Hobson-Jobson A Glossary of Colloquial Anglo-Indian Words and Phrases, and of Kindred Terms, Etymological, Historical, Geographical and Discursive (part 6 of 11)

Hobson-Jobson A Glossary of Colloquial Anglo-Indian Words and Phrases, and of Kindred Terms, Etymological, Historical, Geographical and Discursive (part 6 of 11)

1553.—"And had Vasco da Gama belonged to a nation so glorious as the Romans he would perchance have added to the style of his family, noble as that is, the surname 'OF INDIA,' since we know that those symbols of honour that a man wins are more glorious than those that he inherits, and that Scipio gloried more in the achievement which gave him the surname of 'Africanus,' than in the name of Cornelius, which was that of his family."—Barros, I. iv. 12.

1572.—Defined, without being named, by Camoens:

"Alem do Indo faz, e aquem do Gange Hu terreno muy grãde, e assaz famoso, Que pela parte Austral o mar abrange, E para o Norte o Emodio cavernoso." Lusiadas, vii. 17.

Englished by Burton:

"Outside of Indus, inside Ganges, lies a wide-spread country, famed enough of yore; northward the peaks of caved Emódus rise, and southward Ocean doth confine the shore."

1577.—"INDIA is properly called that great Province of Asia, in the whiche great Alexander kepte his warres, and was so named of the ryuer Indus."—Eden, Hist. of Trauayle, f. 3_v_.

The distinct INDIAS.

c. 650.—"The circumference of the Five Indies is about 90,000 li; on three sides it is bounded by a great sea; on the north it is backed by snowy mountains. It is wide at the north and narrow at the south; its figure is that of a half-moon."—Hwen T'sang, in Pèl. Bouddh., ii. 58.

1298.—"INDIA THE GREATER is that which extends from Maabar to Kesmacoran (i.e. from Coromandel to Mekran), and it contains 13 great kingdoms.... INDIA THE LESSER extends from the Province of Champa to Mutfili (i.e. from Cochin-China to the Kistna Delta), and contains 8 great Kingdoms.... Abash (Abyssinia) is a very great province, and you must know that it constitutes the MIDDLE INDIA."—Marco Polo, Bk. iii. ch. 34, 35.

c. 1328.—"What shall I say? The greatness of this INDIA is beyond description. But let this much suffice concerning INDIA THE GREATER and THE LESS. Of INDIA TERTIA I will say this, that I have not indeed seen its many marvels, not having been there...."—Friar Jordanus, p. 41.

INDIA MINOR, in Clavijo, looks as if it were applied to Afghanistan:

1404.—"And this same Thursday that the said Ambassadors arrived at this great River (the Oxus) they crossed to the other side. And the same day ... came in the evening to a great city which is called Tenmit (Termedh), and this used to belong to INDIA MINOR, but now belongs to the empire of Samarkand, having been conquered by Tamurbec."—Clavijo, § ciii. (Markham, 119).

INDIES.

c. 1601.—"He does smile his face into more lines than are in the new map with the augmentation of the INDIAES."—Twelfth Night, Act iii. sc. 2.

1653.—"I was thirteen times captive and seventeen times sold in the INDIES."—Trans. of Pinto, by H. Cogan, p. 1.

1826.—"... Like a French lady of my acquaintance, who had so general a notion of the East, that upon taking leave of her, she enjoined me to get acquainted with a friend of hers, living as she said quelque part dans LES INDES, and whom, to my astonishment, I found residing at the Cape of Good Hope."—Hajji Baba, Introd. Epistle, ed. 1835, p. ix.

INDIA of the PORTUGUESE.

c. 1567.—"Di qui (Coilan) a Cao Comeri si fanno settanta due miglia, e qui si finisse la costa DELL'INDIA."—Ces. Federici, in Ramusio, iii. 390.

1598.—"At the ende of the countrey of Cambaia beginneth INDIA and the lands of Decam and Cuncam ... from the island called Das Vaguas (read Vaquas) ... which is the righte coast that in all the East Countries is called INDIA.... Now you must vnderstande that this coast of INDIA beginneth at Daman, or the Island Das Vaguas, and stretched South and by East, to the Cape of Comorin, where it endeth."—Linschoten, ch. ix.-x.; [Hak. Soc. i. 62. See also under ABADA].

c. 1610.—"Il y a grand nombre des Portugais qui demeurent ès ports du cette coste de Bengale ... ils n'osoient retourner en L'INDE, pour quelques fautes qu'ils y ont commis."—Pyrard de Laval, i. 239; [Hak. Soc. i. 334].

1615.—"Sociorum literis, qui Mogoris Regiam incolunt auditum est in INDIA de celeberrimo Regno illo quod Saraceni Cataium vocant."—Trigautius, De Christianâ Expeditione apud Sinas, p. 544.

1644.—(Speaking of the Daman district above Bombay.)—"The fruits are nearly all the same as those that you get in INDIA, and especially many Mangas and Cassaras (?), which are like chestnuts."—Bocarro, MS.

It is remarkable to find the term used, in a similar restricted sense, by the Court of the E.I.C. in writing to Fort St. George. They certainly mean some part of the west coast.

1670.—They desire that DUNGAREES may be supplied thence if possible, as "they were not procurable on the COAST OF INDIA, by reason of the disturbances of Sevajee."—Notes and Exts., Pt. i. 2.

1673.—"The Portugals ... might have subdued INDIA by this time, had not we fallen out with them, and given them the first Blow at Ormuz ... they have added some Christians to those formerly converted by St. Thomas, but it is a loud Report to say all INDIA."—Fryer, 137.

1881.—In a correspondence with Sir R. Morier, we observe the Portuguese Minister of Foreign Affairs calls their Goa Viceroy "The Governor General of INDIA."

INDIA of the DUTCH.

1876.—The Dorian "is common throughout all INDIA."—Filet, Plant-Kunding Woordenboek, 196.

INDIES applied to AMERICA.

1563.—"And please to tell me ... which is better, this (Radix Chinae) or the guiacão of our INDIES as we call them...."—Garcia, f. 177.

INDIAN. This word in English first occurs, according to Dr. Guest, in the following passage:—

A.D. 433-440.

"Mid israelum ic waes Mid ebreum and INDEUM, and mid egyptum." In Guest's English Rhythms, ii. 86-87.

But it may be queried whether indeum is not here an error for iudeum; the converse error to that supposed to have been made in the printing of Othello's death-speech—

"of one whose hand Like the base Judean threw a pearl away."

INDIAN used for MAHOUT.

B.C. ? 116-105.—"And upon the beasts (the elephants) there were strong towers of wood, which covered every one of them, and were girt fast unto them with devices: there were also upon every one two and thirty strong men, that fought upon them, beside the INDIAN that ruled them."—I. Maccabees, vi. 37.

B.C. c. 150.—"Of Beasts (i.e. elephants) taken with all their INDIANS there were ten; and of all the rest, which had thrown their INDIANS, he got possession after the battle by driving them together."—Polybius, Bk. i. ch. 40; see also iii. 46, and xi. 1. It is very curious to see the drivers of Carthaginian elephants thus called Indians, though it may be presumed that this is only a Greek application of the term, not a Carthaginian use.

B.C. c. 20.—"Tertio die ... ad Thabusion castellum imminens fluvio Indo ventum est; cui fecerat nomen INDUS ab elephanto dejectus."—Livy, Bk. xxxviii. 14. This Indus or "Indian" river, named after the Mahout thrown into it by his elephant, was somewhere on the borders of Phrygia.

A.D. c. 210.—"Along with this elephant was brought up a female one called Nikaia. And the wife of their INDIAN being near death placed her child of 30 days old beside this one. And when the woman died a certain marvellous attachment grew up of the Beast towards the child...."—Athenaeus, xiii. ch. 8.

INDIAN, for Anglo-Indian.

1816.—"... our best INDIANS. In the idleness and obscurity of home they look back with fondness to the country where they have been useful and distinguished, like the ghosts of Homer's heroes, who prefer the exertions of a labourer on the earth to all the listless enjoyments of Elysium."—Elphinstone, in Life, i. 367.

INDIGO, s. The plant Indigofera tinctoria, L. (N.O. Leguminosae), and the dark blue dye made from it. Greek Ἰνδικὸν. This word appears from Hippocrates to have been applied in his time to pepper. It is also applied by Dioscorides to the mineral substance (a variety of the red oxide of iron) called Indian red (F. Adams, Appendix to Dunbar's Lexicon). [Liddell & Scott call it "a dark-blue dye, indigo." The dye was used in Egyptian mummy-cloths (Wilkinson, Ancient Egypt, ed. 1878, ii. 163).]

A.D. c. 60.—"Of that which is called Ἰνδικὸν one kind is produced spontaneously, being as it were a scum thrown out by the Indian reeds; but that used for dyeing is a purple efflorescence which floats on the brazen cauldrons, which the craftsmen skim off and dry. That is deemed best which is blue in colour, succulent, and smooth to the touch."—Dioscorides, v. cap. 107.

c. 70.—"After this ... INDICO (Indicum) is a colour most esteemed; out of India it commeth; whereupon it tooke the name; and it is nothing els but a slimie mud cleaving to the foame that gathereth about canes and reeds: whiles it is punned or ground, it looketh blacke; but being dissolved it yeeldeth a woonderfull lovely mixture of purple and azur ... INDICO is valued at 20 denarii the pound. In physicke there is use of this INDICO; for it doth assuage swellings that doe stretch the skin."—Plinie, by Ph. Holland, ii. 531.

c. 80-90.—"This river (Sinthus, i.e. Indus) has 7 mouths ... and it has none of them navigable except the middle one only, on which there is a coast mart called Barbaricon.... The articles imported into this mart are.... On the other hand there are exported Costus, Bdellium ... and Indian Black (Ἰνδικὸν μέλαν, i.e. INDIGO)."—Periplus, 38, 39.

1298.—(At Coilum) "They have also abundance of very fine INDIGO (ynde). This is made of a certain herb which is gathered and [after the roots have been removed] is put into great vessels upon which they pour water, and then leave it till the whole of the plant is decomposed...."—Marco Polo, Bk. iii. ch. 22.

1584.—"INDICO from Zindi and Cambaia."—Barrett, in Hakl. ii. 413.

[1605-6.—"... for all which we shall buie Ryse, INDICO, Lapes Bezar which theare in aboundance are to be hadd."—Birdwood, First Letter Book, 77.

[1609.—"... to buy such Comodities as they shall finde there as INDICO, of Laher (Lahore), here worth viij^s the pounde Serchis and the best Belondri...."—Ibid. 287. Serchis is Sarkhej, the Sercaze of Forbes (Or. Mem., 2nd ed. ii. 204) near Ahmadābād: Sir G. Birdwood with some hesitation identifies Belondri with Valabhi, 20 m. N.W. of Bhāvnagar.

[1610.—"Anil or INDIGUE, which is a violet-blue dye."—Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. ii. 246.]

1610.—"In the country thereabouts is made some INDIGO."—Sir H. Middleton, in Purchas, i. 259.

[1616.—"INDIGO is made thus. In the prime June they sow it, which the rains bring up about the prime September: this they cut and it is called the Newty (H. naudhā, 'a young plant'), formerly mentioned, and is a good sort. Next year it sprouts again in the prime August, which they cut and is the best INDIGO, called Jerry (H. jaṛī, 'growing from the root (jaṛ).'"—Foster, Letters, iv. 241.]

c. 1670.—Tavernier gives a detailed account of the manufacture as it was in his time. "They that sift this INDIGO must be careful to keep a Linnen-cloath before their faces, and that their nostrils be well stopt.... Yet ... they that have sifted INDIGO for 9 or 10 days shall spit nothing but blew for a good while together. Once I laid an egg in the morning among the sifters, and when I came to break it in the evening it was all blew within."—E.T. ii. 128-9; [ed. Ball, ii. 11].

We have no conception what is meant by the following singular (apparently sarcastic) entry in the Indian Vocabulary:—

1788.—"INDERGO—a drug of no estimation that grows wild in the woods." [This is H. indarjau, Skt. indra-yava, "barley of Indra," the Wrightia tinctoria, from the leaves of which a sort of indigo is made. See Watt, Econ. Dict. VI. pt. iv. 316. "INDERJÒ of the species of warm bitters."—Halhed, Code, ed. 1781, p. 9.]

1881.—"Découvertes et Inventions.—Décidément le cabinet Gladstone est poursuivi par la malechance. Voici un savant chimiste de Munich qui vient de trouver le moyen se preparer artificiellement et à très bon marché le bleu INDIGO. Cette découverte peut amener la ruine du gouvernement des Indes anglaises, qui est déjà menacé de la banqueroute. L'INDIGO, en effet, est le principal article de commerce des Indes (!); dans l'Allemagne, seulement, on en importe par an pour plus de cent cinquante millions de francs."—Havre Commercial Paper, quoted in Pioneer Mail, Feb. 3.

INGLEES, s. Hind. Inglīs and Inglis. Wilson gives as the explanation of this: "Invalid soldiers and sipahis, to whom allotments of land were assigned as pensions; the lands so granted." But the word is now used as the equivalent of (sepoy's) pension simply. Mr. Carnegie, [who is followed by Platts], says the word is "probably a corruption of English, as pensions were unknown among native Governments, whose rewards invariably took the shape of land assignments." This, however, is quite unsatisfactory; and Sir H. Elliot's suggestion (mentioned by Wilson) that the word was a corruption of invalid (which the sepoys may have confounded in some way with English) is most probable.

INTERLOPER, s. One in former days who traded without the license, or outside the service, of a company (such as the E.I.C.) which had a charter of monopoly. The etymology of the word remains obscure. It looks like Dutch, but intelligent Dutch friends have sought in vain for a Dutch original. Onderloopen, the nearest word we can find, means 'to be inundated.' The hybrid etymology given by Bailey, though allowed by Skeat, seems hardly possible. Perhaps it is an English corruption from ontloopen, 'to evade, escape, run away from.' [The N.E.D. without hesitation gives interlope, a form of leap. Skeat, in his Concise Dict., 2nd ed., agrees, and quotes Low Germ. and Dutch enterloper, 'a runner between.']

1627.—"INTERLOPERS in trade, ¶ Attur Acad. pa. 54."—Minsheu. (What is the meaning of the reference?) [It refers to "The Atturneyes Academie" by Thomas Powell or Powel, for which see 9 ser. Notes and Queries, vii. 198, 392].

1680.—"The commissions relating to the INTERLOPER, or private trader, being considered, it is resolved that a notice be fixed up warning all the Inhabitants of the Towne, not, directly or indirectly, to trade, negotiate, aid, assist, countenance, or hold any correspondence, with Captain William Alley or any person belonging to him or his ship without the license of the Honorable Company. Whoever shall offend herein shall answeare it at their Perill."—Notes and Exts., Pt. iii. 29.

1681.—"The Shippe EXPECTATION, Capt. Ally Com̃and^r, an INTERLOPER, arrived in ye Downes from Porto Novo."—Hedges, Diary, Jan. 4; [Hak. Soc. i. 15].

[1682.—"The Agent having notice of an INTERLOPER lying in Titticorin Bay, immediately sent for ye Councell to consult about it...."—Pringle, Diary of Ft. St. Geo. 1st ser. i. 69.]

" "The Spirit of Commerce, which sees its drifts with eagle's eyes, formed associations at the risque of trying the consequence at law ... since the statutes did not authorize the Company to seize or stop the ships of these adventurers, whom they called INTERLOPERS."—Orme's Fragments, 127.

1683.—"If God gives me life to get this Phirmaund into my possession, ye Honble. Compy. shall never more be much troubled with INTERLOPERS."—Hedges, Diary, Jan. 6; [Hak. Soc. i. 62].

" "May 28. About 9 this morning Mr. Littleton, Mr. Nedham, and Mr. Douglass came to y^e factory, and being sent for, were asked 'Whether they did now, or ever intended, directly or indirectly, to trade with any INTERLOPERS that shall arrive in the Bay of Bengall?'

"Mr. Littleton answered that, 'he did not, nor ever intended to trade with any INTERLOPER.'

"Mr. Nedham answered, 'that at present he did not, and that he came to gett money, and if any such offer should happen, he would not refuse it.'

"Mr. Douglass answered, he did not, nor ever intended to trade with them; but he said 'what Estate he should gett here he would not scruple to send it home upon any INTERLOPER.'

"And having given their respective answers they were dismist."—Ibid. Hak. Soc. i. 90-91.

1694.—"Whether y^e souldiers lately sent up hath created any jealousye in y^e INTERLOP^{RS}: or their own Actions or guilt I know not, but they are so cautious y^t every 2 or 3 bales y^t are packt they immediately send on board."—MS. Letter from Edwd. Hern at Hugley to the Rt. Worshp^{ll} Charles Eyre Esq. Agent for Affaires of the Rt. Honble. East India Comp^a. in Bengall, &c^a. (9th Sept.). MS. Record in India Office.

1719.—"... their business in the South Seas was to sweep those coasts clear of the French INTERLOPERS, which they did very effectually."—Shelvocke's Voyage, 29.

" "I wish you would explain yourself; I cannot imagine what reason I have to be afraid of any of the Company's ships, or Dutch ships, I am no INTERLOPER."—Robinson Crusoe, Pt. ii.

1730.—"To INTERLOPE [of inter, L. between, and LOOPEN, Du. to run, q. d. to run in between, and intercept the Commerce of others], to trade without proper Authority, or interfere with a Company in Commerce."—Bailey's English Dict. s.v.

1760.—"ENTERLOOPER. Terme de Commerce de Mer, fort en usage parmi les Compagnies des Pays du Nord, comme l'Angleterre, la Hollande, Hambourg, le Danemark, &c. Il signifie un vaisseau d'un particulier qui pratique et fréquente les Côtes, et les Havres ou Ports de Mer éloignés, pour y faire un commerce clandestin, au préjudice des Compagnies qui sont autorisées elles seules à le faire dans ces mêmes lieux.... Ce mot se prononce comme s'il étoit écrit EINTRELOPRE. Il est emprunté de l'Anglois, de enter qui signifie entrer et entreprendre, et de Looper, Courreur."—Savary des Bruslons, Dict. Univ. de Commerce, Nouv. ed., Copenhague, s.v.

c. 1812.—"The fault lies in the clause which gives the Company power to send home INTERLOPERS ... and is just as reasonable as one which should forbid all the people of England, except a select few, to look at the moon."—Letter of Dr. Carey, in William Carey, by James Culross, D.D., 1881, p. 165.

IPECACUANHA (WILD), s. The garden name of a plant (Asclepias curassavica, L.) naturalised in all tropical countries. It has nothing to do with the true ipecacuanha, but its root is a powerful emetic, whence the name. The true ipecacuanha is cultivated in India.

IRON-WOOD. This name is applied to several trees in different parts; e.g. to Mesua ferrea, L. (N.O. Clusiaceae), Hind. nagkesar; and in the Burmese provinces to Xylia dolabriformis, Benth.

I-SAY. The Chinese mob used to call the English soldiers A′says or Isays, from the frequency of this apostrophe in their mouths. (The French gamins, it is said, do the same at Boulogne.) At Amoy the Chinese used to call out after foreigners AKEE! AKEE! a tradition from the Portuguese Aqui! 'Here!' In Java the French are called by the natives Orang DEEDONG, i.e. the dîtes-donc people. (See Fortune's Two Visits to the Tea Countries, 1853, p. 52; and Notes and Queries in China and Japan, ii. 175.)

[1863.—"The Sepoys were ... invariably called 'ACHAS.' Acha or good is the constantly recurring answer of a Sepoy when spoken to...."—Fisher, Three Years in China, 146.]

ISKAT, s. Ratlines. A marine term from Port. escada (Roebuck).

[ISLAM, s. Infn. of Ar. salm, 'to be or become safe'; the word generally used by Mahommedans for their religion.

[1616.—"Dated in Achen 1025 according to the rate of SLAM."—Foster, Letters, iv. 125.

[1617.—"I demanded the debts ... one [of the debtors] for the valew of 110 r[ials] is termed SLAM."—Letter of E. Young, from Jacatra, Oct. 3, I.O. Records: O.C. No. 541.]

ISTOOP, s. Oakum. A marine term from Port. estopa (Roebuck).

ISTUBBUL, s. This usual Hind. word for 'stable' may naturally be imagined to be a corruption of the English word. But it is really Ar. iṣṭabl, though that no doubt came in old times from the Latin stabulum through some Byzantine Greek form.

ITZEBOO, s. A Japanese coin, the smallest silver denomination. Itsi-bū, 'one drachm.' [The N.E.D. gives itse, itche, 'one,' bū, 'division, part, quarter']. Present value about 1_s._ Marsden says: "ITZEBO, a small gold piece of oblong form, being 0.6 inch long, and 0.3 broad. Two specimens weighed 2 dwt. 3 grs. only" (Numism. Orient., 814-5). See Cocks's Diary, i. 176, ii. 77. [The coin does not appear in the last currency list; see Chamberlain, Things Japanese, 3rd ed. 99.]

[1616.—"ICHIBOS." (See under KOBANG.)

[1859.—"We found the greatest difficulty in obtaining specimens of the currency of the country, and I came away at last the possessor of a solitary ITZIBU. These are either of gold or silver: the gold ITZIBU is a small oblong piece of money, intrinsically worth about seven and sixpence. The intrinsic value of the gold half-ITZIBU, which is not too large to convert into a shirt-stud, is about one and tenpence."—L. Oliphant, Narr. of Mission, ii. 232.]

IZAM MALUCO, n.p. We often find this form in Correa, instead of NIZAMALUCO (q.v.).

J

JACK, s. Short for JACK-SEPOY; in former days a familiar style for the native soldier; kindly, rather than otherwise.

1853.—"... he should be leading the JACKS."—Oakfield, ii. 66.

JACK, s. The tree called by botanists Artocarpus integrifolia, L. fil., and its fruit. The name, says Drury, is "a corruption of the Skt. word Tchackka, which means the fruit of the tree" (Useful Plants, p. 55). There is, however, no such Skt. word; the Skt. names are Kantaka, Phala, Panasa, and Phalasa. [But the Malayāl. chakka is from the Skt. chakra, 'round.'] Rheede rightly gives Tsjaka (chăkka) as the Malayālam name, and from this no doubt the Portuguese took jaca and handed it on to us. "They call it," says Garcia Orta, "in Malavar jacas, in Canarese and Guzerati panas" (f. 111). "The Tamil form is sākkei, the meaning of which, as may be adduced from various uses to which the word is put in Tamil, is 'the fruit abounding in rind and refuse.'" (Letter from Bp. Caldwell.)

We can hardly doubt that this is the fruit of which Pliny writes: "Major alia pomo et suavitate praecellentior; quo sapientiores Indorum vivunt. (Folium alas avium imitatur longitudine trium cubitorum, latitudine duum). Fructum e cortice mittit admirabilem succi dulcedine; ut uno quaternos satiet. Arbori nomen palae, pomo arienae; plurima est in Sydracis, expeditionum Alexandri termino. Est et alia similis huic; dulcior pomo; sed interaneorum valetudini infesta" (Hist. Nat. xii. 12). Thus rendered, not too faithfully, by Philemon Holland: "Another tree there is in India, greater yet than the former; bearing a fruit much fairer, bigger, and sweeter than the figs aforesaid; and whereof the Indian Sages and Philosophers do ordinarily live. The leaf resembleth birds' wings, carrying three cubits in length, and two in breadth. The fruit it putteth forth at the bark, having within it a wonderfull pleasant juice: insomuch as one of them is sufficient to give four men a competent and full refection. The tree's name is Pala, and the fruit is called Ariena. Great plenty of them is in the country of the Sydraci, the utmost limit of Alexander the Great his expeditions and voyages. And yet there is another tree much like to this, and beareth a fruit more delectable that this Ariena, albeit the guts in a man's belly it wringeth and breeds the bloudie flix" (i. 361).

Strange to say, the fruit thus described has been generally identified with the plantain: so generally that (we presume) the Linnaean name of the plantain Musa sapientum, was founded upon the interpretation of this passage. (It was, I find, the excellent Rumphius who originated the erroneous identification of the ariena with the plantain). Lassen, at first hesitatingly (i. 262), and then more positively (ii. 678), adopts this interpretation, and seeks ariena in the Skt. vāraṇa. The shrewder Gildemeister does the like, for he, sans phrase, uses arienae as Latin for 'plantains.' Ritter, too, accepts it, and is not staggered even by the uno quaternos satiet. Humboldt, quoth he, often saw Indians make their meal with a very little manioc and three bananas of the big kind (Platano-arton). Still less sufficed the Indian Brahmins (sapientes), when one fruit was enough for four of them (v. 876, 877). Bless the venerable Prince of Geographers! Would one Kartoffel, even "of the big kind," make a dinner for four German Professors? Just as little would one plantain suffice four Indian Sages.

The words which we have italicised in the passage from Pliny are quite enough to show that the jack is intended; the fruit growing e cortice (i.e. piercing the bark of the stem, not pendent from twigs like other fruit), the sweetness, the monstrous size, are in combination infallible. And as regards its being the fruit of the sages, we may observe that the jack fruit is at this day in Travancore one of the staples of life. But that Pliny, after his manner, has jumbled things, is also manifest. The first two clauses of his description (Major alia, &c.; Folium alas, &c.) are found in Theophrastus, but apply to two different trees. Hence we get rid of the puzzle about the big leaves, which led scholars astray after plantains, and originated Musa sapientum. And it is clear from Theophrastus that the fruit which caused dysentery in the Macedonian army was yet another. So Pliny has rolled three plants into one. Here are the passages of Theophrastus:—

"(1) And there is another tree which is both itself a tree of great size, and produces a fruit that is wonderfully big and sweet. This is used for food by the Indian Sages, who wear no clothes. (2) And there is yet another which has the leaf of a very long shape, and resembling the wings of birds, and this they set upon helmets; the length is about two cubits.... (3) There is another tree the fruit of which is long, and not straight but crooked, and sweet to the taste. But this gives rise to colic and dysentery ("Ἄλλο τέ ἐστιν οὖ ὁ καρπὸς μακρὸς καὶ οὔκ εὐθύς ἀλλὰ σκολιὸς, ἐσθιόμενος δὲ γλυκύς. οὗτος ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ δηγμὸν ποιεῖ καὶ δυσεντέριαν ...") wherefore Alexander published a general order against eating it."—(Hist. Plant. iv. 4-5).

It is plain that Pliny and Theophrastus were using the same authority, but neither copying the whole of what he found in it.

The second tree, whose leaves were like birds' wings and were used to fix upon helmets, is hard to identify. The first was, when we combine the additional characters quoted by Pliny but omitted by Theophrastus, certainly the jack; the third was, we suspect, the MANGO (q.v.). The terms long and crooked would, perhaps, answer better to the plantain, but hardly the unwholesome effect. As regards the uno quaternos satiet, compare Friar Jordanus below, on the jack: "Sufficiet circiter pro quinque personis." Indeed the whole of the Friar's account is worth comparing with Pliny's. Pliny says that it took four men to eat a jack, Jordanus says five. But an Englishman who had a plantation in Central Java told one of the present writers that he once cut a jack on his ground which took three men—not to eat—but to carry!

As regards the names given by Pliny it is hard to say anything to the purpose, because we do not know to which of the three trees jumbled together the names really applied. If pala really applied to the jack, possibly it may be the Skt. phalasa, or panasa. Or it may be merely p'hala, 'a fruit,' and the passage would then be a comical illustration of the persistence of Indian habits of mind. For a stranger in India, on asking the question, 'What on earth is that?' as he well might on his first sight of a jack-tree with its fruit, would at the present day almost certainly receive for answer: 'Phal hai khudāwand!'—'It is a fruit, my lord!' Ariena looks like hiraṇya, 'golden,' which might be an epithet of the jack, but we find no such specific application of the word.

Omitting Theophrastus and Pliny, the oldest foreign description of the jack that we find is that by Hwen T'sang, who met with it in Bengal:

c. A.D. 650.—"Although the fruit of the pan-wa-so (panasa) is gathered in great quantities, it is held in high esteem. These fruits are as big as a pumpkin; when ripe they are of a reddish yellow. Split in two they disclose inside a quantity of little fruits as big as crane's eggs; and when these are broken there exudes a juice of reddish-yellow colour and delicious flavour. Sometimes the fruit hangs on the branches, as with other trees; but sometimes it grows from the roots, like the fo-ling (Radix Chinae), which is found under the ground."—Julien, iii. 75.

c. 1328.—"There are some trees that bear a very big fruit called CHAQUI; and the fruit is of such size that one is enough for about five persons. There is another tree that has a fruit like that just named, and it is called Bloqui [a corruption of Malayāl. varikka, 'superior fruit'], quite as big and as sweet, but not of the same species. These fruits never grow upon the twigs, for these are not able to bear their weight, but only from the main branches, and even from the trunk of the tree itself, down to the very roots."—Friar Jordanus, 13-14.

A unique MS. of the travels of Friar Odoric, in the Palatine Library at Florence, contains the following curious passage:—

c. 1330.—"And there be also trees which produce fruits so big that two will be a load for a strong man. And when they are eaten you must oil your hands and your mouth; they are of a fragrant odour and very savoury; the fruit is called chabassi." The name is probably corrupt (perhaps chacassi?). But the passage about oiling the hands and lips is aptly elucidated by the description in Baber's Memoirs (see below), a description matchless in its way, and which falls off sadly in the new translation by M. Pavet de Courteille, which quite omits the "haggises."

c. 1335.—"The SHAKĪ and Barkī. This name is given to certain trees which live to a great age. Their leaves are like those of the walnut, and the fruit grows direct out of the stem of the tree. The fruits borne nearest to the ground are the barkī; they are sweeter and better-flavoured than the SHAKĪ ..." etc. (much to the same effect as before).—Ibn Batuta, iii. 127; see also iv. 228.

c. 1350.—"There is again another wonderful tree called CHAKE_-Baruke_, as big as an oak. Its fruit is produced from the trunk, and not from the branches, and is something marvellous to see, being as big as a great lamb, or a child of three years old. It has a hard rind like that of our pine-cones, so that you have to cut it open with a hatchet; inside it has a pulp of surpassing flavour, with the sweetness of honey, and of the best Italian melon; and this also contains some 500 chestnuts of like flavour, which are capital eating when roasted."—John de' Marignolli, in Cathay, &c., 363.

c. 1440.—"There is a tree commonly found, the trunk of which bears a fruit resembling a pine-cone, but so big that a man can hardly lift it; the rind is green and hard, but still yields to the pressure of the finger. Inside there are some 250 or 300 pippins, as big as figs, very sweet in taste, and contained in separate membranes. These have each a kernel within, of a windy quality, of the consistence and taste of chestnuts, and which are roasted like chestnuts. And when cast among embers (to roast), unless you make a cut in them they will explode and jump out. The outer rind of the fruit is given to cattle. Sometimes the fruit is also found growing from the roots of the tree underground, and these fruits excel the others in flavour, wherefore they are sent as presents to kings and petty princes. These (moreover) have no kernels inside them. The tree itself resembles a large fig-tree, and the leaves are cut into fingers like the hand. The wood resembles box, and so it is esteemed for many uses. The name of the tree is CACHI" (i.e. Çachi or TZACCHI).—Nicolo de' Conti.

The description of the leaves ... "foliis da modum palmi intercisis"—is the only slip in this admirable description. Conti must, in memory, have confounded the Jack with its congener the bread-fruit (Artocarpus incisa or incisifolia). We have translated from Poggio's Latin, as the version by Mr. Winter Jones in India in the XVth Century is far from accurate.

1530.—"Another is the kadhil. This has a very bad look and flavour (odour?). It looks like a sheep's stomach stuffed and made into a haggis. It has a sweet sickly taste. Within it are stones like a filbert.... The fruit is very adhesive, and on account of this adhesive quality many rub their mouths with oil before eating them. They grow not only from the branches and trunk, but from its root. You would say that the tree was all hung round with haggises!"—Leyden and Erskine's Baber, 325. Here kadhil represents the Hind. name kaṭhal. The practice of oiling the lips on account of the "adhesive quality" (or as modern mortals would call it, 'stickiness') of the jack, is still usual among natives, and is the cause of a proverb on premature precautions: Gāch'h meṅ Kaṭhal, honṭh meṅ tel! "You have oiled your lips while the jack still hangs on the tree!" We may observe that the call of the Indian cuckoo is in some of the Gangetic districts rendered by the natives as Kaṭhal pakkā! Kaṭhal pakkā! i.e. "Jack's ripe," the bird appearing at that season.

[1547.—"I consider it right to make over to them in perpetuity ... one palm grove and an area for planting certain mango trees and JACK trees (mangueiras e JAQUEIRAS) situate in the village of Calangute...."—Archiv. Port. Orient., fasc. 5, No. 88.]

c. 1590.—"In Sircar Hajypoor there are plenty of the fruits called Kathul and Budhul; some of the first are so large as to be too heavy for one man to carry."—Gladwin's Ayeen, ii. 25. In Blochmann's ed. of the Persian text he reads barhal, [and so in Jarrett's trans. (ii. 152),] which is a Hind. name for the Artocarpus Lakoocha of Roxb.

1563.—"R. What fruit is that which is as big as the largest (coco) nuts?

"O. You just now ate the chestnuts from inside of it, and you said that roasted they were like real chestnuts. Now you shall eat the envelopes of these....

"R. They taste like a melon; but not so good as the better melons.

"O. True. And owing to their viscous nature they are ill to digest; or say rather they are not digested at all, and often issue from the body quite unchanged. I don't much use them. They are called in Malavar JACAS; in Canarin and Guzerati panás.... The tree is a great and tall one; and the fruits grow from the wood of the stem, right up to it, and not on the branches like other fruits."—Garcia, f. 111.

[1598.—"A certain fruit that in Malabar is called IACA, in Canara and Gusurate Panar and Panasa, by the Arabians Panax, by the Persians Fanax."—Linschoten, Hak. Soc. ii. 20.

[c. 1610.—"The JAQUES is a tree of the height of a chestnut."—Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. ii. 366.

[1623.—"We had ZIACCHE, a fruit very rare at this time."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. ii. 264.]

1673.—"Without the town (Madras) grows their Rice ... JAWKS, a Coat of Armour over it, like an Hedg-hog's, guards its weighty Fruit."—Fryer, 40.

1810.—"The JACK-wood ... at first yellow, becomes on exposure to the air of the colour of mahogany, and is of as fine a grain."—Maria Graham, 101.

1878.—"The monstrous JACK that in its eccentric bulk contains a whole magazine of tastes and smells."—Ph. Robinson, In My Indian Garden, 49-50.

It will be observed that the older authorities mention two varieties of the fruit by the names of shakī and barkī, or modifications of these, different kinds according to Jordanus, only from different parts of the tree according to Ibn Batuta. P. Vincenzo Maria (1672) also distinguishes two kinds, one of which he calls GIACHA Barca, the other GIACHA papa or girasole. And Rheede, the great authority on Malabar plants, says (iii. 19):

"Of this tree, however, they reckon more than 30 varieties, distinguished by the quality of their fruit, but all may be reduced to two kinds; the fruit of one kind distinguished by plump and succulent pulp of delicious honey flavour, being the varaka; that of the other, filled with softer and more flabby pulp of inferior flavour, being the Tsjakapa."

More modern writers seem to have less perception in such matters than the old travellers, who entered more fully and sympathetically into native tastes. Drury says, however, "There are several varieties, but what is called the Honey-jack is by far the sweetest and best."

"He that desireth to see more hereof let him reade Ludovicus Romanus, in his fifth Booke and fifteene Chapter of his Navigaciouns, and Christopherus a Costa in his cap. of IACA, and Gracia ab Horto, in the Second Booke and fourth Chapter," saith the learned Paludanus.... And if there be anybody so unreasonable, so say we too—by all means let him do so! [A part of this article is derived from the notes to Jordanus by one of the present writers. We may also add, in aid of such further investigation, that Paludanus is the Latinised name of v.d. Broecke, the commentator on Linschoten. "Ludovicus Romanus" is our old friend Varthema, and "Gracia ab Horto" is Garcia De Orta.]

JACKAL, s. The Canis aureus, L., seldom seen in the daytime, unless it be fighting with the vultures for carrion, but in shrieking multitudes, or rather what seem multitudes from the noise they make, entering the precincts of villages, towns, of Calcutta itself, after dark, and startling the newcomer with their hideous yells. Our word is not apparently Anglo-Indian, being taken from the Turkish chaḳāl. But the Pers. shaghāl is close, and Skt. srigāla, 'the howler,' is probably the first form. The common Hind. word is gīdar, ['the greedy one,' Skt. gṛidh]. The jackal takes the place of the fox as the object of hunting 'meets' in India; the indigenous fox being too small for sport.

1554.—"Non procul inde audio magnum clamorem et velut hominum irridentium insultantiumque voces. Interrogo quid sit; ... narrant mihi ululatum esse bestiarum, quas Turcae CIACALES vocant...."—Busbeq. Epist. i. p. 78.

1615.—"The inhabitants do nightly house their goates and sheepe for feare of IACCALS (in my opinion no other than Foxes), whereof an infinite number do lurke in the obscure vaults."—Sandys, Relation, &c., 205.

1616.—"... those JACKALLS seem to be wild Doggs, who in great companies run up and down in the silent night, much disquieting the peace thereof, by their most hideous noyse."—Terry, ed. 1665, p. 371.

1653.—"Le SCHEKAL est vn espèce de chien sauvage, lequel demeure tout le jour en terre, et sort la nuit criant trois ou quatre fois à certaines heures."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, p. 254.

1672.—"There is yet another kind of beast which they call JACKHALZ; they are horribly greedy of man's flesh, so the inhabitants beset the graves of their dead with heavy stones."—Baldaeus (Germ. ed.), 422.

1673.—"An Hellish concert of JACKALS (a kind of Fox)."—Fryer, 53.

1681.—"For here are many JACKALLS, which catch their Henes, some Tigres that destroy their Cattle; but the greatest of all is the King; whose endeavour is to keep them poor and in want."—Knox, Ceylon, 87. On p. 20 he writes Jacols.

1711.—"JACKCALLS are remarkable for Howling in the Night; one alone making as much noise as three or four Cur Dogs, and in different Notes, as if there were half a Dozen of them got together."—Lockyer, 382.

1810.—Colebrooke (Essays, ii. 109, [Life, 155]) spells SHAKAL. But Jackal was already English.

c. 1816.—

"The JACKAL'S troop, in gather'd cry, Bayed from afar, complainingly." Siege of Corinth, xxxiii.

1880.—"The mention of JACKAL-hunting in one of the letters (of Lord Minto) may remind some Anglo-Indians still living, of the days when the Calcutta hounds used to throw off at gun-fire."—Sat. Rev. Feb. 14.

JACK-SNIPE of English sportsmen is Gallinago gallinula, Linn., smaller than the common snipe, G. scolopacinus, Bonap.

JACKASS COPAL. This is a trade name, and is a capital specimen of Hobson-Jobson. It is, according to Sir R. Burton, [Zanzibar, i. 357], a corruption of chakāzi. There are three qualities of copal in the Zanzibar market. 1. Sandarusi m'ti, or 'Tree Copal,' gathered directly from the tree which exudes it (Trachylobium Mossambicense). 2. Chakāzi or chakazzi, dug from the soil, but seeming of recent origin, and priced on a par with No. 1. 3. The genuine Sandarusi, or true Copal (the Animé of the English market), which is also fossil, but of ancient production, and bears more than twice the price of 1 and 2 (see Sir J. Kirk in J. Linn. Soc. (Botany) for 1871). Of the meaning of chakāzi we have no authentic information. But considering that a pitch made of copal and oil is used in Kutch, and that the cheaper copal would naturally be used for such a purpose, we may suggest as probable that the word is a corr. of jahāzi, and = 'ship-copal.'

JACQUETE, Town and Cape, n.p. The name, properly JAKAD, formerly attached to a place at the extreme west horn of the Kāthiawāṛ Peninsula, where stands the temple of DWARKA (q.v.). Also applied by the Portuguese to the Gulf of Cutch. (See quotation from Camoens under DIUL-SIND.) The last important map which gives this name, so far as we are aware, is Aaron Arrowsmith's great Map of India, 1816, in which Dwarka appears under the name of JUGGUT.

1525.—(Melequyaz) "holds the revenue of Crystna, which is in a town called ZAGUETE where there is a place of Pilgrimage of gentoos which is called Crysna...."—Lembrança das Cousas da India, 35.

1553.—"From the Diul estuary to the Point of JAQUETE 38 leagues; and from the same JAQUETE, which is the site of one of the principal temples of that heathenism, with a noble town, to our city Diu of the Kingdom of Guzarat, 58 leagues."—Barros, I. ix. 1.

1555.—"Whilst the tide was at its greatest height we arrived at the gulf of CHAKAD, where we descried signs of fine weather, such as sea-horses, great snakes, turtles, and sea-weeds."—Sidi 'Ali, p. 77.

[1563.—"Passed the point of JACQUETTE, where is that famous temple of the Resbutos (see RAJPOOT)."—Barros, IV. iv. 4.]

1726.—In Valentyn's map we find JAQUETE marked as a town (at the west point of Kāthiawāṛ) and Enceada da JAQUETE for the Gulf of Cutch.

1727.—"The next sea-port town to Baet, is JIGAT. It stands on a Point of low Land, called Cape JIGAT. The City makes a good Figure from the Sea, showing 4 or 5 high Steeples."—A. Hamilton, i. 135; [ed. 1744].

1813.—"JIGAT Point ... on it is a pagoda; the place where it stands was formerly called JIGAT More, but now by the Hindoos Dorecur (i.e. DWARKA, q.v.). At a distance the pagoda has very much the appearance of a ship under sail.... Great numbers of pilgrims from the interior visit JIGAT pagoda...."—Milburn, i. 150.

1841.—"JIGAT Point called also Dwarka, from the large temple of Dwarka standing near the coast."—Horsburgh, Directory, 5th ed., i. 480.

JADE, s. The well-known mineral, so much prized in China, and so wonderfully wrought in that and other Asiatic countries; the yashm of the Persians; nephrite of mineralogists.

The derivation of the word has been the subject of a good deal of controversy. We were at one time inclined to connect it with the yada-tāsh, the yada stone used by the nomads of Central Asia in conjuring for rain. The stone so used was however, according to P. Hyakinth, quoted in a note with which we were favoured by the lamented Prof. Anton Schiefner, a BEZOAR (q.v.).

Major Raverty, in his translation of the Ṭabaḳāt-i-Nāṣirī, in a passage referring to the regions of Ṭukhāristān and Bāmiān, has the following: "That tract of country has also been famed and celebrated, to the uttermost parts of the countries of the world, for its mines of gold, silver, rubies, and crystal, bejādah [jade], and other [precious] things" (p. 421). On bejādah his note runs: "The name of a gem, by some said to be a species of ruby, and by others a species of sapphire; but JADE is no doubt meant." This interpretation seems however chiefly, if not altogether, suggested by the name; whilst the epithets compounded of bejāda, as given in dictionaries, suggest a red mineral, which jade rarely is. And Prof. Max Müller, in an interesting letter to the Times, dated Jan. 10, 1880, states that the name jade was not known in Europe till after the discovery of America, and that the jade brought from America was called by the Spaniards piedra de IJADA, because it was supposed to cure pain in the groin (Sp. ijada); for like reasons to which it was called lapis nephriticus, whence nephrite (see Bailey, below). Skeat, s.v. says: "It is of unknown origin; but probably Oriental. Prof. Cowell finds yedá a material out of which ornaments are made, in the Divyávadána; but it does not seem to be Sanskrit." Prof. Müller's etymology seems incontrovertible; but the present work has afforded various examples of curious etymological coincidences of this kind. [Prof. Max Müller's etymology is now accepted by the N.E.D. and by Prof. Skeat in the new edition of his Concise Dict. The latter adds that IJADA is connected with the Latin ilia.]

[1595.—"A kinde of greene stones, which the Spaniards call Piedras HIJADAS, and we vse for spleene stones."—Raleigh, Discov. Guiana, 24 (quoted in N.E.D.).]

1730.—"JADE, a greenish Stone, bordering on the colour of Olive, esteemed for its Hardness and Virtues by the Turks and Poles, who adorn their fine Sabres with it; and said to be a preservative against the nephritick Colick."—Bailey's Eng. Dict. s.v.

JADOO, s. Hind. from Pers. jādū, Skt. yātu; conjuring, magic, hocus-pocus.

[1826.—"'Pray, sir,' said the barber, 'is that Sanscrit, or what language?' 'May be it is JADOO,' I replied, in a solemn and deep voice."—Pandurang Hari, ed. 1873, i. 127.]

JADOOGUR, s. Properly Hind. jādūghar, 'conjuring-house' (see the last). The term commonly applied by natives to a Freemasons' Lodge, when there is one, at an English station. On the Bombay side it is also called Shaitān khāna (see Burton's Sind Revisited), a name consonant to the ideas of an Italian priest who intimated to one of the present writers that he had heard the raising of the devil was practised at Masonic meetings, and asked his friend's opinion as to the fact. In S. India the Lodge is called Talai-vĕṭṭa-Kovil, 'Cut-head Temple,' because part of the rite of initiation is supposed to consist in the candidate's head being cut off and put on again.

JAFNA, JAFNAPATÁM, n.p. The very ancient Tamil settlement, and capital of the Tamil kings on the singular peninsula which forms the northernmost part of Ceylon. The real name is, according to Emerson Tennent, Yalpannan, and it is on the whole probable that this name is identical with the Galiba (Prom.) of Ptolemy. [The Madras Gloss. gives the Tamil name as Yāzhppānam, from yazh-pānan, 'a lute-player'; "called after a blind minstrel of that name from the Chola country, who by permission of the Singhalese king obtained possession of Jaffna, then uninhabited, and introduced there a colony of the Tamul people."]

1553.—"... the Kingdom Triquinamalé, which at the upper end of its coast adjoins another called JAFANAPATAM, which stands at the northern part of the island."—Barros, III. ii. cap. i.

c. 1566.—In Cesare de' Federici it is written GIANIFANPATAN.—Ramusio, iii. 390_v_.

[JAFFRY, s. A screen or lattice-work, made generally of bamboo, used for various purposes, such as a fence, a support for climbing plants, &c. The ordinary Pers. ja'farī is derived from a person of the name of Ja'far; but Mr. Platts suggests that in the sense under consideration it may be a corr. of Ar. ẓafirat, ẓafir, 'a braided lock.'

[1832.—"Of vines, the branches must also be equally spread over the JAFFRY, so that light and heat may have access to the whole."—Trans. Agri. Hort. Soc. Ind. ii. 202.]

JAGGERY, s. Coarse brown (or almost black) sugar, made from the sap of various palms. The wild date tree (Phoenix sylvestris, Roxb.), Hind. khajūr, is that which chiefly supplies palm-sugar in Guzerat and Coromandel, and almost alone in Bengal. But the palmyra, the caryota, and the coco-palm all give it; the first as the staple of Tinnevelly and northern Ceylon; the second chiefly in southern Ceylon, where it is known to Europeans as the JAGGERY Palm (kitūl of natives); the third is much drawn for TODDY (q.v.) in the coast districts of Western India, and this is occasionally boiled for sugar. Jaggery is usually made in the form of small round cakes. Great quantities are produced in Tinnevelly, where the cakes used to pass as a kind of currency (as cakes of salt used to pass in parts of Africa, and in Western China), and do even yet to some small extent. In Bombay all rough unrefined sugar-stuff is known by this name; and it is the title under which all kinds of half-prepared sugar is classified in the tariff of the Railways there. The word jaggery is only another form of SUGAR (q.v.), being like it a corr. of the Skt. śarkarā, Konkani sakkarā, [Malayāl. chakkarā, whence it passed into Port. jagara, jagra].

1516.—"Sugar of palms, which they call XAGARA."—Barbosa, 59.

1553.—Exports from the Maldives "also of fish-oil, coco-nuts, and JÁGARA, which is made from these after the manner of sugar."—Barros, Dec. III. liv. iii. cap. 7.

1561.—"JAGRE, which is sugar of palm-trees."—Correa, Lendas, i. 2, 592.

1563.—"And after they have drawn this pot of çura, if the tree gives much they draw another, of which they make sugar, prepared either by sun or fire, and this they call JAGRA."—Garcia, f. 67.

c. 1567.—"There come every yeere from Cochin and from Cananor tenne or fifteene great Shippes (to Chaul) laden with great nuts ... and with sugar made of the selfe same nuts called GIAGRA."—Caesar Frederike, in Hakl. ii. 344.

1598.—"Of the aforesaid sura they likewise make sugar, which is called IAGRA; they seeth the water, and set it in the sun, whereof it becometh sugar, but it is little esteemed, because it is of a browne colour."—Linschoten, 102; [Hak. Soc. ii. 49].

1616.—"Some small quantity of wine, but not common, is made among them; they call it Raak (see ARRACK), distilled from Sugar, and a spicy rinde of a tree called JAGRA."—Terry, ed. 1665, p. 365.

1727.—"The Produce of the Samorin's Country is ... Cocoa-Nut, and that tree produceth JAGGERY, a kind of sugar, and Copera (see COPRAH), or the kernels of the Nut dried."—A. Hamilton, i. 306; [ed. 1744, i. 308].

c. 1750-60.—"Arrack, a coarse sort of sugar called JAGREE, and vinegar are also extracted from it" (coco-palm).—Grose, i. 47.

1807.—"The Tari or fermented juice, and the JAGORY or inspissated juice of the Palmira tree ... are in this country more esteemed than those of the wild date, which is contrary to the opinion of the Bengalese."—F. Buchanan, Mysore, &c., i. 5.

1860.—"In this state it is sold as JAGGERY in the bazaars, at about three farthings per pound."—Tennent's Ceylon, iii. 524.

JAGHEER, JAGHIRE, s. Pers. jāgīr, lit. 'place-holding.' A hereditary assignment of land and of its rent as annuity.

[c. 1590.—"Farmán-i-zabíts are issued for ... appointments to JÁGÍRS, without military service."—Āīn, i. 261.

[1617.—"Hee quittes diuers small JAGGERS to the King."—Sir T. Roe, Hak. Soc. ii. 449.]

c. 1666.—"... Not to speak of what they finger out of the Pay of every Horseman, and of the number of the Horses; which certainly amounts to very considerable Pensions, especially if they can obtain good JAH-GHIRS, that is, good Lands for their Pensions."—Bernier, E.T. 66; [ed. Constable, 213].

1673.—"It (Surat) has for its Maintenance the Income of six Villages; over which the Governor sometimes presides, sometimes not, being in the JAGGEA, or diocese of another."—Fryer, 120.

" "JAGEAH, an Annuity."—Ibid. Index, vi.

1768.—"I say, Madam, I know nothing of books; and yet I believe upon a land-carriage fishery, a stamp act, or a JAGHIRE, I can talk my two hours without feeling the want of them."—Mr. Lofty, in The Good-Natured Man, Act ii.

1778.—"Should it be more agreeable to the parties, Sir Matthew will settle upon Sir John and his Lady, for their joint lives, a JAGGHIRE.

"Sir John.—A JAGGHIRE?

"Thomas.—The term is Indian, and means an annual Income."—Foote, The Nabob, i. 1.

We believe the traditional stage pronunciation in these passages is JAG HIRE (assonant in both syllables to Quag Mire); and this is also the pronunciation given in some dictionaries.

1778.—"... JAGHIRES, which were always rents arising from lands."—Orme, ed. 1803, ii. 52.

1809.—"He was nominally in possession of a larger JAGHIRE."—Ld. Valentia, i. 401.

A territory adjoining Fort St. George was long known as the JAGHIRE, or the Company's JAGHIRE, and is often so mentioned in histories of the 18th century. This territory, granted to the Company by the Nabob of Arcot in 1750 and 1763, nearly answers to the former Collectorate of Chengalput and present Collectorate of Madras.

[In the following the reference is to the Jirgah or tribal council of the Pathan tribes on the N.W. frontier.

[1900.—"No doubt upon the occasion of Lord Curzon's introduction to the Waziris and the Mohmunds, he will inform their JAGIRS that he has long since written a book about them."—Contemporary Rev. Aug. p. 282.]

JAGHEERDAR, s. P.—H. jāgīrdār, the holder of a JAGHEER.

[1813.—"... in the Mahratta empire the principal JAGHIREDARS, or nobles, appear in the field...."—Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd ed. i. 328.]

1826.—"The Resident, many officers, men of rank ... JAGHEERDARS, Brahmins, and Pundits, were present, assembled round my father."—Pandurang Hari, 389; [ed. 1873, ii. 259].

1883.—"The Sikhs administered the country by means of JAGHEERDARS, and paid them by their JAGHEERS: the English administered it by highly paid British officers, at the same time that they endeavoured to lower the land-tax, and to introduce grand material reforms."—Bosworth Smith, L. of Ld. Lawrence, i. 378.

JAIL-KHANA, s. A hybrid word for 'a gaol,' commonly used in the Bengal Presidency.

JAIN, s. and adj. The non-Brahmanical sect so called; believed to represent the earliest heretics of Buddhism, at present chiefly to be found in the Bombay Presidency. There are a few in Mysore, Canara, and in some parts of the Madras Presidency, but in the Middle Ages they appear to have been numerous on the coast of the Peninsula generally. They are also found in various parts of Central and Northern India and Behar. The Jains are generally merchants, and some have been men of enormous wealth (see Colebrooke's Essays, i. 378 seqq.; [Lassen, in Ind. Antiq. ii. 193 seqq., 258 seqq.]). The name is Skt. JAINA, meaning a follower of JINA. The latter word is a title applied to certain saints worshipped by the sect in the place of gods; it is also a name of the Buddhas. An older name for the followers of the sect appears to have been Nirgrantha, 'without bond,' properly the title of Jain ascetics only (otherwise Yatis), [and in particular of the Digambara or 'sky-clad,' naked branch]. (Burnell, S. Indian Palaeography, p. 47, note.)

[c. 1590.—"JAINA. The founder of this wonderful system was Jina, also called Arhat, or Arhant."—Āīn, ed. Jarrett, iii. 188.]

JALEEBOTE, s. Jālībōt. A marine corruption of jolly-boat (Roebuck). (See GALLEVAT.)

JAM, s. Jām.

A. A title borne by certain chiefs in Kutch, in Kāthiāwāṛ, and on the lower Indus. The derivation is very obscure (see Elliot, i. 495). The title is probably Bilūch originally. There are several JĀMS in Lower Sind and its borders, and notably the Jām of Las Bela State, a well-known dependency of Kelat, bordering the sea. [Mr. Longworth Dames writes: "I do not think the word is of Balochi origin, although it is certainly made use of in the Balochi language. It is rather Sindhi, in the broad sense of the word, using Sindhi as the natives do, referring to the tribes of the Indus valley without regard to the modern boundaries of the province of Sindh. As far as I know, it is used as a title, not by Baloches, but by indigenous tribes of Rājput or Jat origin, now, of course, all Musulmans. The Jām of Las Bela belongs to a tribe of this nature known as the Jāmhat. In the Dera Ghāzī Khān District it is used by certain local notables of this class, none of them Baloches. The principal tribe there using it is the Udhāna. It is also an honorific title among the Mochis of Dera Ghāzī Khān town."]

[c. 1590.—"On the Gujarat side towards the south is a Zamíndár of note whom they call JÁM...."—Āīn, ed. Jarrett, ii. 250.

[1843.—See under DAWK.]

B. A nautical measure, Ar. zām, pl. azwām. It occurs in the form GEME in a quotation of 1614 under JASK. It is repeatedly used in the Mohit of Sidi 'Ali, published in the J. As. Soc. Bengal. It would appear from J. Prinsep's remarks there that the word is used in various ways. Thus Baron J. Hammer writes to Prinsep: "Concerning the measure of azwām the first section of the IIId. chapter explains as follows: 'The zām is either the practical one ('arfī), or the rhetorical (iṣṭilāḥī—but this the acute Prinsep suggests should be aṣṭarlābī, 'pertaining to the divisions of the astrolabe'). The practical is one of the 8 parts into which day and night are divided; the rhetorical (but read the astrolabic) is the 8th part of an inch (iṣāba) in the ascension and descension of the stars; ...' an explanation which helps me not a bit to understand the true measure of a zām, in the reckoning of a ship's course." Prinsep then elucidates this: The zām in practical parlance is said to be the 8th part of day and night; it is in fact a nautical watch or Hindu pahar (see PUHUR). Again, it is the 8th part of the ordinary inch, like the jau or barleycorn of the Hindus (the 8th part of an angul or digit), of which jau, zām is possibly a corruption. Again, the iṣāba or inch, and the zām or ⅛ of an inch, had been transferred to the rude angle-instruments of the Arab navigators; and Prinsep deduces from statements in Sidi 'Ali's book that the iṣāba was very nearly equal to 96′ and the zām to 12′. Prinsep had also found on enquiry among Arab mariners, that the term ZĀM was still well known to nautical people as 1/5 of a geographical degree, or 12 nautical miles, quite confirmatory of the former calculation; it was also stated to be still applied to terrestrial measurements (see J.A.S.B. v. 642-3).

1013.—"J'ai déjà parlé de Sérira (read Sarbaza) qui est située à l'extremité de l'île de Lâmeri, à cent-vingt ZÂMÂ de Kala."—Ajāīb-al-Hind, ed. Van der Lith et Marcel Devic, 176.

" "Un marin m'a rapporté qu'il avait fait la traversée de Sérira (Sarbaza) à la Chine dans un Sambouq (see SAMBOOK). 'Nous avions parcouru,' dit-il, 'un espace de cinquante ZÂMÂ, lorsqu'une tempête fondit sur notre embarcation.... Ayant fait de l'eau, nous remîmes à la voile vers le Senf, suivant ses instructions, et nous y abordâmes sains et saufs, après un voyage de quinze ZÂMÂ."—Ibid. pp. 190-91.

1554.—"26th VOYAGE from Calicut to Kardafun" (see GUARDAFUI).

"... you run from Calicut to Kolfaini (i.e. Kalpeni, one of the Laccadive Ids.) two ZĀMS in the direction of W. by S., the 8 or 9 ZĀMS W.S.W. (this course is in the 9 degree channel through the Laccadives), then you may rejoice as you have got clear of the islands of Fúl, from thence W. by N. and W.N.W. till the pole is 4 inches and a quarter, and then true west to Kardafún."

* * * * *

"27th VOYAGE, from Diú to Malacca.

"Leaving Diú you go first S.S.E. till the pole is 5 inches, and side then towards the land, till the distance between it and the ship is six ZĀMS; from thence you steer S.S.E. ... you must not side all at once but by degrees, first till the farkadain (β and γ in the Little Bear) are made by a quarter less than 8 inches, from thence to S.E. till the farkadain are 7¼ inches, from thence true east at a rate of 18 ZĀMS, then you have passed Ceylon."—The Mohit, in J.A.S.B. v. 465.

The meaning of this last routier is: "Steer S.S.E. till you are in 8° N. Lat. (lat. of Cape Comorin); make then a little more easting, but keep 72 miles between you and the coast of Ceylon till you find the β and γ of Ursa Minor have an altitude of only 12° 24′ (i.e. till you are in N. Lat. 6° or 5°), and then steer due east. When you have gone 216 miles you will be quite clear of Ceylon."

1625.—"We cast anchor under the island of Kharg, which is distant from Cais, which we left behind us, 24 GIAM. GIAM is a measure used by the Arab and Persian pilots in the Persian Gulf; and every GIAM is equal to 3 leagues; insomuch that from Cais to Kharg we had made 72 leagues."—P. della Valle, ii. 816.

JAMBOO, JUMBOO, s. The Rose-apple, Eugenia jambos, L. Jambosa vulgaris, Decand.; Skt. jambū, Hind. jam, jambū, jamrūl, &c. This is the use in Bengal, but there is great confusion in application, both colloquially and in books. The name jambū is applied in some parts of India to the exotic GUAVA (q.v.), as well as to other species of Eugenia; including the jāmun (see JAMOON), with which the rose-apple is often confounded in books. They are very different fruits, though they have both been classed by Linnaeus under the genus Eugenia (see further remarks under JAMOON). [Mr. Skeat notes that the word is applied by the Malays both to the rose-apple and the guava, and Wilkinson (Dict. s.v.) notes a large number of fruits to which the name jambū is applied.]

Garcia de Orta mentions the rose-apple under the name IAMBOS, and says (1563) that it had been recently introduced into Goa from Malacca. This may have been the Eugenia Malaccensis, L., which is stated in Forbes Watson's Catalogue of nomenclature to be called in Bengal Malāka Jamrūī, and in Tamil Malākā maram i.e. 'Malacca tree.' The Skt. name jambū is, in the Malay language, applied with distinguishing adjectives to all the species.

[1598.—"The trees whereon the IAMBOS do grow are as great as Plumtrees."—Linschoten, Hak. Soc. ii. 31.]

1672.—P. Vincenzo Maria describes the GIAMBO D'INDIA with great precision, and also the GIAMBO DI CHINA—no doubt J. malaccensis—but at too great length for extract, pp. 351-352.

1673.—"In the South a Wood of JAMBOES, Mangoes, Cocoes."—Fryer, 46.

1727.—"Their JAMBO Malacca (at Goa) is very beautiful and pleasant."—A. Hamilton, i. 255; [ed. 1744, i. 258].

1810.—"The JUMBOO, a species of rose-apple, with its flower like crimson tassels covering every part of the stem."—Maria Graham, 22.

JAMES AND MARY, n.p. The name of a famous sand-bank in the Hoogly R. below Calcutta, which has been fatal to many a ship. It is mentioned under 1748, in the record of a survey of the river quoted in Long, p. 10. It is a common allegation that the name is a corruption of the Hind. words jal mari, with the supposed meaning of 'dead water.' But the real origin of the name dates, as Sir G. Birdwood has shown, out of India Office records, from the wreck of a vessel called the "Royal James and Mary," in September 1694, on that sand-bank (Letter to the Court, from Chuttanuttee, Dec. 19, 1694). [Report on Old Records, 90.] This shoal appears by name in a chart belonging to the English Pilot, 1711.

JAMMA, s. P.—H. jāma, a piece of native clothing. Thus, in composition, see PYJAMMAS. Also stuff for clothing, &c., e.g. mom-JAMA, wax-cloth. ["The JAMA may have been brought by the Aryans from Central Asia, but as it is still now seen it is thoroughly Indian and of ancient date."—Rajendralala Mitra, Indo-Aryans, i. 187 seq.

[1813.—"The better sort (of Hindus) wear ... a JAMA, or long gown of white calico, which is tied round the middle with a fringed or embroidered sash."—Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd ed. i. 52].

JAMOON, s. Hind. jāmun, jāman, jāmlī, &c. The name of a poor fruit common in many parts of India, and apparently in E. Africa, the Eugenia jambolana, Lamk. (Calyptranthes jambolana of Willdenow, Syzygium jambolanum of Decand.) This seems to be confounded with the Eugenia jambos, or Rose-apple (see JAMBOO, above), by the author of a note on Leyden's Baber which Mr. Erskine justly corrects (Baber's own account is very accurate), by the translators of Ibn Batuta, and apparently, as regards the botanical name, by Sir R. Burton. The latter gives jamli as the Indian, and zam as the Arabic name. The name jambū appears to be applied to this fruit at Bombay, which of course promotes the confusion spoken of. In native practice the stones of this fruit have been alleged to be a cure for diabetes, but European trials do not seem to have confirmed this.

c. 13**.—"The inhabitants (of Mombasa) gather also a fruit which they call JAMŪN, and which resembles an olive; it has a stone like the olive, but has a very sweet taste."—Ibn Batuta, ii. 191. Elsewhere the translators write tchoumoûn (iii. 128, iv. 114, 229), a spelling indicated in the original, but surely by some error.

c. 1530.—"Another is the JAMAN.... It is on the whole a fine looking tree. Its fruit resembles the black grape, but has a more acid taste, and is not very good."—Baber, 325. The note on this runs: "This, Dr. Hunter says, is the Eugenia Jambolana, the rose-apple (Eugenia jambolana, but not the rose-apple, which is now called Eugenia jambu.—D.W.). The jâman has no resemblance to the rose-apple; it is more like an oblong sloe than anything else, but grows on a tall tree."

1563.—"I will eat of those olives,——, at least they look like such; but they are very astringent (ponticas) as if binding,——, and yet they do look like ripe Cordova olives.

"O. They are called JAMBOLONES, and grow wild in a wood that looks like a myrtle grove; in its leaves the tree resembles the arbutus; but like the jack, the people of the country don't hold this fruit for very wholesome."—Garcia, f. 111_y_.

1859.—"The Indian JAMLI.... It is a noble tree, which adorns some of the coast villages and plantations, and it produces a damson-like fruit, with a pleasant sub-acid flavour."—Burton, in J.R.G.S. ix. 36.

JANCADA, s. This name was given to certain responsible guides in the Nair country who escorted travellers from one inhabited place to another, guaranteeing their security with their own lives, like the Bhāts of Guzerat. The word is Malayāl. chaṅṅāḍam (i.e. changngāḍam, [the Madras Gloss. writes channātam, and derives it from Skt. sanghāta, 'union']), with the same spelling as that of the word given as the origin of JANGAR or JANGADA, 'a raft.' These jancadas or jangadas seem also to have been placed in other confidential and dangerous charges. Thus:

1543.—"This man who so resolutely died was one of the JANGADAS of the Pagode. They are called JANGADES because the kings and lords of those lands, according to a custom of theirs, send as guardians of the houses of the Pagodes in their territories, two men as captains, who are men of honour and good cavaliers. Such guardians are called JANGADAS, and have soldiers of guard under them, and are as it were the Counsellors and Ministers of the affairs of the pagodes, and they receive their maintenance from the establishment and its revenues. And sometimes the king changes them and appoints others."—Correa, iv. 328.

c. 1610.—"I travelled with another Captain ... who had with him these JANGAI, who are the Nair guides, and who are found at the gates of towns to act as escort to those who require them.... Every one takes them, the weak for safety and protection, those who are stronger, and travel in great companies and well armed, take them only as witnesses that they are not aggressors in case of any dispute with the Nairs."—Pyrard de Laval, ch. xxv.; [Hak. Soc. i. 339, and see Mr. Gray's note in loco].

1672.—"The safest of all journeyings in India are those through the Kingdom of the Nairs and the Samorin, if you travel with GIANCADAS, the most perilous if you go alone. These GIANCADAS are certain heathen men, who venture their own life and the lives of their kinsfolk for small remuneration, to guarantee the safety of travellers."—P. Vincenzo Maria, 127.

See also Chungathum, in Burton's Goa, p. 198.

JANGAR, s. A raft. Port. jangada. ["A double platform canoe made by placing a floor of boards across two boats, with a bamboo railing." (Madras Gloss.).] This word, chiefly colloquial, is the Tamil-Malayāl. shangāḍam, channātam (for the derivation of which see JANCADA). It is a word of particular interest as being one of the few Dravidian words, [but perhaps ultimately of Skt. origin], preserved in the remains of classical antiquity, occurring in the Periplus as our quotation shows. Bluteau does not call the word an Indian term.

c. 80-90.—"The vessels belonging to these places (Camara, Poducē, and Sopatma on the east coast) which hug the shore to Limyricē (Dimyricē), and others also called Σάγγαρα, which consist of the largest canoes of single timbers lashed together; and again those biggest of all which sail to Chryse and Ganges, and are called Κολανδίοφωντα."—Periplus, in Müller's Geog. Gr. Min., i. "The first part of this name for boats or ships is most probably the Tam. kul̤inda = hollowed: the last ōḍam = boat."—Burnell, S.I. Palaeography, 612.

c. 1504.—"He held in readiness many JANGADAS of timber."—Correa, Lendas, I. i. 476.

c. 1540.—"... and to that purpose had already commanded two great Rafts (JÃGADAS), covered with dry wood, barrels of pitch and other combustible stuff, to be placed at the entering into the Port."—Pinto (orig. cap. xlvi.), in Cogan, p. 56.

1553.—"... the fleet ... which might consist of more than 200 rowing vessels of all kinds, a great part of them combined into JANGADAS in order to carry a greater mass of men, and among them two of these contrivances on which were 150 men."—Barros, II. i. 5.

1598.—"Such as stayed in the ship, some tooke bords, deals, and other peeces of wood, and bound them together (which y^e Portingals cal IANGADAS) every man what they could catch, all hoping to save their lives, but of all those there came but two men safe to shore."—Linschoten, p. 147; [Hak. Soc. ii. 181; and see Mr. Gray on Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. i. 53 seq.].

1602.—"For his object was to see if he could rescue them in JANGADAS, which he ordered him immediately to put together of baulks, planks, and oars."—Couto, Dec. IV. liv. iv. cap. 10.

1756.—"... having set fire to a JUNGODO of Boats, these driving down towards the Fleet, compelled them to weigh."—Capt. Jackson, in Dalrymple's Or. Rep. i. 199.

c. 1790.—"SANGARIE." See quotation under HACKERY.

c. 1793.—"Nous nous remîmes en chemin à six heures du matin, et passâmes la rivière dans un SANGARIE ou canot fait d'un palmier creusé."—Haafner, ii. 77.

JANGOMAY, ZANGOMAY, JAMAHEY, &c., n.p. The town and state of Siamese Laos, called by the Burmese Zimmé, by the Siamese Xiengmai or Kiang-mai, &c., is so called in narratives of the 17th century. Serious efforts to establish trade with this place were made by the E.I. Company in the early part of the 17th century, of which notice will be found in Purchas, Pilgrimage, and Sainsbury, e.g. in vol. i. (1614), pp. 311, 325; (1615) p. 425; (1617) ii. p. 90. The place has again become the scene of commercial and political interest; an English Vice-Consulate has been established; and a railway survey undertaken. [See Hallett, A Thousand Miles on an Elephant, 74 seqq.]

c. 1544.—"Out of this Lake of Singapamor ... do four very large and deep rivers proceed, whereof the first ... runneth Eastward through all the Kingdoms of Sornau and Siam ...; the Second, JANGUMAA ... disimboking into the Sea by the Bar of Martabano in the Kingdom of Pegu...."—Pinto (in Cogan, 165).

1553.—(Barros illustrates the position of the different kingdoms of India by the figure of a (left) hand, laid with the palm downwards) "And as regards the western part, following always the sinew of the forefinger, it will correspond with the ranges of mountains running from north to south along which lie the kingdom of Avá, and Bremá, and JANGOMÁ."—III. ii. 5.

c. 1587.—"I went from Pegu to IAMAYHEY, which is in the Countrey of the Langeiannes, whom we call IANGOMES; it is five and twentie dayes iourney to Northeast from Pegu.... Hither to IAMAYHEY come many Merchants out of China, and bring great store of Muske, Gold, Silver, and many things of China worke."—R. Fitch, in Hakl. ii.

c. 1606.—"But the people, or most part of them, fled to the territories of the King of JANGOMA, where they were met by the Padre Friar Francisco, of the Annunciation, who was there negotiating ..."—Bocarro, 136.

1612.—"The Siamese go out with their heads shaven, and leave long mustachioes on their faces; their garb is much like that of the Peguans. The same may be said of the JANGOMAS and the Laojoes" (see LAN JOHN).—Couto, V. vi. 1.

c. 1615.—"The King (of Pegu) which now reigneth ... hath in his time recovered from the King of Syam ... the town and kingdom of ZANGOMAY, and therein an Englishman called Thomas Samuel, who not long before had been sent from Syam by Master Lucas Anthonison, to discover the Trade of that country by the sale of certaine goods sent along with him for that purpose."—W. Methold, in Purchas, v. 1006.

[1617.—"JANGAMA." See under JUDEA.

[1795.—"ZEMEE." See under SHAN.]

JAPAN, n.p. Mr. Giles says: "Our word is from Jeh-pun, the Dutch orthography of the Japanese Ni-pon." What the Dutch have to do with the matter is hard to see. ["Our word 'Japan' and the Japanese Nihon or Nippon, are alike corruptions of Jih-pen, the Chinese pronunciation of the characters (meaning) literally 'sun-origin.'" (Chamberlain, Things Japanese, 3rd ed. 221).] A form closely resembling Japán, as we pronounce it, must have prevailed, among foreigners at least, in China as early as the 13th century; for Marco Polo calls it Chipan-gu or Jipan-ku, a name representing the Chinese Zhi-păn-Kwe ('Sun-origin-Kingdom'), the Kingdom of the Sunrise or Extreme Orient, of which the word Nipon or Niphon, used in Japan, is said to be a dialectic variation. But as there was a distinct gap in Western tradition between the 14th century and the 16th, no doubt we, or rather the Portuguese, acquired the name from the traders at Malacca, in the Malay forms, which Crawfurd gives as Jăpung and Jăpang.

1298.—"CHIPANGU is an Island towards the east in the high seas, 1,500 miles distant from the Continent; and a very great Island it is. The people are white, civilized, and well-favoured. They are Idolaters, and dependent on nobody...."—Marco Polo, bk. iii. ch. 2.

1505.—"... and not far off they took a ship belonging to the King of Calichut; out of which they have brought me certain jewels of good value; including Mccccc. pearls worth 8,000 ducats; also three astrological instruments of silver, such as are not used by our astrologers, large and well-wrought, which I hold in the highest estimation. They say that the King of Calichut had sent the said ship to an island called SAPONIN to obtain the said instruments...."—Letter from the K. of Portugal (Dom Manuel) to the K. of Castille (Ferdinand). Reprint by A. Burnell, 1881, p. 8.

1521.—"In going by this course we passed near two very rich islands; one is in twenty degrees latitude in the antarctic pole, and is called CIPANGHU."—Pigafetta, Magellan's Voyage, Hak. Soc., 67. Here the name appears to be taken from the chart or Mappe-Monde which was carried on the voyage. CIPANGHU appears by that name on the globe of Martin Behaim (1492), but 20 degrees north, not south, of the equator.

1545.—"Now as for us three Portugals, having nothing to sell, we employed our time either in fishing, hunting, or seeing the Temples of these Gentiles, which were very sumptuous and rich, whereinto the Bonzes, who are their priests, received us very courteously, for indeed it is the custom of those of JAPPON (do Japão) to be exceeding kind and courteous."—Pinto (orig. cap. cxxxiv.), in Cogan, E.T. p. 173.

1553.—"After leaving to the eastward the isles of the Lequios (see LEW CHEW) and of the JAPONS (dos Japões), and the great province of Meaco, which for its great size we know not whether to call it Island or Continent, the coast of China still runs on, and those parts pass beyond the antipodes of the meridian of Lisbon."—Barros, I. ix. 1.

1572.—

"Esta meia escondida, que responde De longe a China, donde vem buscar-se, He JAPÃO, onde nasce la prata fina, Que illustrada será co' a Lei divina." Camões, x. 131.

By Burton:

"This Realm, half-shadowed, China's empery afar reflecting, whither ships are bound, is the JAPAN, whose virgin silver mine shall shine still sheenier with the Law Divine."

1727.—"JAPON, with the neighbouring Islands under its Dominions, is about the magnitude of Great Britain."—A. Hamilton, ii. 306; [ed. 1744, ii. 305].

JARGON, JARCOON, ZIRCON, s. The name of a precious stone often mentioned by writers of the 16th century, but respecting the identity of which there seems to be a little obscurity. The English Encyclopaedia, and the Times Reviewer of Emanuel's book On Precious Stones (1866), identify it with the hyacinth or jacinth; but Lord Stanley of Alderley, in his translation of Barbosa (who mentions the stone several times under the form giagonza and jagonza), on the authority of a practical jeweller identifies it with corundum. This is probably an error. Jagonza looks like a corruption of jacinthus. And Haüy's Mineralogy identifies jargon and hyacinth under the common name of zircon. Dana's Mineralogy states that the term hyacinth is applied to these stones, consisting of a silicate of zirconia, "which present bright colours, considerable transparency, and smooth shining surfaces.... The variety from Ceylon, which is colourless, and has a smoky tinge, and is therefore sold for inferior diamonds, is sometimes called jargon" (Syst. of Mineral., 3rd ed., 1850, 379-380; [Encycl. Britt. 9th ed. xxiv. 789 seq.]).

The word probably comes into European languages through the Span. azarcon, a word of which there is a curious history in Dozy and Engelmann. Two Spanish words and their distinct Arabic originals have been confounded in the Span. Dict. of Cobarruvias (1611) and others following him. Sp. zarca is 'a woman with blue eyes,' and this comes from Ar. zarḳā, fem. of azraḳ, 'blue.' This has led the lexicographers above referred to astray, and azarcon has been by them defined as a 'blue earth, made of burnt lead.' But azarcon really applies to 'red-lead,' or vermilion, as does the Port. zarcão, azarcão, and its proper sense is as the Dict. of the Sp. Academy says (after repeating the inconsistent explanation and etymology of Cobarruvias), "an intense orange-colour, Lat. color aureus." This is from the Ar. zarḳūn, which in Ibn Baithar is explained as synonymous with salīḳūn, and asranj, "which the Greeks call sandix," i.e. cinnabar or vermilion (see Sontheimer's Ebn Beithar, i. 44, 530). And the word, as Dozy shows, occurs in Pliny under the form syricum (see quotations below). The eventual etymology is almost certainly Persian, either zargūn, 'gold colour,' as Marcel Devic suggests, or āzargūn (perhaps more properly āẓargūn, from āẓar, 'fire'), 'flame-colour,' as Dozy thinks.

A.D. c. 70.—"Hoc ergo adulteratur minium in officinis sociorum, et ubivis SYRICO. Quonam modo SYRICUM fiat suo loco docebimus, sublini autem SYRICO minium conpendi ratio demonstrat."—Plin. N. H. XXXIII. vii.

" "Inter facticios est et SYRICUM, quo minium sublini diximus. Fit autem Sinopide et sandyce mixtis."—Ibid. XXXV. vi.

1796.—"The artists of Ceylon prepare rings and heads of canes, which contain a complete assortment of all the precious stones found in that island. These assemblages are called JARGONS de Ceilan, and are so called because they consist of a collection of gems which reflect various colours."—Fra Paolino, Eng. ed. 1800, 393. (This is a very loose translation. Fra Paolino evidently thought Jargon was a figurative name applied to this mixture of stones, as it is to a mixture of languages).

1813.—"The colour of JARGONS is grey, with tinges of green, blue, red, and yellow."—I. Mawe, A Treatise on Diamonds, &c. 119.

1860.—"The 'Matura Diamonds,' which are largely used by the native jewellers, consist of ZIRCON, found in the syenite, not only uncoloured, but also of pink and yellow tints, the former passing for rubies."—Tennent's Ceylon, i. 38.

JAROOL, s. The Lagerstroemia reginae, Roxb. H.-Beng. jarūl, jāral. A tree very extensively diffused in the forests of Eastern and Western India and Pegu. It furnishes excellent boat-timber, and is a splendid flowering tree. "An exceeding glorious tree of the Concan jungles, in the month of May robed as in imperial purple, with its terminal panicles of large showy purple flowers. I for the first time introduced it largely into Bombay gardens, and called it Flos reginae"—Sir G. Birdwood, MS.

1850.—"Their forests are frequented by timber-cutters, who fell JAROOL, a magnificent tree with red wood, which, though soft, is durable under water, and therefore in universal use for boat building."—Hooker, Him. Journals, ed. 1855, ii. 318.

1855.—"Much of the way from Rangoon also, by the creeks, to the great river, was through actual dense forest, in which the JAROOL, covered with purple blossoms, made a noble figure."—Blackwood's Mag., May 1856, 538.

JASK, JASQUES, CAPE-, n.p. Ar. Rās Jāshak, a point on the eastern side of the Gulf of Omān, near the entrance to the Persian Gulf, and 6 miles south of a port of the same name. The latter was frequented by the vessels of the English Company whilst the Portuguese held Ormus. After the Portuguese were driven out of Ormus (1622) the English trade was moved to GOMBROON (q.v.). The peninsula of which Cape Jask is the point, is now the terminus of the submarine cable from Bushire; and a company of native infantry is quartered there. Jāsak appears in Yāḳūt as "a large island between the land of Omān and the Island of Kish." No island corresponds to this description, and probably the reference is an incorrect one to Jask (see Dict. de la Perse, p. 149). By a curious misapprehension, Cape Jasques seems to have been Englished as Cape James (see Dunn's Or. Navigator, 1780, p. 94).

1553.—"Crossing from this Cape Moçandan to that opposite to it called JASQUE, which with it forms the mouth of the strait, we enter on the second section (of the coast) according to our division...."—Barros, I. ix. i.

1572.—

"Mas deixemos o estreito, e o conhecido CABO DE JASQUE, dito já Carpella, Com todo o seu terreno mal querido Da natura, e dos dons usados della...." Camões, x. 105.

By Burton:

"But now the Narrows and their noted head CAPE JASK, Carpella called by those of yore, quit we, the dry terrene scant favourèd by Nature niggard of her normal store...."

1614.—"Per Postscript. If it please God this Persian business fall out to y^r contentt, and y^t you thinke fitt to adventure thither, I thinke itt not amisse to sett you downe as y^e Pilotts have informed mee of JASQUES, w^{ch} is a towne standinge neere y^e edge of a straightte Sea Coast where a ship may ride in 8 fathome water a Sacar shotte from y^e shoar and in 6 fathome you maye bee nearer. JASQUE is 6 Gemes (see JAM, B) from Ormus southwards and six Gemes is 60 cosses makes 30 leagues. JASQUES lieth from Muschet east. From JASQUES to SINDA is 200 cosses or 100 leagues. At JASQUES com̃only they have northe winde w^{ch} blowethe trade out of y^e Persian Gulfe. Mischet is on y^e Arabian Coast, and is a little portte of Portugalls."—MS. Letter from Nich. Downton, dd. November 22, 1614, in India Office; [Printed in Foster, Letters, ii. 177, and compare ii. 145].

1617.—"There came news at this time that there was an English ship lying inside the Cape of Rosalgate (see ROSALGAT) with the intention of making a fort at JASQUES in Persia, as a point from which to plunder our cargoes...."—Bocarro, 672.

[1623.—"The point or peak of GIASCK."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. i. 4.

[1630.—"IASQUES." (See under JUNK.)]

1727.—"I'll travel along the Sea-coast, towards Industan, or the Great Mogul's Empire. All the Shore from JASQUES to Sindy, is inhabited by uncivilized People, who admit of no Commerce with Strangers...."—A. Hamilton, i. 115; [ed. 1744].

JASOOS, s. Ar.-H. jāsūs, 'a spy.'

1803.—"I have some JASOOSES, selected by Col. C——'s brahmin for their stupidity, that they might not pry into state secrets, who go to Sindia's camp, remain there a phaur (see PUHUR) in fear ..."—M. Elphinstone, in Life, i. 62.

JAUN, s. This is a term used in Calcutta, and occasionally in Madras, of which the origin is unknown to the present writers. [Mr. H. Beveridge points out that it is derived from H.—Beng. yān, defined by Sir G. Haughton: "a vehicle, any means of conveyance, a horse, a carriage, a palkee." It is Skt. yāna, with the same meaning. The initial ya in Bengali is usually pronounced ja. The root is yā, 'to go.'] It is, or was, applied to a small palankin carriage, such as is commonly used by business men in going to their offices, &c.

c. 1836.—

"Who did not know that office JAUN of pale Pomona green, With its drab and yellow lining, and picked out black between, Which down the Esplanade did go at the ninth hour of the day...."— Bole-Ponjis, by H. M. Parker, ii. 215.

[The JAUN Bazar is a well-known low quarter of Calcutta.]

[1892.—

"From Tarnau in Galicia To JAUN Bazar she came." R. Kipling, Ballad of Fisher's Boarding House.]

JAVA, n.p. This is a geographical name of great antiquity, and occurs, as our first quotation shows, in Ptolemy's Tables. His Ἰαβαδίου represents with singular correctness what was probably the Prakrit or popular form of Yava-dvīpa (see under DIU and MALDIVES), and his interpretation of the Sanskrit is perfectly correct. It will still remain a question whether Yava was not applied to some cereal more congenial to the latitude than barley,[145] or was (as is possible) an attempt to give an Indian meaning to some aboriginal name of similar sound. But the sixth of our quotations, the transcript and translation of a Sanskrit inscription in the Museum at Batavia by Mr. Holle, which we owe to the kindness of Prof. Kern, indicates that a signification of wealth in cereals was attached to the name in the early days of its Indian civilization. This inscription is most interesting, as it is the oldest dated inscription yet discovered upon Javanese soil. Till a recent time it was not known that there was any mention of Java in Sanskrit literature, and this was so when Lassen published the 2nd vol. of his Indian Antiquities (1849). But in fact Java was mentioned in the Rāmāyana, though a perverted reading disguised the fact until the publication of the Bombay edition in 1863. The passage is given in our second quotation; and we also give passages from two later astronomical works whose date is approximately known. The Yava-Koṭi, or Java Point of these writers is understood by Prof. Kern to be the eastern extremity of the island.

We have already (see BENJAMIN) alluded to the fact that the terms Jāwa, Jāwi were applied by the Arabs to the Archipelago generally, and often with specific reference to Sumatra. Prof. Kern, in a paper to which we are largely indebted, has indicated that this larger application of the term was originally Indian. He has discussed it in connection with the terms "Golden and Silver Islands" (Suvarṇa dvīpa and Rūpya dvīpa), which occur in the quotation from the Rāmāyana, and elsewhere in Sanskrit literature, and which evidently were the basis of the Chrysē and Argyrē, which take various forms in the writings of the Greek and Roman geographers. We cannot give the details of his discussion, but his condensed conclusions are as follows:—(1.) Suvarṇa-dvīpa and Yava-dvīpa were according to the prevalent representations the same; (2.) Two names of islands originally distinct were confounded with one another; (3.) Suvarṇa-dvīpa in its proper meaning is Sumatra, Yava-dvīpa in its proper meaning is Java; (4.) Sumatra, or a part of it, and Java were regarded as one whole, doubtless because they were politically united; (5.) By Yava-koṭi was indicated the east point of Java.

This Indian (and also insular) identification, in whole or in part, of Sumatra with Java explains a variety of puzzles, e.g. not merely the Arab application of Java, but also the ascription, in so many passages, of great wealth of gold to Java, though the island, to which that name properly belongs, produces no gold. This tradition of gold-produce we find in the passages quoted from Ptolemy, from the Rāmāyana, from the Holle inscription, and from Marco Polo. It becomes quite intelligible when we are taught that Java and Sumatra were at one time both embraced under the former name, for Sumatra has always been famous for its gold-production. [Mr. Skeat notes as an interesting fact that the standard Malay name Jāwă and the Javanese Jāwa preserve the original form of the word.]

(Ancient).—"Search carefully YAVA DVĪPA, adorned by seven Kingdoms, the Gold and Silver Island, rich in mines of gold. Beyond YAVA DVĪPA is the Mountain called Sisira, whose top touches the sky, and which is visited by gods and demons."—Rāmāyana, IV. xl. 30 (from Kern).

A.D. c. 150.—"IABADIU (Ἰαβαδίου), which means 'Island of Barley,' most fruitful the island is said to be, and also to produce much gold; also the metropolis is said to have the name Argyrē (Silver), and to stand at the western end of the island."—Ptolemy, VII. ii. 29.

414.—"Thus they voyaged for about ninety days, when they arrived at a country called YA-VA-DI [i.e. Yava-dvīpa]. In this country heretics and Brahmans flourish, but the Law of Buddha hardly deserves mentioning."—Fahian, ext. in Groeneveldt's Notes from Chinese Sources.

A.D. c. 500.—"When the sun rises in Ceylon it is sunset in the City of the Blessed (Siddha-pura, i.e. The Fortunate Islands), noon at YAVA-KOṬI, and midnight in the Land of the Romans."—Aryabhata, IV. v. 13 (from Kern).

A.D. c. 650.—"Eastward by a fourth part of the earth's circumference, in the world-quarter of the Bhadrāśvas lies the City famous under the name of YAVA KOTI whose walls and gates are of gold."—Suryā-Siddhānta, XII. v. 38 (from Kern).

Saka, 654, i.e. A.D. 762.—"Dvīpavara_m_ YAVĀKHYAM atulan dhân-yādivājâīhikam sampanna_m_ kanakākaraih" ... i.e. the incomparable splendid island called JAVA, excessively rich in grain and other seeds, and well provided with gold-mines."—Inscription in Batavia Museum (see above).

943.—"Eager ... to study with my own eyes the peculiarities of each country, I have with this object visited Sind and Zanj, and Ṣanf (see CHAMPA) and Ṣīn (China), and ZĀBAJ."—Maṣ'ūdī, i. 5.

" "This Kingdom (India) borders upon that of ZĀBAJ, which is the empire of the Mahrāj, King of the Isles."—Ibid. 163.

992.—"DJAVA is situated in the Southern Ocean.... In the 12th month of the year (992) their King Maradja sent an embassy ... to go to court and bring tribute."—Groeneveldt's Notes from Chinese Sources, pp. 15-17.

1298.—"When you sail from Ziamba (Chamba) 1500 miles in a course between south and south-east, you come to a very great island called JAVA, which, according to the statement of some good mariners, is the greatest Island that there is in the world, seeing that it has a compass of more than 3000 miles, and is under the dominion of a great king.... Pepper, nutmegs, spike, galanga, cubebs, cloves, and all the other good spices are produced in this island, and it is visited by many ships with quantities of merchandise from which they make great profits and gain, for such an amount of gold is found there that no one would believe it or venture to tell it."—Marco Polo, in Ramusio, ii. 51.

c. 1330.—"In the neighbourhood of that realm is a great island, JAVA by name, which hath a compass of a good 3000 miles. Now this island is populous exceedingly, and is the second best of all islands that exist.... The King of this island hath a palace which is truly marvellous.... Now the great Khan of Cathay many a time engaged in war with this King; but this King always vanquished and got the better of him."—Friar Odoric, in Cathay, &c., 87-89.

c. 1349.—"She clandestinely gave birth to a daughter, whom she made when grown up Queen of the finest island in the world, SABA by name...."—John de' Marignolli, ibid. 391.

c. 1444.—"Sunt insulae duae in interiori India, e pene extremis orbis finibus, ambae JAVA nomine, quarum altera tribus, altera duobus millibus milliarum protenditur orientem versus; sed Majoris, Minorisque cognomine discernuntur."—N. Conti, in Poggius, De Var. Fortunae.

1503.—The Syrian Bishops Thomas, Jaballaha, Jacob, and Denha, sent on a mission to India in 1503 by the (Nestorian) Patriarch Elias, were ordained to go "to the land of the Indians and the islands of the seas which are between DABAG and Sin and Masin (see MACHEEN)."—Assemani, III. Pt. i. 592. This Dabag is probably a relic of the Zābaj of the Relation, of Maṣ'ūdī, and of Al-birūnī.

1516.—"Further on ... there are many islands, small and great, amongst which is one very large which they call JAVA the Great.... They say that this island is the most abundant country in the world.... There grow pepper, cinnamon, ginger, bamboos, cubebs, and gold...."—Barbosa, 197.

Referring to Sumatra, or the Archipelago in general.

Saka, 578, i.e. A.D. 656.—"The Prince Adityadharma is the Deva of the First JAVA Land (prathama YAVA-bhū). May he be great! Written in the year of Saka, 578. May it be great!"—From a Sanskrit Inscription from Pager-Ruyong, in Menang Karbau (Sumatra), publd. by Friedrich, in the Batavian Transactions, vol. xxiii.

1224.—"MA'BAR (q.v.) is the last part of India; then comes the country of China (Ṣín), the first part of which is JĀWA, reached by a difficult and fatal sea."—Yāḳūt, i. 516.

" "This is some account of remotest Ṣín, which I record without vouching for its truth ... for in sooth it is a far off land. I have seen no one who had gone to it and penetrated far into it; only the merchants seek its outlying parts, to wit the country known as JĀWA on the sea-coast, like to India; from it are brought Aloeswood ('ūd), camphor, and nard (sunbul), and clove, and mace (basbāsa), and China drugs, and vessels of china-ware."—Ibid. iii. 445.

Kazwīnī speaks in almost the same words of JĀWA. He often copies Yāḳūt, but perhaps he really means his own time (for he uses different words) when he says: "Up to this time the merchants came no further into China than to this country (JĀWA) on account of the distance and difference of religion."—ii. 18.

1298.—"When you leave this Island of Pentam and sail about 100 miles, you reach the Island of JAVA the Less. For all its name 'tis none so small but that it has a compass of 2000 miles or more...." &c.—Marco Polo, bk. iii. ch. 9.

c. 1300.—"... In the mountains of JÁVA scented woods grow.... The mountains of JÁVA are very high. It is the custom of the people to puncture their hands and entire body with needles, and then rub in some black substance."—Rashīd-uddīn, in Elliot, i. 71.

1328.—"There is also another exceeding great island, which is called JAUA, which is in circuit more than seven [thousand?] miles as I have heard, and where are many world's wonders. Among which, besides the finest aromatic spices, this is one, to wit, that there be found pygmy men.... There are also trees producing cloves, which when they are in flower emit an odour so pungent that they kill every man who cometh among them, unless he shut his mouth and nostrils.... In a certain part of that island they delight to eat white and fat men when they can get them...."—Friar Jordanus, 30-31.

c. 1330.—"Parmi les isles de la Mer de l'Inde il faut citer celle de DJÂWAH, grande isle célèbre par l'abondance de ses drogues ... au sud de l'isle de DJÂWAH on remarque la ville de Fansour, d'où le camphre Fansoûri tire son nom."—Géog. d'Aboulfeda, II. pt. ii. 127. [See CAMPHOR].

c. 1346.—"After a passage of 25 days we arrived at the Island of JĀWA, which gives its name to the lubān jāwiy (see BENJAMIN).... We thus made our entrance into the capital, that is to say the city of Sumatra; a fine large town with a wall of wood and towers also of wood."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 228-230.

1553.—"And so these, as well as those of the interior of the Island (Sumatra), are all dark, with lank hair, of good nature and countenance, and not resembling the Javanese, although such near neighbours, indeed it is very notable that at so small a distance from each other their nature should vary so much, all the more because all the people of this Island call themselves by the common name of JAWIS (Jaüijs), because they hold it for certain that the Javanese (os JÃOS) were formerly lords of this great Island...."—Barros, III. v. 1.

1555.—"Beyond the Island of IAUA they sailed along by another called Bali; and then came also vnto other called Aujaue, Cambaba, Solor.... The course by these Islands is about 500 leagues. The ancient cosmographers call all these Islands by the name IAUOS; but late experience hath found the names to be very diuers as you see."—Antonio Galvano, old E.T. in Hakl. iv. 423.

1856.—

"It is a saying in Goozerat,— 'Who goes to JAVA Never returns. If by chance he return, Then for two generations to live upon, Money enough he brings back.'" Râs Mâlâ, ii. 82; [ed. 1878, p. 418].

JAVA-RADISH, s. A singular variety (Raphanus caudatus, L.) of the common radish (R. sativus, L.), of which the pods, which attain a foot in length, are eaten and not the root. It is much cultivated in Western India, under the name of mugra [see Baden-Powell, Punjab Products, i. 260]. It is curious that the Hind. name of the common radish is mūlī, from mūl, 'root,' exactly analogous to radish from radix.

[JAVA-WIND, s. In the Straits Settlements an unhealthy south wind blowing from the direction of Java is so called. (Compare SUMATRA, B.)]

JAWAUB, s. Hind. from Ar. jawāb, 'an answer.' In India it has, besides this ordinary meaning, that of 'dismissal.' And in Anglo-Indian colloquial it is especially used for a lady's refusal of an offer; whence the verb passive 'to be jawaub'd.' [The JAWAUB Club consisted of men who had been at least half a dozen times 'jawaub'd.'

1830.—"'The JUWAWB'D CLUB,' asked Elsmere, with surprise, 'what is that?'

"''Tis a fanciful association of those melancholy candidates for wedlock who have fallen in their pursuit, and are smarting under the sting of rejection.'"—Orient. Sport. Mag., reprint 1873, i. 424.]

JAWĀB among the natives is often applied to anything erected or planted for a symmetrical double, where

"Grove nods at grove, each alley has a brother, And half the platform just reflects the other."

"In the houses of many chiefs every picture on the walls has its JAWAB (or duplicate). The portrait of Scindiah now in my dining-room was the JAWAB (copy in fact) of Mr. C. Landseer's picture, and hung opposite to the original in the Darbar room" (M.-Gen. Keatinge). ["The masjid with three domes of white marble occupies the left wing and has a counterpart (JAWĀB) in a precisely similar building on the right hand side of the Tāj. This last is sometimes called the false masjid; but it is in no sense dedicated to religious purposes."—Führer, Monumental Antiquities, N.W.P., p. 64.]

JAY, s. The name usually given by Europeans to the Coracias Indica, Linn., the Nīlkanṭh, or 'blue-throat' of the Hindus, found all over India.

[1878.—"They are the commonality of birddom, who furnish forth the mobs which bewilder the drunken-flighted JAY when he jerks, shrieking in a series of blue hyphen-flashes through the air...."—Ph. Robinson, In My Indian Garden, 3.]

JEEL, s. Hind. jhīl. A stagnant sheet of inundation; a mere or lagoon. Especially applied to the great sheets of remanent inundation in Bengal. In Eastern Bengal they are also called BHEEL (q.v.)

[1757.—"Towards five the guard waked me with notice that the Nawab would presently pass by to his palace of Mootee JEEL."—Holwell's Letter of Feb. 28, in Wheeler, Early Records, 250.]

The Jhīls of Silhet are vividly and most accurately described (though the word is not used) in the following passage:—

c. 1778.—"I shall not therefore be disbelieved when I say that in pointing my boat towards Sylhet I had recourse to my compass, the same as at sea, and steered a straight course through a lake not less than 100 miles in extent, occasionally passing through villages built on artificial mounds: but so scanty was the ground that each house had a canoe attached to it."—Hon. Robert Lindsay, in Lives of the Lindsays, iii. 166.

1824.—"At length we ... entered what might be called a sea of reeds. It was, in fact, a vast JEEL or marsh, whose tall rushes rise above the surface of the water, having depth enough for a very large vessel. We sailed briskly on, rustling like a greyhound in a field of corn."—Heber, i. 101.

1850.—"To the geologist the JHEELS and Sunderbunds are a most instructive region, as whatever may be the mean elevation of their waters, a permanent depression of 10 to 15 feet would submerge an immense tract."—Hooker's Himalayan Journals, ed. 1855, ii. 265.

1885.—"You attribute to me an act, the credit of which was due to Lieut. George Hutchinson, of the late Bengal Engineers.[146] That able officer, in company with the late Colonel Berkley, H.M. 32nd Regt., laid out the defences of the Alum Bagh camp, remarkable for its bold plan, which was so well devised that, with an apparently dangerous extent, it was defensible at every point by the small but ever ready force under Sir James Outram. A long interval ... was defended by a post of support called 'Moir's Picket' ... covered by a wide expanse of JHEEL, or lake, resulting from the rainy season. Foreseeing the probable drying up of the water, Lieut. Hutchinson, by a clever inspiration, marched all the transport elephants through and through the lake, and when the water disappeared, the dried clay-bed, pierced into a honey-combed surface of circular holes a foot in diameter and two or more feet deep, became a better protection against either cavalry or infantry than the water had been...."—Letter to Lt.-Col. P. R. Innes from F. M. Lord Napier of Magdāla, dd. April 15.

JEEL and BHEEL are both applied to the artificial lakes in Central India and Bundelkhand.

JEETUL, s. Hind. jītal. A very old Indian denomination of copper coin, now entirely obsolete. It long survived on the western coast, and the name was used by the Portuguese for one of their small copper coins in the forms ceitils and zoitoles. It is doubtful, however, if ceitil is the same word. At least there is a medieval Portuguese coin called ceitil and ceptil (see Fernandes, in Memorias da Academia Real das Sciencias de Lisboa, 2da Classe, 1856); this may have got confounded with the Indian JITAL. The jītal of the Delhi coinage of Alā-ud-dīn (c. 1300) was, according to Mr. E. Thomas's calculations, 1/64 of the silver tanga, the coin called in later days the rupee. It was therefore just the equivalent of our modern pice. But of course, like most modern denominations of coin, it has varied greatly.

c. 1193-4.—"According to Ḳuṭb-ud-Dīn's command, Nizam-ud-Dīn Mohammad, on his return, brought them [the two slaves] along with him to the capital, Dihli; and Malik Ḳuṭb-ud-Dīn purchased both the Turks for the sum of 100,000 JITALS."—Raverty, Ṭabaḳāṭ-i-Nāṣiri, p. 603.

c. 1290.—"In the same year ... there was dearth in Dehli, and grain rose to a JITAL per sír (see SEER)."—Ẓiáh-ud-dín Barní, in Elliot, iii. 146.

c. 1340.—"The dirhem sultānī is worth ⅓ of the dirhem shashtānī ... and is worth 3 fals, whilst the JĪTAL is worth 4 fals; and the dirhem hashtkānī, which is exactly the silver dirhem of Egypt and Syria, is worth 32 fals."—Shihābuddīn, in Notices et Extraits, xiii. 212.

1554.—In Sunda. "The cash (caixas) here go 120 to the tanga of silver; the which caixas are a copper money larger than CEITILS, and pierced in the middle, which they say have come from China for many years, and the whole place is full of them."—A. Nunes, 42.

c. 1590.—"For the purpose of calculation the dam is divided into 25 parts, each of which is called a JÉTAL. This imaginary division is only used by accountants."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 31.

1678.—"48 JUTTALS, 1 Pagod, an Imaginary Coin."—Fryer (at Surat), 206.

c. 1750-60.—"At Carwar 6 pices make the JUTTAL, and 48 JUTTALS a Pagoda."—Grose, i. 282.

JEHAUD, s. Ar. jihād, ['an effort, a striving']; then a sacred war of Musulmans against the infidel; which Sir Herbert Edwardes called, not very neatly, 'a crescentade.'

[c. 630 A.D.—"Make war upon such of those to whom the Scriptures have been given who believe not in God, or in the last day, and who forbid not that which God and his Prophet have forbidden, and who profess not the profession of the truth, until they pay tribute (jizyah) out of hand, and they be humbled."—Korān, Surah ix. 29.]

1880.—"When the Athenians invaded Ephesus, towards the end of the Peloponnesian War, Tissaphernes offered a mighty sacrifice at Artemis, and raised the people in a sort of JEHAD, or holy war, for her defence."—Sat. Review, July 17, 84_b_.

[1901.—"The matter has now assumed the aspect of a 'SCHAD,' or holy war against Christianity."—Times, April 4.]

JELAUBEE, s. Hind. jalebī, [which is apparently a corruption of the Ar. zalābiya, P. zalībiya]. A rich sweetmeat made of sugar and ghee, with a little flour, melted and trickled into a pan so as to form a kind of interlaced work, when baked.

[1870.—"The poison is said to have been given once in sweetmeats, JELABEES."—Chevers, Med. Jurisp. 178.]

JELLY, s. In South India this is applied to vitrified brick refuse used as metal for roads. [The Madras Gloss. gives it as a synonym for KUNKUR.] It would appear from a remark of C. P. Brown (MS. notes) to be Telugu zalli, Tam. shalli, which means properly 'shivers, bits, pieces.'

[1868.—"... anicuts in some instances coated over the crown with JELLY in chunam."—Nelson, Man. of Madura, Pt. v. 53.]

JELUM, n.p. The most westerly of the "Five Rivers" that give their name to the PUNJAB (q.v.), (among which the Indus itself is not usually included). Properly Jailam or Jīlam, now apparently written Jhīlam, and taking this name from a town on the right bank. The Jhilam is the Ὑδάσπης of Alexander's historians, a name corrupted from the Skt. Vitastā, which is more nearly represented by Ptolemy's Βιδάσπης. A still further (Prakritic) corruption of the same is Behat (see BEHUT).

1037.—"Here he (Mahmūd) fell ill, and remained sick for fourteen days, and got no better. So in a fit of repentance he forswore wine, and ordered his servants to throw all his supply ... into the JAILAM. ..."—Baihaḳī, in Elliot, ii. 139.

c. 1204.—"... in the height of the conflict, Shams-ud-dîn, in all his panoply, rode right into the water of the river JĪLAM ... and his warlike feats while in that water reached such a pitch that he was despatching those infidels from the height of the waters to the lowest depths of Hell ..."—Ṭabaḳāṭ, by Raverty, 604-5.

1856.—

"Hydaspes! often have thy waves run tuned To battle music, since the soldier King, The Macedonian, dipped his golden casque And swam thy swollen flood, until the time When Night the peace-maker, with pious hand, Unclasping her dark mantle, smoothed it soft O'er the pale faces of the brave who slept Cold in their clay, on Chillian's bloody field." The Banyan Tree.

JEMADAR, JEMAUTDAR, &c. Hind. from Ar.—P. jama'dar, jama' meaning 'an aggregate,' the word indicates generally, a leader of a body of individuals. [Some of the forms are as if from Ar.—P. jamā'at, 'an assemblage.'] Technically, in the Indian army, it is the title of the second rank of native officer in a company of sepoys, the Sūbadār (see SOUBADAR) being the first. In this sense the word dates from the reorganisation of the army in 1768. It is also applied to certain officers of police (under the dārogha), of the customs, and of other civil departments. And in larger domestic establishments there is often a jemadār, who is over the servants generally, or over the stables, camp service and orderlies. It is also an honorific title often used by the other household servants in addressing the bihishtī (see BHEESTY).

1752.—"The English battalion no sooner quitted Tritchinopoly than the regent set about accomplishing his scheme of surprising the City, and ... endeavoured to gain 500 of the Nabob's best peons with firelocks. The JEMAUTDARS, or captains of these troops, received his bribes and promised to join."—Orme, ed. 1803, i. 257.

1817.—"... Calliaud had commenced an intrigue with some of the JEMATDARS, or captains of the enemy's troops, when he received intelligence that the French had arrived at Trichinopoly."—Mill, iii. 175.

1824.—"'Abdullah' was a Mussulman convert of Mr. Corrie's, who had travelled in Persia with Sir Gore Ouseley, and accompanied him to England, from whence he was returning ... when the Bishop took him into his service as a 'JEMAUTDAR,' or head officer of the peons."—Editor's note to Heber, ed. 1844, i. 65.

[1826.—"The principal officers are called JUMMAHDARS, some of whom command five thousand horse."—Pandurang Hari, ed. 1873, i. 56.]

JENNYE, n.p. Hind. Janaī. The name of a great river in Bengal, which is in fact a portion of the course of the Brahmaputra (see BURRAMPOOTER), and the conditions of which are explained in the following passage written by one of the authors of this Glossary many years ago: "In Rennell's time, the Burrampooter, after issuing westward from the Assam valley, swept south-eastward, and forming with the Ganges a fluvial peninsula, entered the sea abreast of that river below Dacca. And so almost all English maps persist in representing it, though this eastern channel is now, unless in the rainy season, shallow and insignificant; the vast body of the Burrampooter cutting across the neck of the peninsula under the name of JENAI, and uniting with the Ganges near Pubna (about 150 miles N.E. of Calcutta), from which point the two rivers under the name of Pudda (Padda) flow on in mighty union to the sea." (Blackwood's Mag., March 1852, p. 338.)

The river is indicated as an offshoot of the Burrampooter in Rennell's Bengal Atlas (Map No. 6) under the name of JENNI, but it is not mentioned in his Memoir of the Map of Hindostan. The great change of the river's course was palpably imminent at the beginning of the last century; for Buchanan (c. 1809) says: "The river threatens to carry away all the vicinity of Dewangunj, and perhaps to force its way into the heart of Nator." (Eastern India, iii. 394; see also 377.) Nator or Nattore was the territory now called Rajshāhī District. The real direction of the change has been further south. The Janai is also called the Jamunā (see under JUMNA). Hooker calls it Jummal (?) noticing that the maps still led him to suppose the Burrampooter flowed 70 miles further east (see Him. Journals, ed. 1855, ii. 259).

JENNYRICKSHAW, s. Read Capt. Gill's description below. Giles states the word to be taken from the Japanese pronunciation of three characters, reading jin-riki-sha, signifying 'Man—Strength—Cart.' The term is therefore, observes our friend E. C. Baber, an exact equivalent of "Pullman-Car"! The article has been introduced into India, and is now in use at Simla and other hill-stations. [The invention of the vehicle is attributed to various people—to an Englishman known as "Public-spirited Smith" (8 ser. Notes and Queries, viii. 325); to native Japanese about 1868-70, or to an American named Goble, "half-cobbler and half-missionary." See Chamberlain, Things Japanese, 3rd ed. 236 seq.]

1876.—"A machine called a JINNYRICKSHAW is the usual public conveyance of Shanghai. This is an importation from Japan, and is admirably adapted for the flat country, where the roads are good, and coolie hire cheap.... In shape they are like a buggy, but very much smaller, with room inside for one person only. One coolie goes into the shafts and runs along at the rate of 6 miles an hour; if the distance is long, he is usually accompanied by a companion who runs behind, and they take it in turn to draw the vehicle."—W. Gill, River of Golden Sand, i. 10. See also p. 163.

1880.—"The Kuruma or JIN-RI-KI-SHA consists of a light perambulator body, an adjustable hood of oiled paper, a velvet or cloth lining and cushion, a well for parcels under the seat, two high slim wheels, and a pair of shafts connected by a bar at the ends."—Miss Bird, Japan, i. 18.

[1885.—"We ... got into RICKSHAWS to make an otherwise impossible descent to the theatre."—Lady Dufferin, Viceregal Life, 89.]

JEZYA, s. Ar. jizya. The poll-tax which the Musulman law imposes on subjects who are not Moslem.

[c. 630 A.D. See under JEHAUD.]

c. 1300.—"The Kázi replied ... 'No doctor but the great doctor (Hanifa) to whose school we belong, has assented to the imposition of JIZYA on Hindus. Doctors of other schools allow of no alternative but "Death or Islam."'"—Ẓiā-ud-dīn Barnī, in Elliot, iii. 184.

1683.—"Understand what custome ye English paid formerly, and compare ye difference between that and our last order for taking custome and JIDGEA. If they pay no more than they did formerly, they complain without occasion. If more, write what it is, and there shall be an abatement."—Vizier's Letter to Nabob, in Hedges, Diary, July 18; [Hak. Soc. i. 100].

1686.—"Books of accounts received from Dacca, with advice that it was reported at the Court there that the Poll-money or JUDGEEA lately ordered by the Mogul would be exacted of the English and Dutch.... Among the orders issued to Pattana Cossumbazar, and Dacca, instructions are given to the latter place not to pay the JUDGEEA or Poll-tax, if demanded."—Ft. St. Geo. Consns. (on Tour) Sept. 29 and Oct. 10; Notes and Extracts, No. i. p. 49.

1765.—"When the Hindoo Rajahs ... submitted to Tamarlane; it was on these capital stipulations: That ... the emperors should never impose the JESSERAH (or poll-tax) upon the Hindoos."—Holwell, Hist. Events, i. 37.

JHAUMP, s. A hurdle of and bamboo, used as a shutter or door. Hind. jhānp, Mahr. jhānpa; in connection with which there are verbs, Hind. jhānp-nā, jhāpnā, ḍhānpnā, 'to cover.' See jhoprā, s.v. AK; [but there seems to be no etymological connection].

JHOOM, s. jhūm. This is a word used on the eastern frontiers of Bengal for that kind of cultivation which is practised in the hill forests of India and Indo-China, under which a tract is cleared by fire, cultivated for a year or two, and then abandoned for another tract, where a like process is pursued. This is the Kumari (see COOMRY) of S.W. India, the Chena of Ceylon (see Emerson Tennent, ii. 463), the toung-gyan of Burma [Gazetteer, ii. 72, 757, the dahya of North India (Skt. dah, 'to burn'), ponam (Tam. pun, 'inferior'), or ponacaud (Mal. punakkātu, pun, 'inferior,' kātu, 'forest') of Malabar]. In the Philippine Islands it is known as gainges; it is practised in the Ardennes, under the name of sartage, and in Sweden under the name of svedjande (see Marsh, Earth as Modified by Human Action, 346).

[1800.—"In this hilly tract are a number of people ... who use a kind of cultivation called the Cotucadu, which a good deal resembles that which in the Eastern parts of Bengal is called JUMEA."—Buchanan, Mysore, ii. 177.]

1883.—"It is now many years since Government, seeing the waste of forest caused by JUMING, endeavoured to put a stop to the practice.... The people JUMED as before, regardless of orders."—Indian Agriculturist, Sept. (Calcutta).

1885.—"JUMING disputes often arose, one village against another, both desiring to JUM the same tract of jungle, and these cases were very troublesome to deal with. The JUMING season commences about the middle of May, and the air is then darkened by the smoke from the numerous clearings...." (Here follows an account of the process).—Lt.-Col. Lewin, A Fly on the Wheel, 348 seqq.

JIGGY-JIGGY, adv. Japanese equivalent for 'make haste!' The Chinese syllables chih-chih, given as the origin, mean 'straight, straight!' Qu. 'right ahead'? (Bp. Moule).

JILLMILL, s. Venetian shutters, or as they are called in Italy, persiane. The origin of the word is not clear. The Hind. word 'jhilmilā' seems to mean 'sparkling,' and to have been applied to some kind of gauze. Possibly this may have been used for blinds, and thence transferred to shutters. [So Platts in his H. Dict.] Or it may lave been an onomatopoeia, from the rattle of such shutters; or it may have been corrupted from a Port. word such as janella, 'a window.' All this is conjecture.

[1832.—"Besides the purdahs, the openings between the pillars have blinds neatly made of bamboo strips, wove together with coloured cords: these are called JHILLMUNS or cheeks" (see CHICK, A).—Mrs. Meer Hassan Ali, Observations, i. 306.]

1874.—"The front (of a Bengal house) is generally long, exhibiting a pillared verandah, or a row of French casements, and JILL-MILLED windows."—Calc. Review, No. cxvii. 207.

JOCOLE, s. We know not what this word is; perhaps 'toys'? [Mr. W. Foster writes: "On looking up the I.O. copy of the Ft. St. George Consultations for Nov. 22, 1703, from which Wheeler took the passage, I found that the word is plainly not JOCOLES, but JOCOLET, which is a not unusual form of CHOCOLATE." The N.E.D. s.v. Chocolate, gives as other forms jocolatte, jacolatt, jocalat.]

1703.—"... sent from the Patriarch to the Governor with a small present of JOCOLES, oil, and wines."—In Wheeler, ii. 32.

JOGEE, s. Hind. jogī. A Hindu ascetic; and sometimes a 'conjuror.' From Skt. yogīn, one who practises the yoga, a system of meditation combined with austerities, which is supposed to induce miraculous power over elementary matter. In fact the stuff which has of late been propagated in India by certain persons, under the names of theosophy and esoteric Buddhism, is essentially the doctrine of the Jogis.

1298.—"There is another class of people called CHUGHI who ... form a religious order devoted to the Idols. They are extremely long-lived, every man of them living to 150 or 200 years ... there are certain members of the Order who lead the most ascetic life in the world, going stark naked."—Marco Polo, 2nd ed. ii. 351.

1343.—"We cast anchor by a little island near the main, ANCHEDIVA (q.v.), where there was a temple, a grove, and a tank of water.... We found a JOGĪ leaning against the wall of a budkhāna or temple of idols" (respecting whom he tells remarkable stories).—Ibn Batuta, iv. 62-63, and see p. 275.

c. 1442.—"The Infidels are divided into a great number of classes, such as the Bramins, the JOGHIS and others."—Abdurrazzāk, in India in the XVth Cent., 17.

1498.—"They went and put in at Angediva ... there were good water-springs, and there was in the upper part of the island a tank built with stone, with very good water and much wood ... there were no inhabitants, only a beggar-man whom they call JOGUEDES."—Correa, by Lord Stanley, 239. Compare Ibn Batuta above. After 150 years, tank, grove, and JOGI just as they were!

1510.—"The King of the IOGHE is a man of great dignity, and has about 30,000 people, and he is a pagan, he and all his subjects; and by the pagan Kings he and his people are considered to be saints, on account of their lives, which you shall hear ..."—Varthema, p. 111. Perhaps the chief of the Gorakhnātha Gosains, who were once very numerous on the West Coast, and have still a settlement at Kadri, near Mangalore. See P. della Valle's notice below.

1516.—"And many of them noble and respectable people, not to be subject to the Moors, go out of the Kingdom, and take the habit of poverty, wandering the world ... they carry very heavy chains round their necks and waists, and legs; and they smear all their bodies and faces with ashes.... These people are commonly called JOGUES, and in their own speech they are called Zoame (see SWAMY) which means Servant of God.... These JOGUES eat all meats, and do not observe any idolatry."—Barbosa, 99-100.

1553.—"Much of the general fear that affected the inhabitants of that city (Goa before its capture) proceeded from a Gentoo, of Bengal by nation, who went about in the habit of a JOGUE, which is the straitest sect of their Religion ... saying that the City would speedily have a new Lord, and would be inhabited by a strange people, contrary to the will of the natives."—De Barros, Dec. II. liv. v. cap. 3.

" "For this reason the place (Adam's Peak) is so famous among all the Gentiledom of the East yonder, that they resort thither as pilgrims from more than 1000 leagues off, and chiefly those whom they call JÓGUES, who are as men who have abandoned the world and dedicated themselves to God, and make great pilgrimages to visit the Temples consecrated to him."—Ibid. Dec. III. liv. ii. cap. 1.

1563.—"... to make them fight, like the cobras de capello which the JOGUES carry about asking alms of the people, and these JOGUES are certain heathen (Gentios) who go begging all about the country, powdered all over with ashes, and venerated by all the poor heathen, and by some of the Moors also...."—Garcia, f. 156_v_, 157.

[1567.—"JOGUES." See under CASIS.

[c. 1610.—"The Gentiles have also their Abedalles (Abd-Allah), which are like to our hermits, and are called JOGUIES."—Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. i. 343.]

1624.—"Finally I went to see the King of the JOGIS (Gioghi) where he dwelt at that time, under the shade of a cottage, and I found him roughly occupied in his affairs as a man of the field and husbandman ... they told me his name was Batinata, and that the hermitage and the place generally was called Cadira (Kadri)."—P. della Valle, ii. 724; [Hak. Soc. ii. 350, and see i. 37, 75].

[1667.—"I allude particularly to the people called JAUGUIS, a name which signifies 'united to God.'"—Bernier, ed. Constable, 316.]

1673.—"Near the Gate in a Choultry sate more than Forty naked JOUGIES, or men united to God, covered with Ashes and pleited Turbats of their own Hair."—Fryer, 160.

1727.—"There is another sort called JOUGIES, who ... go naked except a bit of Cloth about their Loyns, and some deny themselves even that, delighting in Nastiness, and an holy Obscenity, with a great Show of Sanctity."—A. Hamilton, i. 152; [ed. 1744, i. 153].

1809.—

"Fate work'd its own the while. A band Of YOGUEES, as they roamed the land Seeking a spouse for Jaga-Naut their God, Stray'd to this solitary glade." Curse of Kehama, xiii. 16.

c. 1812.—"Scarcely ... were we seated when behold, there poured into the space before us, not only all the YOGEES, Fakeers, and rogues of that description ... but the King of the Beggars himself, wearing his peculiar badge."—Mrs. Sherwood, (describing a visit to Henry Martyn at Cawnpore), Autobiog., 415.

"Apnē gānw kā JOGĪ ān gānw kā sidh." Hind. proverb: "The man who is a JOGI in his own village is a deity in another."—Quoted by Elliot, ii. 207.

JOHN COMPANY, n.p. An old personification of the East India Company, by the natives often taken seriously, and so used, in former days. The term COMPANY is still applied in Sumatra by natives to the existing (Dutch) Government (see H. O. Forbes, Naturalist's Wanderings, 1885, p. 204). [Dohāī COMPANY Bahādur kī is still a common form of native appeal for justice, and COMPANY Bāgh is the usual phrase for the public garden of a station. It has been suggested, but apparently without real reason, that the phrase is a corruption of COMPANY JAHĀN, "which has a fine sounding smack about it, recalling Shāh Jehān and Jehāngīr, and the golden age of the Moguls" (G. A. Sala, quoted in Notes and Queries, 8 ser. ii. 37). And Sir G. Birdwood writes: "The earliest coins minted by the English in India were of copper, stamped with a figure of an irradiated lingam, the phallic 'Roi Soleil.' The mintage of this coin is unknown (? Madras), but without doubt it must have served to ingratiate us with the natives of the country, and may have given origin to their personification of the Company under the potent title of KUMPANI JEHAN, which, in English mouths, became 'John Company'" (Report on Old Records, 222, note).]

[1784.—"Further, I knew that as simple Hottentots and Indians could form no idea of the Dutch Company and its government and constitution, the Dutch in India had given out that this was one mighty ruling prince who was called JAN or JOHN, with the surname Company, which also procured for them more reverence than if they could have actually made the people understand that they were, in fact, ruled by a company of merchants."—Andreas Spurrmann, Travels to the Cape of Good Hope, the South-Polar Lands, and round the World, p. 347; see 9 ser. Notes and Queries, vii. 34.]

1803.—(The Nawab) "much amused me by the account he gave of the manner in which my arrival was announced to him.... 'Lord Sahab Ka bhànja, Company ki nawasa teshrìf laià'; literally translated, 'The Lord's sister's son, and the grandson of the COMPANY, has arrived.'"—Lord Valentia, i. 137.

1808.—"However the business is pleasant now, consisting principally of orders to countermand military operations, and preparations to save JOHNNY COMPANY'S cash."—Lord Minto in India, 184.

1818-19.—"In England the ruling power is possessed by two parties, one the King, who is Lord of the State, and the other the Honourable COMPANY. The former governs his own country; and the latter, though only subjects, exceed the King in power, and are the directors of mercantile affairs."—Sadāsukh, in Elliot, viii. 411.

1826.—"He said that according to some accounts, he had heard the Company was an old Englishwoman ... then again he told me that some of the Topee wallas say 'JOHN COMPANY,' and he knew that John was a man's name, for his master was called John Brice, but he could not say to a certainty whether 'Company' was a man's or a woman's name."—Pandurang Hari, 60; [ed. 1873, i. 83, in a note to which the phrase is said to be a corruption of Joint Company].

1836.—"The jargon that the English speak to the natives is most absurd. I call it 'JOHN COMPANY'S English,' which rather affronts Mrs. Staunton."—Letters from Madras, 42.

1852.—"JOHN COMPANY, whatever may be his faults, is infinitely better than Downing Street. If India were made over to the Colonial Office, I should not think it worth three years' purchase."—Mem. Col. Mountain, 293.

1888.—"It fares with them as with the sceptics once mentioned by a South-Indian villager to a Government official. Some men had been now and then known, he said, to express doubt if there were any such person as JOHN COMPANY; but of such it was observed that something bad soon happened to them."—Sat. Review, Feb. 14, p. 220.

JOMPON, s. Hind. jānpān, japān, [which are not to be found in Platt's Dict.]. A kind of sedan, or portable chair used chiefly by the ladies at the Hill Sanitaria of Upper India. It is carried by two pairs of men (who are called Jomponnies, i.e. jānpānī or japānī), each pair bearing on their shoulders a short bar from which the shafts of the chair are slung. There is some perplexity as to the origin of the word. For we find in Crawfurd's Malay Dict. "Jampana (Jav. Jampona), a kind of litter." Also the Javanese Dict. of P. Jansz (1876) gives: "Djempånå—dragstoel (i.e. portable chair), or sedan of a person of rank." [Klinkert has jempana, djempana, sempana as a State sedan-chair, and he connects sempana with Skt. sam-panna, 'that which has turned out well, fortunate.' Wilkinson has: "jempana, Skt.? a kind of State carriage or sedan for ladies of the court."] The word cannot, however, have been introduced into India by the officers who served in Java (1811-15), for its use is much older in the Himālaya, as may be seen from the quotation from P. Desideri.

It seems just possible that the name may indicate the thing to have been borrowed from Japan. But the fact that dpyāṅ means 'hang' in Tibetan may indicate another origin.

Wilson, however, has the following: "Jhámpán, Bengali. A stage on which snake-catchers and other juggling vagabonds exhibit; a kind of sedan used by travellers in the Himalaya, written Jámpaun (?)." [Both Platts and Fallon give the word jhappān as Hind.; the former does not attempt a derivation; the latter gives Hind. jhānp, 'a cover,' and this on the whole seems to be the most probable etymology. It may have been originally in India, as it is now in the Straits, a closed litter for ladies of rank, and the word may have become appropriated to the open conveyance in which European ladies are carried.]

1716.—"The roads are nowhere practicable for a horseman, or for a JAMPAN, a sort of palankin."—Letter of P. Ipolito Desideri, dated April 10, in Lettres Edif. xv. 184.

1783.—(After a description) "... by these central poles the litter, or as it is here called, the SAMPAN, is supported on the shoulders of four men."—Forster's Journey, ed. 1808, ii. 3.

[1822.—"The CHUMPAUN, or as it is more frequently called, the CHUMPALA, is the usual vehicle in which persons of distinction, especially females, are carried...."—Lloyd, Gerard, Narr. i. 105.

[1842.—"... a conveyance called a JAUMPAUN, which is like a short palankeen, with an arched top, slung on three poles (like what is called a TONJON in India)...."—Elphinstone, Caubul, ed. 1842, i. 137.

[1849.—"A JHAPPAN is a kind of arm chair with a canopy and curtains; the canopy, &c., can be taken off."—Mrs. Mackenzie, Life in the Mission, ii. 103.]

1879.—"The gondola of Simla is the 'JAMPAN' or 'jampot,' as it is sometimes called, on the same linguistic principle ... as that which converts asparagus into sparrow-grass.... Every lady on the hills keeps her JAMPAN and JAMPANEES ... just as in the plains she keeps her carriage and footmen."—Letter in Times, Aug. 17.

JOOL, JHOOL, s. Hind. jhūl, supposed by Shakespear (no doubt correctly) to be a corrupt form of the Ar. jull, having much the same meaning; [but Platts takes it from jhūlnā, 'to dangle']. Housings, body clothing of a horse, elephant, or other domesticated animal; often a quilt, used as such. In colloquial use all over India. The modern Arabs use the plur. jilāl as a singular. This Dozy defines as "couverture en laine plus ou moins ornée de dessins, très large, très chaude et enveloppant le poitrail et la croupe du cheval" (exactly the Indian jhūl)—also "ornement de soie qu'on étend sur la croupe des chevaux aux jours de fête."

[1819.—"Dr. Duncan ... took the JHOOL, or broadcloth housing from the elephant...."—Tod. Personal Narr. in Annals, Calcutta reprint, i. 715.]

1880.—"Horse JHOOLS, &c., at shortest notice."—Advt. in Madras Mail, Feb. 13.

JOOLA, s. Hind. jhūlā. The ordinary meaning of the word is 'a swing'; but in the Himālaya it is specifically applied to the rude suspension bridges used there.

[1812.—"There are several kinds of bridges constructed for the passage of strong currents and rivers, but the most common are the Sángha and JHULA" (a description of both follows).—Asiat. Res. xi. 475.]

1830.—"Our chief object in descending to the Sutlej was to swing on a JOOLAH bridge. The bridge consists of 7 grass ropes, about twice the thickness of your thumb, tied to a single post on either bank. A piece of the hollowed trunk of a tree, half a yard long, slips upon these ropes, and from this 4 loops from the same grass rope depend. The passenger hangs in the loops, placing a couple of ropes under each thigh, and holds on by pegs in the block over his head; the signal is given, and he is drawn over by an eighth rope."—Mem. of Col. Mountain, 114.

JOSS, s. An idol. This is a corruption of the Portuguese Deos, 'God,' first taken up in the 'Pidgin' language of the Chinese ports from the Portuguese, and then adopted from that jargon by Europeans as if they had got hold of a Chinese word. [See CHIN-CHIN.]

1659.—"But the Devil (whom the Chinese commonly called JOOSJE) is a mighty and powerful Prince of the World."—Walter Schulz, 17.

" "In a four-cornered cabinet in their dwelling-rooms, they have, as it were, an altar, and thereon an image ... this they call JOSIN."—Saar, ed. 1672, p. 27.

1677.—"All the Sinese keep a limning of the Devil in their houses.... They paint him with two horns on his head, and commonly call him JOSIE (Joosje)."—Gerret Vermeulen, Oost Indische Voyagie, 33.

1711.—"I know but little of their Religion, more than that every Man has a small JOSS or God in his own House."—Lockyer, 181.

1727.—"Their JOSSES or Demi-gods some of human shape, some of monstrous Figure."—A. Hamilton, ii. 266; [ed. 1744, ii. 265].

c. 1790.—

"Down with dukes, earls, and lords, those pagan JOSSES, False gods! away with stars and strings and crosses." Peter Pindar, Ode to Kien Long.

1798.—"The images which the Chinese worship are called JOOSTJE by the Dutch, and JOSS by the English seamen. The latter is evidently a corruption of the former, which being a Dutch nickname for the devil, was probably given to these idols by the Dutch who first saw them."—Stavorinus, E.T. i. 173.

This is of course quite wrong.

JOSS-HOUSE, s. An idol temple in China or Japan. From JOSS, as explained in the last article.

1750-52.—"The sailors, and even some books of voyages ... call the pagodas YOSS-HOUSES, for on enquiring of a Chinese for the name of the idol, he answers Grande YOSS, instead of Gran Dios."—Olof. Toreen, 232.

1760-1810.—"On the 8th, 18th, and 28th day of the Moon those foreign barbarians may visit the Flower Gardens, and the Honam JOSS-HOUSE, but not in droves of over ten at a time."—'8 Regulations' at Canton, from The Fankwae at Canton (1882), p. 29.

1840.—"Every town, every village, it is true, abounds with JOSS-HOUSES, upon which large sums of money have been spent."—Mem. Col. Mountain, 186.

1876.—"... the fantastic gables and tawdry ornaments of a large JOSS-HOUSE, or temple."—Fortnightly Review, No. cliii. 222.

1876:—

"One Tim Wang he makee-tlavel, Makee stop one night in JOSS-HOUSE." Leland, Pidgin-English Sing-Song, p. 42.

Thus also in "pidgin," JOSS-HOUSE-man or JOSS-pidgin-man is a priest, or a missionary.

JOSTICK, JOSS-STICK, s. A stick of fragrant tinder (powdered costus, sandalwood, &c.) used by the Chinese as incense in their temples, and formerly exported for use as cigar-lights. The name appears to be from the temple use. (See PUTCHOCK.)

1876.—"Burnee JOSS-STICK, talkee plitty."—Leland, Pidgin-English Sing-Song, p. 43.

1879.—"There is a recess outside each shop, and at dusk the JOSS-STICKS burning in these fill the city with the fragrance of incense."—Miss Bird, Golden Chersonese, 49.

JOW, s. Hind. jhāū. The name is applied to various species of the shrubby tamarisk which abound on the low alluvials of Indian rivers, and are useful in many ways, for rough basket-making and the like. It is the usual material for gabions and fascines in Indian siege-operations.

[c. 1809.—"... by the natives it is called JHAU; but this name is generic, and is applied not only to another species of Tamarisk, but to the Casuarina of Bengal, and to the cone-bearing plants that have been introduced by Europeans."—Buchanan-Hamilton, Eastern India, iii. 597.

[1840.—"... on the opposite JHOW, or bastard tamarisk jungle ... a native ... had been attacked by a tiger...."—Davidson, Travels, ii. 326.]

JOWAULLA MOOKHEE, n.p. Skt.—Hind. Jwālā-mukhī, 'flame-mouthed'; a generic name for quasi-volcanic phenomena, but particularly applied to a place in the Kangra district of the Punjab mountain country, near the Biās River, where jets of gas issue from the ground and are kept constantly burning. There is a shrine of Devī, and it is a place of pilgrimage famous all over the Himālaya as well as in the plains of India. The famous fire-jets at Baku are sometimes visited by more adventurous Indian pilgrims, and known as the Great JWĀLĀ-MUKHĪ. The author of the following passage was evidently ignorant of the phenomenon worshipped, though the name indicates its nature.

c. 1360.—"Sultán Fíroz ... marched with his army towards Nagarkot (see NUGGURCOTE) ... the idol JWÁLÁ-MUKHÍ, much worshipped by the infidels, was situated on the road to Nagarkot.... Some of the infidels have reported that Sultán Fíroz went specially to see this idol, and held a golden umbrella over its head. But ... the infidels slandered the Sultán.... Other infidels said that Sultán Muhammad Sháh bin Tughlik Sháh held an umbrella over this same idol, but this also is a lie...."—Shams-i-Siráj Afíf, in Elliot, iii. 318.

1616.—"... a place called IALLA MOKEE, where out of cold Springs and hard Rocks, there are daily to be seene incessant Eruptions of Fire, before which the Idolatrous people fall doune and worship."—Terry, in Purchas, ii. 1467.

[c. 1617.—In Sir T. Roe's Map, "JALLAMAKEE, the Pilgrimage of the Banians."—Hak. Soc. ii. 535.]

1783.—"At TAULLAH MHOKEE (sic) a small volcanic fire issues from the side of a mountain, on which the Hindoos have raised a temple that has long been of celebrity, and favourite resort among the people of the Punjab."—G. Forster's Journey, ed. 1798, i. 308.

1799.—"Prason Poory afterwards travelled ... to the Maha or Buree (i.e. larger) JOWALLA MOOKHI or Juâla Mûchi, terms that mean a 'Flaming Mouth,' as being a spot in the neighbourhood of Bakee (Baku) on the west side of the (Caspian) Sea ... whence fire issues; a circumstance that has rendered it of great veneration with the Hindus."—Jonathan Duncan, in As. Res. v. 41.

JOWAUR, JOWARREE, s. Hind. jawār, juār, [Skt. yava-prakāra or akāra, 'of the nature of barley';] Sorghum vulgare, Pers. (Holcus sorghum, L.) one of the best and most frequently grown of the tall millets of southern countries. It is grown nearly all over India in the unflooded tracts; it is sown about July and reaped in November. The reedy stems are 8 to 12 feet high. It is the cholam of the Tamil regions. The stalks are KIRBEE. The Ar. dura or dhura is perhaps the same word ultimately as jawār; for the old Semitic name is dokn, from the smoky aspect of the grain. It is an odd instance of the looseness which used to pervade dictionaries and glossaries that R. Drummond (Illus. of the Gram. Parts of Guzerattee, &c., Bombay, 1808) calls "JOOAR, a kind of pulse, the food of the common people."

[c. 1590.—In Khandesh "JOWÁRI is chiefly cultivated of which, in some places, there are three crops in a year, and its stalk is so delicate and pleasant to the taste that it is regarded in the light of a fruit."—Āīn, ed. Jarrett, ii. 223.]

1760.—"En suite mauvais chemin sur des levées faites de boue dans des quarrés de JOUARI et des champs de Nelis (see NELLY) remplis d'eau."—Anquetil du Perron, I. ccclxxxiii.

1800.—"... My industrious followers must live either upon JOWARRY, of which there is an abundance everywhere, or they must be more industrious in procuring rice for themselves."—Wellington, i. 175.

1813.—Forbes calls it "JUARREE or cush-cush" (?). [See CUSCUS.]—Or. Mem. ii. 406; [2nd ed. ii. 35, and i. 23].

1819.—"In 1797-8 JOIWAREE sold in the Muchoo Kaunta at six rupees per culsee (see CULSEY) of 24 maunds."—Macmurdo, in Tr. Lit. Soc. Bo. i. 287.

[1826.—"And the sabre began to cut away upon them as if they were a field of JOANEE (standing corn)."—Pandurang Hari, ed. 1873 i. 66.]

JOY, s. This seems from the quotation to have been used on the west coast for jewel (Port. joia).

1810.—"The vanity of parents sometimes leads them to dress their children, even while infants, in this manner, which affords a temptation ... to murder these helpless creatures for the sake of their ornaments or JOYS."—Maria Graham, 3.

JUBTEE, JUPTEE, &c., s. Guz. japtī, &c. Corrupt forms of zabtī. ["Watan-zabtī, or -japtī, Mahr., Produce of lands sequestered by the State, an item of revenue; in Guzerat the lands once exempt, now subject to assessment" (Wilson).] (See ZUBT.)

1808.—"The Sindias as Sovereigns of Broach used to take the revenues of Moojmooadars and Desoys (see DESSAYE) of that district every third year, amounting to Rs. 58,390, and called the periodical confiscation JUPTEE."—R. Drummond. [Majmūadār "in Guzerat the title given to the keepers of the pargana revenue records, who have held the office as a hereditary right since the settlement of Todar Mal, and are paid by fees charged on the villages." (Wilson)].

JUDEA, ODIA, &c., n.p. These names are often given in old writers to the city of Ayuthia, or Ayodhya, or Yuthia (so called apparently after the Hindu city of Rāma, Ayodhya, which we now call OUDH), which was the capital of Siam from the 14th century down to about 1767, when it was destroyed by the Burmese, and the Siamese royal residence was transferred to Bangkock [see BANCOCK.]

1522.—"All these cities are constructed like ours, and are subject to the King of Siam, who is named Siri Zacabedera, and who inhabits IUDIA."—Pigafetta, Hak. Soc. 156.

c. 1546.—"The capitall City of all this Empire is ODIAA, whereof I haue spoken heretofore: it is fortified with walls of brick and mortar, and contains, according to some, foure hundred thousand fires, whereof an hundred thousand are strangers of divers countries."—Pinto, in Cogan's E.T. p. 285; orig. cap. clxxxix.

1553.—"For the Realm is great, and its Cities and Towns very populous; insomuch that the city HUDIA alone, which is the capital of the Kingdom of Siam (Sião), and the residence of the King, furnishes 50,000 men of its own."—Barros, III. ii. 5.

1614.—"As regards the size of the City of ODIA ... it may be guessed by an experiment made by a curious engineer with whom we communicated on the subject. He says that ... he embarked in one of the native boats, small, and very light, with the determination to go all round the City (which is entirely compassed by water), and that he started one day from the Portuguese settlement, at dawn, and when he got back it was already far on in the night, and he affirmed that by his calculation he had gone more than 8 leagues."—Couto, VI. vii. 9.

1617.—"The merchants of the country of LAN JOHN, a place joining to the country of Jangama (see JANGOMAY) arrived at 'the city of JUDEA' before Eaton's coming away from thence, and brought great store of merchandize."—Sainsbury, ii. 90.

" "1 (letter) from Mr. Benjamyn Farry in JUDEA, at Syam."—Cocks's Diary, Hak. Soc. i. 272.

[1639.—"The chief of the Kingdom is IUDIA by some called ODIA ... the city of IUDIA, the ordinary Residence of the Court is seated on the Menam."—Mandelslo, Travels, E.T. ii. 122.

[1693.—"As for the City of Siam, the Siamese do call it SI-YO-THI-YA, the o of the syllable yo being closer than our (French) Diphthong au."—La Loubère, Siam, E.T. i. 7.]

1727.—"... all are sent to the City of Siam or ODIA for the King's Use.... The City stands on an Island in the River Memnon, which by Turnings and Windings, makes the distance from the Bar about 50 Leagues."—A. Hamilton, ii. 160; [ed. 1744].

[1774.—"AYUTTAYA with its districts Dvaravati, YODAYA and Kamanpaik."—Insc. in Ind. Antiq. xxii. 4.

[1827.—"The powerful Lord ... who dwells over every head in the city of the sacred and great kingdom of SI-A-YOO-THA-YA."—Treaty between E.I.C. and King of Siam, in Wilson, Documents of the Burmese War, App. lxxvii.]

JUGBOOLAK, s. Marine Hind. for jack-block (Roebuck).

JUGGURNAUT, n.p. A corruption of the Skt. Jagannātha, 'Lord of the Universe,' a name of Krishṇa worshipped as Vishṇu at the famous shrine of Pūrī in Orissa. The image so called is an amorphous idol, much like those worshipped in some of the South Sea Islands, and it has been plausibly suggested (we believe first by Gen. Cunningham) that it was in reality a Buddhist symbol, which has been adopted as an object of Brahmanical worship, and made to serve as the image of a god. The idol was, and is, annually dragged forth in procession on a monstrous car, and as masses of excited pilgrims crowded round to drag or accompany it, accidents occurred. Occasionally also persons, sometimes sufferers from painful disease, cast themselves before the advancing wheels. The testimony of Mr. Stirling, who was for some years Collector of Orissa in the second decade of the last century, and that of Sir W. W. Hunter, who states that he had gone through the MS. archives of the province since it became British, show that the popular impression in regard to the continued frequency of immolations on these occasions—a belief that has made Juggurnaut a standing metaphor—was greatly exaggerated. The belief indeed in the custom of such immolation had existed for centuries, and the rehearsal of these or other cognate religious suicides at one or other of the great temples of the Peninsula, founded partly on fact, and partly on popular report, finds a place in almost every old narrative relating to India. The really great mortality from hardship, exhaustion, and epidemic disease which frequently ravaged the crowds of pilgrims on such occasions, doubtless aided in keeping up the popular impressions in connection with the Juggurnaut festival.

[1311.—"JAGNÁR." See under MADURA.]

c. 1321.—"Annually on the recurrence of the day when that idol was made, the folk of the country come and take it down, and put it on a fine chariot; and then the King and Queen, and the whole body of the people, join together and draw it forth from the church with loud singing of songs, and all kinds of music ... and many pilgrims who have come to this feast cast themselves under the chariot, so that its wheels may go over them, saying that they desire to die for their god. And the car passes over them, and crushes them, and cuts them in sunder, and so they perish on the spot."—Friar Odoric, in Cathay, &c. i. 83.

c. 1430.—"In Bizenegalia (see BISNAGAR) also, at a certain time of the year, this idol is carried through the city, placed between two chariots ... accompanied by a great concourse of people. Many, carried away by the fervour of their faith, cast themselves on the ground before the wheels, in order that they may be crushed to death,—a mode of death which they say is very acceptable to their god."—N. Conti, in India in XVth Cent., 28.

c. 1581.—"All for devotion attach themselves to the trace of the car, which is drawn in this manner by a vast number of people ... and on the annual feast day of the Pagod this car is dragged by crowds of people through certain parts of the city (Negapatam), some of whom from devotion, or the desire to be thought to make a devoted end, cast themselves down under the wheels of the cars, and so perish, remaining all ground and crushed by the said cars."—Gasparo Balbi, f. 84. The preceding passages refer to scenes in the south of the Peninsula.

c. 1590.—"In the town of Pursotem on the banks of the sea stands the temple of JAGNAUT, near to which are the images of Kishen, his brother, and their sister, made of Sandal-wood, which are said to be 4,000 years old.... The Brahmins ... at certain times carry the image in procession upon a carriage of sixteen wheels, which in the Hindooee language is called Rahth (see RUT); and they believe that whoever assists in drawing it along obtains remission of all his sins."—Gladwin's Ayeen, ii. 13-15; [ed. Jarrett, ii. 127].

[1616.—"The chief city called JEKANAT."—Sir T. Roe, Hak. Soc. ii. 538.]

1632.—"Vnto this Pagod or house of Sathen ... doe belong 9,000 Brammines or Priests, which doe dayly offer sacrifice vnto their great God IAGGARNAT, from which Idoll the City is so called.... And when it (the chariot of Iaggarnat) is going along the city, there are many that will offer themselves a sacrifice to this Idoll, and desperately lye downe on the ground, that the Chariott wheeles may runne over them, whereby they are killed outright; some get broken armes, some broken legges, so that many of them are destroyed, and by this meanes they thinke to merit Heauen."—W. Bruton, in Hakl. v. 57.

1667.—"In the town of JAGANNAT, which is seated upon the Gulf of Bengala, and where is that famous Temple of the Idol of the same name, there is yearly celebrated a certain Feast.... The first day that they shew this Idol with Ceremony in the Temple, the Crowd is usually so great to see it, that there is not a year, but some of those poor Pilgrims, that come afar off, tired and harassed, are suffocated there; all the people blessing them for having been so happy.... And when this Hellish Triumphant Chariot marcheth, there are found (which is no Fable) persons so foolishly credulous and superstitious as to throw themselves with their bellies under those large and heavy wheels, which bruise them to death...."—Bernier, a Letter to Mr. Chapelain, in Eng. ed. 1684, 97; [ed. Constable, 304 seq.].

[1669-79.—"In that great and Sumptuous Diabolicall Pagod, there Standeth theere gretest God JN^O. GERNAET, whence ye Pagod receued that name alsoe."—MS. Asia, &c., by T. B. f. 12. Col. Temple adds: "Throughout the whole MS. Jagannāth is repeatedly called Jn^o. Gernaet, which obviously stands for the common transposition Janganāth.]

1682.—"... We lay by last night till 10 o'clock this morning, ye Captain being desirous to see ye JAGERNOT Pagodas for his better satisfaction...."—Hedges, Diary, July 16; [Hak. Soc. i. 30].

1727.—"His (JAGARYNAT'S) Effigy is often carried abroad in Procession, mounted on a Coach four stories high ... they fasten small Ropes to the Cable, two or three Fathoms long, so that upwards of 2,000 People have room enough to draw the Coach, and some old Zealots, as it passes through the Street, fall flat on the Ground, to have the Honour to be crushed to Pieces by the Coach Wheels."—A. Hamilton, i. 387; [ed. 1744].

1809.—

"A thousand pilgrims strain Arm, shoulder, breast, and thigh, with might and main, To drag that sacred wain, And scarce can draw along the enormous load. Prone fall the frantic votaries on the road, And calling on the God Their self-devoted bodies there they lay To pave his chariot way. On JAGA-NAUT they call, The ponderous car rolls on, and crushes all, Through flesh and bones it ploughs its dreadful path. Groans rise unheard; the dying cry. And death, and agony Are trodden under foot by yon mad throng, Who follow close and thrust the deadly wheels along." Curse of Kehama, xiv. 5.

1814.—"The sight here beggars all description. Though JUGGERNAUT made some progress on the 19th, and has travelled daily ever since, he has not yet reached the place of his destination. His brother is ahead of him, and the lady in the rear. One woman has devoted herself under the wheels, and a shocking sight it was. Another also intended to devote herself, missed the wheels with her body, and had her arm broken. Three people lost their lives in the crowd."—In Asiatic Journal—quoted in Beveridge, Hist. of India, ii. 54, without exacter reference.

c. 1818.—"That excess of fanaticism which formerly prompted the pilgrims to court death by throwing themselves in crowds under the wheels of the car of JAGANNÁTH has happily long ceased to actuate the worshippers of the present day. During 4 years that I have witnessed the ceremony, three cases only of this revolting species of immolation have occurred, one of which I may observe is doubtful, and should probably be ascribed to accident; in the others the victims had long been suffering from some excruciating complaints, and chose this method of ridding themselves of the burthen of life in preference to other modes of suicide so prevalent with the lower orders under similar circumstances."—A. Stirling, in As. Res. xv. 324.

1827.—March 28th in this year, Mr. Poynder, in the E. I. Court of Proprietors, stated that "about the year 1790 no fewer than 28 Hindus were crushed to death at Ishera on the Ganges, under the wheels of JUGGURNAUT."—As. Journal, 1821, vol. xxiii. 702.

[1864.—"On the 7th July 1864, the editor of the Friend of India mentions that, a few days previously, he had seen, near Serampore, two persons crushed to death, and another frightfully lacerated, having thrown themselves under the wheels of a car during the Rath Jatra festival. It was afterwards stated that this occurrence was accidental."—Chevers, Ind. Med. Jurispr. 665.]

1871.—"... poor Johnny Tetterby staggering under his Moloch of an infant, the JUGGERNAUT that crushed all his enjoyments."—Forster's Life of Dickens, ii. 415.

1876.—"Le monde en marchant n'a pas beaucoup plus de souci de ce qu'il écrase que le char de l'idole de JAGARNATA."—E. Renan, in Revue des Deux Mondes, 3^e Série, xviii. p. 504.

JULIBDAR, s. Pers. jilaudār, from jilau, the string attached to the bridle by which a horse is led, the servant who leads a horse, also called janībahdār, janībahkash. In the time of Hedges the word must have been commonly used in Bengal, but it is now quite obsolete.

[c. 1590.—"For some time it was a rule that, whenever he (Akbar) rode out on a kháçah horse, a rupee should be given, viz., one dám to the Átbegi, two to the JILAUDÁR...."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 142. (And see under PYKE.)]

1673.—"In the heart of this Square is raised a place as large as a Mountebank's Stage, where the GELABDAR, or Master Muliteer, with his prime Passengers or Servants, have an opportunity to view the whole Caphala."—Fryer, 341.

1683.—"Your JYLIBDAR, after he had received his letter would not stay for the Gen^{ll}, but stood upon departure."—Hedges, Diary, Sept. 15; [Hak. Soc. i. 112].

" "We admire what made you send peons to force our GYLLIBDAR back to your Factory, after he had gone 12 cosses on his way, and dismisse him again without any reason for it."—Hedges, Diary, Sept. 26; [Hak. Soc. i. 120].

1754.—"100 GILODAR; those who are charged with the direction of the couriers and their horses."—Hanway's Travels, i. 171; 252.

[1812.—"I have often admired the courage and dexterity with which the Persian JELOWDARS or grooms throw themselves into the thickest engagement of angry horses."—Morier, Journey through Persia, 63 seq.]

1880.—"It would make a good picture, the surroundings of camels, horses, donkeys, and men.... Pascal and Remise cooking for me; the JELLAODARS, enveloped in felt coats, smoking their kalliúns, amid the half-light of fast fading day...."—MS. Journal in Persia of Capt. W. Gill, R.E.

JUMBEEA, s. Ar. janbiya, probably from janb, 'the side'; a kind of dagger worn in the girdle, so as to be drawn across the body. It is usually in form slightly curved. Sir R. Burton (Camões, Commentary, 413) identifies it with the agomia and gomio of the quotations below, and refers to a sketch in his Pilgrimage, but this we cannot find, [it is in the Memorial ed. i. 236], though the jambiyah is several times mentioned, e.g. i. 347, iii. 72. The term occurs repeatedly in Mr. Egerton's catalogue of arms in the India Museum. JANBWA occurs as the name of a dagger in the Āīn (orig. i. 119); why Blochmann in his translation [i. 110] spells it jhanbwah we do not know. See also Dozy and Eng. s.v. jambette. It seems very doubtful if the latter French word has anything to do with the Arabic word.

c. 1328.—"Takī-ud-dīn refused roughly and pushed him away. Then the maimed man drew a dagger (khanjar) such as is called in that country JANBIYA, and gave him a mortal wound."—Ibn Batuta, i. 534.

1498.—"The Moors had erected palisades of great thickness, with thick planking, and fastened so that we could not see them within. And their people paraded the shore with targets, azagays, AGOMIAS, and bows and slings from which they slung stones at us."—Roteiro de Vasco da Gama, 32.

1516.—"They go to fight one another bare from the waist upwards, and from the waist downwards wrapped in cotton cloths drawn tightly round, and with many folds, and with their arms, which are swords, bucklers, and daggers (GOMIOS)."—Barbosa, p. 80.

1774.—"Autour du corps ils ont un ceinturon de cuir brodé, ou garni d'argent, au milieu duquel sur le devant ils passent un couteau large recourbé, et pointu (JAMBEA), dont la pointe est tournée du côté droit."—Niebuhr, Desc. de l'Arabie, 54.

JUMDUD, s. H. jamdad, jamdhar. A kind of dagger, broad at the base and slightly curved, the hilt formed with a cross-grip like that of the Katār (see KUTTAUR). [A drawing of what he calls a jamdhar katārī is given in Egerton's Catalogue (Pl. IX. No. 344-5).] F. Johnson's Dictionary gives jamdar as a Persian word with the suggested etymology of janb-dar, 'flank-render.' But in the Āīn the word is spelt jamdhar, which seems to indicate Hind. origin; and its occurrence in the poem of Chand Bardāi (see Ind. Antiq. i. 281) corroborates this. Mr. Beames there suggests the etymology of Yama-dant 'Death's Tooth.' The drawings of the jamdhad or jamdhar in the Āīn illustrations show several specimens with double and triple toothed points, which perhaps favours this view; but Yama-dhāra, 'death-wielder,' appears in the Sanskrit dictionaries as the name of a weapon. [Rather, perhaps, yama-dhara, 'death-bearer.']

c. 1526.—"JAMDHER." See quotation under KUTTAUR.

[1813.—"... visited the JAMDAR khana, or treasury containing his jewels ... curious arms...."—Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd ed. ii. 469.]

JUMMA, s. Hind. from Ar. jama'. The total assessment (for land revenue) from any particular estate, or division of country. The Arab. word signifies 'total' or 'aggregate.'

1781.—"An increase of more than 26 lacks of rupees (was) effected on the former JUMMA."—Fifth Report, p. 8.

JUMMABUNDEE, s. Hind. from P.—Ar. jama'bandī. A SETTLEMENT (q.v.), i.e. the determination of the amount of land revenue due for a year, or a period of years, from a village, estate, or parcel of land. [In the N.W.P. it is specially applied to the annual village rent-roll, giving details of the holding of each cultivator.]

[1765.—"The rents of the province, according to the JUMMA-BUNDY, or rent-roll ... amounted to ..."—Verelst, View of Bengal, App. 214.

[1814.—"JUMMABUNDEE." See under PATEL.]

JUMNA, n.p. The name of a famous river in India which runs by Delhi and Agra. Skt. Yamunā, Hind. Jamunā and Jamnā, the Διαμούνα of Ptolemy, the Ἰωβαρής of Arrian, the Jomanes of Pliny. The spelling of Ptolemy almost exactly expresses the modern Hind. form Jamunā. The name Jamunā is also applied to what was in the 18th century, an unimportant branch of the Brahmaputra R. which connected it with the Ganges, but which has now for many years been the main channel of the former great river. (See JENNYE.) Jamunā is the name of several other rivers of less note.

[1616-17.—"I proposed for a water worke, w^{ch} might giue the Chief Cittye of the Mogores content ... w^{ch} is to be don vppon the Riuer IEMINY w^{ch} passeth by Agra...."—Birdwood, First Letter Book, 460.

[1619.—"The river GEMINI was vnfit to set a Myll vppon."—Sir T. Roe, Hak. Soc. ii. 477.

[1663.—"... the GEMNA, a river which may be compared to the Loire...."—Bernier, Letter to M. De la Mothe le Vayer, ed. Constable, 241.]

[JUMNA MUSJID, n.p. A common corruption of the Ar. jāmĕ' masjid, 'the cathedral or congregational mosque,' Ar. jama', 'to collect.' The common form is supposed to represent some great mosque on the JUMNA R.

[1785.—"The JUMNA-musjid is of great antiquity...."—Diary, in Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd ed. ii. 448.

[1849.—"In passing we got out to see the JAMNA Masjid, a very fine building now used as a magazine."—Mrs. Mackenzie, Life in the Mission, ii. 170.

[1865.—"... the great mosque or DJAMIA '... this word DJAMIA' means literally 'collecting' or 'uniting,' because here attends the great concourse of Friday worshippers...."—Palgrave, Central and E. Arabia, ed. 1868, 266.]

JUNGEERA, n.p., i.e. Janjīrā. The name of a native State on the coast, south of Bombay, from which the Fort and chief place is 44 m. distant. This place is on a small island, rising in the entrance to the Rājpurī inlet, to which the name Janjīrā properly pertains, believed to be a local corruption of the Ar. jazīra, 'island.' The State is also called Habsān, meaning 'HUBSHEE'S land,' from the fact that for 3 or 4 centuries its chief has been of that race. This was not at first continuous, nor have the chiefs, even when of African blood, been always of one family; but they have apparently been so for the last 200 years. 'The Sīdī' (see SEEDY) and 'The Ḥabshī,' are titles popularly applied to this chief. This State has a port and some land in Kāthiāwār.

Gen. Keatinge writes: "The members of the Sidi's family whom I saw were, for natives of India, particularly fair." The old Portuguese writers call this harbour Danda (or as they write it Damda), e.g. João de Castro in Primeiro Roteiro, p. 48. His rude chart shows the island-fort.

JUNGLE, s. Hind. and Mahr. jangal, from Skt. jaṇgala (a word which occurs chiefly in medical treatises). The native word means in strictness only waste, uncultivated ground; then, such ground covered with shrubs, trees or long grass; and thence again the Anglo-Indian application is to forest, or other wild growth, rather than to the fact that it is not cultivated. A forest; a thicket; a tangled wilderness. The word seems to have passed at a rather early date into Persian, and also into use in Turkistan. From Anglo-Indian it has been adopted into French as well as in English. The word does not seem to occur in Fryer, which rather indicates that its use was not so extremely common among foreigners as it is now.

c. 1200.—"... Now the land is humid, JUNGLE (jangalah), or of the ordinary kind."—Susruta, i. ch. 35.

c. 1370.—"Elephants were numerous as sheep in the JANGAL round the Ráí's dwelling."—Táríkh-i-Fíroz-Sháhí, in Elliot, iii. 314.

c. 1450.—"The Kings of India hunt the elephant. They will stay a whole month or more in the wilderness, and in the JUNGLE (Jangal)."—Abdurrazāk, in Not. et Ext. xiv. 51.

1474.—"... Bicheneger. The vast city is surrounded by three ravines, and intersected by a river, bordering on one side on a dreadful JUNGEL."—Ath. Nikitin, in India in XVth Cent., 29.

1776.—"Land waste for five years ... is called JUNGLE."—Halhed's Gentoo Code, 190.

1809.—"The air of Calcutta is much affected by the closeness of the JUNGLE around it."—Ld. Valentia, i. 207.

1809.—

"They built them here a bower of jointed cane, Strong for the needful use, and light and long Was the slight framework rear'd, with little pain; Lithe creepers then the wicker sides supply, And the tall JUNGLE grass fit roofing gave Beneath the genial sky." Curse of Kehama, xiii. 7.

c. 1830.—"C'est là que je rencontrai les JUNGLES ... j'avoue que je fus très désappointé."—Jacquemont, Correspond. i. 134.

c. 1833-38.—

"L'Hippotame au large ventre Habite aux JUNGLES de Java, Où grondent, au fond de chaque antre Plus de monstres qu'on ne rêva." Theoph. Gautier, in Poésies Complètes, ed. 1876, i. 325.

1848.—"But he was as lonely here as in his JUNGLE at Boggleywala."—Thackeray, Vanity Fair, ch. iii.

" "'Was there ever a battle won like Salamanca? Hey, Dobbin? But where was it he learnt his art? In India, my boy. The JUNGLE is the school for a general, mark me that.'"—Ibid., ed. 1863, i. 312.

c. 1858.—

"La bête formidable, habitante des JUNGLES S'endort, le ventre en l'air, et dilate ses ongles."—_Leconte de Lisle._

"

"Des DJUNGLES du Pendj-Ab Aux sables du Karnate."—Ibid.

1865.—"To an eye accustomed for years to the wild wastes of the JUNGLE, the whole country presents the appearance of one continuous well-ordered garden."—Waring, Tropical Resident at Home, 7.

1867.—"... here are no cobwebs of plea and counterplea, no JUNGLES of argument and brakes of analysis."—Swinburne, Essays and Studies, 133.

1873.—"JUNGLE, derived to us, through the living language of India, from the Sanskrit, may now be regarded as good English."—Fitz-Edward Hall, Modern English, 306.

1878.—"Cet animal est commun dans les forêts, et dans les DJENGLES."—Marre, Kata-Kata-Malayou, 83.

1879.—"The owls of metaphysics hooted from the gloom of their various JUNGLES."—Fortnightly Rev. No. clxv., N.S., 19.

JUNGLE-FEVER, s. A dangerous remittent fever arising from the malaria of forest or jungle tracts.

1808.—"I was one day sent to a great distance, to take charge of an officer who had been seized by JUNGLE-FEVER."—Letter in Morton's L. of Leyden, 43.

JUNGLE-FOWL, s. The popular name of more than one species of those birds from which our domestic poultry are supposed to be descended; especially Gallus Sonneratii, Temminck, the Grey Jungle-fowl, and Gallus ferrugineus, Gmelin, the Red Jungle-fowl. The former belongs only to Southern India; the latter from the Himālaya, south to the N. Circārs on the east, and to the Rājpīpla Hills south of the Nerbudda on the west.

1800.—"... the thickets bordered on the village, and I was told abounded in JUNGLE-FOWL."—Symes, Embassy to Ava, 96.

1868.—"The common JUNGLE-COCK ... was also obtained here. It is almost exactly like a common game-cock, but the voice is different."—Wallace, Malay Archip., 108.

The word jungle is habitually used adjectively, as in this instance, to denote wild species, e.g. JUNGLE-cat, JUNGLE-dog, JUNGLE-fruit, &c.

JUNGLE-MAHALS, n.p. Hind. Jangal-Mahāl. This, originally a vague name of sundry tracts and chieftainships lying between the settled districts of Bengal and the hill country of Chutiā Nāgpūr, was constituted a regular district in 1805, but again broken up and redistributed among adjoining districts in 1833 (see Imperial Gazetteer, s.v.).

JUNGLE-TERRY, n.p. Hind. Jangal-tarāi (see TERAI). A name formerly applied to a border-tract between Bengal and Behar, including the inland parts of Monghyr and Bhāgalpūr, and what are now termed the Santāl Parganas. Hodges, below, calls it to the "westward" of Bhāgalpūr; but Barkope, which he describes as near the centre of the tract, lies, according to Rennell's map, about 35 m. S.E. of Bhāgalpūr town; and the Cleveland inscription shows that the term included the tract occupied by the Rājmahāl hill-people. The Map No. 2 in Rennell's Bengal Atlas (1779) is entitled "the JUNGLETERRY District, with the adjacent provinces of Birbhoom, Rajemal, Boglipour, &c., comprehending the countries situated between Moorshedabad and Bahar." But the map itself does not show the name Jungle Terry anywhere.

1781.—"Early in February we set out on a tour through a part of the country called the JUNGLE-TERRY, to the westward of Bauglepore ... after leaving the village of Barkope, which is nearly in the centre of the JUNGLE TERRY, we entered the hills.... In the great famine which raged through Indostan in the year 1770 ... the Jungle Terry is said to have suffered greatly."—Hodges, pp. 90-95.

1784.—"To be sold ... that capital collection of Paintings, late the property of A. Cleveland, Esq., deceased, consisting of the most capital views in the districts of Monghyr, Rajemehal, Boglipoor, and the JUNGLETERRY, by Mr. Hodges...."—In Seton-Karr, i. 64.

c. 1788.—

"To the Memory of AUGUSTUS CLEVELAND, Esq., Late Collector of the Districts of Bhaugulpore and Rajamahall, Who without Bloodshed or the Terror of Authority, Employing only the Means of Conciliation, Confidence, and Benevolence, Attempted and Accomplished The entire Subjection of the Lawless and Savage Inhabitants of the JUNGLETERRY of Rajamahall...." (etc.)

Inscription on the Monument erected by Government to Cleveland, who died in 1784.

1817.—"These hills are principally covered with wood, excepting where it has been cleared away for the natives to build their villages, and cultivate janaira (JOWAUR), plantains and yams, which together with some of the small grains mentioned in the account of the JUNGLETERRY, constitute almost the whole of the productions of these hills."—Sutherland's Report on the Hill People (in App. to Long, 560).

1824.—"This part, I find (he is writing at Monghyr), is not reckoned either in Bengal or Bahar, having been, under the name of the JUNGLETERRY district, always regarded, till its pacification and settlement, as a sort of border or debateable land."—Heber, i. 131.

JUNGLO, s. Guz. Janglo. This term, we are told by R. Drummond, was used in his time (the beginning of the 19th century), by the less polite, to distinguish Europeans; "wild men of the woods," that is, who did not understand Guzerati!

1808.—"Joseph Maria, a well-known scribe of the order of Topeewallas ... was actually mobbed, on the first circuit of 1806, in the town of Pitlaud, by parties of curious old women and young, some of whom gazing upon him put the question, Aré JUNGLA, too munne pirrneesh? 'O wild one, wilt thou marry me?' He knew not what they asked, and made no answer, whereupon they declared that he was indeed a very Jungla, and it required all the address of Kripram (the worthy Brahmin who related this anecdote to the writer, uncontradicted in the presence of the said Senhor) to draw off the dames and damsels from the astonished Joseph."—R. Drummond, Illns. (s.v.).

JUNK, s. A large Eastern ship; especially (and in later use exclusively) a Chinese ship. This indeed is the earliest application also; any more general application belongs to an intermediate period. This is one of the oldest words in the Europeo-Indian vocabulary. It occurs in the travels of Friar Odorico, written down in 1331, and a few years later in the rambling reminiscences of John de' Marignolli. The great Catalan World-map of 1375 gives a sketch of one of those ships with their sails of bamboo matting and calls them INCHI, no doubt a clerical error for IŨCHI. Dobner, the original editor of Marignolli, in the 18th century, says of the word (junkos): "This word I cannot find in any medieval glossary. Most probably we are to understand vessels of platted reeds (a juncis texta) which several authors relate to be used in India." It is notable that the same erroneous suggestion is made by Amerigo Vespucci in his curious letter to one of the Medici, giving an account of the voyage of Da Gama, whose squadron he had met at C. Verde on its way home.

The French translators of Ibn Batuta derive the word from the Chinese tchouen (chwen), and Littré gives the same etymology (s.v. jonque). It is possible that the word may be eventually traced to a Chinese original, but not very probable. The old Arab traders must have learned the word from Malay pilots, for it is certainly the Javanese and Malay jong and ajong, 'a ship or large vessel.' In Javanese the Great Bear is called Lintang jong, 'The Constellation Junk,' [which is in Malay Bintang Jong. The various forms in Malay and cognate languages, with the Chinese words which have been suggested as the origin, are very fully given by Scott, Malayan Words in English, p. 59 seq.]

c. 1300.—"Large ships called in the language of China 'JUNKS' bring various sorts of choice merchandize and cloths from Chín and Máchín, and the countries of Hind and Sind."—Rashíduddín, in Elliot, i. 69.

1331.—"And when we were there in harbour at Polumbum, we embarked in another ship called a JUNK (aliam navim nomine ZUNCUM).... Now on board that ship were good 700 souls, what with sailors and with merchants...."—Friar Odoric, in Cathay, &c., 73.

c. 1343.—"They make no voyages on the China Sea except with Chinese vessels ... of these there are three kinds; the big ones which are called JUNK, in the plural junūk.... Each of these big ships carries from three up to twelve sails. The sails are made of bamboo slips, woven like mats; they are never hauled down, but are shifted round as the wind blows from one quarter or another."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 91. The French translators write the words as gonk (and gonoûk). Ibn Batuta really indicates chunk (and chunūk); but both must have been quite wrong.

c. 1348.—"Wishing them to visit the shrine of St. Thomas the Apostle ... we embarked on certain Junks (ascendentes JUNKOS) from Lower India, which is called Minubar."—Marignolli, in Cathay, &c., 356.

1459.—"About the year of Our Lord 1420, a Ship or JUNK of India, in crossing the Indian Sea, was driven ... in a westerly and south-westerly direction for 40 days, without seeing anything but sky and sea.... The ship having touched on the coast to supply its wants, the mariners beheld there the egg of a certain bird called chrocho, which egg was as big as a butt...."—Rubric on Fra Mauro's Great Map at Venice.

" "The Ships or junks (ZONCHI) which navigate this sea, carry 4 masts, and others besides that they can set up or strike (at will); and they have 40 to 60 little chambers for the merchants, and they have only one rudder...."—Ibid.

1516.—"Many Moorish merchants reside in it (Malacca), and also Gentiles, particularly Chetis (see CHETTY), who are natives of Cholmendel; and they are all very rich, and have many large ships which they call JUNGOS."—Barbosa, 191.

1549.—"Exclusus isto concilio, applicavit animum ad navem Sinensis formae, quam IUNCUM vocant."—Scti. Franc. Xaverii Epist. 337.

[1554.—"... in the many ships and junks (JUGOS) which certainly passed that way."—Castanheda, ii. c. 20.]

1563.—"JUNCOS are certain long ships that have stern and prow fashioned in the same way."—Garcia, f. 58_b_.

1591.—"By this Negro we were advertised of a small Barke of some thirtie tunnes (which the Moors call a IUNCO)."—Barker's Acc. of Lancaster's Voyage, in Hakl. ii. 589.

1616.—"And doubtless they had made havock of them all, had they not presently been relieved by two Arabian JUNKS (for so their small ill-built ships are named....)"—Terry, ed. 1665, p. 342.

[1625.—"An hundred Prawes and IUNKES."—Purchas, Pilgrimage, i. 2, 43.

[1627.—"China also, and the great Atlantis (that you call America), which have now but IUNKS and Canoas, abounded then in tall Ships."—Bacon, New Atlantis, p. 12.]

1630.—"So repairing to Iasques (see JASK), a place in the Persian Gulph, they obtained a fleete of Seaven IUNCKS, to convey them and theirs as Merchantmen bound for the Shoares of India."—Lord, Religion of the Persees, 3.

1673.—Fryer also speaks of "Portugal JUNKS." The word had thus come to mean any large vessel in the Indian Seas. Barker's use for a small vessel (above) is exceptional.

JUNKAMEER, s. This word occurs in Wheeler, i. 300, where it should certainly have been written JUNCANEER. It was long a perplexity, and as it was the subject of one of Dr. Burnell's latest, if not the very last, of his contributions to this work, I transcribe the words of his communication:

"Working at improving the notes to v. Linschoten, I have accidentally cleared up the meaning of a word you asked me about long ago, but which I was then obliged to give up—'Jonkamīr.' It = 'a collector of customs.'

"(1745).—Notre Supérieur qui sçavoit qu'à moitié chemin certains JONQUANIERS[147] mettoient les passans à contribution, nous avoit donné un ou deux fanons (see FANAM) pour les payer en allant et en revenant, au cas qu'ils l'exigeassent de nous."—P. Norbert, Memoires, pp. 159-160.

"The original word is in Malayālam chungakāran, and do. in Tamil, though it does not occur in the Dictionaries of that language; but chungam (= 'Customs') does.

"I was much pleased to settle this curious word; but I should never have thought of the origin of it, had it not been for that rascally old Capuchin P. Norbert's note."

My friend's letter (from West Stratton) has no date, but it must have been written in July or August 1882.—[H.Y.] (See JUNKEON.)

1680.—"The Didwan (see DEWAUN) returned with Lingapas Ruccas (see ROOCKA) upon the Avaldar (see HAVILDAR) at St. Thoma, and upon the two chief JUNCANEERS in this part of the country, ordering them not to stop goods or provisions coming into the town."—Fort St. Geo. Consn., Nov. 22, Notes and Exts., iii. 39.

1746.—"Given to the Governor's Servants, JUNCANEERS, &c., as usual at Christmas, Salampores (see SALEMPOORY) 18Ps. P. 13."—Acct. of Extra Charges at Fort St. David, to Dec. 31. MS. Report, in India Office.

JUNK-CEYLON, n.p. The popular name of an island off the west coast of the Malay Peninsula. Forrest (Voyage to Mergui, pp. iii. and 29-30) calls it Jan-Sylan, and says it is properly Ujong (i.e. in Malay, 'Cape') Sylang. This appears to be nearly right. The name is, according to Crawfurd (Malay Dict. s.v. Salang, and Dict. Ind. Archip. s.v. Ujung) Ujung Salang, 'Salang Headland.' [Mr. Skeat doubts the correctness of this. "There is at least one quite possible alternative, i.e. jong salang, in which jong means 'a junk,' and salang, when applied to vessels, 'heavily tossing' (see Klinkert, Dict. s.v. salang). Another meaning of salang is 'to transfix a person with a dagger,' and is the technical term for Malay executions, in which the kris was driven down from the collar-bone to the heart. Parles in the first quotation is now known as Perlis."]

1539.—"There we crost over to the firm Land, and passing by the Port of JUNÇALAN (Iuncalão) we sailed two days and a half with a favourable wind, by means whereof we got to the River of Parles in the Kingdom of Queda...."—Pinto (orig. cap. xix.) in Cogan, p. 22.

1592.—"We departed thence to a Baie in the Kingdom of IUNSALAOM, which is betweene Malacca and Pegu, 8 degrees to the Northward."—Barker, in Hakl. ii. 591.

1727.—"The North End of JONK CEYLOAN lies within a mile of the Continent."—A. Hamilton, 69; [ed. 1744, ii. 67].

JUNKEON, s. This word occurs as below. It is no doubt some form of the word chungam, mentioned under JUNKAMEER. Wilson gives Telugu Sunkam, which might be used in Orissa, where Bruton was. [Shungum (Mal. chunkam) appears in the sense of toll or customs duties in many of the old treaties in Logan, Malabar, vol. iii.]

1638.—"Any IUNKEON or Custome."—Bruton's Narrative, in Hakl. v. 53.

1676.—"These practices (claims of perquisite by the factory chiefs) hath occasioned some to apply to the Governour for relief, and chosen rather to pay JUNCAN than submit to the unreasonable demands aforesaid."—Major Puckle's Proposals, in Fort St. Geo. Consn., Feb. 16. Notes and Exts., i. 39.

[1727.—"... at every ten or twelve Miles end, a Fellow to demand JUNKAUN or Poll-Money for me and my Servants...."—A. Hamilton, ed. 1744, i. 392.]

JURIBASSO, s. This word, meaning 'an interpreter,' occurs constantly in the Diary of Richard Cocks, of the English Factory in Japan, admirably edited for the Hakluyt Society by Mr. Edward Maunde Thompson (1883). The word is really Malayo-Javanese jurubahāsa, lit. 'language-master,' juru being an expert, 'a master of a craft,' and bahāsa the Skt. bhāshā, 'speech.' [Wilkinson, Dict., writes Juru-bĕhasa; Mr. Skeat prefers juru-bhasa.]

1603.—At Patani the Hollanders having arrived, and sent presents—"ils furent pris par un officier nommé Orankaea (see ORANKAY) JUREBASSA, qui en fit trois portions."—In Rec. du Voyages, ed. 1703, ii. 667. See also pp. 672, 675.

1613.—"(Said the Mandarin of Ancão) ... 'Captain-major, Auditor, residents, and JERUBAÇAS, for the space of two days you must come before me to attend to these instructions (capitulos), in order that I may write to the Aīlão.'...

"These communications being read in the Chamber of the City of Macau, before the Vereadores, the people, and the Captain-Major then commanding in the said city, João Serrão da Cunha, they sought for a person who might be charged to reply, such as had knowledge and experience of the Chinese, and of their manner of speech, and finding Lourenço Carvalho ... he made the reply in the following form of words '... To this purpose we the Captain-Major, the Auditor, the Vereadores, the Padres, and the JURUBAÇA, assembling together and beating our foreheads before God....'"—Bocarro, pp. 725-729.

" "The foureteenth, I sent M. Cockes, and my IUREBASSO to both the Kings to entreat them to prouide me of a dozen Seamen."—Capt. Saris, in Purchas, 378.

1615.—"... his desire was that, for his sake, I would geve over the pursute of this matter against the sea bongew, for that yf it were followed, of force the said bongew must cut his bellie, and then my JUREBASSO must do the lyke. Unto which his request I was content to agree...."—Cocks's Diary, i. 33.

[ " "This night we had a conference with our JURYBASSA."—Foster, Letters, iii. 167].

JUTE, s. The fibre (GUNNY-fibre) of the bark of Corchorus capsularis, L., and Corchorus olitorius, L., which in the last 45 years has become so important an export from India, and a material for manufacture in Great Britain as well as in India. "At the last meeting of the Cambridge Philosophical Society, Professor Skeat commented on various English words. Jute, a fibrous substance, he explained from the Sanskrit jūṭa, a less usual form of jaṭa, meaning, 1st, the matted hair of an ascetic; 2ndly, the fibrous roots of a tree such as the banyan; 3rdly, any fibrous substance" (Academy, Dec. 27, 1879). The secondary meanings attributed here to jaṭa are very doubtful.[148] The term jute appears to have been first used by Dr. Roxburgh in a letter dated 1795, in which he drew the attention of the Court of Directors to the value of the fibre "called jute by the natives." [It appears, however, as early as 1746 in the Log of a voyage quoted by Col. Temple in J.R.A.S., Jan. 1900, p. 158.] The name in fact appears to be taken from the vernacular name in Orissa. This is stated to be properly jhōṭŏ, but jhŭṭŏ is used by the uneducated. See Report of the Jute Commission, by Babu Hemchundra Kerr, Calcutta, 1874; also a letter from Mr. J. S. Cotton in the Academy, Jan. 17, 1880.

JUTKA, s. From Dak.—Hind. jhaṭkā, 'quick.' The native cab of Madras, and of Mofussil towns in that Presidency; a conveyance only to be characterised by the epithet ramshackle, though in that respect equalled by the Calcutta CRANCHEE (q.v.). It consists of a sort of box with Venetian windows, on two wheels, and drawn by a miserable pony. It is entered by a door at the back. (See SHIGRAM, with like meanings).

JUZAIL, s. This word jazāil is generally applied to the heavy Afghan rifle, fired with a forked rest. If it is Ar. it must be jazā'il, the plural of jazīl, 'big,' used as a substantive. Jazīl is often used for a big, thick thing, so it looks probable. (See GINGALL.) Hence jazā'ilchī, one armed with such a weapon.

[1812.—"The JEZAERCHI also, the men who use blunderbusses, were to wear the new Russian dress."—Morier, Journey through Persia, 30.

[1898.—

"All night the cressets glimmered pale On Ulwur sabre and Tonk JEZAIL." R. Kipling, Barrack-room Ballads, 84.

[1900.—"Two companies of Khyber JEZAILCHIES."—Warburton, Eighteen Years in the Khyber, 78.]

JYEDAD, s. P.—H. jāidād. Territory assigned for the support of troops.

[1824.—"Rampoora on the Chumbul ... had been granted to Dudernaic, as JAIDAD, or temporary assignment for the payment of his troops."—Malcolm, Central India, i. 223.]

JYSHE, s. This term, Ar. jaish, 'an army, a legion,' was applied by Tippoo to his regular infantry, the body of which was called the Jaish Kachari (see under CUTCHERRY).

c. 1782.—"About this time the Bar or regular infantry, Kutcheri, were called the JYSH KUTCHERI."—Hist. of Tipú Sultán, by Hussein Ali Khán Kermáni, p. 32.

1786.—"At such times as new levies or recruits for the JYSHE and Piadehs are to be entertained, you two and Syed Peer assembling in Kuchurry are to entertain none but proper and eligible men."—Tippoo's Letters, 256.

K

KAJEE, s. This is a title of Ministers of State used in Nepaul and Sikkim. It is no doubt the Arabic word (see CAZEE for quotations). Kājī is the pronunciation of this last word in various parts of India.

[KALA JUGGAH, s. Anglo-H. kālā jagah for a 'dark place,' arranged near a ball-room for the purpose of flirtation.

[1885.—"At night it was rather cold, and the frequenters of the KALA JAGAH (or dark places) were unable to enjoy it as much as I hoped they would."—Lady Dufferin, Viceregal Life, 91.]

KALINGA, n.p. (See KLING.)

KALLA-NIMMACK, s. Hind. kālā-namak, 'black salt,' a common mineral drug, used especially in horse-treatment. It is muriate of soda, having a mixture of oxide of iron, and some impurities. (Royle.)

KAPAL, s. Kāpăl, the Malay word for a ship, [which seems to have come from the Tam. kappal,] "applied to any square-rigged vessel, with top and top-gallant masts" (Marsden, Memoirs of a Malay Family, 57).

KARBAREE, s. Hind. kārbārī, 'an agent, a manager.' Used chiefly in Bengal Proper.

[c. 1857.—"The Foujdar's report stated that a police CARBAREE was sleeping in his own house."—Chevers, Ind. Med. Jurisp. 467.]

1867.—"The Lushai KARBARIS (literally men of business) duly arrived and met me at Kassalong."—Lewin, A Fly on the Wheel, 293.

KARCANNA, s. Hind. from Pers. kār-khāna, 'business-place.' We cannot improve upon Wilson's definition: "An office, or place where business is carried on; but it is in use more especially applied to places where mechanical work is performed; a workshop, a manufactory, an arsenal; also, fig., to any great fuss or bustle." The last use seems to be obsolete.

[1663.—"Large halls are seen in many places, called KAR-KANAYS or workshops for the artizans."—Bernier, ed. Constable, 258 seq. Also see CARCANA.]

KARDAR, s. P.—H. kārdār, an agent (of the Government) in Sindh.

[1842.—"I further insist upon the offending KARDAR being sent a prisoner to my head-quarters at Sukkur within the space of five days, to be dealt with as I shall determine."—Sir C. Napier, in Napier's Conquest of Scinde, 149.]

KAREETA, s. Hind. from Ar. kharīṭa, and in India also khalīṭa. The silk bag (described by Mrs. Parkes, below) in which is enclosed a letter to or from a native noble; also, by transfer, the letter itself. In 2 Kings v. 23, the bag in which Naaman bound the silver is kharīt; also in Isaiah iii. 22, the word translated 'crisping-pins' is kharīṭim, rather 'purses.'

c. 1350.—"The Sherīf Ibrāhīm, surnamed the KHĀRĪTADĀR, i.e. the Master of the Royal Paper and Pens, was governor of the territory of Hānsī and Sarsatī."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 337.

1838.—"Her Highness the Bāiza Bā'i did me the honour to send me a KHARĪTĀ, that is a letter enclosed in a long bag of Kimkhwāb (see KINCOB), crimson silk brocaded with flowers in gold, contained in another of fine muslin: the mouth of the bag was tied with a gold and tasseled cord, to which was appended the great seal of her Highness."—Wanderings of a Pilgrim (Mrs. Parkes), ii. 250.

In the following passage the thing is described (at Constantinople).

1673.—"... le Visir prenant un sachet de beau brocard d'or à fleurs, long tout au moins d'une demi aulne et large de cinq ou six doigts, lié et scellé par le haut avec une inscription qui y estoit attachée, et disant que c'estoit une lettre du Grand Seigneur...."—Journal d'Ant. Galland, ii. 94.

KAUL, s. Hind. Kāl, properly 'Time,' then a period, death, and popularly the visitation of famine. Under this word we read:

1808.—"Scarcity, and the scourge of civil war, embittered the Mahratta nation in A.D. 1804, of whom many emigrants were supported by the justice and generosity of neighbouring powers, and (a large number) were relieved in their own capital by the charitable contributions of the English at Bombay alone. This and opening of Hospitals for the sick and starving, within the British settlements, were gratefully told to the writer afterwards by many Mahrattas in the heart, and from distant parts, of their own country."—R. Drummond, Illustrations, &c.

KAUNTA, CAUNTA, s. This word, Mahr. and Guz. kānṭha, 'coast or margin,' [Skt. kanṭha, 'immediate proximity,' kanṭhī, 'the neck,'] is used in the northern part of the Bombay Presidency in composition to form several popular geographical terms, as Mahi Kānṭhā, for a group of small States on the banks of the Mahi River; Rewā Kānṭhā, south of the above; Sindhu Kānṭhā, the Indus Delta, &c. The word is no doubt the same which we find in Ptolemy for the Gulf of Kachh, Κάνθι κόλπος. Kānṭhī-Kot was formerly an important place in Eastern Kachh, and Kāṇṭhī was the name of the southern coast district (see Ritter, vi. 1038).

KEBULEE. (See MYROBOLANS.)

KEDDAH, s. Hind. Khedā (khednā, 'to chase,' from Skt. ākheṭa, 'hunting'). The term used in Bengal for the enclosure constructed to entrap elephants. [The system of hunting elephants by making a trench round a space and enticing the wild animals by means of tame decoys is described by Arrian, Indika, 13.] (See CORRAL.)

[c. 1590.—"There are several modes of hunting elephants. 1. K'HEDAH" (then follows a description).—Āīn, i. 284.]

1780-90.—"The party on the plain below have, during this interval, been completely occupied in forming the KEDDAH or enclosure."—Lives of the Lindsays, iii. 191.

1810.—"A trap called a KEDDAH."—Williamson, V. M. ii. 436.

1860.—"The custom in Bengal is to construct a strong enclosure (called a KEDDAH) in the heart of the forest."—Tennent's Ceylon, ii. 342.

KEDGEREE, KITCHERY, s. Hind. khichṛī, a mess of rice, cooked with butter and dāl (see DHALL), and flavoured with a little spice, shred onion, and the like; a common dish all over India, and often served at Anglo-Indian breakfast tables, in which very old precedent is followed, as the first quotation shows. The word appears to have been applied metaphorically to mixtures of sundry kinds (see Fryer, below), and also to mixt jargon or lingua franca. In England we find the word is often applied to a mess of re-cooked fish, served for breakfast; but this is inaccurate. Fish is frequently eaten with kedgeree, but is no part of it. ["Fish Kitcherie" is an old Anglo-Indian dish, see the recipe in Riddell, Indian Domestic Economy, p. 437.]

c. 1340.—"The munj (MOONG) is boiled with rice, and then buttered and eaten. This is what they call KISHRĪ, and on this dish they breakfast every day."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 131.

c. 1443.—"The elephants of the palace are fed upon KITCHRI."—Abdurrazzāk, in India in XVth Cent. 27.

c. 1475.—"Horses are fed on pease; also on KICHIRIS, boiled with sugar and oil; and early in the morning they get shishenivo" (?).—Athan. Nikitin, in do., p. 10.

The following recipe for KEDGEREE is by Abu'l Faẓl:—

c. 1590.—"KHICHRI, Rice, split dál, and ghí, 5 ser of each; ⅓ ser salt; this gives 7 dishes."—Āīn, i. 59.

1648.—"Their daily gains are very small, ... and with these they fill their hungry bellies with a certain food called KITSERYE."—Van Twist, 57.

1653.—"KICHERI est vne sorte de legume dont les Indiens se nourissent ordinairement."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, p. 545.

1672.—Baldaeus has KITZERY, Tavernier QUICHERI [ed. Ball, i. 282, 391].

1673.—"The Diet of this Sort of People admits not of great Variety or Cost, their delightfullest Food being only CUTCHERRY a sort of Pulse and Rice mixed together, and boiled in Butter, with which they grow fat."—Fryer, 81.

Again, speaking of pearls in the Persian Gulf, he says: "Whatever is of any Value is very dear. Here is a great Plenty of what they call KETCHERY, a mixture of all together, or Refuse of Rough, Yellow, and Unequal, which they sell by Bushels to the Russians."—Ibid. 320.

1727.—"Some Doll and Rice, being mingled together and boiled make KITCHEREE, the common Food of the Country. They eat it with Butter and Atchar (see ACHAR)."—A. Hamilton, i. 161; [ed. 1744, i. 162].

1750-60.—"KITCHAREE is only rice stewed, with a certain pulse they call Dholl, and is generally eaten with salt-fish, butter, and pickles of various sorts, to which they give the general name of Atchar."—Grose, i. 150.

[1813.—"He was always a welcome guest ... and ate as much of their rice and CUTCHEREE as he chose."—Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd ed. i. 502.]

1880.—"A correspondent of the Indian Mirror, writing of the annual religious fair at Ajmere, thus describes a feature in the proceedings: "There are two tremendous copper pots, one of which is said to contain about eighty maunds of rice and the other forty maunds. To fill these pots with rice, sugar, and dried fruits requires a round sum of money, and it is only the rich who can afford to do so. This year His Highness the Nawab of Tonk paid Rs. 3,000 to fill up the pots.... After the pots filled with KHICHRI had been inspected by the Nawab, who was accompanied by the Commissioner of Ajmere and several Civil Officers, the distribution, or more properly the plunder, of KHICHRI commenced, and men well wrapped up with clothes, stuffed with cotton, were seen leaping down into the boiling pot to secure their share of the booty."—Pioneer Mail, July 8. [See the reference to this custom in Sir T. Roe, Hak. Soc. ii. 314, and a full account in Rajputana Gazetteer, ii. 63.]

KEDGEREE, n.p. Khijirī or Kijarī, a village and police station on the low lands near the mouth of the Hoogly, on the west bank, and 68 miles below Calcutta. It was formerly well known as a usual anchorage of the larger Indiamen.

1683.—"This morning early we weighed anchor with the tide of Ebb, but having little wind, got no further than the Point of KEGARIA Island."—Hedges, Diary, Jan. 26; [Hak. Soc. i. 64].

1684.—"Sign^r Nicolo Pareres, a Portugall Merchant, assured me their whole community had wrott y^e Vice King of Goa ... to send them 2 or 3 Frigates with ... Soldiers to possess themselves of ye Islands of KEGERIA and Ingellee."—Ibid. Dec. 17; [Hak. Soc. i. 172].

1727.—"It is now inhabited by Fishers, as are also Ingellie and KIDGERIE, two neighbouring Islands on the West Side of the Mouth of the Ganges."—A. Hamilton, ii. 2; [ed. 1744]. (See HIDGELEE.)

1753.—"De l'autre côté de l'entré, les rivières de CAJORI et de l'Ingeli (see HIDGELEE), puis plus au large la rivière de Pipli et celle de Balasor (see BALASORE), sont avec Tombali (see TUMLOOK), rivière mentionné plus haut, et qu'on peut ajouter ici, des dérivations d'un grand fleuve, dont le nom de Ganga lui est commun avec le Gange.... Une carte du Golfe de Bengale inserée dans Blaeu, fera même distinguer les rivières d'Ingeli et de CAJORI (si on prend la peine de l'examiner) comme des bras du Ganga."—D'Anville, p. 66.

As to the origin of this singular error, about a river Ganga flowing across India from W. to E., see some extracts under GODAVERY. The Rupnarain River, which joins the Hoogly from the W. just above Diamond Harbour, is the grand fleuve here spoken of. The name Gunga or Old Gunga is applied to this in charts late in the 18th century. It is thus mentioned by A. Hamilton, 1727: "About five leagues farther up on the West Side of the River of Hughly, is another Branch of the Ganges, called Ganga, it is broader than that of the Hughly, but much shallower."—ii. 3; [ed. 1744].

KEDGEREE-POT, s. A vulgar expression for a round pipkin such as is in common Indian use, both for holding water and for cooking purposes. (See CHATTY, GHURRA.)

1811.—"As a memorial of such misfortunes, they plant in the earth an oar bearing a CUDGERI, or earthen pot."—Solvyns, Les Hindous, iii.

1830.—"Some natives were in readiness with a small raft of KEDGEREE-POTS, on which the palkee was to be ferried over."—Mem. of Col. Mountain, 110.

KENNERY, n.p. The site of a famous and very extensive group of cave-temples on the Island of SALSETTE, near Bombay, properly Kāṇherī.

1602.—"Holding some conversation with certain very aged Christians, who had been among the first converts there of Padre Fr. Antonio do Porto, ... one of them, who alleged himself to be more than 120 years old, and who spoke Portuguese very well, and read and wrote it, and was continually reading the Flos Sanctorum, and the Lives of the Saints, assured me that without doubt the work of the Pagoda of CANARI was made under the orders of the father of Saint Josafat the Prince, whom Barlaam converted to the Faith of Christ...."—Couto, VII. iii. cap. 10.

1673.—"Next Morn before Break of Day we directed our steps to the anciently fam'd, but now ruin'd City of CANOREIN ... all cut out of a Rock," &c.—Fryer, 71-72.

1825.—"The principal curiosities of Salsette ... are the cave temples of KENNERY. These are certainly in every way remarkable, from their number, their beautiful situation, their elaborate carving, and their marked connection with Buddh and his religion."—Heber, ii. 130.

KERSEYMERE, s. This is an English draper's term, and not Anglo-Indian. But it is through forms like cassimere (also in English use), a corruption of cashmere, though the corruption has been shaped by the previously existing English word kersey for a kind of woollen cloth, as if kersey were one kind and kerseymere another, of similar goods. Kersey is given by Minsheu (2nd ed. 1627), without definition, thus: "KERSIE cloth, G. (i.e. French) carizé." The only word like the last given by Littré is "Carisil, sorte de canevas."... This does not apply to kersey, which appears to be represented by "Creseau—Terme de Commerce; étoffe de laine croissée à deux envers; etym. croiser." Both words are probably connected with croiser or with carré. Planché indeed (whose etymologies are generally worthless) says: "made originally at Kersey, in Suffolk, whence its name." And he adds, equal to the occasion, "Kerseymere, so named from the position of the original factory on the mere, or water which runs through the village of Kersey" (!) Mr. Skeat, however, we see, thinks that Kersey, in Suffolk, is perhaps the origin of the word Kersey: [and this he repeats in the new ed. (1901) of his Concise Etym. Dict., adding, "Not from Jersey, which is also used as the name of a material." Kerseymere, he says, is "a corruption of Cashmere or Cassimere, by confusion with kersey"].

1495.—"Item the xv day of Februar, bocht fra Jhonne Andersoun x ellis of quhit CARESAY, to be tua coitis, ane to the King, and ane to the Lard of Balgony; price of ellne vjs.; summa ... iij. li."—Accts. of the Ld. H. Treasurer of Scotland, 1877, p. 225.

1583.—"I think cloth, KERSEYS and tinne have never bene here at so lowe prices as they are now."—Mr. John Newton, from Babylon (i.e. Bagdad) July 20, in Hakl. 378.

1603.—"I had as lief be a list of an English KERSEY, as be pil'd as thou art pil'd, for a French velvet."—Measure for Measure, i. 2.

1625.—"Ordanet the thesaurer to tak aff to ilk ane of the officeris and to the drummer and pyper, ilk ane of thame, fyve elne of reid KAIRSIE claithe."—Exts. from Recds. of Glasgow, 1876, p. 347.

1626.—In a contract between the Factor of the King of Persia and a Dutch "Opper Koopman" for goods we find: "2000 Persian ells of CARSAY at 1 eocri (?) the ell."—Valentijn, v. 295.

1784.—"For sale—superfine cambrics and edgings ... scarlet and blue KASSIMERES."—In Seton-Karr, i. 47.

c. 1880.—(no date given) "KERSEYMERE. Cassimere. A finer description of kersey ... (then follows the absurd etymology as given by Planché).... It is principally a manufacture of the west of England, and except in being tweeled (sic) and of narrow width it in no respect differs from superfine cloth."—Draper's Dict. s.v.

KHADIR, s. H. khādar; the recent alluvial bordering a large river. (See under BANGUR).

[1828.—"The river ... meanders fantastically ... through a KHADER, or valley between two ranges of hills."—Mundy, Pen and Pencil Sketches, ed. 1858, p. 130.

[The KHADIR Cup is one of the chief racing trophies open to pig-stickers in upper India.]

KHAKEE, vulgarly KHARKI, KHARKEE, s. or adj. Hind. khākī, 'dusty or dust-coloured,' from Pers. khāk, 'earth,' or 'dust'; applied to a light drab or chocolate-coloured cloth. This was the colour of the uniform worn by some of the Punjab regiments at the siege of Delhi, and became very popular in the army generally during the campaigns of 1857-58, being adopted as a convenient material by many other corps. [Gubbins (Mutinies in Oudh, 296) describes how the soldiers at Lucknow dyed their uniforms a light brown or dust colour with a mixture of black and red office inks, and Cave Brown (Punjab and Delhi, ii. 211) speaks of its introduction in place of the red uniform which gave the British soldier the name of "Lal Coortee Wallahs."]

[1858.—A book appeared called "Service and Adventures with the KHAKEE Ressalah, or Meerut Volunteer Horse during the Mutinies in 1857-8," by R. H. W. Dunlop.

[1859.—"It has been decided that the full dress will be of dark blue cloth, made up, not like the tunic, but as the native ungreekah (angarkha), and set off with red piping. The undress clothing will be entirely of KHAKEE."—Madras Govt. Order, Feb. 18, quoted in Calcutta Rev. ciii. 407.

[1862.—"KHARKEE does not catch in brambles so much as other stuffs."—Brinckman, Rifle in Cashmere, 136.]

1878.—"The Amir, we may mention, wore a KHAKI suit, edged with gold, and the well-known Herati cap."—Sat. Review, Nov. 30, 683.

[1899.—"The batteries to be painted with the KIRKEE colour, which being similar to the roads of the country, will render the vehicles invisible."—Times, July 12.

[1890-91.—The newspapers have constant references to a KHAKI election, that is an election started on a war policy, and the War Loan for the Transvaal Campaign has been known as "KHAKIS."]

Recent military operations have led to the general introduction of KHAKI as the service uniform. Something like this has been used in the East for clothing from a very early time:—

[1611.—"See if you can get me a piece of very fine brown calico to make me clothes."—Danvers, Letters, i. 109.]

KHALSA, s. and adj. Hind. from Ar. khālṣa (properly khāliṣa) 'pure, genuine.' It has various technical meanings, but, as we introduce the word, it is applied by the Sikhs to their community and church (so to call it) collectively.

1783.—"The Sicques salute each other by the expression Wah Gooroo, without any inclination of the body, or motion of the hand. The Government at large, and their armies, are denominated KHALSA, and KHALSAJEE."—Forster's Journey, ed. 1808, i. 307.

1881.—

"And all the Punjab knows me, for my father's name was known In the days of the conquering KHALSA, when I was a boy half-grown." Attar Singh loquitur, by Sowar, in an Indian paper; name and date lost.

KHAN, s. A. Turki through Pers. Khān. Originally this was a title, equivalent to Lord or Prince, used among the Mongol and Turk nomad hordes. Besides this sense, and an application to various other chiefs and nobles, it has still become in Persia, and still more in Afghanistan, a sort of vague title like "Esq.," whilst in India it has become a common affix to, or in fact part of, the name of Hindustānis out of every rank, properly, however of those claiming a Pathān descent. The tendency of swelling titles is always thus to degenerate, and when the value of Khān had sunk, a new form, Khān-Khānān (Khān of Khāns) was devised at the Court of Delhi, and applied to one of the high officers of State.

[c. 1610.—The "Assant CAOUNAS" of Pyrard de Laval, which Mr. Gray fails to identify, is probably Hasan-Khan, Hak. Soc. i. 69.

[1616.—"All the Captayens, as CHANNA CHANA (Khān-Khānān), Mahobet CHAN, CHAN John (Khān Jahān)."—Sir T. Roe, Hak. Soc. i. 192.

[1675.—"CAWN." See under GINGI.]

B. Pers. khān. A public building for the accommodation of travellers, a caravanserai. [The word appears in English as early as about 1400; see Stanf. Dict. s.v.]

1653.—"HAN est vn Serrail ou enclos que les Arabes appellent fondoux où se retirent les Carauanes, ou les Marchands Estrangers, ... ce mot de HAN est Turq, et est le mesme que Kiarauansarai ou Karbasara (see CARAVANSERAY) dont parle Belon...."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, p. 540.

1827.—"He lost all hope, being informed by his late fellow-traveller, whom he found at the KHAN, that the Nuwaub was absent on a secret expedition."—W. Scott, The Surgeon's Daughter, ch. xiii.

KHANNA, CONNAH, &c. s. This term (Pers. khāna, 'a house, a compartment, apartment, department, receptacle,' &c.) is used almost ad libitum in India in composition, sometimes with most incongruous words, as bobachee (for bāwarchī) CONNAH, 'cook-house,' BUGGY-CONNAH, 'buggy, or coach-house,' BOTTLE-KHANNA, TOSHA-KHANA (q.v.), &c. &c.

1784.—"The house, cook-room, BOTTLE-CONNAH, godown, &c., are all pucka built."—In Seton-Karr, i. 41.

KHANSAMA. See CONSUMAH.

KHANUM, s. Turki, through Pers. khānum and khānim, a lady of rank; the feminine of the title KHĀN, A (q.v.)

1404.—"... la mayor delles avia nõbre CAÑON, que quiere dezir Reyna, o Señora grande."—Clavijo, f. 52_v_.

" "The great wall and tents were for the use of the chief wife of the Lord, who was called CAÑO, and the other was for the second wife, called Quinchi CAÑO, which means 'the little lady.'"—Markham's Clavijo, 145.

1505.—"The greatest of the Begs of the Sagharichi was then Shîr Haji Beg, whose daughter, Ais-doulet Begum, Yunīs Khan married.... The Khan had three daughters by Ais-doulet Begum.... The second daughter, Kullûk Nigar KHÂNUM, was my mother.... Five months after the taking of Kabul she departed to God's mercy, in the year 911" (1505).—Baber, p. 12.

1619.—"The King's ladies, when they are not married to him ... and not near relations of his house, but only concubines or girls of the Palace, are not called begum, which is a title of queens and princesses, but only CANUM, a title given in Persia to all noble ladies."—P. della Valle, ii. 13.

KHASS, KAUSS, &c., adj. Hind. from Ar. khāṣṣ, 'special, particular, Royal.' It has many particular applications, one of the most common being to estates retained in the hands of Goyernment, which are said to be held khāṣṣ. The khāṣṣ-maḥal again, in a native house, is the women's apartment. Many years ago a white-bearded khānsamān (see CONSUMAH), in the service of one of the present writers, indulging in reminiscences of the days when he had been attached to Lord Lake's camp, in the beginning of the last century, extolled the sāhibs of those times above their successors, observing (in his native Hindustani): "In those days I think the Sahibs all came from London khāṣṣ; now a great lot of Liverpoolwālās come to the country!"

There were in the Palaces of the Great Mogul and other Mahommedan Princes of India always two Halls of Audience, or Durbar, the Dewān-i-'Ām, or Hall of the Public, and the Dewān-i-Khāṣṣ, the Special or Royal Hall, for those who had the entrée, as we say.

In the Indian Vocabulary, 1788, the word is written Coss.

KHĀSYA, n.p. A name applied to the oldest existing race in the cis-Tibetan Himālaya, between Nepal and the Ganges, i.e. in the British Districts of Kumāun and Garhwāl. The Khāsyas are Hindu in religion and customs, and probably are substantially Hindu also in blood; though in their aspect there is some slight suggestion of that of their Tibetan neighbours. There can be no ground for supposing them to be connected with the Mongoloïd nation of Kasias (see COSSYA) in the mountains south of Assam.

[1526.—"About these hills are other tribes of men. With all the investigation and enquiry I could make.... All that I could learn was that the men of these hills were called KAS. It struck me that as the Hindustanis frequently confound shīn and sīn and as Kashmīr is the chief ... city in those hills, it may have taken its name from that circumstance."—Leyden's Baber, 313.]

1799.—"The Vakeel of the rajāh of Comanh (i.e. Kumāun) of Almora, who is a learned Pandit, informs me that the greater part of the zemindars of that country are C'HASAS.... They are certainly a very ancient tribe, for they are mentioned as such in the Institutes of MENU; and their great ancestor C'HASA or C'HASYA is mentioned by Sanchoniathon, under the name of CASSIUS. He is supposed to have lived before the Flood, and to have given his name to the mountains he seized upon."—Wilford (Wilfordizing!), in As. Res. vi. 456.

1824.—"The KHASYA nation pretend to be all Rajpoots of the highest caste ... they will not even sell one of their little mountain cows to a stranger.... They are a modest, gentle, respectful people, honest in their dealings."—Heber, i. 264.

KHELÁT, n.p. The capital of the Bilūch State upon the western frontier of Sind, which gives its name to the State itself. The name is in fact the Ar. ḳal'a, 'a fort.' (See under KILLADAR.) The terminal t of the Ar. word (written ḳal'at) has for many centuries been pronounced only when the word is the first half of a compound name meaning 'Castle of ——.' No doubt this was the case with the Bilūch capital, though in its case the second part has been completely dropt out of use. Khelát (Ḳal'at)-i-Ghiljī is an example where the second part remains, though sometimes dropt.

KHIRÁJ, s. Ar. kharāj (usually pron. in India khirāj), is properly a tribute levied by a Musulman lord upon conquered unbelievers, also land-tax; in India it is almost always used for the land-revenue paid to Government; whence a common expression (also Ar.) lā khirāj, treated as one word, lākhirāj, 'rent-free.'

[c. 1590.—"In ancient times a capitation tax was imposed, called KHIRÁJ."—Āīn, ed. Jarrett, ii. 55. "Some call the whole produce of the revenue KHIRÁJ."—Ibid. ii. 57.]

1653.—"Le Sultan souffre les Chrétiens, les Iuifs, et les Indou sur ses terres, auec toute liberté de leur Loy, en payant cinq Reales d'Espagne ou plus par an, et ce tribut s'appelle KARACHE...."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, p. 48.

1784.—"... 136 beegahs, 18 of which are LACKHERAGE land, or land paying no rent."—In Seton-Karr, i. 49.

KHOA, s. Hind. and Beng. khoā, a kind of concrete, of broken brick, lime, &c., used for floors and terrace-roofs.

KHOT, s. This is a Mahrātī word, khot, in use in some parts of the Bombay Presidency as the designation of persons holding or farming villages on a peculiar tenure called khotī, and coming under the class legally defined as 'superior holders.'

The position and claims of the khots have been the subject of much debate and difficulty, especially with regard to the rights and duties of the tenants under them, whose position takes various forms; but to go into these questions would carry us much more deeply into local technicalities than would be consistent with the scope of this work, or the knowledge of the editor. Practically it would seem that the khot is, in the midst of provinces where RYOTWARRY is the ruling system, an exceptional person, holding much the position of a petty zemindar in Bengal (apart from any question of permanent settlement); and that most of the difficult questions touching khotī have arisen from this its exceptional character in Western India.

The KHOT occurs especially in the Konkan, and was found in existence when, in the early part of the last century, we occupied territory that had been subject to the Mahratta power. It is apparently traceable back at least to the time of the 'Adil Shāhī (see IDALCAN) dynasty of the Deccan. There are, however, various denominations of khot. In the Southern Konkan the khoti has long been a hereditary zemindar, with proprietary rights, and also has in many cases replaced the ancient PATEL as headman of the village; a circumstance that has caused the khoti to be sometimes regarded and defined as the holder of an office, rather than of a property. In the Northern Konkan, again, the Khotis were originally mere revenue-farmers, without proprietary or hereditary rights, but had been able to usurp both.

As has been said above, administrative difficulties as to the Khotis have been chiefly connected with their rights over, or claims from, the ryots, which have been often exorbitant and oppressive. At the same time it is in evidence that in the former distracted state of the country, a KHOTI was sometimes established in compliance with a petition of the cultivators. The Khoti "acted as a buffer between them and the extortionate demands of the revenue officers under the native Government. And this is easily comprehended, when it is remembered that formerly districts used to be farmed to the native officials, whose sole object was to squeeze as much revenue as possible out of each village. The Khot bore the brunt of this struggle. In many cases he prevented a new survey of his village, by consenting to the imposition of some new patti.[149] This no doubt he recovered from the ryots, but he gave them their own time to pay, advanced them money for their cultivation, and was a milder master than a rapacious revenue officer would have been" (Candy, pp. 20-21). See Selections from Records of Bombay Government, No. cxxxiv., N.S., viz., Selections with Notes, regarding the Khoti Tenure, compiled by E. T. Candy, Bo. C. S. 1873; also Abstract of Proceedings of the Govt. of Bombay in the Revenue Dept., April 24, 1876, No. 2474.

KHOTI, s. The holder of the peculiar KHOT tenure in the Bombay Presidency.

KHUDD, KUDD, s. This is a term chiefly employed in the Himālaya, khadd, meaning a precipitous hill-side, also a deep valley. It is not in the dictionaries, but is probably allied to the Hind. khāt, 'a pit,' Dakh.—Hind. khaḍḍā. [Platts gives Hind. khaḍ. This is from Skt. khaṇḍa, 'a gap, a chasm,' while khāt comes from Skt. khāta, 'an excavation.'] The word is in constant Anglo-Indian colloquial use at Simla and other Himālayan stations.

1837.—"The steeps about Mussoori are so very perpendicular in many places, that a person of the strongest nerve would scarcely be able to look over the edge of the narrow footpath into the KHUD, without a shudder."—Bacon, First Impressions, ii. 146.

1838.—"On my arrival I found one of the ponies at the estate had been killed by a fall over the precipice, when bringing up water from the KHUD."—Wanderings of a Pilgrim, ii. 240.

1866.—"When the men of the 43d Regt. refused to carry the guns any longer, the EURASIAN gunners, about 20 in number, accompanying them, made an attempt to bring them on, but were unequal to doing so, and under the direction of this officer (Capt. Cockburn, R.A.) threw them down a KHUD, as the ravines in the Himalaya are called...."—Bhotan and the H. of the Dooar War, by Surgeon Rennie, M.D. p. 199.

1879.—"The commander-in-chief ... is perhaps alive now because his horse so judiciously chose the spot on which suddenly to swerve round that its hind hoofs were only half over the CHUD" (sic).—Times Letter, from Simla, Aug. 15.

KHURREEF, s. Ar. kharīf, 'autumn'; and in India the crop, or harvest of the crop, which is sown at the beginning of the rainy season (April and May) and gathered in after it, including rice, the tall millets, maize, cotton, rape, sesamum, &c. The obverse crop is RUBBEE (q.v.).

[1809.—"Three weeks have not elapsed since the KUREEF crop, which consists of Bajru (see BAJRA), Jooar (see JOWAUR), several smaller kinds of grain, and cotton, was cleared from off the fields, and the same ground is already ploughed ... and sown for the great RUBBEE crop of wheat, barley and chunu (see GRAM)."—Broughton, Letters from a Mahratta Camp, ed. 1892, p. 215.]

KHUTPUT, s. This is a native slang term in Western India for a prevalent system of intrigue and corruption. The general meaning of khaṭpaṭ in Hind. and Mahr. is rather 'wrangling' and 'worry,' but it is in the former sense that the word became famous (1850-54) in consequence of Sir James Outram's struggles with the rascality, during his tenure of the Residency of Baroda.

[1881.—"KHUTPUT, or court intrigue, rules more or less in every native State, to an extent incredible among the more civilised nations of Europe."—Frazer, Records of Sport, 204.]

KHUTTRY, KHETTRY, CUTTRY, s. Hind. Khattrī, Khatrī, Skt. Kshatriya. The second, or military caste, in the theoretical or fourfold division of the Hindus. [But the word is more commonly applied to a mercantile caste, which has its origin in the Punjab, but is found in considerable numbers in other parts of India. Whether they are really of Kshatriya descent is a matter on which there is much difference of opinion. See Crooke, Tribes and Castes of N.W.P., iii. 264 seqq.] The Χατριαῖοι whom Ptolemy locates apparently towards Rājputānā are probably Kshatriyas.

[1623.—"They told me CIAUTRU was a title of honour."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. ii. 312.]

1630.—"And because CUTTERY was of a martiall temper God gave him power to sway Kingdomes with the scepter."—Lord, Banians, 5.

1638.—"Les habitans ... sont la pluspart Benyans et KETTERIS, tisserans, teinturiers, et autres ouuriers en coton."—Mandelslo, ed. 1659, 130.

[1671.—"There are also CUTTAREES, another Sect Principally about Agra and those parts up the Country, who are as the Banian Gentoos here."—In Yule, Hedges' Diary, Hak. Soc. ii. cccxi.]

1673.—"Opium is frequently eaten in great quantities by the Rashpoots, QUETERIES, and Patans."—Fryer, 193.

1726.—"The second generation in rank among these heathen is that of the SETTRE'AS."—Valentijn, Chorom. 87.

1782.—"The CHITTERY occasionally betakes himself to traffic, and the Sooder has become the inheritor of principalities."—G. Forster's Journey, ed. 1808, i. 64.

1836.—"The Banians are the mercantile caste of the original Hindoos.... They call themselves SHUDDERIES, which signifies innocent or harmless (!)"—Sir R. Phillips, Million of Facts, 322.

KHYBER PASS, n.p. The famous gorge which forms the chief gate of Afghanistan from Peshawar, properly Khaibar. [The place of the same name near Al-Madinah is mentioned in the Āīn (iii. 57), and Sir R. Burton writes: "Khaybar in Hebrew is supposed to mean a castle. D'Herbelot makes it to mean a pact or association of the Jews against the Moslems." (Pilgrimage, ed. 1893, i. 346, note).]

1519.—"Early next morning we set out on our march, and crossing the KHEIBER PASS, halted at the foot of it. The Khizer-Khail had been extremely licentious in their conduct. Both on the coming and going of our army they had shot upon the stragglers, and such of our people as lagged behind, or separated from the rest, and carried off their horses. It was clearly expedient that they should meet with a suitable chastisement."—Baber, p. 277.

1603.—"On Thursday Jamrúd was our encamping ground.

"On Friday we went through the KHAIBAR PASS, and encamped at 'Alí Musjid."—Jahángír, in Elliot, vi. 314.

1783.—"The stage from Timrood (read Jimrood) to Dickah, usually called the HYBER-PASS, being the only one in which much danger is to be apprehended from banditti, the officer of the escort gave orders to his party to ... march early on the next morning.... Timur Shah, who used to pass the winter at Peshour ... never passed through the territory of the HYBERS, without their attacking his advanced or rear guard."—Forster's Travels, ed. 1808, ii. 65-66.

1856.—

"... See the booted Moguls, like a pack Of hungry wolves, burst from their desert lair, And crowding through the KHYBER'S rocky strait, Sweep like a bloody harrow o'er the land." The Banyan Tree, p. 6.

KIDDERPORE, n.p. This is the name of a suburb of Calcutta, on the left bank of the Hoogly, a little way south of Fort William, and is the seat of the Government Dockyard. This establishment was formed in the 18th century by Gen. Kyd, "after whom," says the Imperial Gazetteer, "the village is named." This is the general belief, and was mine [H.Y.] till recently, when I found from the chart and directions in the English Pilot of 1711 that the village of Kidderpore (called in the same chart Kitherepore) then occupied the same position, i.e. immediately below "Gobarnapore" and that immediately below "Chittanutte" (i.e. Govindpūr and Chatānatī (see CHUTTANUTTY)).

1711.—"... then keep Rounding Chitti Poe (Chitpore) Bite down to Chitty Nutty Point (see CHUTTANUTTY).... The Bite below Gover Napore (Govindpūr) is Shoal, and below the Shoal is an Eddy; therefore from Gover Napore, you must stand over to the Starboard-Shore, and keep it aboard till you come up almost with the Point opposite to KIDDERY-PORE, but no longer...."—The English Pilot, p. 65.

KIL, s. Pitch or bitumen. Tam. and Mal. kīl, Ar. ḳīr, Pers. ḳīr and ḳīl.

c. 1330.—"In Persia are some springs, from which flows a kind of pitch which is called kic (read KIR) (pix dico seu pegua), with which they smear the skins in which wine is carried and stored."—Friar Jordanus, p. 10.

c. 1560.—"These are pitched with a bitumen which they call QUIL, which is like pitch."—Correa, Hak. Soc. 240.

KILLADAR, s. P.—H. ḳil'adār, from Ar. ḳal'a, 'a fort.' The commandant of a fort, castle, or garrison. The Ar. ḳal'a is always in India pronounced ḳil'a. And it is possible that in the first quotation Ibn Batuta has misinterpreted an Indian title; taking it as from Pers. kilīd, 'a key.' It may be noted with reference to ḳal'a that this Ar. word is generally represented in Spanish names by Alcala, a name borne by nine Spanish towns entered in K. Johnstone's Index Geographicus; and in Sicilian ones by Calata, e.g. Calatafimi, Caltanissetta, Caltagirone.

c. 1340.—"... Kādhi Khān, Sadr-al-Jihān, who became the chief of the Amīrs, and had the title of KALĪT-DĀR, i.e. Keeper of the keys of the Palace. This officer was accustomed to pass every night at the Sultan's door, with the bodyguard."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 196.

1757.—"The fugitive garrison ... returned with 500 more, sent by the KELLIDAR of Vandiwash."—Orme, ed. 1803, ii. 217.

1817.—"The following were the terms ... that Arni should be restored to its former governor or KILLEDAR."—Mill, iii. 340.

1829.—"Among the prisoners captured in the Fort of Hattrass, search was made by us for the KEELEDAR."—Mem. of John Shipp, ii. 210.

KILLA-KOTE, s. pl. A combination of Ar.—P. and Hind. words for a fort (ḳil'a for ḳal'a, and kōṭ), used in Western India to imply the whole fortifications of a territory (R. Drummond).

KILLUT, KILLAUT, &c., s. Ar.—H. khil'at. A dress of honour presented by a superior on ceremonial occasions; but the meaning is often extended to the whole of a ceremonial present of that nature, of whatever it may consist. [The Ar. khil-a'h properly means 'what a man strips from his person.' "There were (among the later Moguls) five degrees of khila't, those of three, five, six, or seven pieces; or they might as a special mark of favour consist of clothes that the emperor had actually worn." (See for further details Mr. Irvine in J.R.A.S., N.S., July 1896, p. 533).] The word has in Russian been degraded to mean the long loose gown which forms the most common dress in Turkistan, called generally by Schuyler 'a dressing-gown' (Germ. Schlafrock). See Fraehn, Wolga Bulgaren, p. 43.

1411.—"Several days passed in sumptuous feasts. KHIL'ATS and girdles of royal magnificence were distributed."—Abdurazzāk, in Not. et Exts. xiv. 209.

1673.—"Sir George Oxenden held it.... He defended himself and the Merchants so bravely, that he had a COLLAT or SEERPAW, (q.v.) a Robe of Honour from Head to Foot, offered him from the Great Mogul."—Fryer, 87.

1676.—"This is the Wardrobe, where the Royal Garments are kept; and from whence the King sends for the CALAAT, or a whole Habit for a Man, when he would honour any Stranger...."—Tavernier, E.T. ii. 46; [ed. Ball, ii. 98].

1774.—"A flowered satin gown was brought me, and I was dressed in it as a KHILAT."—Bogle, in Markham's Tibet, 25.

1786.—"And he the said Warren Hastings did send KELLAUTS, or robes of honour (the most public and distinguished mode of acknowledging merit known in India) to the said ministers in testimony of his approbation of their services."—Articles of Charge against Hastings, in Burke's Works, vii. 25.

1809.—"On paying a visit to any Asiatic Prince, an inferior receives from him a complete dress of honour, consisting of a KHELAUT, a robe, a turban, a shield and sword, with a string of pearls to go round the neck."—Ld. Valentia, i. 99.

1813.—"On examining the KHELAUTS ... from the great Maharajah Madajee Sindia, the serpeych (see SIRPECH) ... presented to Sir Charles Malet, was found to be composed of false stones."—Forbes, Or. Mem. iii. 50; [2nd ed. ii. 418].

KINCOB, s. Gold brocade. P.—H. kamkhāb, ḳamkhwāb, vulgarly kimkhwāb. The English is perhaps from the Gujarātī, as in that language the last syllable is short.

This word has been twice imported from the East. For it is only another form of the medieval name of an Eastern damask or brocade, CAMMOCCA. This was taken from the medieval Persian and Arabic forms kamkhā or kīmkhwā, 'damasked silk,' and seems to have come to Europe in the 13th century. F. Johnson's Dict. distinguishes between kamkhā, 'damask silk of one colour,' and kimkhā, 'damask silk of different colours.' And this again, according to Dozy, quoting Hoffmann, is originally a Chinese word kin-kha; in which doubtless kin, 'gold,' is the first element. Kim is the Fuhkien form of the word; qu. kim-hoa, 'gold-flower'? We have seen kimkhwāb derived from Pers. kam-khwāb, 'less sleep,' because such cloth is rough and prevents sleep! This is a type of many etymologies. ["The ordinary derivation of the word supposes that a man could not even dream of it who had not seen it (kam, 'little,' khwāb, 'dream')" (Yusuf Ali, Mono. on Silk, 86). Platts and the Madras Gloss. take it from kam, 'little,' khwāb, 'nap.'] Ducange appears to think the word survived in the French mocade (or moquette); but if so the application of the term must have degenerated in England. (See in Draper's Dict. mockado, the form of which has suggested a sham stuff.)

c. 1300.—"Παὶδὸς γὰρ εὐδαιμονοῦντος, καὶ τὸν πάτερα δεῖ συνευδαιμονεῖν· κατὰ τὴν ὑμνουμένην ἀντιπελάργωσιν. Ἐσθῆτα πηνοϋφη πεπομφῶς ἣν καμχᾶν ἡ Περσῶν φησι γλῶττα, δράσων εὖ ἴσθι, οὐ δίπλακα μὲν οὐδὲ μαρμαρέην οἵαν Ἑλένη ἐξύφαινεν, ἀλλ' ἠερειδῆ καὶ ποικίλην."—Letter of Theodorus the Hyrtacenian to Lucites, Protonotary and Protovestiary of the Trapezuntians. In Notices et Extraits, vi. 38.

1330.—"Their clothes are of Tartary cloth, and CAMOCAS, and other rich stuffs ofttimes adorned with gold and silver and precious stones."—Book of the Estate of the Great Kaan, in Cathay, 246.

c. 1340.—"You may reckon also that in Cathay you get three or three and a half pieces of damasked silk (CAMMOCCA) for a sommo."—Pegolotti, ibid. 295.

1342.—"The King of China had sent to the Sultan 100 slaves of both sexes for 500 pieces of KAMKHĀ, of which 100 were made in the City of Zaitūn...."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 1.

c. 1375.—"Thei setten this Ydole upon a Chare with gret reverence, wel arrayed with Clothes of Gold, of riche Clothes of Tartarye, of CAMACAA, and other precious Clothes."—Sir John Maundevill, ed. 1866, p. 175.

c. 1400.—"In kyrtle of CAMMAKA kynge am I cladde."—Coventry Mystery, 163.

1404.—"... é quando se del quisieron partir los Embajadores, fizo vestir al dicho Ruy Gonzalez una ropa de CAMOCAN, e dióle un sombrero, e dixole, que aquello tomase en señal del amor que el Tamurbec tenia al Señor Rey."—Clavijo, § lxxxviii.

1411.—"We have sent an ambassador who carries you from us KĪMKHĀ."—Letter from Emp. of Chian to Shah Rukh, in Not. et Ext. xiv. 214.

1474.—"And the King gave a signe to him that wayted, com̃aunding him to give to the dauncer a peece of CAMOCATO. And he taking this peece threwe it about the heade of the dauncer, and of the men and women: and useing certain wordes in praiseng the King, threwe it before the mynstrells."—Josafa Barbaro, Travels in Persia, E.T. Hak. Soc. p. 62.

1688.—"Καμουχᾶς, Χαμουχᾶς, Pannus sericus, sive ex bombyce confectus, et more Damasceno contextus, Italis Damasco, nostris olim Camocas, de quâ voce diximus in Gloss. Mediæ Latinit. hodie etiamnum Mocade." This is followed by several quotations from Medieval Greek MSS.—Du Cange, Gloss. Med. et Inf. Graecitatis, s.v.

1712.—In the Spectator under this year see an advertisement of an "Isabella-coloured KINCOB gown flowered with green and gold."—Cited in Malcolm's Anecdotes of Manners, &c., 1808, p. 429.

1733.—"Dieser mal waren von Seiten des Bräutigams ein Stück rother KAMKA ... und eine rothe Pferdehaut; von Seiten der Braut aber ein Stück violet KAMKA."—u. s. w.—Gmelin, Reise durch Siberien, i. 137-138.

1781.—"My holiday suit, consisting of a flowered Velvet Coat of the Carpet Pattern, with two rows of broad Gold Lace, a rich KINGCOB Waistcoat, and Crimson Velvet Breeches with Gold Garters, is now a butt to the shafts of Macaroni ridicule."—Letter from An Old Country Captain, in India Gazette, Feb. 24.

1786.—"... but not until the nabob's mother aforesaid had engaged to pay for the said change of prison, a sum of £10,000 ... and that she would ransack the zenanah ... for KINCOBS, muslins, cloths, &c. &c. &c...."—Articles of Charge against Hastings, in Burke's Works, 1852, vii. 23.

1809.—"Twenty trays of shawls, KHEENKAUBS ... were tendered to me."—Ld. Valentia, i. 117.

[1813.—Forbes writes KEEMCOB, KEEMCAB, Or. Mem. 2nd i. 311; ii. 418.]

1829.—"Tired of this service we took possession of the town of Muttra, driving them out. Here we had glorious plunder—shawls, silks, satins, KHEMKAUBS, money, &c."—Mem. of John Shipp, i. 124.

KING-CROW, s. A glossy black bird, otherwise called Drongo shrike, about as large as a small pigeon, with a long forked tail, Dicrurus macrocercus, Vieillot, found all over India. "It perches generally on some bare branch, whence it can have a good look-out, or the top of a house, or post, or telegraph-wire, frequently also on low bushes, hedges, walks, or ant-hills" (Jerdon).

1883.—"... the KING-CROW ... leaves the whole bird and beast tribe far behind in originality and force of character.... He does not come into the house, the telegraph wire suits him better. Perched on it he can see what is going on ... drops, beak foremost, on the back of the kite ... spies a bee-eater capturing a goodly moth, and after a hot chase, forces it to deliver up its booty."—The Tribes on My Frontier, 143.

KIOSQUE, s. From the Turki and Pers. kūshk or kushk, 'a pavilion, a villa,' &c. The word is not Anglo-Indian, nor is it a word, we think, at all common in modern native use.

c. 1350.—"When he was returned from his expedition, and drawing near to the capital, he ordered his son to build him a palace, or as those people call it a KUSHK, by the side of a river which runs at that place, which is called Afghanpūr."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 212.

1623.—"There is (in the garden) running water which issues from the entrance of a great KIOSCK, or covered place, where one may stay to take the air, which is built at the end of the garden over a great pond which adjoins the outside of the garden, so that, like the one at Surat, it serves also for the public use of the city."—P. della Valle, i. 535; [Hak. Soc. i. 68].

KIRBEE, KURBEE, s. Hind. karbī, kirbī, Skt. kaḍamba, 'the stalk of a pot-herb.' The stalks of juār (see JOWAUR), used as food for cattle.

[1809.—"We also fell in with large ricks of KURBEE, the dried stalks of Bajiru and Jooar, two inferior kinds of grain; an excellent fodder for the camels."—Broughton, Letters from a Mahratta Camp, ed. 1892, p. 41.

[1823.—"Ordinary price of the straw (KIRBA) at harvest-time Rs. 1½ per hundred sheaves...."—Trans. Lit. Soc. Bombay, iii. 243.]

KISHM, n.p. The largest of the islands in the Persian Gulf, called by the Portuguese Queixome and the like, and sometimes by our old travellers, Kishmish. It is now more popularly called Jazīrat-al-ṭawīla, in Pers. Jaz. darāz, 'the Long Island' (like the Lewes), and the name of Kishm is confined to the chief town, at the eastern extremity, where still remains the old Portuguese fort taken in 1622, before which William Baffin the Navigator fell. But the oldest name is the still not quite extinct Brokht, which closely preserves the Greek Oaracta.

B.C. 325.—"And setting sail (from Harmozeia), in a run of 300 stadia they passed a desert and bushy island, and moored beside another island which was large and inhabited. The small desert island was named Organa (no doubt Gerun, afterwards the site of N. Hormuz—see ORMUS); and the one at which they anchored Ὀάρακτα, planted with vines and date-palms, and with plenty of corn."—Arrian, Voyage of Nearchus, ch. xxxvii.

1538.—"... so I hasted with him in the company of divers merchants for to go from Babylon (orig. Babylonia) to CAIXEM, whence he carried me to Ormuz...."—F. M. Pinto, chap. vi. (Cogan, p. 9).

1553.—"Finally, like a timorous and despairing man ... he determined to leave the city (Ormuz) deserted, and to pass over to the Isle of QUEIXOME. That island is close to the mainland of Persia, and is within sight of Ormuz at 3 leagues distance."—Barros, III. vii. 4.

1554.—"Then we departed to the Isle of Kais or Old Hormuz, and then to the island of BRAKHTA, and some others of the Green Sea, i.e. in the Sea of Hormuz, without being able to get any intelligence."—Sidi 'Ali, 67.

[1600.—"QUEIXIOME." See under RESHIRE.

[1623.—"They say likewise that Ormuz and KESCHIOME are extremely well fortified by the Moors."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. i. 188; in i. 2, KESOM.

[1652.—"KECKMISHE." See under CONGO BUNDER.]

1673.—"The next morning we had brought Loft on the left hand of the Island of KISMASH, leaving a woody Island uninhabited between KISMASH and the Main."—Fryer, 320.

1682.—"The Island QUEIXOME, or QUEIXUME, or QUIZOME, otherwise called by travellers and geographers Kechmiche, and by the natives BROKT...."—Nieuhof, Zee en Lant-Reize, ii. 103.

1817.—

"... Vases filled with KISHMEE'S golden wine And the red weepings of the Shiraz vine."—Moore, Mokanna.

1821.—"We are to keep a small force at KISHMI, to make descents and destroy boats and other means of maritime war, whenever any symptoms of piracy reappear."—Elphinstone, in Life, ii. 121.

See also BASSADORE.

KISHMISH, s. Pers. Small stoneless raisins originally imported from Persia. Perhaps so called from the island KISHM. Its vines are mentioned by Arrian, and by T. Moore! (See under KISHM.) [For the manufacture of Kishmish in Afghanistan, see Watt, Econ. Dict. VI. pt. iv. 284.]

[c. 1665.—"Usbec being the country which principally supplies Delhi with these fruits.... KICHMICHES, or raisins, apparently without stones...."—Bernier, ed. Constable, 118.]

1673.—"We refreshed ourselves an entire Day at Gerom, where a small White Grape, without any Stone, was an excellent Cordial ... they are called KISMAS Grapes, and the Wine is known by the same Name farther than where they grow."—Fryer, 242.

1711.—"I could never meet with any of the KISHMISHES before they were turned. These are Raisins, a size less than our Malagas, of the same Colour, and without Stones."—Lockyer, 233.

1883.—"KISHMISH, a delicious grape, of white elongated shape, also small and very sweet, both eaten and used for wine-making. When dried this is the Sultana raisin...."—Wills, Modern Persia, 171.

KISSMISS, s. Native servant's word for Christmas. But that festival is usually called Baṛā din, 'the great day.' (See BURRA DIN.)

KIST, s. Ar. ḳist. The yearly land revenue in India is paid by instalments which fall due at different periods in different parts of the country; each such instalment is called a ḳist, or quota. [The settlement of these instalments is ḳist-bandī.]

[1767.—"This method of comprising the whole estimate into so narrow a compass ... will convey to you a more distinct idea ... than if we transmitted a monthly account of the deficiency of each person's KISTBUNDEE."—Verelst, View of Bengal, App. 56.]

1809.—"Force was always requisite to make him pay his KISTS or tribute."—Ld. Valentia, i. 347.

1810.—"The heavy KISTS or collections of Bengal are from August to September."—Williamson, V. M. ii. 498.

1817.—"'So desperate a malady,' said the President, 'requires a remedy that shall reach its source. And I have no hesitation in stating my opinion that there is no mode of eradicating the disease, but by removing the original cause; and placing these districts, which are pledged for the security of the KISTS, beyond the reach of his Highness's management.'"—Mill, vi. 55.

KITMUTGAR, s. Hind. khidmatgār, from Ar.—P. khidmat, 'service,' therefore 'one rendering service.' The Anglo-Indian use is peculiar to the Bengal Presidency, where the word is habitually applied to a Musulman servant, whose duties are connected with serving meals and waiting at table under the CONSUMAH, if there be one. Kismutgar is a vulgarism, now perhaps obsolete. The word is spelt by Hadley in his Grammar (see under MOORS) khuzmutgâr. In the word khidmat, as in khil'at (see KILLUT), the terminal t in uninflected Arabic has long been dropt, though retained in the form in which these words have got into foreign tongues.

1759.—The wages of a KHEDMUTGAR appear as 3 Rupees a month.—In Long, p. 182.

1765.—"... they were taken into the service of Soujah Dowlah as immediate attendants on his person; Hodjee (see HADJEE) in capacity of his first KISTMUTGAR (or valet)."—Holwell, Hist. Events, &c., i. 60.

1782.—"I therefore beg to caution strangers against those race of vagabonds who ply about them under the denomination of CONSUMAHS and KISMUTDARS."—Letter in India Gazette, Sept. 28.

1784.—"The Bearer ... perceiving a quantity of blood ... called to the Hookaburdar and a KISTMUTGAR."—In Seton-Karr, i. 13.

1810.—"The KHEDMUTGAR, or as he is often termed, the Kismutgar, is with very few exceptions, a Mussulman; his business is to ... wait at table."—Williamson, V. M. i. 212.

c. 1810.—"The KITMUTGAUR, who had attended us from Calcutta, had done his work, and made his harvests, though in no very large way, of the 'Tazee Willaut' or white people."—Mrs. Sherwood, Autobiog. 283. The phrase in italics stands for tāzī Wilāyatī (see BILAYUT), "fresh or green Europeans"—GRIFFINS (q.v.).

1813.—"We ... saw nothing remarkable on the way but a KHIDMUTGAR of Chimnagie Appa, who was rolling from Poona to Punderpoor, in performance of a vow which he made for a child. He had been a month at it, and had become so expert that he went on smoothly and without pausing, and kept rolling evenly along the middle of the road, over stones and everything. He travelled at the rate of two coss a day."—Elphinstone, in Life, i. 257-8.

1878.—"We had each our own ... KITMUTGAR or table servant. It is the custom in India for each person to have his own table servant, and when dining out to take him with him to wait behind his chair."—Life in the Mofussil, i. 32.

[1889.—"Here's the KHIT coming for the late change."—R. Kipling, The Gadsbys, 24.]

KITTYSOL, KITSOL, s. This word survived till lately in the Indian Tariff, but it is otherwise long obsolete. It was formerly in common use for 'an umbrella,' and especially for the kind, made of bamboo and paper, imported from China, such as the English fashion of to-day has adopted to screen fire-places in summer. The word is Portuguese, quita-sol, 'bar-sun.' Also tirasole occurs in Scot's Discourse of Java, quoted below from Purchas. See also Hulsius, Coll. of Voyages, in German, 1602, i. 27. [Mr. Skeat points out that in Howison's Malay Dict. (1801) we have, s.v. Payong: "A KITTASOL, sombrera," which is nearer to the Port. original than any of the examples given since 1611. This may be due to the strong Portuguese influence at Malacca.]

1588.—"The present was fortie peeces of silke ... a litter chaire and guilt, and two QUITASOLES of silke."—Parkes's Mendoza, ii. 105.

1605.—"... Before the shewes came, the King was brought out vpon a man's shoulders, bestriding his necke, and the man holding his legs before him, and had many rich TYRASOLES carried ouer and round about him."—E. Scot, in Purchas, i. 181.

1611.—"Of KITTASOLES of State for to shaddow him, there bee twentie" (in the Treasury of Akbar).—Hawkins, in Purchas, i. 215.

[1614.—"QUITTA SOLLS (or sombreros)."—Foster, Letters, ii. 207.]

1615.—"The China Capt., Andrea Dittis, retorned from Langasaque and brought me a present from his brother, viz., 1 faire KITESOLL...."—Cocks's Diary, i. 28.

1648.—"... above his head was borne two KIPPE-SOLES, or Sun-skreens, made of Paper."—Van Twist, 51.

1673.—"Little but rich KITSOLLS (which are the names of several Countries for Umbrelloes)."—Fryer, 160.

1687.—"They (the Aldermen of Madras) may be allowed to have KETTYSOLS over them."—Letter of Court of Directors, in Wheeler, i. 200.

1690.—"nomen ... vulgo effertur Peritsol ... aliquando paulo aliter scribitur ... et utrumque rectius pronuntiandum est Paresol vel potius Parasol cujus significatio Appellativa est, i. q. QUITTESOL seu une Ombrelle, quâ in calidioribus regionibus utuntur homines ad caput a sole tuendum."—Hyde's Preface to Travels of Abraham Peritsol, p. vii., in Syntag. Dissertt. i.

" "No Man in India, no not the Mogul's Son, is permitted the Priviledge of wearing a KITTISAL or Umbrella.... The use of the Umbrella is sacred to the Prince, appropriated only to his use."—Ovington, 315.

1755.—"He carries a Roundell, or QUIT DE SOLEIL over your head."—Ives, 50.

1759.—In Expenses of Nawab's entertainment at Calcutta, we find: "A China KITYSOL ... Rs. 3½."—Long, 194.

1761.—A chart of Chittagong, by Barth. Plaisted, marks on S. side of Chittagong R., an umbrella-like tree, called "KITTYSOLL Tree."

[1785.—"To finish the whole, a KITTESAW (a kind of umbrella) is suspended not infrequently over the lady's head."—Diary, in Busteed, Echoes, 3rd ed. 112.]

1792.—"In those days the KETESAL, which is now sported by our very Cooks and Boatswains, was prohibited, as I have heard, d'you see, to any one below the rank of field officer."—Letter, in Madras Courier, May 3.

1813.—In the table of exports from Macao, we find:—

"KITTISOLLS, large, 2,000 to 3,000, do. small, 8,000 to 10,000," Milburn, ii. 464.

1875.—"Umbrellas, Chinese, of paper, or KETTYSOLLS."—Indian Tariff.

In another table of the same year "Chinese paper KETTISOLS, valuation Rs. 30 for a box of 110, duty 5 per cent." (See CHATTA, ROUNDEL, UMBRELLA.)

KITTYSOL-BOY, s. A servant who carried an umbrella over his master. See Milburn, ii. 62. (See examples under ROUNDEL.)

KLING, n.p. This is the name (Kălīng) applied in the Malay countries, including our Straits Settlements, to the people of Continental India who trade thither, or are settled in those regions, and to the descendants of those settlers. [Mr. Skeat remarks: "The standard Malay form is not Kāling, which is the Sumatran form, but Kĕling (K'ling or Kling). The Malay use of the word is, as a rule, restricted to Tamils, but it is very rarely used in a wider sense."]

The name is a form of KALINGA, a very ancient name for the region known as the "NORTHERN CIRCARS," (q.v.), i.e. the Telugu coast of the Bay of Bengal, or, to express it otherwise in general terms, for that coast which extends from the Kistna to the Mahānadī. "The Kalingas" also appear frequently, after the Pauranic fashion, as an ethnic name in the old Sanskrit lists of races. Kalinga appears in the earliest of Indian inscriptions, viz. in the edicts of Aśoka, and specifically in that famous edict (XIII.) remaining in fragments at Girnār and Kapurdi-giri, and more completely at Khālsī, which preserves the link, almost unique from the Indian side, connecting the histories of India and of the Greeks, by recording the names of Antiochus, Ptolemy, Antigonus, Magas, and Alexander.

Kalinga is a kingdom constantly mentioned in the Buddhist and historical legends of Ceylon; and we find commemoration of the kingdom of KALINGA and of the capital city of KALINGA_nagara_ (e.g. in Ind. Antiq. iii. 152, x. 243). It was from a daughter of a King of Kalinga that sprang, according to the Mahawanso, the famous Wijayo, the civilizer of Ceylon and the founder of its ancient royal race.

KALINGA_patam_, a port of the Ganjam district, still preserves the ancient name of Kalinga, though its identity with the Kalinganagara of the inscriptions is not to be assumed. The name in later, but still ancient, inscriptions appears occasionally as Tri-Kalinga, "the Three Kalingas"; and this probably, in a Telugu version Mūḍu-Kalinga, having that meaning, is the original of the Modogalinga of Pliny in one of the passages quoted from him. (The possible connection which obviously suggests itself of this name Trikalinga with the names Tilinga and Tilingāna, applied, at least since the Middle Ages, to the same region, will be noticed under TELINGA).

The coast of Kalinga appears to be that part of the continent whence commerce with the Archipelago at an early date, and emigration thither, was most rife; and the name appears to have been in great measure adopted in the Archipelago as the designation of India in general, or of the whole of the Peninsular part of it. Throughout the book of Malay historical legends called the Sijara Malayu the word Kaling or Kling is used for India in general, but more particularly for the southern parts (see Journ. Ind. Archip. v. 133). And the statement of Forrest (Voyage to Mergui Archip. 1792, p. 82) that Macassar "Indostan" was called "Neegree Telinga" (i.e. Nagara Telinga) illustrates the same thing and also the substantial identity of the names Telinga, Kalinga.

The name Kling, applied to settlers of Indian origin, makes its appearance in the Portuguese narratives immediately after the conquest of Malacca (1511). At the present day most, if not all of the Klings of Singapore come, not from the "Northern Circars," but from Tanjore, a purely Tamil district. And thus it is that so good an authority as Roorda van Eijsinga translates Kalīng by 'Coromandel people.' They are either Hindūs or Labbais (see LUBBYE). The latter class in British India never take domestic service with Europeans, whilst they seem to succeed well in that capacity in Singapore. "In 1876," writes Dr. Burnell, "the head-servant at Bekker's great hotel there was a very good specimen of the Nagūr Labbais; and to my surprise he recollected me as the head assistant-collector of Tanjore, which I had been some ten years before." The Hindu Klings appear to be chiefly drivers of hackney carriages and keepers of eating-houses. There is a Śiva temple in Singapore, which is served by PANDĀRĀMS (q.v.). The only Brahmans there in 1876 were certain convicts. It may be noticed that Calingas is the name of a heathen tribe of (alleged) Malay origin in the east of N. Luzon (Philippine Islands).

B.C. c. 250.—"Great is KALIÑGA conquered by the King Piyadasi, beloved of the Devas. There have been hundreds of thousands of creatures carried off.... On learning it the King ... has immediately after the acquisition of KALIÑGA, turned to religion, he has occupied himself with religion, he has conceived a zeal for religion, he applies himself to the spread of religion...."—Edict XIII. of Piyadasi (i.e. Aśoka), after M. Senart, in Ind. Antiq. x. 271. [And see V. A. Smith, Asoka, 129 seq.]

A.D. 60-70.—"... multarumque gentium cognomen Bragmanae, quorum Macco (or Macto) CALINGAE ... gentes CALINGAE mari proximi, et supra Mandaei, Malli quorum Mons Mallus, finisque tractus ejus Ganges ... novissima gente Gangaridum CALINGARUM. Regia Pertalis vocatur ... Insula in Gange est magnae amplitudinis gentem continens unam, nomine _Modo_GALINGAM.

"Ab ostio Gangis ad promontorium CALINGON et oppidum Dandaguda DCXXV. mil. passuum."—Pliny, Hist. Nat. vi. 18, 19, 20.

"In CALINGIS ejusdem Indiae gente quinquennes concipere feminas, octavum vitae annum non excedere."—Ibid. vii. 2.

c. 460.—"In the land of Wango, in the capital of Wango, there was formerly a certain Wango King. The daughter of the King of KALINGA was the principal queen of that monarch.

"That sovereign had a daughter (named Suppadewi) by his queen. Fortune-tellers predicted that she would connect herself with the king of animals (the lion), &c."—Mahawanso, ch. vi. (Turnour, p. 43).

c. 550.—In the "Bṛhat-Saṅhitâ" of Varāhamihira, as translated by Prof. Kern in the J. R. As. Soc., KALINGA appears as the name of a country in iv. 82, 86, 231, and "the KALINGAS" as an ethnic name in iv. 461, 468, v. 65, 239.

c. 640.—"After having travelled from 1400 to 1500 li, he (Hwen Thsang) arrived at the Kingdom of KIELINGKIA (Kaliñga). Continuous forests and jungles extend for many hundreds of li. The kingdom produces wild elephants of a black colour, which are much valued in the neighbouring realms.[150] In ancient times the kingdom of KALINGA possessed a dense population, insomuch that in the streets shoulders rubbed, and the naves of waggon-wheels jostled; if the passengers but lifted their sleeves an awning of immense extent was formed...."—Pèlerins Bouddh. iii. 92-93.

c. 1045.—"Bhíshma said to the prince: 'There formerly came, on a visit to me, a Brahman, from the KALINGA country....'"—Vishnu Purāna, in H. H. Wilson's Works, viii. 75.

(Trikalinga).

A.D. c. 150.—"... Τρίγλυπτον, το καὶ Τρίλιγγον, Βασιλείον· ἐν ταύτῃ ἀλεκτρυόνες λέγονται εἴναι πωγωνίαι, καὶ κόρακες καὶ ψιττακοὶ λευκοὶ."—Ptolemy, vi. 2, 23.

(A.D. —?).—Copper Grant of which a summary is given, in which the ancestors of the Donors are Vijáya Krishna and Siva Gupta Deva, monarch of the THREE KALINGAS.—Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1872, p. 171.

A.D. 876.—"... a god amongst principal and inferior kings—the chief of the devotees of Siva—Lord of TRIKALINGA—lord of the three principalities of the Gajapati (see COSPETIR), Aswapati, and Narapati...."—Copper Grant from near Jabalpur, in J.A.S.B., viii. Pt. i. p. 484.

c. 12th century.—"... The devout worshipper of Maheçvara, most venerable, great ruler of rulers, and Sovereign Lord, the glory of the Lunar race, and King of the THREE KALINGAS, Çri Mahábhava Gupta Deva...."—Copper Grant from Sambulpur, in J.A.S.B. xlvi. Pt. i. p. 177.

"... the fourth of the Agasti family, student of the Kánva section of the Yajur Veda, emigrant from TRÍKALINGA ... by name Koṇḍadeva, son of Rámaçarmá."—Ibid.

(Kling).

1511.—"... And beyond all these arguments which the merchants laid before Afonso Dalboquerque, he himself had certain information that the principal reason why this Javanese (este Iao) practised these doings was because he could not bear that the QUILINS and Chitims (see CHETTY) who were Hindoos (Gentios) should be out of his jurisdiction."—Alboquerque, Commentaries, Hak. Soc. iii. 146.

" "For in Malaca, as there was a continual traffic of people of many nations, each nation maintained apart its own customs and administration of justice, so that there was in the city one BENDARÁ (q.v.) of the natives, of Moors and heathen severally; a Bendará of the foreigners; a Bendará of the foreign merchants of each class severally; to wit, of the Chins, of the Leqeos (LOO-CHOO people), of the people of Siam, of Pegu, of the QUELINS, of the merchants from within Cape Comorin, of the merchants of India (i.e. of the Western Coast), of the merchants of Bengala...."—Correa, ii. 253.

[1533.—"QUELYS." See under TUAN.]

1552.—"E repartidos os nossos em quadrilhas roubarão a cidade, et com quãto se não buleo com as casas dos QUELINS, nem dos Pegus, nem dos Jaos ..."—Castanheda, iii. 208; see also ii. 355.

De Bry terms these people QUILLINES (iii. 98, &c.)

1601.—"5. His Majesty shall repopulate the burnt suburb (of Malacca) called Campo CLIN ..."—Agreement between the King of Johore and the Dutch, in Valentijn v. 332. [In Malay Kampong K'LING or KLING, 'Kling village.']

1602.—"About their loynes they weare a kind of Callico-cloth, which is made at CLYN in manner of a silke girdle."—E. Scot, in Purchas, i. 165.

1604.—"If it were not for the Sabindar (see SHABUNDER), the Admirall, and one or two more which are CLYN-men borne, there were no living for a Christian among them...."—Ibid. i. 175.

1605.—"The fifteenth of Iune here arrived Nockhoda (NACODA) Tingall, a CLING-man from Banda...."—Capt. Saris, in Purchas, i. 385.

1610.—"His Majesty should order that all the Portuguese and QUELINS merchants of San Thomé, who buy goods in Malacca and export them to India, San Thomé, and Bengala should pay the export duties, as the Javanese (os Jaos) who bring them in pay the import duties."—Livro das Monções, 318.

1613.—See remarks under CHELING, and, in the quotation from Godinho de Eredia, "CAMPON CHELIM" and "CHELIS of Coromandel."

1868.—"The KLINGS of Western India are a numerous body of Mahometans, and ... are petty merchants and shopkeepers."—Wallace, Malay Archip., ed. 1880, p. 20.

" "The foreign residents in Singapore mainly consist of two rival races ... viz. KLINGS from the Coromandel Coast of India, and Chinese.... The KLINGS are universally the hack-carriage (gharry) drivers, and private grooms (syces), and they also monopolize the washing of clothes.... But besides this class there are KLINGS who amass money as tradesmen and merchants, and become rich."—Collingwood, Rambles of a Naturalist, 268-9.

KOBANG, s. The name (lit. 'greater division') of a Japanese gold coin, of the same form and class as the OBANG (q.v.). The coin was issued occasionally from 1580 to 1860, and its most usual weight was 222 grs. troy. The shape was oblong, of an average length of 2½ inches and width of 1½.

[1599.—"COWPAN." See under TAEL.]

1616.—"Aug. 22.—About 10 a clock we departed from Shrongo, and paid our host for the howse a bar of COBAN gould, vallued at 5 tais 4 mas...."—Cocks's Diary, i. 165.

" Sept. 17.—"I received two bars COBAN gould with two ichibos (see ITZEBOO) of 4 to a COBAN, all gould, of Mr. Eaton to be acco. for as I should have occasion to use them."—Ibid. 176.

1705.—"Outre ces roupies il y a encore des pièces d'or qu'on appelle COUPANS, qui valent dix-neuf roupies.... Ces pièces s'appellant coupans parce-qu'elles sont longues, et si plates qu'on en pourroit couper, et c'est par allusion à notre langue qu'on les appellent ainsi."—Luillier, 256-7.

1727.—"My friend took my advice and complimented the Doctor with five Japon CUPANGS, or fifty Dutch Dollars."—A. Hamilton, ii. 86; [ed. 1744, ii. 85].

1726.—"1 gold KOEBANG (which is no more seen now) used to make 10 ryx dollars, 1 Itzebo making 2½ ryx dollars."—Valentijn, iv. 356.

1768-71.—"The coins current at Batavia are the following:—The milled Dutch gold ducat, which is worth 6 gilders and 12 stivers; the Japan gold COUPANGS, of which the old go for 24 gilders, and the new for 14 gilders and 8 stivers."—Stavorinus, E.T. i. 307.

[1813.—"COPANG." See under MACE.]

1880.—"Never give a KOBANG to a cat."—Jap. Proverb, in Miss Bird, i. 367.

KOËL, s. This is the common name in northern India of Eudynamys orientalis, L. (Fam. of Cuckoos), also called kokilā and koklā. The name koīl is taken from its cry during the breeding season, "ku-il, ku-il, increasing in vigour and intensity as it goes on. The male bird has also another note, which Blyth syllables as Ho-whee-ho, or Ho-a-o, or Ho-y-o. When it takes flight it has yet another somewhat melodious and rich liquid call; all thoroughly cuculine." (Jerdon.)

c. 1526.—"Another is the KOEL, which in length may be equal to the crow, but is much thinner. It has a kind of song, and is the nightingale of Hindustan. It is respected by the natives of Hindustan as much as the nightingale is by us. It inhabits gardens where the trees are close planted."—Baber, p. 323.

c. 1590.—"The KOYIL resembles the myneh (see MYNA), but is blacker, and has red eyes and a long tail. It is fabled to be enamoured of the rose, in the same manner as the nightingale."—Ayeen, ed. Gladwin, ii. 381; [ed. Jarrett, iii. 121].

c. 1790.—"Le plaisir que cause la fraîcheur dont on jouit sous cette belle verdure est augmenté encore par le gazouillement des oiseaux et les cris clairs et perçans du KOEWIL...."—Haafner, ii. 9.

1810.—"The KOKEELA and a few other birds of song."—Maria Graham, 22.

1883.—"This same crow-pheasant has a second or third cousin called the KOEL, which deposits its eggs in the nest of the crow, and has its young brought up by that discreditable foster-parent. Now this bird supposes that it has a musical voice, and devotes the best part of the night to vocal exercise, after the manner of the nightingale. You may call it the Indian nightingale if you like. There is a difference however in its song ... when it gets to the very top of its pitch, its voice cracks and there is an end of it, or rather there is not, for the persevering musician begins again.... Does not the Maratha novelist, dwelling on the delights of a spring morning in an Indian village, tell how the air was filled with the dulcet melody of the KOEL, the green parrot, and the peacock?"—Tribes on My Frontier, 156.

KOHINOR, n.p. Pers. Koh-i-nūr, 'Mountain of Light'; the name of one of the most famous diamonds in the world. It was an item in the Deccan booty of Alāuddīn Khiljī (dd. 1316), and was surrendered to Baber (or more precisely to his son Humāyūn) on the capture of Agra (1526). It remained in the possession of the Moghul dynasty till Nādir extorted it at Delhi from the conquered Mahommed Shāh (1739). After Nādir's death it came into the hands of Ahmed Shāh, the founder of the Afghān monarchy. Shāh Shujā', Ahmed's grandson, had in turn to give it up to Ranjīt Singh when a fugitive in his dominions. On the annexation of the Punjab in 1849 it passed to the English, and is now among the Crown jewels of England. Before it reached that position it ran through strange risks, as may be read in a most diverting story told by Bosworth Smith in his Life of Lord Lawrence (i. 327-8). In 1850-51, before being shown at the Great Exhibition in Hyde Park, it went through a process of cutting which, for reasons unintelligible to ordinary mortals, reduced its weight from 186-1/16 carats to 106-1/16. [See an interesting note in Ball's Tavernier, ii. 431 seqq.]

1526.—"In the battle in which Ibrâhim was defeated, Bikermâjit (Raja of Gwalior) was sent to hell. Bikermâjit's family ... were at this moment in Agra. When Hûmâiûn arrived ... (he) did not permit them to be plundered. Of their own free will they presented to Hûmâiûn a peshkesh (see PESHCUSH), consisting of a quantity of jewels and precious stones. Among these was one famous diamond which had been acquired by Sultân Alâeddîn. It is so valuable that a judge of diamonds valued it at half the daily expense of the whole world. It is about eight mishkals...."—Baber, p. 308.

1676.—(With an engraving of the stone.) "This diamond belongs to the Great Mogul ... and it weighs 319 Ratis (see RUTTEE) and a half, which make 279 and nine 16ths of our Carats; when it was rough it weigh'd 907 Ratis, which make 793 carats."—Tavernier, E.T. ii. 148; [ed. Ball, ii. 123].

[1842.—"In one of the bracelets was the COHI NOOR, known to be one of the largest diamonds in the world."—Elphinstone, Caubul, i. 68.]

1856.—

"He (Akbar) bears no weapon, save his dagger, hid Up to the ivory haft in muslin swathes; No ornament but that one famous gem, MOUNTAIN OF LIGHT! bound with a silken thread Upon his nervous wrist; more used, I ween, To feel the rough strap of his buckler there." The Banyan Tree.

See also (1876) Browning, Epilogue to Pacchiarotto, &c.

KOOKRY, s. Hind. kukrī, [which originally means 'a twisted skein of thread,' from kūknā, 'to wind'; and then anything curved]. The peculiar weapon of the Goorkhas, a bill, admirably designed and poised for hewing a branch or a foe. [See engravings in Egerton, Handbook of Indian Arms, pl. ix.]

1793.—"It is in felling small trees or shrubs, and lopping the branches of others for this purpose that the dagger or knife worn by every Nepaulian, and called KHOOKHERI, is chiefly employed."—Kirkpatrick's Nepaul, 118.

[c. 1826.—"I hear my friend means to offer me a CUCKERY."—Ld. Combermere, in Life, ii. 179.

[1828.—"We have seen some men supplied with COOKERIES, and the curved knife of the Ghorka."—Skinner, Excursions, ii. 129.]

1866.—"A dense jungle of bamboo, through which we had to cut a way, taking it by turns to lead, and hew a path through the tough stems with my 'KUKRI,' which here proved of great service."—Lt.-Col. T. Lewin, A Fly on the Wheel, p. 269.

KOOMKY, s. (See COOMKY.)

KOONBEE, KUNBEE, KOOLUMBEE, n.p. The name of the prevalent cultivating class in Guzerat and the Konkan, the Kurmī of N. India. Skt. kuṭumba. The Kunbī is the pure Sudra, [but the N. India branch are beginning to assert a more respectable origin]. In the Deccan the title distinguished the cultivator from him who wore arms and preferred to be called a Mahratta (Drummond).

[1598.—"The Canarijns and CORUMBIJNS are the Countrimen."—Linschoten, Hak. Soc. i. 260.

[c. 1610.—"The natives are the Bramenis, Canarins and COULOMBINS."—Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. ii. 35.

[1813.—"A Sepoy of the Mharatta or COLUMBEE tribe."—Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd ed. i. 27.]

KOOT, s. Hind. kuṭ, from Skt. kushṭa, the costum and costus of the Roman writers. (See under PUTCHOCK.)

B.C. 16.—"COSTUM molle date, et blandi mihi thuris honores."—Propertius, IV. vi. 5.

c. 70-80.—"Odorum causâ unguentorumque et deliciarum, si placet, etiam superstitionis gratiâ emantur, quoniam tunc supplicamus et COSTO."—Pliny, Hist. Nat. xxii. 56.

c. 80-90.—(From the Sinthus or Indus) "ἀντιφορτίζεται δὲ κόστος, βδέλλα, λύκιον, νάρδος...."—Periplus.

1563.—"R. And does not the Indian COSTUS grow in Guzarate?

"O. It grows in territory often subject to Guzarat, i.e. lying between Bengal and Dely and Cambay, I mean the lands of Mamdou and Chitor...."—Garcia, f. 72.

1584.—"COSTO dulce from Zindi and Cambaia."—Barret, in Hakl. ii. 413.

KOOZA, s. A GOGLET, or pitcher of porous clay; corr. of Pers. kūza. Commonly used at Bombay.

[1611.—"One sack of CUSHER to make coho."—Danvers, Letters, i. 128.]

1690.—"Therefore they carry about with them KOUSERS or Jarrs of Water, when they go abroad, to quench their thirst...."—Ovington, 295.

[1871.—"Many parts of India are celebrated for their COOJAHS or guglets, but the finest are brought from Bussorah, being light, thin, and porous, made from a whitish clay."—Riddell, Ind. Domest. Econ., 362.]

KOSHOON, s. This is a term which was affected by Tippoo Sahib in his military organisation, for a brigade, or a regiment in the larger Continental use of that word. His Piādah 'askar, or Regular Infantry, was formed into 5 Kachahris (see CUTCHERRY), composed in all of 27 Kushūns. A MS. note on the copy of Kirkpatrick's Letters in the India Office Library says that Kushoon was properly Skt. kshuni or kshauni, 'a grand division of the force of an Empire, as used in the Mahābhārata.' But the word adopted by Tippoo appears to be Turki. Thus we read in Quatremère's transl. from Abdurrazzāk: "He (Shāh Rukh) distributed to the emirs who commanded the tomāns (corps of 10,000), the KOSHŪN (corps of 1000), the sadeh (of 100), the deheh (of 10), and even to the private soldiers, presents and rewards" (Nots. et Exts. xiv. 91; see also p. 89). Again: "The soldiers of Isfahan having heard of the amnesty accorded them, arrived, KOSHŪN by KOSHŪN." (Ibid. 130.) Vambéry gives ḲOSHŪN as Or. Turki for an army, a troop (literally whatever is composed of several parts).

[1753.—"... Kara-KUSHUN, are also foot soldiers ... the name is Turkish and signifies black guard."—Hanway, I. pt. ii. 252.]

c. 1782.—"In the time of the deceased Nawab, the exercises ... of the regular troops were ... performed, and the word given according to the French system ... but now, the Sultan (Tippoo) ... changed the military code ... and altered the technical terms or words of command ... to words of the Persian and Turkish languages.... From the regular infantry 5000 men being selected, they were named KUSHOON, and the officer commanding that body was called a Sipahdar...."—Hist. of Tipu Sultan, p. 31.

[1810.—"... with a division of five regular CUSHOONS...."—Wilks, Mysore, reprint 1869, ii. 218.]

KOTOW, KOWTOW, s. From the Chinese k'o-t'ou, lit. 'knock-head'; the salutation used in China before the Emperor, his representatives, or his symbols, made by prostrations repeated a fixed number of times, the forehead touching the ground at each prostration. It is also used as the most respectful form of salutation from children to parents, and from servants to masters on formal occasions, &c.

This mode of homage belongs to old Pan-Asiatic practice. It was not, however, according to M. Pauthier, of indigenous antiquity at the Court of China, for it is not found in the ancient Book of Rites of the Cheu Dynasty, and he supposes it to have been introduced by the great destroyer and reorganiser, Tsin shi Hwangti, the Builder of the Wall. It had certainly become established by the 8th century of our era, for it is mentioned that the Ambassadors who came to Court from the famous Hārūn-al-Rashīd (A.D. 798) had to perform it. Its nature is mentioned by Marco Polo, and by the ambassadors of Shāh Rukh (see below). It was also the established ceremonial in the presence of the Mongol Khāns, and is described by Baber under the name of kornish. It was probably introduced into Persia in the time of the Mongol Princes of the house of Hulākū, and it continued to be in use in the time of Shāh 'Abbās. The custom indeed in Persia may possibly have come down from time immemorial, for, as the classical quotations show, it was of very ancient prevalence in that country. But the interruptions to Persian monarchy are perhaps against this. In English the term, which was made familiar by Lord Amherst's refusal to perform it at Pekin in 1816, is frequently used for servile acquiescence or adulation.

K'O-TOU-K'O-TOU! is often colloquially used for 'Thank you' (E. C. Baber).

c. B.C. 484.—"And afterwards when they were come to Susa in the king's presence, and the guards ordered them to fall down and do obeisance, and went so far as to use force to compel them, they refused, and said they would never do any such thing, even were their heads thrust down to the ground, for it was not their custom to worship men, and they had not come to Persia for that purpose."—Herodotus, by Rawlinson, vii. 136.

c. B.C. 464.—"Themistocles ... first meets with Artabanus the Chiliarch, and tells him that he was a Greek, and wished to have an interview with the king.... But quoth he; 'Stranger, the laws of men are various.... You Greeks, 'tis said, most admire liberty and equality, but to us of our many and good laws the best is to honour the king, and adore him by prostration, as the Image of God, the Preserver of all things.'... Themistocles, on hearing these things, says to him: 'But I, O Artabanus, ... will myself obey your laws.'..."—Plutarch, Themistoc., xxvii.

c. B.C. 390.—"Conon, being sent by Pharnabazus to the king, on his arrival, in accordance with Persian custom, first presented himself to the Chiliarch Tithraustes who held the second rank in the empire, and stated that he desired an interview with the king; for no one is admitted without this. The officer replied: 'It can be at once; but consider whether you think it best to have an interview, or to write the business on which you come. For if you come into the presence you must needs worship the king (what they call προσκυνεῖν). If this is disagreeable to you you may commit your wishes to me, without doubt of their being as well accomplished.' Then Conon says: 'Indeed it is not disagreeable to me to pay the king any honour whatever. But I fear lest I bring discredit upon my city, if belonging to a state which is wont to rule over other nations I adopt manners which are not her own, but those of foreigners.' Hence he delivered his wishes in writing to the officer."—Corn. Nepos, Conon, c. iv.

B.C. 324.—"But he (Alexander) was now downhearted, and beginning to be despairing towards the divinity, and suspicious towards his friends. Especially he dreaded Antipater and his sons. Of these Iolas was the Chief Cupbearer, whilst Kasander had come but lately. So the latter, seeing certain Barbarians prostrating themselves (προσκυνοῦντας), a sort of thing which he, having been brought up in Greek fashion, had never witnessed before, broke into fits of laughter. But Alexander in a rage gript him fast by the hair with both hands, and knocked his head against the wall."—Plutarch, Alexander, lxxiv.

A.D. 798.—"In the 14th year of Tchin-yuan, the Khalif Galun (Hārūn) sent three ambassadors to the Emperor; they performed the ceremony of kneeling and beating the forehead on the ground, to salute the Emperor. The earlier ambassadors from the Khalifs who came to China had at first made difficulties about performing this ceremony. The Chinese history relates that the Mahomedans declared that they knelt only to worship Heaven. But eventually, being better informed, they made scruple no longer."—Gaubil, Abrégé de l'Histoire des Thangs, in Amyot, Mémoires conc. les Chinois, xvi. 144.

c. 1245.—"Tartari de mandato ipsius principes suos Baiochonoy et Bato violenter ab omnibus nunciis ad ipsos venientibus faciunt adorari cum triplici genuum flexione, triplici quoque capitum suorum in terram allisione."—Vincent Bellovacensis, Spec. Historiale, l. xxix. cap. 74.

1298.—"And when they are all seated, each in his proper place, then a great prelate rises and says with a loud voice: 'Bow and adore!' And as soon as he has said this, the company bow down until their foreheads touch the earth in adoration towards the Emperor as if he were a god. And this adoration they repeat four times."—Marco Polo, Bk. ii. ch. 15.

1404.—"E ficieronle vestir dos ropas de camocan (see KINCOB), é la usanza era, quando estas roupat ponian por el Señor, de facer un gran yantar, é despues de comer de les vestir de las ropas, é entonces de fincar los finojos tres veces in tierra por reverencia del gran Señor."—Clavijo, § xcii.

" "And the custom was, when these robes were presented as from the Emperor, to make a great feast, and after eating to clothe them with the robes, and then that they should touch the ground three times with the knees to show great reverence for the Lord."—See Markham, p. 104.

1421.—"His worship Hajji Yusuf the Kazi, who was ... chief of one of the twelve imperial Councils, came forward accompanied by several Mussulmans acquainted with the languages. They said to the ambassadors: 'First prostrate yourselves, and then touch the ground three times with your heads.'"—Embassy from Shāh Rukh, in Cathay, p. ccvi.

1502.—"My uncle the elder Khan came three or four farsangs out from Tashkend, and having erected an awning, seated himself under it. The younger Khan advanced ... and when he came to the distance at which the kornish is to be performed, he knelt nine times...."—Baber, 106.

c. 1590.—The kornish under Akbar had been greatly modified:

"His Majesty has commanded the palm of the right hand to be placed upon the forehead, and the head to be bent downwards. This mode of salutation, in the language of the present age, is called Kornish."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 158.

But for his position as the head of religion, in his new faith he permitted, or claimed prostration (sijda) before him:

"As some perverse and dark-minded men look upon prostration as blasphemous man-worship, His Majesty, from practical wisdom, has ordered it to be discontinued by the ignorant, and remitted it to all ranks.... However, in the private assembly, when any of those are in waiting, upon whom the star of good fortune shines, and they receive the order of seating themselves, they certainly perform the prostration of gratitude by bowing down their foreheads to the earth."—Ibid. p. 159.

[1615.—"... Whereatt some officers called me to size-da (sij-dah), but the King answered no, no, in Persian."—Sir T. Roe, Hak. Soc. i. 244; and see ii. 296.]

1618.—"The King (Shāh 'Abbās) halted and looked at the Sultan, the latter on both knees, as is their fashion, near him, and advanced his right foot towards him to be kissed. The Sultan having kissed it, and touched it with his forehead ... made a circuit round the king, passing behind him, and making way for his companions to do the like. This done the Sultan came and kissed a second time, as did the other, and this they did three times."—P. della Valle, i. 646.

[c. 1686.—"Job (Charnock) made a salam Koornis, or low obeisance, every second step he advanced."—Orme, Fragments, quoted in Yule, Hedges' Diary, Hak. Soc. ii. xcvii.]

1816.—"Lord Amherst put into my hands ... a translation ... by Mr. Morrison of a document received at Tongchow with some others from Chang, containing an official description of the ceremonies to be observed at the public audience of the Embassador.... The Embassador was then to have been conducted by the Mandarins to the level area, where kneeling ... he was next to have been conducted to the lower end of the hall, where facing the upper part ... he was to have performed the KO-TOU with 9 prostrations; afterwards he was to have been led out of the hall, and having prostrated himself once behind the row of Mandarins, he was to have been allowed to sit down; he was further to have prostrated himself with the attendant Princes and Mandarins when the Emperor drank. Two other prostrations were to have been made, the first when the milk-tea was presented to him, and the other when he had finished drinking."—Ellis's Journal of (Lord Amherst's) Embassy to China, 213-214.

1824.—"The first ambassador, with all his following, shall then perform the ceremonial of the three kneelings and the nine prostrations; they shall then rise and be led away in proper order."—Ceremonial observed at the Court of Peking for the Reception of Ambassadors, ed. 1824, in Pauthier, 192.

1855.—"... The spectacle of one after another of the aristocracy of nature making the KOTOW to the aristocracy of the accident."—H. Martineau, Autobiog. ii. 377.

1860.—"Some Seiks, and a private in the Buffs having remained behind with the grog-carts, fell into the hands of the Chinese. On the next morning they were brought before the authorities, and commanded to perform the KOTOU. The Seiks obeyed; but Moyse, the English soldier, declaring that he would not prostrate himself before any Chinaman alive, was immediately knocked upon the head, and his body thrown upon a dunghill" (see China Correspondent of the Times). This passage prefaces some noble lines by Sir F. Doyle, ending:

"Vain mightiest fleets, of iron framed; Vain those all-shattering guns; Unless proud England keep, untamed, The strong heart of her sons. So let his name through Europe ring— A man of mean estate, Who died, as firm as Sparta's king, Because his soul was great." Macmillan's Mag. iii. 130.

1876.—"Nebba more KOWTOW big people."—Leland, 46.

1879.—"We know that John Bull adores a lord, but a man of Major L'Estrange's social standing would scarcely KOWTOW to every shabby little title to be found in stuffy little rooms in Mayfair."—Sat. Review, April 19, p. 505.

KOTUL, s. This appears to be a Turki word, though adopted by the Afghans. Kotal, 'a mountain pass, a col.' Pavet de Courteille quotes several passages, in which it occurs, from Baber's original Turki.

[1554.—"KOUTEL." See under RHINOCEROS.

[1809.—"We afterwards went on through the hills, and crossed two COTULS or passes."—Elphinstone, Caubul, ed. 1842, i. 51.]

KUBBER, KHUBBER, s. Ar.—P.—H. khabar, 'news,' and especially as a sporting term, news of game, e.g. "There is PUCKA KHUBBER of a tiger this morning."

[1828.—"... the servant informed us that there were some gongwalas, or villagers, in waiting, who had some KHUBBER (news about tigers) to give us."—Mundy, Pen and Pencil Sketches, ed. 1858, p. 53.]

1878.—"KHABAR of innumerable black partridges had been received."—Life in the Mofussil, i. 159.

1879.—"He will not tell me what KHABBAR has been received."—'Vanity Fair,' Nov. 29, p. 299.

KUBBERDAUR. An interjectional exclamation, 'Take care!' Pers. khabar-dār! 'take heed!' (see KUBBER). It is the usual cry of chokidārs to show that they are awake. [As a substantive it has the sense of a 'scout' or 'spy.']

c. 1664.—"Each omrah causeth a guard to be kept all the night long, in his particular camp, of such men that perpetually go the round, and cry KABER-DAR, have a care."—Bernier, E.T. 119; [ed. Constable, 369].

c. 1665.—"Les archers crient ensuite a pleine tête, CABERDAR, c'est à dire prends garde."—Thevenot, v. 58.

[1813.—"There is a strange custom which prevails at all Indian courts, of having a servant called a KHUBUR-DAR, or newsman, who is an admitted spy upon the chief, about whose person he is employed."—Broughton, Letters from a Mahratta Camp, ed. 1892, p. 25.]

KUHÁR, s. Hind. Kahār, [Skt. skandha-kāra, 'one who carries loads on his shoulders']. The name of a Śūdra caste of cultivators, numerous in Bahār and the N.W. Provinces, whose speciality is to carry palankins. The name is, therefore, in many parts of India synonymous with 'palankin-bearer,' and the Hindu body-servants called BEARERS (q.v.) in the Bengal Presidency are generally of this caste.

c. 1350.—"It is the custom for every traveller in India ... also to hire KAHĀRS, who carry the kitchen furniture, whilst others carry himself in the palankin, of which we have spoken, and carry the latter when it is not in use."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 415.

c. 1550.—"So saying he began to make ready a present, and sent for bulbs, roots, and fruit, birds and beasts, with the finest of fish ... which were brought by KAHĀRS in basketfuls."—Rāmāyana of Tulsi Dās, by Growse, 1878, ii. 101.

1673.—"He (the President of Bombay) goes sometimes in his Coach, drawn by large Milk-white Oxen, sometimes on Horseback, other times in Palankeens, carried by COHORS, Musselmen Porters."—Fryer, 68.

1810.—"The CAHAR, or palanquin-bearer, is a servant of peculiar utility in a country where, for four months, the intense heat precludes Europeans from taking much exercise."—Williamson, V. M. i. 209.

1873.—"Bhuí KAHÁR. A widely spread caste of rather inferior rank, whose occupation is to carry palkis, dolis, water-skins, &c.; to act as Porters ... they eat flesh and drink spirits: they are an ignorant but industrious class. Buchanan describes them as of Telinga descent...."—Dr. H. V. Carter's Notices of Castes in Bombay Pry., quoted in Ind. Antiq. ii. 154.

KULÁ, KLÁ, n.p. Burmese name of a native of Continental India; and hence misapplied also to the English and other Westerns who have come from India to Burma; in fact used generally for a Western foreigner.

The origin of this term has been much debated. Some have supposed it to be connected with the name of the Indian race, the Kols; another suggestion has connected it with Kalinga (see KLING); and a third with the Skt. kula, 'caste or tribe'; whilst the Burmese popular etymology renders it from kū, 'to cross over,' and la, 'to come,' therefore 'the people that come across (the sea).' But the true history of the word has for the first time been traced by Professor Forchhammer, to GOLA, the name applied in old Pegu inscriptions to the Indian Buddhist immigrants, a name which he identifies with the Skt. Gauḍa, the ancient name of Northern Bengal, whence the famous city of Gauṛ (see GOUR, C).

14th cent.—"The Heroes Sona and Uttara were sent to Rāmañña, which forms a part of Suvannabhūmi, to propagate the holy faith.... This town is called to this day GOLA_mattikanagara_, because of the many houses it contained made of earth in the fashion of houses of the GOLA people."—Inscr. at Kalyāni near Pegu, in Forchhammer, ii. 5.

1795.—"They were still anxious to know why a person consulting his own amusement, and master of his own time, should walk so fast; but on being informed that I was a 'COLAR,' or stranger, and that it was the custom of my country, they were reconciled to this...."—Symes, Embassy, p. 290.

1855.—"His private dwelling was a small place on one side of the court, from which the women peeped out at the KALÁS;..."—Yule, Mission to the Court of Ava (Phayre's), p. 5.

" "By a curious self-delusion, the Burmans would seem to claim that in theory at least they are white people. And what is still more curious, the Bengalees appear indirectly to admit the claim; for our servants in speaking of themselves and their countrymen, as distinguished from the Burmans, constantly made use of the term kálá admi—'black man,' as the representative of the Burmese KĂLÁ, a foreigner."—Ibid. p. 37.

KUMPÁSS, s. Hind. kampās, corruption of English compass, and hence applied not only to a marine or a surveying compass, but also to theodolites, levelling instruments, and other elaborate instruments of observation, and even to the shaft of a carriage. Thus the sextant used to be called tikunta kampāss, "the 3-cornered compass."

[1866.—"Many an amusing story did I hear of this wonderful KUMPASS. It possessed the power of reversing everything observed. Hence if you looked through the doorbeen at a fort, everything inside was revealed. Thus the Feringhees so readily took forts, not by skill or by valour, but by means of the wonderful power of the doorbeen."—Confess. of an Orderly, 175.]

KUNKUR, CONKER, &c., s. Hind. kankar, 'gravel.' As regards the definition of the word in Anglo-Indian usage it is impossible to improve on Wilson: "A coarse kind of limestone found in the soil, in large tabular strata, or interspersed throughout the superficial mould, in nodules of various sizes, though usually small." Nodular kunkur, wherever it exists, is the usual material for road metalling, and as it binds when wetted and rammed into a compact, hard, and even surface, it is an admirable material for the purpose.

c. 1781.—"Etaya is situated on a very high bank of the river Jumna, the sides of which consist of what in India is called CONCHA, which is originally sand, but the constant action of the sun in the dry season forms it almost into a vitrification" (!)—Hodges, 110.

1794.—"KONKER" appears in a Notification for tenders in Calcutta Gazette.—In Seton-Karr, ii. 135.

c. 1809.—"We came within view of Cawnpore. Our long, long voyage terminated under a high CONKUR bank."—Mrs. Sherwood, Autobiog. 381.

1810.—"... a weaker kind of lime is obtained by burning a substance called KUNKUR, which, at first, might be mistaken for small rugged flints, slightly coated with soil."—Williamson, V. M. ii. 13.

KUREEF, KHURREEF, s. Hind. adopted from Ar. kharīf ('autumn'). The crop sown just before, or at the beginning of, the rainy season, in May or June, and reaped after the rains in November-December. This includes rice, maize, the tall millets, &c. (See RUBBEE).

[1824.—"The basis on which the settlements were generally founded, was a measurement of the KHUREEF, or first crop, when it is cut down, and of the RUBBEE, or second, when it is about half a foot high...."—Malcolm, Central India, ii. 29.]

KURNOOL, n.p. The name of a city and territory in the Deccan, Karnūl of the Imp. Gazetteer; till 1838 a tributary Nawabship; then resumed on account of treason; and now since 1858 a collectorate of Madras Presidency. Properly Kandanūr; Canoul of Orme. Kirkpatrick says that the name Kurnool, Kunnool, or Kundnool (all of which forms seem to be applied corruptly to the place) signifies in the language of that country 'fine spun, clear thread,' and according to Meer Husain it has its name from its beautiful cotton fabrics. But we presume the town must have existed before it made cotton fabrics? This is a specimen of the stuff that men, even so able as Kirkpatrick, sometimes repeat after those native authorities who "ought to know better," as we are often told. [The Madras Gloss. gives the name as Tam. karnūlu, from kandena, 'a mixture of lamp-oil and burnt straw used in greasing cart-wheels' and prolu, 'village,' because when the temple at Alampur was being built, the wheels of the carts were greased here, and thus a settlement was formed.]

KUTTAUR, s. Hind. kaṭār, Skt. kaṭṭāra, 'a dagger,' especially a kind of dagger peculiar to India, having a solid blade of diamond-section, the handle of which consists of two parallel bars with a cross-piece joining them. The hand grips the cross-piece, and the bars pass along each side of the wrist. [See a drawing in Egerton, Handbook, Indian Arms, pl. ix.] Ibn Batuta's account is vivid, and perhaps in the matter of size there may be no exaggeration. Through the kindness of Col. Waterhouse I have a phototype of some Travancore weapons shown at the Calcutta Exhibition of 1883-4; among them two great kaṭārs, with sheaths made from the snouts of two saw-fishes (with the teeth remaining in). They are done to scale, and one of the blades is 20 inches long, the other 26. There is also a plate in the Ind. Antiq. (vii. 193) representing some curious weapons from the Tanjore Palace Armoury, among which are kaṭār-hilted daggers evidently of great length, though the entire length is not shown. The plate accompanies interesting notes by Mr. M. J. Walhouse, who states the curious fact that many of the blades mounted kaṭār-fashion were of European manufacture, and that one of these bore the famous name of Andrea Ferara. I add an extract. Mr. Walhouse accounts for the adoption of these blades in a country possessing the far-famed Indian steel, in that the latter was excessively brittle. The passage from Stavorinus describes the weapon, without giving a native name. We do not know what name is indicated by 'belly piercer.'

c. 1343.—"The villagers gathered round him, and one of them stabbed him with a ḲATTĀRA. This is the name given to an iron weapon resembling a plough-share; the hand is inserted into it so that the forearm is shielded; but the blade beyond is two cubits in length, and a blow with it is mortal."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 31-32.

1442.—"The blacks of this country have the body nearly naked.... In one hand they hold an Indian poignard (KATĀRAH-i-Hindī), and in the other a buckler of ox-hide ... this costume is common to the king and the beggar."—Abdurrazzāk, in India in the XVth Cent., p. 17.

c. 1526.—"On the whole there were given one tipchâk horse with the saddle, two pairs of swords with the belts, 25 sets of enamelled daggers (khanjar—see HANGER), 16 enamelled KITÂREHS, two daggers (jamdher—see JUMDUD) set with precious stones."—Baber, 338.

[c. 1590.—In the list of the Moghul arms we have: "10. KATÁRAH, price ½ R. to 1 Muhur."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 110, with an engraving, No. 9, pl. xii.]

1638.—"Les personnes de qualité portẽt dans la ceinture vne sorte d'armes, ou de poignards, courte et large, qu'ils appellent ginda (?) ou CATARRE, dont la garde et la gaine sont d'or."—Mandelslo, Paris, 1659, 223.

1673.—"They go rich in Attire, with a Poniard, or CATARRE, at their girdle."—Fryer, 93.

1690.—"... which chafes and ferments him to such a pitch; that with a CATARRY or Bagonet in his hands he first falls upon those that are near him ... killing and stabbing as he goes...."—Ovington, 237.

1754.—"To these were added an enamelled dagger (which the Indians call CUTTARRI) and two swords...."—H. of Nadir, in Hanway's Travels, ii. 386.

1768-71.—"They (the Moguls) on the left side ... wear a weapon which they call by a name that may be translated belly-piercer; it is about 14 inches long; broad near the hilt, and tapering away to a sharp point; it is made of fine steel; the handle has, on each side of it, a catch, which, when the weapon is griped by the hand, shuts round the wrist, and secures it from being dropped."—Stavorinus, E.T. i. 457.

1813.—"After a short silent prayer, Lullabhy, in the presence of all the company, waved his CATARRA, or short dagger, over the bed of the expiring man.... The patient continued for some time motionless: in half an hour his heart appeared to beat, circulation quickened, ... at the expiration of the third hour Lullabhy had effected his cure."—Forbes, Or. Mem. iii. 249; [2nd ed. ii. 272, and see i. 69].

1856.—"The manners of the bardic tribe are very similar to those of their Rajpoot clients; their dress is nearly the same, but the bard seldom appears without the 'KUTÂR,' or dagger, a representation of which is scrawled beside his signature, and often rudely engraved upon his monumental stone, in evidence of his death in the sacred duty of TRÂGÂ" (q.v.).—Forbes, Râs Mâlâ, ed. 1878, pp. 559-560.

1878.—"The ancient Indian smiths seem to have had a difficulty in hitting on a medium between this highly refined brittle steel and a too soft metal. In ancient sculptures, as in Srirangam near Trichinapalli, life-sized figures of armed men are represented, bearing KUTTARS or long daggers of a peculiar shape; the handles, not so broad as in the later KUTTARS, are covered with a long narrow guard, and the blades 2¼ inches broad at bottom, taper very gradually to a point through a length of 18 inches, more than ¾ of which is deeply channelled on both sides with 6 converging grooves. There were many of these in the Tanjor armoury, perfectly corresponding ... and all were so soft as to be easily bent."—Ind. Antiq. vii.

KUZZANNA, s. Ar.—H. khizāna, or khazāna, 'a treasury.' [In Ar. khazīnah, or khaznah, means 'a treasure,' representing 1000 kis or purses, each worth about £5 (see Burton, Ar. Nights, i. 405).] It is the usual word for the district and general treasuries in British India; and khazānchī for the treasurer.

1683.—"Ye King's Duan (see DEWAUN) had demanded of them 8000 Rupees on account of remains of last year's Tallecas (see TALLICA) ... ordering his Peasdast (Peshdast, an assistant) to see it suddenly paid in ye King's CUZZANNA."—Hedges, Diary, Hak. Soc. i. 103.

[1757.—"A mint has been established in Calcutta; continue coining gold and silver into SICCAS and MOHURS ... they shall pass current in the provinces of Bengal, Bahar and Orissa, and be received into the CADGANNA...."—Perwannah from Jaffier Ally Khan, in Verelst, App. 145.]

KUZZILBASH, n.p. Turki kizil-bāsh, 'red-head.' This title has been since the days of the Safavi (see SOPHY) dynasty in Persia, applied to the Persianized Turks, who form the ruling class in that country, from the red caps which they wore. The class is also settled extensively over Afghanistan. ["At Kābul," writes Bellew (Races of Afghanistan, 107), "he (Nādir) left as chandaul, or 'rear guard,' a detachment of 12,000 of his Kizilbāsh (so named from the red caps they wore), or Mughal Persian troops. After the death of Nādir they remained at Kābul as a military colony, and their descendants occupy a distinct quarter of the city, which is called Chandaul. These Kizilbāsh hold their own ground here, as a distinct Persian community of the Shia persuasion, against the native population of the Sunni profession. They constitute an important element in the general population of the city, and exercise a considerable influence in its local politics. Owing to their isolated position and antagonism to the native population, they are favourably inclined to the British authority."] Many of them used to take service with the Delhi emperors; and not a few do so now in our frontier cavalry regiments.

c. 1510.—"L'vsanza loro è di portare vna BERRETTA ROSSA, ch'auanza sopra la testa mezzo braccio, a guisa d'vn zon ('like a top'), che dalla parte, che si mette in testa, vine a essar larga, ristringendosi tuttauia sino in cima, et è fatta con dodici coste grosse vn dito ... ne mai tagliano barba ne mostacchi."—G. M. Angiolello, in Ramusio, ii. f. 74.

1550.—"Oltra il deserto che è sopra il Corassam fino à Samarcand ... signorreggiano Iescil bas, cioè le berrette verdi, le quali benette verdi sono alcuni Tartari Musulmani che portano le loro berrette di feltro verde acute, e cosi si fanno chiamare à differentia de Soffiani suoi capitali nemici che signoreggiano la Persia, pur anche essi Musulmani, i quali portano le BERRETTE ROSSE, quali berrette verdi e rosse, hanno continuamente hauuta fra se guerra crudelissima per causa di diversità di opinione nella loro religione."—Chaggi Memet, in Ramusio, ii. f. 16_v_. "Beyond the desert above Corassam, as far as Samarkand and the idolatrous cities, the Yeshilbas (Iescilbas) or 'Green-caps,' are predominant. These Green-caps are certain Musulman Tartars who wear pointed caps of green felt, and they are so called to distinguish them from their chief enemies the Soffians, who are predominant in Persia, who are indeed also Musulmans, but who wear RED CAPS."

1574.—"These Persians are also called Red Turks, which I believe is because they have behind on their Turbants, Red Marks, as Cotton Ribbands &c. with Red Brims, whereby they are soon discerned from other Nations."—Rauwolff, 173.

1606.—"COCELBAXAS, who are the soldiers whom they esteem most highly."—Gouvea, f. 143.

1653.—"Ie visité le KESELBACHE qui y commande vne petite forteresse, duquel ie receu beaucoup de civilitez."—De La Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, pp. 284-5.

" "KESELBACHE est vn mot composé de Kesel, qui signifie rouge, et bachi, teste, comme qui diroit TESTE ROUGE, et par ce terme s'entendent les gens de guerre de Perse, à cause du bonnet de Sophi qui est rouge."—Ibid. 545.

1673.—"Those who compose the Main Body of the Cavalry, are the CUSLE-BASHEES, or with us the Chevaliers."—Fryer, 356. Fryer also writes CUSSELBASH (Index).

1815.—"The seven Turkish tribes, who had been the chief promoters of his (Ismail's) glory and success, were distinguished by a particular dress; they wore a red cap, from which they received the Turkish name of KUZELBASH, or 'golden heads,' which has descended to their posterity."—Malcolm, H. of Persia, ii. 502-3.

1828.—"The KUZZILBASH, a Tale of Khorasan. By James Baillie Fraser."

1883.—"For there are rats and rats, and a man of average capacity may as well hope to distinguish scientifically between Ghilzais, Kuki Kheyls, Logar Maliks, Shigwals, Ghazis, Jezailchis, Hazaras, Logaris, Wardaks, Mandozais, Lepel-Griffin, and KIZILBASHES, as to master the division of the great race of rats."—Tribes on My Frontier, 15.

KYFE, n. One often meets with this word (Ar. KAIF) in books about the Levant, to indicate the absolute enjoyment of the dolce far niente. Though it is in the Hindustāni dictionaries, we never remember to have heard it used in India; but the first quotation below shows that it is, or has been, in use in Western India, in something like the Turkish sense. The proper meaning of the Ar. word is 'how?' 'in what manner?' the secondary is 'partial intoxication.' This looks almost like a parallel to the English vulgar slang of 'how comed you so?' But in fact a man's kaif is his 'howness,' i.e. what pleases him, his humour; and this passes into the sense of gaiety caused by ḥashīsh, &c.

1808.—"... a kind of confectio Japonica loaded with opium, Gānja or Bang, and causing KEIF, or the first degree of intoxication, lulling the senses and disposing to sleep."—R. Drummond.

KYOUNG, s. Burm. kyaung. A Buddhist monastery. The term is not employed by Padre Sangermano, who uses BAO, a word, he says, used by the Portuguese in India (p. 88). I cannot explain it. [See BAO.]

1799.—"The KIOUMS or convents of the Rhahaans are different in their structure from common houses, and much resemble the architecture of the Chinese; they are made entirely of wood; the roof is composed of different stages, supported by strong pillars," &c.—Symes, p. 210.

KYTHEE, s. Hind. Kaithī. A form of cursive Nagari character, used by Bunyas, &c., in Gangetic India. It is from Kāyath (Skt. Kāyastha), a member of the writer-caste.

L

LAC, s. Hind. lākh, from Skt. lākshā, for rākshā. The resinous incrustation produced on certain trees (of which the dhāk (see DHAWK) is one, but chiefly PEEPUL, and khossum [kusum, kusumb], i.e. Schleichera bijuga, trijuga) by the puncture of the Lac insect (Coccus Lacca, L.). See Roxburgh, in Vol. III. As. Res., 384 seqq.; [and a full list of the trees on which the insect feeds, in Watt, Econ. Dict. ii. 410 seq.]. The incrustation contains 60 to 70 per cent. of resinous lac, and 10 per cent. of dark red colouring matter from which is manufactured lac-dye. The material in its original crude form is called stick-lac; when boiled in water it loses its red colour, and is then termed seed-lac; the melted clarified substance, after the extraction of the dye, is turned out in thin irregular laminae called shell-lac. This is used to make sealing-wax, in the fabrication of varnishes, and very largely as a stiffening for men's hats.

Though lāk bears the same sense in Persian, and lak or luk are used in modern Arabic for sealing-wax, it would appear from Dozy (Glos., pp. 295-6, and Oosterlingen, 57), that identical or approximate forms are used in various Arabic-speaking regions for a variety of substances giving a red dye, including the coccus ilicis or Kermes. Still, we have seen no evidence that in India the word was applied otherwise than to the lac of our heading. (Garcia says that the Arabs called it loc-sumutri, 'lac of Sumatra'; probably because the Pegu lac was brought to the ports of Sumatra, and purchased there.) And this the term in the Periplus seems unquestionably to indicate; whilst it is probable that the passage quoted from Aelian is a much misconceived account of the product. It is not nearly so absurd as De Monfart's account below. The English word lake for a certain red colour is from this. So also are lacquer and lackered ware, because lac is used in some of the varnishes with which such ware is prepared.

c. A.D. 80-90.—These articles are imported (to the ports of Barbaricē, on the W. of the Red Sea) from the interior parts of Ariakē:—

"Σίδηρος Ἰνδικὸς καὶ στόμωμα (Indian iron and steel) * * * * * Λάκκος χρωμάτινος (LAC-dye)." Periplus, § 6.

c. 250.—"There are produced in India animals of the size of a beetle, of a red colour, and if you saw them for the first time you would compare them to cinnabar. They have very long legs, and are soft to the touch; they are produced on the trees that bear electrum, and they feed on the fruit of these. The Indians catch them and crush them, and with these dye their red cloaks, and the tunics under these, and everything else that they wish to turn to this colour, and to dye. And this kind of clothing is carried also to the King of Persia."—Aelian, de Nat. Animal. iv. 46.

c. 1343.—The notice of lacca in Pegolotti is in parts very difficult to translate, and we do not feel absolutely certain that it refers to the Indian product, though we believe it to be so. Thus, after explaining that there are two classes of lacca, the matura and acerba, or ripe and unripe, he goes on: "It is produced attached to stalks, i.e. to the branches of shrubs, but it ought to be clear from stalks, and earthy dust, and sand, and from costiere (?). The stalks are the twigs of the wood on which it is produced, the costiere or figs, as the Catalans call them, are composed of the dust of the thing, which when it is fresh heaps together and hardens like pitch; only that pitch is black, and those costiere or figs are red and of the colour of unripe LACCA. And more of these costiere is found in the unripe than the ripe LACCA," and so on.—Della Decima, iii. 365.

1510.—"There also grows a very large quantity of LACCA (or lacra) for making red colour, and the tree of this is formed like our trees which produce walnuts."—Varthema, 238.

1516.—"Here (in Pegu) they load much fine LAQUAR, which grows in the country."—Barbosa, Lisbon Acad., 366.

1519.—"And because he had it much in charge to get all the lac (ALACRE) that he could, the governor knowing through information of the merchants that much came to the Coast of Choromandel by the ships of Pegu and Martaban that frequented that coast...."—Correa, ii. 567.

1563.—"Now it is time to speak of the LACRE, of which so much is consumed in this country in closing letters, and for other seals, in the place of wax."—Garcia, f. 112_v_.

1582.—"LAKER is a kinde of gum that procedeth of the ant."—Castañeda, tr. by N.L., f. 33.

c. 1590.—(Recipe for Lac varnish). "LAC is used for chighs (see CHICK, A). If red, 4 ser of LAC, and 1 s. of vermilion; if yellow, 4 s. of LAC, and 1 s. zarnīkh."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 226.

1615.—"In this Iland (Goa) is the hard Waxe made (which we call Spanish Waxe), and is made in the manner following. They inclose a large plotte of ground, with a little trench filled with water; then they sticke up a great number of small staues vpon the sayd plot, that being done they bring thither a sort of pismires, farre biggar than ours, which beeing debar'd by the water to issue out, are constrained to retire themselves vppon the said staues, where they are kil'd with the Heate of the Sunne, and thereof it is that LACKA is made."—De Monfart, 35-36.

c. 1610.—"... Vne manière de boëte ronde, vernie, et LACRÈE, qui est vne ouurage de ces isles."—Pyrard de Laval, i. 127; [Hak. Soc. i. 170].

1627.—"LAC is a strange drugge, made by certain winged Pismires of the gumme of Trees."—Purchas, Pilgrimage, 569.

1644.—"There are in the territories of the Mogor, besides those things mentioned, other articles of trade, such as LACRE, both the insect lacre and the cake" (de formiga e de pasta).—Bocarro, MS.

1663.—"In one of these Halls you shall find Embroiderers ... in another you shall see Goldsmiths ... in a fourth Workmen in LACCA."—Bernier E.T. 83; [ed. Constable, 259].

1727.—"Their LACKT or japon'd Ware is without any Doubt the best in the World."—A. Hamilton, ii. 305; [ed. 1744].

LACCADIVE ISLANDS, n.p. Probably Skt. Lakśadvīpa, '100,000 Islands'; a name however which would apply much better to the Maldives, for the former are not really very numerous. There is not, we suspect, any ancient or certain native source for the name as specifically applied to the northern group of islands. Barbosa, the oldest authority we know as mentioning the group (1516), calls them Malandiva, and the Maldives Palandiva. Several of the individual islands are mentioned in the Tuhfat-al-Majāhidīn (E.T. by Rowlandson, pp. 150-52), the group itself being called "the islands of Malabar."

LACK, s. One hundred thousand, and especially in the Anglo-Indian colloquial 100,000 Rupees, in the days of better exchange the equivalent of £10,000. Hind. lākh, lak, &c., from Skt. laksha, used (see below) in the same sense, but which appears to have originally meant "a mark." It is necessary to explain that the term does not occur in the earlier Skt. works. Thus in the Talavakāra Brāhmaṇā, a complete series of the higher numerical terms is given. After śata (10), sahasra (1000), comes ayuta (10,000), prayuta (now a million), niyuta (now also a million), arbuda (100 millions), nyarbuda (not now used), nikharṇa (do.), and padma (now 10,000 millions). Laksha is therefore a modern substitute for prayuta, and the series has been expanded. This was probably done by the Indian astronomers between the 5th and 10th centuries A.D.

The word has been adopted in the Malay and Javanese, and other languages of the Archipelago. But it is remarkable that in all of this class of languages which have adopted the word it is used in the sense of 10,000 instead of 100,000 with the sole exception of the Lampungs of Sumatra, who use it correctly. (Crawfurd). (See CRORE.)

We should observe that though a lack, used absolutely for a sum of money, in modern times always implies rupees, this has not always been the case. Thus in the time of Akbar and his immediate successors the revenue was settled and reckoned in laks of DAMS (q.v.). Thus:

c. 1594.—"In the 40th year of his majesty's reign (Akbar's), his dominions consisted of 105 Sircars, subdivided into 2737 Kusbahs (see CUSBAH), the revenue of which he settled for ten years, at the annual rent of 3 Arribs, 62 Crore, 97 LACKS, 55,246 Dams...."—Ayeen, ed. Gladwin, ii. 1; [ed. Jarrett, ii. 115].

At Ormuz again we find another LACK in vogue, of which the unit was apparently the dīnār, not the old gold coin, but a degenerate dīnār of small value. Thus:

1554.—"(Money of Ormuz).—A LEQUE is equivalent to 50 pardaos of çadis, which is called 'bad money,' (and this leque is not a coin but a number by which they reckon at Ormuz): and each of these pardaos is equal to 2 azares, and each azar to 10 çadis, each çadi to 100 dinars, and after this fashion they calculate in the books of the Custom-house...."—Nunez, Lyvro dos Pesos, &c., in Subsidios, 25.

Here the azar is the Persian hazār or 1000 (dīnārs); the çadi Pers. sad or 100 (dīnārs); the LEQUE or LAK, 100,000 (dīnārs); and the tomān (see TOMAUN), which does not appear here, is 10,000 (dīnārs).

c. 1300.—"They went to the Kāfir's tent, killed him, and came back into the town, whence they carried off money belonging to the Sultan amounting to 12 LAKS. The LAK is a sum of 100,000 (silver) dīnārs, equivalent to 10,000 Indian gold dīnārs."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 106.

c. 1340.—"The Sultan distributes daily two LĀKS in alms, never less; a sum of which the equivalent in money of Egypt and Syria would be 160,000 pieces of silver."—Shihābuddīn Dimishki, in Notes and Exts., xiii. 192.

In these examples from Pinto the word is used apart from money, in the Malay form, but not in the Malay sense of 10,000:

c. 1540.—"The old man desiring to satisfie Antonio de Faria's demand, Sir, said he ... the chronicles of those times affirm, how in only four yeares and an half sixteen LACAZAAS (lacasá) of men were slain, every LACAZAA containing an hundred thousand."—Pinto (orig. cap. xlv.) in Cogan, p. 53.

c. 1546.—"... he ruined in 4 months space all the enemies countries, with such a destruction of people as, if credit may be given to our histories ... there died fifty LAQUESAAS of persons."—Ibid. p. 224.

1615.—"And the whole present was worth ten of their LEAKES, as they call them; a LEAKE being 10,000 pounds sterling; the whole 100,000 pounds sterling."—Coryat's Letters from India (Crudities, iii. f. 25_v_).

1616.—"He received twenty LECKS of roupies towards his charge (two hundred thousand pounds sterling)."—Sir T. Roe, reprint, p. 35; [Hak. Soc. i. 201, and see i. 95, 183, 238].

1651.—"Yeder LAC is hondert duysend."—Rogerius, 77.

c. 1665.—"Il faut cent mille roupies pour faire un LEK, cent mille LEKS pour faire un courou, cent mille courous pour faire un padan, et cent mille padan pour faire un nil."—Thevenot, v. 54.

1673.—"In these great Solemnities, it is usual for them to set it around with Lamps to the number of two or three LEAQUES, which is so many hundred thousand in our account."—Fryer, [p. 104, reading LECQUES].

1684.—"They have by information of the servants dug in severall places of the house, where they have found great summes of money. Under his bed were found LACKS 4½. In the House of Office two LACKS. They in all found Ten LACKS already, and make no doubt but to find more."—Hedges, Diary, Jan. 2; [Hak. Soc. i. 145].

1692.—"... a LACK of Pagodas...."—In Wheeler, i. 262.

1747.—"The Nabob and other Principal Persons of this Country are of such an extreme lacrative (sic) Disposition, and ... are so exceedingly avaritious, occasioned by the large Proffers they have received from the French, that nothing less than LACKS will go near to satisfie them."—Letter from Ft. St. David to the Court, May 2 (MS. Records in India Office).

1778.—"Sir Matthew Mite will make up the money already advanced in another name, by way of future mortgage upon his estate, for the entire purchase, 5 LACKS of roupees."—Foote, The Nabob, Act I. sc. i.

1785.—"Your servants have no Trade in this country; neither do you pay them high wages, yet in a few years they return to England with many LACS of pagodas."—Nabob of Arcot, in Burke's Speech on his Debts, Works, iv. 18.

1833.—"Tout le reste (et dans le reste il y a des intendants riches de plus de vingt LAKS) s'assied par terre."—Jacquemont, Correspond. ii. 120.

1879.—"In modern times the only numbers in practical use above 'thousands' are laksa ('LAC' or 'LAKH') and koṭi ('crore'); and an Indian sum is wont to be pointed thus: 123, 45, 67, 890, to signify 123 crores, 45 LAKHS, + 67 thousand, eight hundred and ninety."—Whitney, Sansk. Grammar, 161.

The older writers, it will be observed (c. 1600-1620), put the LAKH at £10,000; Hamilton (c. 1700) puts it at £12,500; Williamson (c. 1810) at the same; then for many years it stood again as the equivalent of £10,000; now (1880) it is little more than £8000; [now (1901) about £6666].

LACKERAGE. (See KHIRAJ.)

LALL-SHRAUB, s. Englishman's Hind. lāl-sharāb, 'red wine.' The universal name of claret in India.

[c. 1780.—"To every plate are set down two glasses; one pyramidal (like hobnob glasses in England) for LOLL SHRUB (scilicet, claret); the other a common sized wineglass for whatever beverage is most agreeable."—Diary of Mrs. Fay, in Busteed, Echoes, 123.]

LALLA, s. P.—H. lālā. In Persia this word seems to be used for a kind of domestic tutor; now for a male nurse, or as he would be called in India, 'child's bearer.' In N. India it is usually applied to a native clerk writing the vernacular, or to a respectable merchant. [For the Pers. usage see Blochmann, Āīn, i. 426 note.]

[1765.—"Amongst the first to be considered, I would recommend Juggut Seet, and one Gurdy LOLL."—Verelst, App. 218.

[1841.—"Where there are no tigers, the LALLA (scribe) becomes a shikaree."—Society in India, ii. 176.]

LAMA, s. A Tibetan Buddhist monk. Tibet. bLama (b being silent). The word is sometimes found written Llama; but this is nonsense. In fact it seems to be a popular confusion, arising from the name of the S. American quadruped which is so spelt. See quotation from Times below.

c. 1590.—"Fawning Court doctors ... said it was mentioned in some holy books that men used to live up to the age of 1000 years ... and in Thibet there were even now a class of LĀMAHS or Mongolian devotees, and recluses, and hermits that live 200 years and more...."—Badāonī, quoted by Blochmann, Āīn, i. 201.

1664.—"This Ambassador had in his suit a Physician, which was said to be of the Kingdom of Lassa, and of the Tribe Lamy or LAMA, which is that of the men of the Law in that country, as the Brahmans are in the Indies ... he related of his great LAMA that when he was old, and ready to die, he assembled his council, and declared to them that now he was passing into the Body of a little child lately born...."—Bernier, E.T. 135; [ed. Constable, 424].

1716.—"Les Thibetaines ont des Religieux nommés LAMAS."—In Lettres Edif. xii. 438.

1774.—"... ma questo primo figlio ... rinunziò la corona al secondo e lui difatti si fece religioso o LAMA del paese."—Della Tomba, 61.

c. 1818.—

"The Parliament of Thibet met— The little LAMA, called before it, Did there and then his whipping get, And, as the Nursery Gazette Assures us, like a hero bore it." T. Moore, The Little Grand Lama.

1876.—"... Hastings ... touches on the analogy between Tibet and the high valley of Quito, as described by De la Condamine, an analogy which Mr. Markham brings out in interesting detail.... But when he enlarges on the wool which is a staple of both countries, and on the animals producing it, he risks confirming in careless readers that popular impression which might be expressed in the phraseology of Fluelen—''Tis all one; 'tis alike as my fingers is to my fingers, and there is LLAMAS in both."—Rev. of Markham's Tibet, in Times, May 15.

The passage last quoted is in jesting vein, but the following is serious and delightful:—

1879.—"The landlord prostrated himself as reverently, if not as lowly, as a Peruvian before his Grand LLAMA."—Patty's Dream, a novel reviewed in the Academy, May 17.

LAMASERY, LAMASERIE, s. This is a word, introduced apparently by the French R. C. Missionaries, for a LAMA convent. Without being positive, I would say that it does not represent any Oriental word (e.g. compound of lami and SERAI), but is a factitious French word analogous to nonnerie, vacherie, laiterie, &c.

[c. 1844.—"According to the Tartars, the LAMASERY of the Five Towers is the best place you can be buried in."—Huc, Travels in Tartary, i. 78.]

LAMBALLIE, LOMBALLIE, LOMBARDIE, LUMBANAH, &c., s. Dakh. Hind. Lāmbāṛā, Mahr. Lambāṇ, with other forms in the languages of the Peninsula. [Platts connects the name with Skt. lamba, 'long, tall'; the Madras Gloss. with Skt. lampata, 'greedy.'] A wandering tribe of dealers in grain, salt, &c., better known as Banjārās (see BRINJARRY). As an Anglo-Indian word this is now obsolete. It was perhaps a corruption of Lubhāna, the name of one of the great clans or divisions of the Banjārās. [Another suggestion made is that the name is derived from their business of carrying salt (Skt. lavaṇa); see Crooke, Tribes of N.W.P. i. 158.]

1756.—"The army was constantly supplied ... by bands of people called LAMBALLIS, peculiar to the Deccan, who are constantly moving up and down the country, with their flocks, and contract to furnish the armies in the field."—Orme, ii. 102.

1785.—"What you say of the scarcity of grain in your army, notwithstanding your having a CUTWÂL (see COTWAL), and so many LUMBÂNEHS with you, has astonished us."—Letters of Tippoo, 49.

LANCHARA, s. A kind of small vessel often mentioned in the Portuguese histories of the 16th and 17th centuries. The derivation is probably Malay lanchār, 'quick, nimble.' [Mr. Skeat writes: "The real Malay form is Lanchar-an, which is regularly formed from Malay lanchār, 'swift,' and LANCHARA I believe to be a Port. form of lanchar-an, as LANCHARA could not possibly, in Malay, be formed from lanchār, as has hitherto been implied or suggested."]

c. 1535.—"In questo paese di Cambaia (read Camboja) vi sono molti fiumi, nelli quali vi sono li nauili detti LANCHARAS, cõ li quali vanno nauigando la costa di Siam...."—Sommario de' Regni, &c., in Ramusio, i. f. 336.

c. 1539.—"This King (of the Batas) understanding that I had brought him a letter and a Present from the Captain of Malaca, caused me to be entertained by the Xabundar (see SHABUNDER).... This General, accompanied with five LANCHARES and twelve Ballons, came to me to the Port where I rode at anchor."—Pinto, E.T. p. 81.

LANDWIND, s. Used in the south of India. A wind which blows seaward during the night and early morning. [The dangerous effects of it are described in Madras Gloss. s.v.] In Port. Terrenho.

1561.—"Correndo a costa com TERRENHOS."—Correa, Lendas, I. i. 115.

[1598.—"The East winds beginne to blow from off the land into the seas, whereby they are called TERREINHOS."—Linschoten, Hak. Soc. i. 234.

[1612.—"Send John Dench ... that in the morning he may go out with the LANDTORNE and return with the seatorne."—Danvers, Letters, i. 206.]

1644.—"And as it is between monsoon and monsoon (monsam) the wind is quite uncertain only at the beginning of summer. The N.W prevails more than any other wind ... and at the end of it begin the LAND WINDS (terrenhos) from midnight to about noon, and these are E. winds."—Bocarro, MS.

1673.—"... we made for the Land, to gain the LAND BREEZES. They begin about Midnight, and hold till Noon, and are by the Portugals named TERRHENOES."—Fryer, 23.

[1773.—See the account in Ives, 76.]

1838.—"We have had some very bad weather for the last week; furious LAND-WIND, very fatiguing and weakening.... Everything was so dried up, that when I attempted to walk a few yards towards the beach, the grass crunched under my feet like snow."—Letters from Madras, 199-200.

LANGASAQUE, n.p. The most usual old form for the Japanese city which we now call Nagasaki (see Sainsbury, passim).

1611.—"After two or three dayes space a Iesuite came vnto vs from a place called LANGESACKE, to which place the Carake of Macao is yeerely wont to come."—W. Adams, in Purchas, i. 126.

1613.—The Journal of Capt. John Saris has both NANGASAQUE and LANGASAQUE.—Ibid. 366.

1614.—"Geve hym counsell to take heed of one Pedro Guzano, a papist Christian, whoe is his hoste at Miaco; for a lyinge fryre (or Jesuit) tould Mr. Peacock at LANGASAQUE that Capt. Adams was dead in the howse of the said Guzano, which now I know is a lye per letters I received...."—Cocks, to Wickham, in Diary, &c., ii. 264.

1618.—"It has now com to passe, which before I feared, that a company of rich usurers have gotten this sentence against us, and com doune together every yeare to LANGASAQUE and this place, and have allwais byn accustomed to buy by the pancado (as they call it), or whole sale, all the goodes which came in the carick from Amacan, the Portingales having no prevelegese as we have."—The same to the E.I. Co., ii. 207-8.

Two years later Cocks changes his spelling and adopts NANGASAQUE (Ibid. 300 and to the end).

LAN JOHN, LANGIANNE, &c., n.p. Such names are applied in the early part of the 17th century to the Shan or Laos State of Luang Praban on the Mekong. Lan-chan is one of its names signifying in Siamese, it is said, 'a million of elephants.' It is known to the Burmese by the same name (Len-Shen). It was near this place that the estimable French traveller Henri Mouhot died, in 1861.

1587.—"I went from Pegu to Iamahey (see JANGOMAY), which is in the country of the LANGEIANNES; it is fiue and twentie dayes iourney North-east from Pegu."—Fitch, in Hakl. ii.

c. 1598.—"Thus we arrived at LANCHAN, the capital of the Kingdom (Lao) where the King resides. It is a Kingdom of great extent, but thinly inhabited, because it has been frequently devastated by Pegu."—De Morga, 98.

1613.—"There reigned in Pegu in the year 1590 a King called Ximindo ginico, Lord reigning from the confines and roots of Great Tartary, to the very last territories bordering on our fortress of Malaca. He kept at his court the principal sons of the Kings of Ová, Tangu, Porão, Lanjão (i.e. Ava, Taungu, Prome, LANJANG), Jangomá, Siam, Camboja, and many other realms, making two and thirty of the white umbrella."—Bocarro, 117.

1617.—"The merchants of the country of LAN JOHN, a place joining to the country of Jangoma (JANGOMAY) arrived at the city of JUDEA ... and brought great store of merchandize."—Sainsbury, ii. 90.

1663.—"Entre tant et de si puissans Royaumes du dernier Orient, desquels on n'a presque iamais entendu parler en Europe, il y en a vn qui se nomme LAO, et plus proprement le Royaume des LANGIENS ... le Royaume n'a pris son nom que du grand nombre d'Elephants qui s'y rencontrent: de vray ce mot de LANGIENS signifie proprement, miliers d'Elephants."—Marini, H. Novvelle et Cvrievse des Royaumes de Tunquin et de Lao (Fr. Tr., Paris, 1666), 329, 337.

1668.—LANCHANG appears in the Map of Siam in De la Loubère's work, but we do not find it in the book itself.

c. 1692.—"LAOS est situé sous le même Climat que Tonquin; c'est un royaume grand et puissant, separé des Etats voisins par des forets et par des deserts.... Les principales villes sont LANDJAM et Tsiamaja."—Kaempfer, H. du Japon, i. 22-3.

LANTEA, s. A swift kind of boat frequently mentioned by F. M. Pinto and some early writers on China; but we are unable to identify the word.

c. 1540.—"... that ... they set sail from Liampoo for Malaca, and that being advanced as far as the Isle of Sumbor they had been set upon by a Pyrat, a Guzarat by Nation, called Coia Acem, who had three Junks, and four LANTEEAS...."—Pinto, E.T. p. 69.

c. 1560.—"There be other lesser shipping than Iunkes, somewhat long, called Bancones, they place three Oares on a side, and rowe very well, and load a great deal of goods; there be other lesse called LANTEAS, which doe rowe very swift, and beare a good burthen also: and these two sorts of Ships, viz., Bancones and LANTEAS, because they are swift, the theeues do commonly vse."—Caspar da Cruz, in Purchas, iii. 174.

LAOS, n.p. A name applied by the Portuguese to the civilised people who occupied the inland frontier of Burma and Siam, between those countries on the one hand and China and Tongking on the other; a people called by the Burmese SHANS, a name which we have in recent years adopted. They are of the same race of Thai to which the Siamese belong, and which extends with singular identity of manners and language, though broken into many separate communities, from Assam to the Malay Peninsula. The name has since been frequently used as a singular, and applied as a territorial name to the region occupied by this people immediately to the North of Siam. There have been a great number of separate principalities in this region, of which now one and now another predominated and conquered its neighbours. Before the rise of Siam the most important was that of which Sakotai was the capital, afterwards represented by Xieng-mai, the Zimmé of the Burmese and the JANGOMAY of some old English documents. In later times the chief States were Muang Luang Praban (see LAN JOHN) and Vien-shan, both upon the Mekong. It would appear from Lieut. Macleod's narrative, and from Garnier, that the name of LAO is that by which the branch of these people on the Lower Mekong, i.e. of those two States, used to designate themselves. Muang Praban is still quasi independent; Vien-Shan was annexed with great cruelties by Siam, c. 1828.

1553.—"Of silver of 11 dinheiros alloy he (Alboquerque) made only a kind of money called Malaquezes, which silver came thither from Pegu, whilst from Siam came a very pure silver of 12 dinheiros assay, procured from certain people called LAOS, lying to the north of these two kingdoms."—Barros, II. vi. 6.

1553.—"... certain very rugged mountain ranges, like the Alps, inhabited by the people called Gueos who fight on horseback, and with whom the King of Siam is continually at war. They are near him only on the north, leaving between the two the people called LAOS, who encompass this Kingdom of Siam, both on the North, and on the East along the river Mecon ... and on the south adjoin these LAOS the two Kingdoms of CAMBOJA and Choampa (see CHAMPA), which are on the sea-board. These LAOS ... though they are lords of so great territories, are all subject to this King of Siam, though often in rebellion against him."—Ibid. III. ii. 5.

" "Three Kingdoms at the upper part of these, are those of the LAOS, who (as we have said) obey Siam through fear: the first of these is called Jangoma (see JANGOMAY), the chief city of which is called Chiamay ... the second Chancray Chencran: the third Lanchaa (see LAN JOHN) which is below the others, and adjoins the Kingdom of Cacho, or Cauchichina...."—Ibid.

c. 1560.—"These LAOS came to Camboia, downe a River many daies Iournie, which they say to have his beginning in China as many others which runne into the Sea of India; it hath eight, fifteene, and twentie fathome water, as myselfe saw by experience in a great part of it; it passeth through manie vnknowne and desart Countries of great Woods and Forests where there are innumerable Elephants, and many Buffes ... and certayne beastes which in that Countrie they call Badas (see ABADA)."—Gaspar da Cruz, in Purchas, iii. 169.

c. 1598.—"... I offered to go to the LAOS by land, at my expense, in search of the King of Cambodia, as I knew that that was the road to go by...."—Blas de Herman Gonzalez, in De Morga (E.T. by Hon. H. Stanley, Hak. Soc.), p. 97.

1641.—"Concerning the Land of the LOUWEN, and a Journey made thereunto by our Folk in Anno 1641" (&c.).—Valentijn, III. Pt. ii. pp. 50 seqq.

1663.—"Relation Novvele et Cvrievse dv Royavme de LAO.—Traduite de l'Italien du P. de Marini, Romain. Paris, 1666."

1766.—"Les peuples de LAO, nos voisins, n'admittent ni la question ni les peines arbitraires ... ni les horribles supplices qui sont parmi nous en usage; mais aussi nous les regardons comme de barbares.... Toute l'Asie convient que nous dansons beaucoup mieux qu'eux."—Voltaire, Dialogue XXI., André des Couches à Siam.

LAR, n.p. This name has had several applications.

(A). To the region which we now call Guzerat, in its most general application. In this sense the name is now quite obsolete; but it is that used by most of the early Arab geographers. It is the Λαρικὴ of Ptolemy; and appears to represent an old Skt. name Laṭa, adj. Laṭaka, or Laṭika. ["The name Láṭa appears to be derived from some local tribe, perhaps the Lattas, who, as r and l are commonly used for each other, may possibly be the well-known Rashṭrakúṭas since their great King Amoghavarsha (A.D. 851-879) calls the name of the dynasty Ratta."—Bombay Gazetteer, I. pt. i. 7.]

c. A.D. 150.—"Τῆς δὲ Ἰνδοσκυθίας τὰ ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν τὰ μεν ἀπὸ θάλασσης κατέχει ἡ Λαρικὴ χώρα, ἐν ᾗ μεσόγειοι ἀπὸ μεν δύσεως τοῦ Ναμάδου ποταμοῦ πόλις ἥδε.... Βαρύγαζα ἐμπόριον."—Ptolemy, VII. ii. 62.

c. 940.—"On the coast, e.g. at Ṣaimūr, at Sūbāra, and at Tāna, they speak LĀRĪ; these provinces give their name to the Sea of LĀR (LĀRAWĪ) on the coast of which they are situated."—Maṣ'ūdi, i. 381.

c. 1020.—"... to Kach the country producing gum (moḳl, i.e. BDELLIUM, q.v.), and bárdrúd (?) ... to Somnát, fourteen (parasangs); to Kambáya, thirty ... to Tána five. There you enter the country of LÁRÁN, where is Jaimúr" (i.q. Ṣaimúr, see CHOUL).—Al-Birūni, in Elliot, i. 66.

c. 1190.—"Udaya the Parmâr mounted and came. The Dors followed him from LĀR...."—The Poem of Chand Bardai, E.T. by Beames, in Ind. Antiq. i. 275.

c. 1330.—"A certain Traveller says that Tāna is a city of Guzerat (Juzrāt) in its eastern part, lying west of Malabar (Munībār); whilst Ibn Sa'yid says that it is the furthest city of LĀR (Al-Lār), and very famous among traders."—Abulfeda, in Gildemeister, p. 188.

(B). To the Delta region of the Indus, and especially to its western part. Sir H. Elliot supposes the name in this use, which survived until recently, to be identical with the preceding, and that the name had originally extended continuously over the coast, from the western part of the Delta to beyond Bombay (see his Historians, i. 378). We have no means of deciding this question (see LARRY BUNDER).

c. 1820.—"Díwal ... was reduced to ruins by a Muhammedan invasion, and another site chosen to the eastward. The new town still went by the same name ... and was succeeded by Lári Bandar or the port of LÁR, which is the name of the country forming the modern delta, particularly the western part."—M‘Murdo, in J. R. As. Soc. i. 29.

(C). To a Province on the north of the Persian Gulf, with its capital.

c. 1220.—LAR is erroneously described by Yakūt as a great island between Sirāf and Kish. But there is no such island.[151] It is an extensive province of the continent. See Barbier de Meynard, Dict. de la Perse, p. 501.

c. 1330.—"We marched for three days through a desert ... and then arrived at LĀR, a big town having springs, considerable streams, and gardens, and fine bazars. We lodged in the hermitage of the pious Shaikh Abu Dulaf Muḥammad...."—Ibn Batuta, ii. 240.

c. 1487.—"Retorneing alongest the coast, forneagainst Ormuos there is a towne called LAR, a great and good towne of merchaundise, about ij^{ml}. houses...."—Josafa Barbaro, old E.T. (Hak. Soc.) 80.

[c. 1590.—"LÁR borders on the mountains of Great Tibet. To its north is a lofty mountain which dominates all the surrounding country, and the ascent of which is arduous...."—Āīn, ed. Jarrett, ii. 363.]

1553.—"These benefactions the Kings of Ormuz ... pay to this day to a mosque which that Caciz (see CASIS) had made in a district called Hongez of Sheikh Doniar, adjoining the city of LARA, distant from Ormuz over 40 leagues."—Barros, II. ii. 2.

1602.—"This man was a Moor, a native of the Kingdom of LARA, adjoining that of Ormuz: his proper name was Cufo, but as he was a native of the Kingdom of LARA he took a surname from the country, and called himself Cufo LARYM."—Couto, IV. vii. 6.

1622.—"LAR, as I said before, is capital of a great province or kingdom, which till our day had a prince of its own, who rightfully or wrongfully reigned there absolutely; but about 23 years since, for reasons rather generous than covetous, as it would seem, it was attacked by Abbas K. of Persia, and the country forcibly taken.... Now LAR is the seat of a Sultan dependent on the Khan of Shiraz...."—P. della Valle, ii. 322.

1727.—"And 4 Days Journey within Land, is the City of LAAR, which according to their fabulous tradition is the Burying-place of Lot...."—A. Hamilton, i. 92; [ed. 1744].

LARĀĪ, s. This Hind. word, meaning 'fighting,' is by a curious idiom applied to the biting and annoyance of fleas and the like. [It is not mentioned in the dictionaries of either Fallon or Platts.] There is a similar idiom (jang kardan) in Persian.

LAREK, n.p. Lārak; an island in the Persian Gulf, not far from the island of Jerun or ORMUS.

[1623.—"At noon, being near LARECK, and no wind stirring, we cast Anchor."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. i. 3.]

1685.—"We came up with the Islands of Ormus and ARACK ..." (called LARECK afterwards).—Hedges, Diary, May 23; [Hak. Soc. i. 202].

LARIN, s. Pers. lārī. A peculiar kind of money formerly in use on the Persian Gulf, W. Coast of India, and in the Maldive Islands, in which last it survived to the last century. The name is there retained still, though coins of the ordinary form are used. It is sufficiently described in the quotations, and representations are given by De Bry and Tavernier. The name appears to have been derived from the territory of LAR on the Persian Gulf. (See under that word, [and Mr. Gray's note on Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. i. 232 seq.].)

1525.—"As tamgas LARYS valem cada hũa sesêmta reis...."—Lembrança, das Cousas da India, 38.

c. 1563.—"I have seen the men of the Country who were Gentiles take their children, their sonnes and their daughters, and have desired the Portugalls to buy them, and I have seene them sold for eight or ten LARINES apiece, which may be of our money x s. or xiii s. iiii d."—Master Caesar Frederike, in Hakl. ii. 343.

1583.—Gasparo Balbi has an account of the LARINO, the greater part of which seems to be borrowed literatim by Fitch in the succeeding quotation. But Balbi adds: "The first who began to strike them was the King of LAR, who formerly was a powerful King in Persia, but is now a small one."—f. 35.

1587.—"The said LARINE is a strange piece of money, not being round, as all other current money in Christianitie, but is a small rod of silver, of the greatnesse of the pen of a goose feather ... which is wrested so that two endes meet at the just half part, and in the head thereof is a stamp Turkesco, and these be the best current money in all the Indias, and 6 of these LARINES make a duckat."—R. Fitch, in Hakl. ii. 407.

1598.—"An Oxe or a Cowe is there to be bought for one LARIJN, which is as much as halfe a Gilderne."—Linschoten, 28; [Hak. Soc. i. 94; in i. 48 LARYNEN; see also i. 242].

c. 1610.—"La monnoye du Royaume n'est que d'argent et d'vne sorte. Ce sont des pieces d'argent qu'ils appellent LARINS, de valeur de huit sols ou enuiron de nostre monnoye ... longues comme le doigt mais redoublées...."—Pyrard de Laval, i. 163; [Hak. Soc. i. 232].

1613.—"We agreed with one of the Governor's kinred for twenty LARIES (twenty shillings) to conduct us...."—N. Whithington, in Purchas, i. 484.

1622.—"The LARI is a piece of money that I will exhibit in Italy, most eccentric in form, for it is nothing but a little rod of silver of a fixed weight, and bent double unequally. On the bend it is marked with some small stamp or other. It is called LARI because it was the peculiar money of the Princes of LAR, invented by them when they were separated from the Kingdom of Persia.... In value every 5 LARI are equal to a piastre or patacca of reals of Spain, or 'piece of eight' as we choose to call it."—P. della Valle, ii. 434.

LARKIN, s. (obsolete). A kind of drink—apparently a sort of PUNCH—which was popular in the Company's old factories. We know the word only on the authority of Pietro della Valle; but he is the most accurate of travellers. We are in the dark as to the origin of the name. On the one hand its form suggests an eponymus among the old servants of the Company, such as Robert Larkin, whom we find to have been engaged for the service in 1610, and to have died chief of the Factory of Patani, on the E. coast of the Malay Peninsula, in 1616. But again we find in a Vocabulary of "Certaine Wordes of the Naturall Language of Iaua," in Drake's Voyage (Hak. iv. 246): "Larnike = Drinke." Of this word we can trace nothing nearer than (Javan.) larih, 'to pledge, or invite to drink at an entertainment,' and (Malay) larih-larahan, 'mutual pledging to drink.' It will be observed that della Valle assigns the drink especially to Java.

1623.—"Meanwhile the year 1622 was drawing near its close, and its last days were often celebrated of an evening in the House of the English, with good fellowship. And on one of these occasions I learned from them how to make a beverage called LARKIN, which they told me was in great vogue in Java, and in all those other islands of the Far East. This said beverage seemed to me in truth an admirable thing,—not for use at every meal (it is too strong for that),—but as a tonic in case of debility, and to make tasty possets, much better than those we make with Muscatel wines or Cretan malmseys. So I asked for the recipe; and am taking it to Italy with me.... It seemed odd to me that those hot southern regions, as well as in the environs of Hormuz here, where also the heat is great, they should use both spice in their food and spirits in their drink, as well as sundry other hot beverages like this LARKIN."—P. della Valle, ii. 475.

LARRY-BUNDER, n.p. The name of an old seaport in the Delta of the Indus, which succeeded Daibul (see DIUL-SIND) as the chief haven of Sind. We are doubtful of the proper orthography. It was in later Mahommedan times called Lāhorī-bandar, probably from presumed connection with Lahore as the port of the Punjab (Elliot, i. 378). At first sight M‘Murdo's suggestion that the original name may have been Lārī-bandar, from LĀR, the local name of the southern part of Sind, seems probable. M‘Murdo, indeed, writing about 1820, says that the name Lārī-Bandar was not at all familiar to natives; but if accustomed to the form Lāhorī-bandar they might not recognize it in the other. The shape taken however by what is apparently the same name in our first quotation is adverse to M‘Murdo's suggestion.

1030.—"This stream (the Indus) after passing (Alor) ... divides into two streams; one empties itself into the sea in the neighbourhood of the city of LŪHARĀNĪ, and the other branches off to the East, to the borders of Kach, and is known by the name of Sind Sāgar, i.e. Sea of Sind."—Al-Birūnī, in Elliot, i. 49.

c. 1333.—"I travelled five days in his company with Alā-ul-Mulk, and we arrived at the seat of his Government, i.e. the town of LĀHARI, a fine city situated on the shore of the great Sea, and near which the River Sind enters the sea. Thus two great waters join near it; it possesses a grand haven, frequented by the people of Yemen, of Fārs (etc).... The Amir Alā-ul-Mulk ... told me that the revenue of this place amounted to 60 laks a year."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 112.

1565.—"Blood had not yet been spilled, when suddenly, news came from Thatta, that the Firingis had passed LĀHORĪ-BANDAR, and attacked the city."—Táríkh-i-Táhiri, in Elliot, i. 277.

[1607.—"Then you are to saile for LAWRIE in the Bay of the River Syndus."—Birdwood, First Letter-book, 251.

[1611.—"I took ... LARREE, the port town of the River Sinda."—Danvers, Letters, i. 162.]

1613.—"In November 1613 the Expedition arrived at LAUREBUNDER, the port of Sinde, with Sir Robert Shirley and his company."—Sainsbury, i. 321.

c. 1665.—"Il se fait aussi beaucoup de trafic au LOURE-BENDER, qui est à trois jours de Tatta sur la mer, où la rade est plus excellente pour Vaisseaux, qu'en quelque autre lieu que ce soit des Indes."—Thevenot, v. 159.

1679.—"... If Suratt, Baroach, and BUNDURLAREE in Scinda may be included in the same Phyrmaund to be customs free ... then that they get these places and words inserted."—Ft. St. Geo. Consns., Feb. 20. In Notes and Exts., No. 1. Madras, 1871.

1727.—"It was my Fortune ... to come to LARRIBUNDER, with a Cargo from Mallebar, worth above £10,000."—A. Hamilton, i. 116; [ed. 1744, i. 117, LARRIBUNDAR].

1739.—"But the Castle and town of LOHRE BENDER, with all the country to the eastward of the river ATTOK, and of the waters of the SCIND, and NALA SUNKHRA, shall, as before, belong to the Empire of Hindostan."—H. of Nadir, in Hanway, ii. 387.

1753.—"Le bras gauche du Sind se rend à LAHERI, où il s'épanche en un lac; et ce port, qui est celui de Tattanagar, communément est nommé LAÛRÉBENDER."—D'Anville, p. 40.

1763.—"Les Anglois ont sur cette côte encore plusieurs petits établissement (sic) où ils envoyent des premiers Marchands, des sous-Marchands, ou des Facteurs, comme en Scindi, à trois endroits, à Tatta, une grande ville et la résidence du Seigneur du païs, à LAR BUNDER, et à Schah-Bunder."—Niebuhr, Voyage, ii. 8.

1780.—"The first place of any note, after passing the bar, is LARIBUNDA, about 5 or 6 leagues from the sea."—Dunn's Oriental Navigator, 5th ed. p. 96.

1813.—"LARIBUNDER. This is commonly called Scindy River, being the principal branch of the Indus, having 15 feet water on the bar, and 6 or 7 fathoms inside; it is situated in latitude about 24° 30′ north. ... The town of LARIBUNDER is about 5 leagues from the sea, and vessels of 200 tons used to proceed up to it."—Milburn, i. 146.

1831.—"We took the route by Durajee and Meerpoor.... The town of LAHORY was in sight from the former of these places, and is situated on the same, or left bank of the Pittee."—A. Burnes, 2nd. ed. i. 22.

LASCAR, s. The word is originally from Pers. lashkar, 'an army,' 'a camp.' This is usually derived from Ar. al 'askar, but it would rather seem that Ar. 'askar, 'an army' is taken from this Pers. word: whence lashkarī, 'one belonging to an army, a soldier.' The word lascár or láscár (both these pronunciations are in vogue) appears to have been corrupted, through the Portuguese use of lashkarī in the forms lasquarin, lascari, &c., either by the Portuguese themselves, or by the Dutch and English who took up the word from them, and from these laskār has passed back again into native use in this corrupt shape. The early Portuguese writers have the forms we have just named in the sense of 'soldier'; but lascar is never so used now. It is in general the equivalent of khalāsī, in the various senses of that word (see CLASSY), viz. (1) an inferior class of artilleryman ('gun-lascar'); (2) a tent-pitcher, doing other work which the class are accustomed to do; (3) a sailor. The last is the most common Anglo-Indian use, and has passed into the English language. The use of lascar in the modern sense by Pyrard de Laval shows that this use was already general on the west coast at the beginning of the 17th century, [also see quotation from Pringle below]; whilst the curious distinction which Pyrard makes between Lascar and Lascari, and Dr. Fryer makes between Luscar and Lascar (accenting probably Lúscar and Lascár) shows that lashkarī for a soldier was still in use. In Ceylon the use of the word lascareen for a local or civil soldier long survived; perhaps is not yet extinct. The word lashkari does not seem to occur in the Āīn.

[1523.—"Fighting men called LASCARYNS."—Alguns documentos, Tombo, p. 479.

[1538.—"My mother only bore me to be a Captain, and not your LASCAR (LASCARIN)."—Letter of Nuno da Cunha, in Barros, Dec. IV. bk. 10, ch. 21.]

1541.—"It is a proverbial saying all over INDIA (i.e. Portuguese India, see s.v.) that the good LASQUARIM, or 'soldier' as we should call him, must be an Abyssinian."—Castro, Roteiro, 73.

1546.—"Besides these there were others (who fell at Diu) whose names are unknown, being men of the lower rank, among whom I knew a LASCARYM (a man getting only 500 reis of pay!) who was the first man to lay his hand on the Moorish wall, and shouted aloud that they might see him, as many have told me. And he was immediately thrown down wounded in five places with stones and bullets, but still lived; and a noble gentleman sent and had him rescued and carried away by his slaves. And he survived, but being a common man he did not even get his pay!"—Correa, iv. 567.

1552.—"... eles os reparte polos LASCARINS de suas capitanias, q̃ assi chamão soldados."—Castanheda, ii. 67. [Mr. Whiteway notes that in the orig. repartem for reparte, and the reference should be ii. 16.]

1554.—"Moreover the Senhor Governor conceded to the said ambassador that if in the territories of Idalshaa (see IDALCAN), or in those of our Lord the King there shall be any differences or quarrels between any Portuguese LASCARINS or PEONS (piães) of ours, and LASCARINS of the territories of Idalshaa and peons of his, that the said Idalshaa shall order the delivery up of the Portuguese and peons that they may be punished if culpable. And in like manner ..."—S. Botelho, Tombo, 44.

1572.—"Erant in eo praesidio LASQUARINI circiter septingenti artis scolopettariae peritissimi."—E. Acosta, f. 236_v_.

1598.—"The soldier of Ballagate, which is called LASCARIN...."—Linschoten, 74; [in Hak. Soc. i. 264, LASCARIIN].

1600.—"Todo a mais churma e meneyo das naos são Mouros que chamão LASCHÃRES...."—Lucena, Life of St. Franc. Xav., liv. iv. p. 223.

[1602.—"... because the LASCARS (LASCARIS), for so they call the Arab sailors."—Couto, Dec. X. bk. 3, ch. 13.]

c. 1610.—"Mesmes tous les mariniers et les pilotes sont Indiens, tant Gentils que Mahometans. Tous ces gens de mer les appellent LASCARS, et les soldats LASCARITS."—Pyrard de Laval, i. 317; [Hak. Soc. i. 438; also see ii. 3, 17].

[1615.—"... two horses with six LASCERAS and two caffres (see CAFFER)."—Foster, Letters, iv. 112.]

1644.—"... The aldeas of the jurisdiction of Damam, in which district there are 4 fortified posts defended by Lascars (LASCARĪS) who are mostly native Christian soldiers, though they may be heathen as some of them are."—Bocarro, MS.

1673.—"The Seamen and Soldiers differ only in a Vowel, the one being pronounced with an u, the other with an a, as LUSCAR, a soldier, LASCAR, a seaman."—Fryer, 107.

[1683-84.—"The Warehousekeeper having Seaverall dayes advised the Council of Ship Welfares tardynesse in receiving & stowing away the Goods, ... alledging that they have not hands Sufficient to dispatch them, though we have spared them tenn LASKARS for that purpose...."—Pringle, Diary Ft. St. Geo., 1st ser. iii. 7 seq.; also see p. 43.]

1685.—"They sent also from Sofragan D. Antonio da Motta Galvaon with 6 companies, which made 190 men; the Dissava (see DISSAVE) of the adjoining provinces joined him with 4000 LASCARINS."—Ribeyro, H. of the I. of Ceylan (from French Tr., p. 241).

1690.—"For when the English Sailers at that time perceiv'd the softness of the Indian LASCARRS; how tame they were ... they embark'd again upon a new Design ... to ... rob these harmless Traffickers in the Red Sea."—Ovington, 464.

1726.—"LASCARYNS, or Loopers, are native soldiers, who have some regular maintenance, and in return must always be ready."—Valentijn, Ceylon, Names of Offices, &c., 10.

1755.—"Some LASCARS and Sepoys were now sent forward to clear the road."—Orme, ed. 1803, i. 394.

1787.—"The Field Pieces attached to the Cavalry draw up on the Right and Left Flank of the Regiment; the Artillery LASCARS forming in a line with the Front Rank the full Extent of the Drag Ropes, which they hold in their hands."—Regns. for the Hon. Company's Troops on the Coast of Coromandel, by M.-Gen. Sir Archibald Campbell, K.B. Govr. & C. in C. Madras, p. 9.

1803.—"In those parts (of the low country of Ceylon) where it is not thought requisite to quarter a body of troops, there is a police corps of the natives appointed to enforce the commands of Government in each district; they are composed of Conganies, or sergeants, Aratjies, or corporals, and LASCARINES, or common soldiers, and perform the same office as our Sheriff's men or constables."—Percival's Ceylon, 222.

1807.—"A large open boat formed the van, containing his excellency's guard of LASCOREENS, with their spears raised perpendicularly, the union colours flying, and Ceylon drums called TOMTOMS beating."—Cordiner's Ceylon, 170.

1872.—"The LASCARS on board the steamers were insignificant looking people."—The Dilemma, ch. ii.

In the following passages the original word lashkar is used in its proper sense for 'a camp.'

[1614.—"He said he bought it of a banyan in the LASKER."—Foster, Letters, ii. 142.

[1615.—"We came to the LASKER the 7th of February in the evening."—Ibid. iii. 85.]

1616.—"I tooke horse to auoyd presse, and other inconvenience, and crossed out of the LESKAR, before him."—Sir T. Roe, in Purchas, i. 559; see also 560; [Hak. Soc. ii. 324].

[1682.—"... presents to the Seir LASCARR (sar-i-lashkar, 'head of the army') this day received."—Pringle, Diary Ft. St. Geo., 1st ser. i. 84.]

LĀT, LĀT SĀHIB, s. This, a popular corruption of Lord Sahib, or Lārd Sāhib, as it is written in Hind., is the usual form from native lips, at least in the Bengal Presidency, of the title by which the Governor-General has long been known in the vernaculars. The term also extends nowadays to Lieutenant-Governors, who in contact with the higher authority become Chhoṭā ('Little') LĀT, whilst the Governor-General and the Commander-in-Chief are sometimes discriminated as the Mulkī LĀT SĀHIB [or BARĒ LĀT], and the Jangī LĀT SĀHIB ('territorial' and 'military'), the Bishop as the LĀT PĀDRĒ SĀHIB, and the Chief Justice as the LĀT JUSTY SĀHIB. The title is also sometimes, but very incorrectly, applied to minor dignitaries of the supreme Government, [whilst the common form of blessing addressed to a civil officer is "Huzūr LĀT GUVNAR, LĀT SIKRITAR ho-jāeṅ."

1824.—"He seemed, however, much puzzled to make out my rank, never having heard (he said) of any 'LORD SAHIB' except the Governor-General, while he was still more perplexed by the exposition of 'LORD Bishop SAHIB,' which for some reason or other my servants always prefer to that of LORD PADRE."—Heber, i. 69.

1837.—"The Arab, thinking I had purposely stolen his kitten, ran after the buggy at full speed, shouting as he passed Lord Auckland's tents, 'Dohā'ī, dohā'ī, Sāhib! dohā'ī, LORD SĀHIB!' (see DOAI). 'Mercy, mercy, sir! mercy, Governor-General!' The faster the horse rushed on, the faster followed the shouting Arab."—Wanderings of a Pilgrim, ii. 142.

1868.—"The old barber at Roorkee, after telling me that he had known Strachey when he first began, added, 'Ab LĀT-SEKRETUR hai! Ah! hum bhi boodda hogya!' ('Now he is Lord Secretary! Ah! I too have become old!')"—Letter from the late M.-Gen. W. W. H. Greathed.

1877.—"... in a rare but most valuable book (Galloway's Observations on India, 1825, pp. 254-8), in which the author reports, with much quiet humour, an aged native's account of the awful consequences of contempt of an order of the (as he called the Supreme Court) 'Shubreem Koorut,' the order of Impey being 'LORD JUSTEY SAHIB-kahookm,' the instruments of whose will were 'abidabis' or affidavits."—Letter from Sir J. F. Stephen, in Times, May 31.

LAT, s. Hind. lāt, used as a corruption of the English lot, in reference to an auction (Carnegie).

LĀṬ, LĀṬH, s. This word, meaning a staff or pole, is used for an obelisk or columnar monument; and is specifically used for the ancient Buddhist columns of Eastern India.

[1861-62.—"The pillar (at Besarh) is known by the people as Bhīm-Sen-kā-LĀT and Bhīm-Sen-ka-ḍanḍā."—Cunningham, Arch. Rep. i. 61.]

LATERITE, s. A term, first used by Dr. Francis Buchanan, to indicate a reddish brick-like argillaceous formation much impregnated with iron peroxide, and hardening on exposure to the atmosphere, which is found in places all over South India from one coast to the other, and the origin of which geologists find very obscure. It is found in two distinct types: viz. (1) High-level Laterite, capping especially the trap-rocks of the Deccan, with a bed from 30 or 40 to 200 feet in thickness, which perhaps at one time extended over the greater part of Peninsular India. This is found as far north as the Rajmahal and Monghyr hills. (2). Low-level Laterite, forming comparatively thin and sloping beds on the plains of the coast. The origin of both is regarded as being, in the most probable view, modified volcanic matter; the low-level laterite having undergone a further rearrangement and deposition; but the matter is too complex for brief statement (see Newbold, in J.R.A.S., vol. viii.; and the Manual of the Geol. of India, pp. xlv. seqq., 348 seqq.). Mr. King and others have found flint weapons in the low-level formation. Laterite is the usual material for road-metal in S. India, as KUNKUR (q.v.) is in the north. In Ceylon it is called CABOOK (q.v.).

1800.—"It is diffused in immense masses, without any appearance of stratification, and is placed over the granite that forms the basis of Malayala.... It very soon becomes as hard as brick, and resists the air and water much better than any brick I have seen in India.... As it is usually cut into the form of bricks for building, in several of the native dialects it is called the brick-stone (Iticacullee) [Malayāl. vettukal].... The most proper English name would be LATERITE, from Lateritis, the appellation that may be given it in science."—Buchanan, Mysore, &c., ii. 440-441.

1860.—"Natives resident in these localities (Galle and Colombo) are easily recognisable elsewhere by the general hue of their dress. This is occasioned by the prevalence along the western coast of LATERITE, or, as the Singhalese call it, CABOOK, a product of disintegrated gneiss, which being subjected to detrition communicates its hue to the soil."—Tennent's Ceylon, i. 17.

LATTEE, s. A stick; a bludgeon, often made of the male bamboo (Dendrocalamus strictus), and sometimes bound at short intervals with iron rings, forming a formidable weapon. The word is Hind. lāṭhī and laṭhī, Mahr. laṭhṭha. This is from Prakrit laṭṭhī, for Skt. yashṭi, 'a stick,' according to the Prakrit grammar of Vavaruchi (ed. Cowell, ii. 32); see also Lassen, Institutiones, Ling. Prakrit, 195. Jiskī lāṭhī, us kī bhaiṇs, is a Hind. proverb (cujus baculum ejus bubalus), equivalent to the "good old rule, the simple plan."

1830.—"The natives use a very dangerous weapon, which they have been forbidden by Government to carry. I took one as a curiosity, which had been seized on a man in a fight in a village. It is a very heavy LĀTHI, a solid male bamboo, 5 feet 5 inches long, headed with iron in a most formidable manner. There are 6 jagged semicircular irons at the top, each 2 inches in length, 1 in height, and it is shod with iron bands 16 inches deep from the top."—Wanderings of a Pilgrim, i. 133.

1878.—"After driving some 6 miles, we came upon about 100 men seated in rows on the roadside, all with LATTIES."—Life in the Mofussil, i. 114.

LATTEEAL, s. Hind. lāṭhīyāl, or, more cumbrously, lāṭhīwālā, 'a club-man,' a hired ruffian. Such gentry were not many years ago entertained in scores by planters in some parts of Bengal, to maintain by force their claims to lands for sowing indigo on.

1878.—"Doubtless there were hired LATTIALS ... on both sides."—Life in the Mofussil, ii. 6.

LAW-OFFICER. This was the official designation of a Mahommedan officer learned in the (Mahommedan) law, who was for many years of our Indian administration an essential functionary of the judges' Courts in the districts, as well as of the Sudder or Courts of Review at the Presidency.

It is to be remembered that the law administered in Courts under the Company's government, from the assumption of the Dewanny of Bengal, Bahar, and Orissa, was the Mahommedan law; at first by the hands of native CAZEES and MUFTIES, with some superintendence from the higher European servants of the Company; a superintendence which, while undergoing sundry vicissitudes of system during the next 30 years, developed gradually into a European judiciary, which again was set on an extended and quasi-permanent footing by Lord Cornwallis's Government, in Regulation IX. of 1793 (see ADAWLUT). The Mahommedan law continued, however, to be the professed basis of criminal jurisprudence, though modified more and more, as years went on, by new REGULATIONS, and by the recorded constructions and circular orders of the superior Courts, until the accomplishment of the great changes which followed the Mutiny, and the assumption of the direct government of India by the Crown (1858). The landmarks of change were (a) the enactment of the Penal Code (Act XLV. of 1860), and (b) that of the Code of Criminal Procedure (Act XXV. of 1861), followed by (c) the establishment of the High Court (July 1, 1862), in which became merged both the SUPREME COURT with its peculiar jurisdiction, and the (quondam-Company's) Sudder Courts of Review and Appeal, civil and criminal (Dewanny ADAWLVT, and Nizamat ADAWLUT).

The authoritative exposition of the Mahommedan Law, in aid and guidance of the English judges, was the function of the Mahommedan LAW-OFFICER. He sat with the judge on the bench at Sessions, i.e. in the hearing of criminal cases committed by the magistrate for trial; and at the end of the trial he gave in his written record of the proceedings with his FUTWA (q.v.) (see Regn. IX. 1793, sect. 47), which was his judgment as to the guilt of the accused, as to the definition of the crime, and as to its appropriate punishment according to Mahommedan Law. The judge was bound attentively to consider the futwa, and if it seemed to him to be consonant with natural justice, and also in conformity with the Mahommedan Law, he passed sentence (save in certain excepted cases) in its terms, and issued his warrant to the magistrate for execution of the sentence, unless it were one of death, in which case the proceedings had to be referred to the Sudder Nizamut for confirmation. In cases also where there was disagreement between the civilian judge and the Law-officer, either as to finding or sentence, the matter was referred to the Sudder Court for ultimate decision.

In 1832, certain modifications were introduced by law (Regn. VI. of that year), which declared that the futwa might be dispensed with either by referring the case for report to a PUNCHAYET (q.v.), which sat apart from the Court; or by constituting assessors in the trial (generally three in number). The frequent adoption of the latter alternative rendered the appearance of the Law-officer and his futwa much less universal as time went on. The post of LAW-OFFICER was indeed not actually abolished till 1864. But it would appear from enquiry that I have made, among friends of old standing in the Civil Service, that for some years before the issue of the Penal Code and the other reforms already mentioned, the MOOLVEE (maulavī) or Mahommedan LAW-OFFICER had, in some at least of the Bengal districts, practically ceased to sit with the judge, even in cases where no assessors were summoned.[152] I cannot trace any legislative authority for this, nor any Circular of the Sudder Nizamut; and it is not easy, at this time of day, to obtain much personal testimony. But Sir George Yule (who was Judge of Rungpore and Bogra about 1855-56) writes thus:

"The MOULVEE-ship ... must have been abolished before I became a judge (I think), which was 2 or 3 years before the Mutiny; for I have no recollection of ever sitting with a Moulvee, and I had a great number of heavy criminal cases to try in Rungpore and Bogra. Assessors were substituted for the Moulvee in some cases, but I have no recollection of employing these either."

Mr. Seton-Karr, again, who was Civil and Sessions Judge of Jessore (1857-1860), writes:

"I am quite certain of my own practice ... and I made deliberate choice of native assessors, whenever the law required me to have such functionaries. I determined never to sit with a Maulavi, as, even before the Penal Code was passed, and came into operation, I wished to get rid of FUTWAS and differences of opinion."

The office of Law-officer was formally abolished by Act XI. of 1864.

In respect of civil litigation, it had been especially laid down (Regn. of April 11, 1780, quoted below) that in suits regarding successions, inheritance, marriage, caste, and all religious usages and institutions, the Mahommedan laws with respect to Mahommedans, and the Hindū laws with respect to Hindūs, were to be considered as the general rules by which the judges were to form their decisions. In the respective cases, it was laid down, the Mahommedan and Hindū LAW-OFFICERS of the court were to attend and expound the law.

In this note I have dealt only with the Mahommedan law-officer, whose presence and co-operation was so long (it has been seen) essential in a criminal trial. In civil cases he did not sit with the judge (at least in memory of man now living), but the judge could and did, in case of need, refer to him on any point of Mahommedan Law. The Hindū LAW-OFFICER (PUNDIT) is found in the legislation of 1793, and is distinctly traceable in the Regulations down at least to 1821. In fact he is named in the Act XI. of 1864 (see quotation under CAZEE) abolishing Law-officers. But in many of the districts it would seem that he had very long before 1860 practically ceased to exist, under what circumstances exactly I have failed to discover. He had nothing to do with criminal justice, and the occasions for reference to him were presumably not frequent enough to justify his maintenance in every district. A Pundit continued to be attached to the Sudder Dewanny, and to him questions were referred by the District Courts when requisite. Neither Pundit nor Moolvee is attached to the High Court, but native judges sit on its Bench. It need only be added that under Regulation III. of 1821, a magistrate was authorized to refer for trial to the Law-officer of his district a variety of complaints and charges of a trivial character. The designation of the Law-officer was Maulavi. (See ADAWLUT, CAZEE, FUTWA, MOOLVEE, MUFTY.)

1780.—"That in all suits regarding inheritance, marriage, and caste, and other religious usages or institutions, the laws of the Koran with respect to Mahommedans, and those of the Shaster with respect to Gentoos, shall be invariably adhered to. On all such occasions the MOLAVIES or Brahmins shall respectively attend to expound the law; and they shall sign the report and assist in passing the decree."—Regulation passed by the G.-G. and Council, April 11, 1780.

1793.—"II. The LAW OFFICERS of the Sudder Dewanny Adawlut, the Nizamut Adawlut, the provincial Courts of Appeal, the courts of circuit, and the zillah and city courts ... shall not be removed but for incapacity or misconduct...."—Reg. XII. of 1793.

In §§ iv., v., vi. CAUZY and MUFTY are substituted for LAW-OFFICER, but referring to the same persons.

1799.—"IV. If the FUTWA of the LAW OFFICERS of the Nizamut Adawlut declare any person convicted of wilful murder not liable to suffer death under the Mahomedan law on the ground of ... the Court of Nizamut Adawlut shall notwithstanding sentence the prisoner to suffer death...."—Reg. VIII. of 1799.

LAXIMANA, LAQUESIMENA, &c., s. Malay Laksamana, from Skt. lakshmaṇa, 'having fortunate tokens' (which was the name of a mythical hero, brother of Rāma). This was the title of one of the highest dignitaries in the Malay State, commander of the forces.

1511.—"There used to be in Malaca five principal dignities ... the third is LASSAMANE; this is Admiral of the Sea...."—Alboquerque, by Birch, iii. 87.

c. 1539.—"The King accordingly set forth a Fleet of two hundred Sails.... And of this Navy he made General the great LAQUE XEMENA, his Admiral, of whose Valor the History of the Indiaes hath spoken in divers places."—Pinto, in Cogan, p. 38.

1553.—"LACSAMANA was harassed by the King to engage Dom Garcia; but his reply was: Sire, against the Portuguese and their high-sided vessels it is impossible to engage with low-cut LANCHARAS like ours. Leave me (to act) for I know this people well, seeing how much blood they have cost me; good fortune is now with thee, and I am about to avenge you on them. And so he did."—Barros, III. viii. 7.

[1615.—"On the morrow I went to take my leave of LAXAMAN, to whom all strangers' business are resigned."—Foster, Letters, iv. 6.]

LEAGUER, s. The following use of this word is now quite obsolete, we believe, in English; but it illustrates the now familiar German use of Lager-Bier, i.e. 'beer for laying down, for keeping' (primarily in cask). The word in this sense is neither in Minshew (1627), nor in Bayley (1730).

1747.—"That the Storekeeper do provide LEAGUERS of good Columbo or Batavia arrack."—Ft. St. David Consn., May 5 (MS. Record in India Office).

1782.—"Will be sold by Public Auction by Mr. Bondfield, at his Auction Room, formerly the Court of Cutcherry ... Square and Globe Lanthorns, a quantity of Country Rum in LEAGUERS, a Slave Girl, and a variety of other articles."—India Gazette, Nov. 23.

LECQUE, s. We do not know what the word used by the Abbé Raynal in the following extract is meant for. It is perhaps a mistake for last, a Dutch weight.

1770.—"They (Dutch at the Cape) receive a still smaller profit from 60 LECQUES of red wine, and 80 or 90 of white, which they carry to Europe every year. The LECQUE weighs about 1,200 pounds."—Raynal, E.T. 1777, i. 231.

LEE, s. Chin. lī. The ordinary Chinese itinerary measure. Books of the Jesuit Missionaries generally interpret the modern lī as 1/10 of a league, which gives about 3 lī to the mile; more exactly, according to Mr. Giles, 27-4/5 lī = 10 miles; but it evidently varies a good deal in different parts of China, and has also varied in the course of ages. Thus in the 8th century, data quoted by M. Vivien de St. Martin, from Père Gaubil, show that the lī was little more than 1/5 of an English mile. And from several concurrent statements we may also conclude that the lī is generalised so that a certain number of lī, generally 100, stand for a day's march. [Archdeacon Gray (China, ii. 101) gives 10 lī as the equivalent of 3⅓ English miles; Gen. Cunningham (Arch. Rep. i. 305) asserts that Hwen Thsang converts the Indian yojanas into Chinese lī at the rate of 40 lī per yojana, or of 10 lī per kos.]

1585.—"By the said booke it is found that the Chinos haue amongst them but only three kind of measures; the which in their language are called LII, pu, and icham, which is as much as to say, or in effect, as a forlong, league, or iorney: the measure, which is called lii, hath so much space as a man's voice on a plaine grounde may bee hearde in a quiet day, halowing or whoping with all the force and strength he may; and ten of these LIIS maketh a pu, which is a great Spanish league; and ten pus maketh a daye's iourney, which is called icham, which maketh 12 (sic) long leagues."—Mendoza, i. 21.

1861.—"In this part of the country a day's march, whatever its actual distance, is called 100 LI; and the LI may therefore be taken as a measure of time rather than of distance."—Col. Sarel, in J. R. Geog. Soc. xxxii. 11.

1878.—"D'après les clauses du contrat le voyage d'une longueur totale de 1,800 LIS, ou 180 lieues, devait s'effectuer en 18 jours."—L. Rousset, À Travers la Chine, 337.

LEECHEE, LYCHEE, s. Chin. li-chi, and in S. China (its native region) lai-chi; the beautiful and delicate fruit of the Nephelium litchi, Cambessèdes (N. O. Sapindaceae), a tree which has been for nearly a century introduced into Bengal with success. The dried fruit, usually ticketed as lychee, is now common in London shops.

c. 1540.—"... outra verdura muito mais fresca, e de melhor cheiro, que esta, a que os naturaes da terra chamão LECHIAS...."—Pinto, ch. lxviii.

1563.—"R. Of the things of China you have not said a word; though there they have many fruits highly praised, such as are LALICHIAS (lalixias) and other excellent fruits.

"O. I did not speak of the things of China, because China is a region of which there is so much to tell that it never comes to an end...."—Garcia, f. 157.

1585.—"Also they have a kinde of plummes that they doo call LECHIAS, that are of an exceeding gallant tast, and never hurteth anybody, although they should eate a great number of them."—Parke's Mendoza, i. 14.

1598.—"There is a kind of fruit called LECHYAS, which are like Plums, but of another taste, and are very good, and much esteemed, whereof I have eaten."—Linschoten, 38; [Hak. Soc. i. 131].

1631.—"Adfertur ad nos præterea fructus quidam Lances (read LAICES) vocatus, qui racematim, ut uvæ, crescit."—Jac. Bontii, Dial. vi. p. 11.

1684.—"LATSEA, or Chinese Chestnuts."—Valentijn, iv. (China) 12.

1750-52.—"LEICKI is a species of trees which they seem to reckon equal to the sweet orange trees.... It seems hardly credible that the country about Canton (in which place only the fruit grows) annually makes 100,000 tel of dried LEICKIS."—Olof Toreen, 302-3.

1824.—"Of the fruits which this season offers, the finest are LEECHES (sic) and mangoes; the first is really very fine, being a sort of plum, with the flavour of a Frontignac grape."—Heber, i. 60.

c. 1858.—

"Et tandis que ton pied, sorti de la babouche, Pendait, rose, au bord du MANCHY (see MUNCHEEL) À l'ombre des bois noirs touffus, et du LETCHI, Aux fruits moins pourpres que ta bouche." Leconte de Lisle.

1878.—"... and the LICHI hiding under a shell of ruddy brown its globes of translucent and delicately fragrant flesh."—Ph. Robinson, In My Indian Garden, 49.

1879.—"... Here are a hundred and sixty LICHI fruits for you...."—M. Stokes, Indian Fairy Tales (Calc. ed.) 51.

LEMON, s. Citrus medica, var. Limonum, Hooker. This is of course not an Anglo-Indian word. But it has come into European languages through the Ar. leimūn, and is, according to Hehn, of Indian origin. In Hind. we have both līmū and nīmbū, which last, at least, seems to be an indigenous form. The Skt. dictionaries give nimbūka. In England we get the word through the Romance languages, Fr. limon, It. limone, Sp. limon, &c., perhaps both from the Crusades and from the Moors of Spain. [Mr. Skeat writes: "The Malay form is limau, 'a lime, lemon, or orange.' The Port. limão may possibly come from this Malay form. I feel sure that limau, which in some dialects is limar, is an indigenous word which was transferred to Europe."] (See LIME.)

c. 1200.—"Sunt praeterea aliae arbores fructus acidos, pontici videlicet saporis, ex se procreantes, quos appellant LIMONES."—Jacobi de Vitriaco, Hist. Iherosolym, cap. lxxxv. in Bongars.

c. 1328.—"I will only say this much, that this India, as regards fruit and other things, is entirely different from Christendom; except, indeed, that there be LEMONS in some places, as sweet as sugar, whilst there be other LEMONS sour like ours."—Friar Jordanus, 15.

1331.—"Profunditas hujus aquae plena est lapidibus preciosis. Quae aqua multum est yrudinibus et sanguisugis plena. Hos lapides non accipit rex, sed pro animâ suâ semel vel bis in anno sub aquas ipsos pauperes ire permittit.... Et ut ipsi pauperes ire sub aquam possint accipiunt LIMONEM et quemdam fructum quem bene pistant, et illo bene se ungunt.... Et cum sic sint uncti yrudines et sanguisugæ illos offendere non valent."—Fr. Odoric, in Cathay, &c., App., p. xxi.

c. 1333.—"The fruit of the mango-tree (al-'anba) is the size of a great pear. When yet green they take the fallen fruit and powder it with salt and preserve it, as is done with the sweet citron and the lemon (al-LEIMŪN) in our country."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 126.

LEMON-GRASS, s. Andropogon citratus, D.C., a grass cultivated in Ceylon and Singapore, yielding an oil much used in perfumery, under the name of Lemon-Grass Oil, Oil of Verbena, or Indian Melissa Oil. Royle (Hind. Medicine, 82) has applied the name to another very fragrant grass, Andropogon schoenanthus, L., according to him the σχοῖνος of Dioscorides. This last, which grows wild in various parts of India, yields Rūsa Oil, alias O. of Ginger-grass or of Geranium, which is exported from Bombay to Arabia and Turkey, where it is extensively used in the adulteration of "Otto of Roses."

LEOPARD, s. We insert this in order to remark that there has been a great deal of controversy among Indian sportsmen, and also among naturalists, as to whether there are or are not two species of this Cat, distinguished by those who maintain the affirmative, as panther (F. pardus) and leopard (Felis leopardus), the latter being the smaller, though by some these names are reversed. Even those who support this distinction of species appear to admit that the markings, habits, and general appearance (except size) of the two animals are almost identical. Jerdon describes the two varieties, but (with Blyth) classes both as one species (Felis pardus). [Mr. Blanford takes the same view: "I cannot help suspecting that the difference is very often due to age.... I have for years endeavoured to distinguish the two forms, but without success." (Mammalia of India, 68 seq.)]

LEWCHEW, LIU KIU, LOO-CHOO, &c., n.p. The name of a group of islands to the south of Japan, a name much more familiar than in later years during the 16th century, when their people habitually navigated the China seas, and visited the ports of the Archipelago. In the earliest notices they are perhaps mixt up with the Japanese. [Mr. Chamberlain writes the name Luchu, and says that it is pronounced Dūchū by the natives and Ryūkyū by the Japanese (Things Japanese, 3rd ed. p. 267). Mr. Pringle traces the name in the "Gold flowered LOES" which appear in a Madras list of 1684, and which he supposes to be "a name invented for the occasion to describe some silk stuff brought from the Liu Kiu islands." (Diary Ft. St. Geo. 1st ser. iii. 174).]

1516.—"Opposite this country of China there are many islands in the sea, and beyond them at 175 leagues to the east there is one very large, which they say is the mainland, from whence there come in each year to Malaca 3 or 4 ships like those of the Chinese, of white people whom they describe as great and wealthy merchants.... These islands are called LEQUEOS, the people of Malaca say they are better men, and greater and wealthier merchants, and better dressed and adorned, and more honourable than the Chinese."—Barbosa, 207.

1540.—"And they, demanding of him whence he came, and what he would have, he answered them that he was of the Kingdom of Siam [of the settlement of the Tanaucarim foreigners, and that he came from Veniaga] and as a merchant was going to traffique in the Isle of LEQUIOS."—Pinto (orig. cap. x. xli), in Cogan, 49.

1553.—"Fernao Peres ... whilst he remained at that island of Beniaga, saw there certain junks of the people called LEQUIOS, of whom he had already got a good deal of information at Malaca, as that they inhabited certain islands adjoining that coast of China; and he observed that the most part of the merchandize that they brought was a great quantity of gold ... and they appeared to him a better disposed people than the Chinese...."—Barros, III. ii. 8. See also II. vi. 6.

1556.—(In this year) "a Portugal arrived at Malaca, named Pero Gomez d'Almeyda, servant to the Grand Master of Santiago, with a rich Present, and letters from the Nautaquim, Prince of the Island of Tanixumaa, directed to King John the third ... to have five hundred Portugals granted to him, to the end that with them, and his own Forces, he might conquer the Island of LEQUIO, for which he would remain tributary to him at 5000 Kintals of Copper and 1000 of Lattin, yearly...."—Pinto, in Cogan, p. 188.

1615.—"The King of Mashona (qu. Shashma?) ... who is King of the westermost islands of Japan ... has conquered the LEQUES Islands, which not long since were under the Government of China."—Sainsbury, i. 447.

" "The King of Shashma ... a man of greate power, and hath conquered the islandes called the LEQUES, which not long since were under the government of China. LEQUE Grande yeeldeth greate store of amber greece of the best sorte, and will vent 1,000 or 15,000 (sic) ps. of coarse cloth, as dutties and such like, per annum."—Letter of Raphe Coppindall, in Cocks, ii. 272.

[ " "They being put from LIQUEA...."—Ibid. i. 1.]

LIAMPO, n.p. This is the name which the older writers, especially Portuguese, give to the Chinese port which we now call Ning-Po. It is a form of corruption which appears in other cases of names used by the Portuguese, or of those who learned from them. Thus Nanking is similarly called Lanchin in the publications of the same age, and Yunnan appears in Mendoza as Olam.

1540.—"Sailing in this manner we arrived six dayes after at the Ports of LIAMPOO, which are two Islands one just against another, distant three Leagues from the place, where at that time the Portugals used their commerce. There they had built above a thousand houses, that were governed by Sheriffs, Auditors, Consuls, Judges, and 6 or 7 other kinde of Officers [com governança de Vereadores, & Ouvidor, & Alcaides, & outras seis ou sete Varas de Justiça & Officiaes de Republica], where the Notaries underneath the publique Acts which they made, wrote thus, I, such a one, publique Notarie of this Town of LIAMPOO for the King our Soveraign Lord. And this they did with as much confidence and assurance as if this Place had been scituated between Santarem and Lisbon; so that there were houses there which cost three or four thousand Duckats the building, but both they and all the rest were afterwards demolished for our sins by the Chineses...."—Pinto (orig. cap. lxvi.), in Cogan, p. 82.

What Cogan renders 'Ports of LIAMPOO' is portas, i.e. Gates. And the expression is remarkable as preserving a very old tradition of Eastern navigation; the oldest document regarding Arab trade to China (the Relation, tr. by Reinaud) says that the ships after crossing the Sea of Sanji 'pass the Gates of China. These Gates are in fact mountains washed by the sea; between these mountains is an opening, through which the ships pass' (p. 19). This phrase was perhaps a translation of a term used by the Chinese themselves—see under BOCCA TIGRIS.

1553.—"The eighth (division of the coasts of the Indies) terminates in a notable cape, the most easterly point of the whole continent so far as we know at present, and which stands about midway in the whole coast of that great country China. This our people call Cabo de LIAMPO, after an illustrious city which lies in the bend of the cape. It is called by the natives NIMPO, which our countrymen have corrupted into LIAMPO."—Barros, i. ix. 1.

1696.—"Those Junks commonly touch at LYMPO, from whence they bring Petre, Geelongs, and other Silks."—Bowyear, in Dalrymple, i. 87.

1701.—"The Mandarine of Justice arrived late last night from LIMPO."—Fragmentary MS. Records of China Factory (at Chusan?), in India Office, Oct. 24.

1727.—"The Province of Chequiam, whose chief city is LIMPOA, by some called Nimpoa, and by others Ningpoo."—A. Hamilton, ii. 283; [ed. 1744, ii. 282].

1770.—"To these articles of importation may be added those brought every year, by a dozen Chinese Junks, from Emoy, LIMPO, and Canton."—Raynal, tr. 1777, i. 249.

LIKIN, LEKIN, s. We borrow from Mr. Giles: "An arbitrary tax, originally of one cash per tael on all kinds of produce, imposed with a view of making up the deficiency in the land-tax of China caused by the T'aiping and Nienfei troubles. It was to be set aside for military purposes only—hence its common name of 'war tax'.... The Chefoo Agreement makes the area of the Foreign concessions at the various Treaty Ports exempt from the tax of Lekin" (Gloss. of Reference, s.v.). The same authority explains the term as "li (le, i.e. a cash or 1/1000 of a tael)-money," because of the original rate of levy. The LIKIN is professedly not an imperial customs-duty, but a provincial tax levied by the governors of the provinces, and at their discretion as to amount; hence varying in local rate, and from time to time changeable. This has been a chief difficulty in carrying out the Chefoo Agreement, which as yet has never been authoritatively interpreted or finally ratified by England. [It was ratified in 1886. For the conditions of the Agreement see Ball, Things Chinese, 3rd ed. 629 seqq.] We quote the article of the Agreement which deals with opium, which has involved the chief difficulties, as leaving not only the amount to be paid, but the line at which this is to be paid, undefined.

1876.—"Sect. III. ... (iii). On Opium Sir Thomas Wade will move his Government to sanction an arrangement different from that affecting other imports. British merchants, when opium is brought into port, will be obliged to have it taken cognizance of by the Customs, and deposited in Bond ... until such time as there is a sale for it. The importer will then pay the tariff duty upon it, and the purchasers the LIKIN: in order to the prevention of the evasion of the duty. The amount of LIKIN to be collected will be decided by the different Provincial Governments, according to the circumstances of each."—Agreement of Chefoo.

1878.—"La Chine est parsemée d'une infinité de petits bureaux d'octroi échelonnés le long des voies commerciales; les Chinois les nomment LI-KIN. C'est la source la plus sure, et la plus productive des revenus."—Rousset, À Travers la Chine, 221.

LILAC, s. This plant-name is eventually to be identified with ANIL (q.v.), and with the Skt. nīla, 'of a dark colour (especially dark blue or black)'; a fact which might be urged in favour of the view that the ancients in Asia, as has been alleged of them in Europe, belonged to the body of the colour-blind (like the writer of this article). The Indian word takes, in the sense of indigo, in Persian the form līlang; in Ar. this, modified into līlak and līlāk, is applied to the lilac (Syringa spp.). Marcel Devic says the Ar. adj. līlak has the modified sense 'bleuâtre.' See a remark under BUCKYNE. We may note that in Scotland the 'striving after meaning' gives this familiar and beautiful tree the name among the uneducated of 'lily-oak.'

LIME, s. The fruit of the small Citrus medica, var. acida, Hooker, is that generally called lime in India, approaching as it does very nearly to the fruit of the West India Lime. It is often not much bigger than a pigeon's egg, and one well-known miniature lime of this kind is called by the natives from its thin skin kāghazī nīmbū, or 'paper lime.' This seems to bear much the same relation to the lemon that the miniature thin-skinned orange, which in London shops is called Tangerine, bears to the "China orange." But lime is also used with the characterising adjective for the Citrus medica, var. Limetta, Hooker, or Sweet Lime, an insipid fruit.

The word no doubt comes from the Sp. and Port. lima, which is from the Ar. līma; Fr. lime, Pers. līmū, līmūn (see LEMON). But probably it came into English from the Portuguese in India. It is not in Minsheu (2nd ed. 1727).

1404.—"And in this land of Guilan snow never falls, so hot is it; and it produces abundance of citrons and LIMES and oranges (cidras é LIMAS é naranjas)."—Clavijo, § lxxxvi.

c. 1526.—"Another is the LIME (līmū), which is very plentiful. Its size is about that of a hen's egg, which it resembles in shape. If one who is poisoned boils and eats its fibres, the injury done by the poison is averted."—Baber, 328.

1563.—"It is a fact that there are some Portuguese so pig-headed that they would rather die than acknowledge that we have here any fruit equal to that of Portugal; but there are many fruits here that bear the bell, as for instance all the fructas de espinho. For the LEMONS of those parts are so big that they look like citrons, besides being very tender and full of flavour, especially those of Baçaim; whilst the citrons themselves are much better and more tender (than those of Portugal); and the LIMES (limas) vastly better...."—Garcia, f. 133.

c. 1630.—"The Ile inricht us with many good things; Buffolls, Goats, Turtle, Hens, huge Batts ... also with Oranges, LEMONS, LYMES...."—Sir T. Herbert, 28.

1673.—"Here Asparagus flourish, as do LIMES, Pomegranates, Genetins...."—Fryer, 110. ("Jenneting" from Fr. genétin, [or, according to Prof. Skeat, for jeanneton, a dimin. from Fr. pomme de S. Jean.]

1690.—"The Island (Johanna) abounds with Fowls and Rice, with Pepper, Yams, Plantens, Bonanoes, Potatoes, Oranges, LEMONS, LIMES, Pine-apples, &c...."—Ovington, 109.

LINGAIT, LINGAYET, LINGUIT, LINGAVANT, LINGADHARI, s. Mahr. Liñgā-īt, Can. Lingāyata, a member of a Sivaite sect in W. and S. India, whose members wear the liñga (see LINGAM) in a small gold or silver box suspended round the neck. The sect was founded in the 12th century by Bāsava. They are also called Jangama, or Vīra Śaiva, and have various subdivisions. [See Nelson, Madura, pt. iii. 48 seq.; Monier Williams, Brahmanism, 88.]

1673.—"At Hubly in this Kingdom are a caste called LINGUITS, who are buried upright."—Fryer, 153. This is still their practice.

Lingua is given as the name or title of the King of Columbum (see QUILON) in the 14th century, by Friar Jordanus (p. 41), which might have been taken to denote that he belonged to this sect; but this seems never to have had followers in Malabar.

LINGAM, s. This is taken from the S. Indian form of the word, which in N. India is Skt. and Hind. liñga, 'a token, badge,' &c., thence the symbol of Śiva which is so extensively an object of worship among the Hindus, in the form of a cylinder of stone. The great idol of Somnāth, destroyed by Mahmūd of Ghazni, and the object of so much romantic narrative, was a colossal symbol of this kind. In the quotation of 1838 below, the word is used simply for a badge of caste, which is certainly the original Skt. meaning, but is probably a mistake as attributed in that sense to modern vernacular use. The man may have been a LINGAIT (q.v.), so that his badge was actually a figure of the lingam. But this clever authoress often gets out of her depth.

1311.—"The stone idols called LING Mahádeo, which had been a long time established at that place ... these, up to this time, the kick of the horse of Islam had not attempted to break.... Deo Narain fell down, and the other gods who had seats there raised their feet, and jumped so high, that at one leap they reached the foot of Lanka, and in that affright the LINGS themselves would have fled, had they had any legs to stand on."—Amír Khusrú, in Elliot, iv. 91.

1616.—"... above this there is elevated the figure of an idol, which in decency I abstain from naming, but which is called by the heathen LINGA, and which they worship with many superstitions; and indeed they regard it to such a degree that the heathen of Canara carry well-wrought images of the kind round their necks. This abominable custom was abolished by a certain Canara King, a man of reason and righteousness."—Couto, Dec. VII. iii. 11.

1726.—"There are also some of them who wear a certain stone idol called LINGAM ... round the neck, or else in the hair of the head...."—Valentijn, Choro. 74.

1781.—"These Pagodas have each a small chamber in the center of twelve feet square, with a lamp hanging over the LINGHAM."—Hodges, 94.

1799.—"I had often remarked near the banks of the rivulet a number of little altars, with a LINGA of Mahádeva upon them. It seems they are placed over the ashes of Hindus who have been burnt near the spot."—Colebrooke, in Life, p. 152.

1809.—"Without was an immense LINGAM of black stone."—Ld. Valentia, i. 371.

1814.—"... two respectable Brahmuns, a man and his wife, of the secular order; who, having no children, had made several religious pilgrimages, performed the accustomed ceremonies to the LINGA, and consulted the divines."—Forbes, Or. Mem. ii. 364; [2nd ed. ii. 4; in ii. 164, LINGAM].

1838.—"In addition to the preaching, Mr. G. got hold of a man's LINGUM, or badge of caste, and took it away."—Letters from Madras, 156.

1843.—"The homage was paid to LINGAMISM. The insult was offered to Mahometanism. Lingamism is not merely idolatry, but idolatry in its most pernicious form."—Macaulay, Speech on Gates of Somnauth.

LINGUIST, s. An old word for an interpreter, formerly much used in the East. It long survived in China, and is there perhaps not yet obsolete. Probably adopted from the Port. lingua, used for an interpreter.

1554.—"To a LLINGUA of the factory (at Goa) 2 pardaos monthly...."—S. Botelho, Tombo, 63.

" "To the LINGUOA of this kingdom (Ormuz) a Portuguese.... To the LINGUOA of the custom-house, a bramen."—Ibid. 104.

[1612.—"Did Captain Saris' LINGUIST attend?"—Danvers, Letters, i. 68.]

1700.—"I carried the LINGUIST into a Merchant's House that was my Acquaintance to consult with that Merchant about removing that Remora, that stop'd the Man of War from entring into the Harbour."—A. Hamilton, iii. 254; [ed. 1744].

1711.—"LINGUISTS require not too much haste, having always five or six to make choice of, never a Barrel the better Herring."—Lockyer, 102.

1760.—"I am sorry to think your Honour should have reason to think, that I have been anyway concerned in that unlucky affair that happened at the Negrais, in the month of October 1759; but give me leave to assure your Honour that I was no further concerned, than as a LINGUISTER for the King's Officer who commanded the Party."—Letter to the Gov. of Fort St. George, from Antonio the Linguist, in Dalrymple, i. 396.

1760-1810.—"If the ten should presume to enter villages, public places, or bazaars, punishment will be inflicted on the LINGUIST who accompanies them."—Regulations at Canton, from The Fankwae at Canton, p. 29.

1882.—"As up to treaty days, neither Consul nor Vice-Consul of a foreign nation was acknowledged, whenever either of these officers made a communication to the Hoppo, it had to be done through the Hong merchants, to whom the dispatch was taken by a LINGUIST."—The Fankwae at Canton, p. 50.

LIP-LAP, s. A vulgar and disparaging nickname given in the Dutch Indies to Eurasians, and corresponding to Anglo-Indian CHEE-CHEE (q.v.). The proper meaning of lip-lap seems to be the uncoagulated pulp of the coco-nut (see Rumphius, bk. i. ch. 1). [Mr. Skeat notes that the word is not in the Dicts., but Klinkert gives Jav. lap-lap, 'a dish-clout.']

1768-71.—"Children born in the Indies are nicknamed LIPLAPS by the Europeans, although both parents may have come from Europe."—Stavorinus, E.T. i. 315.

LISHTEE, LISTEE, s. Hind. lishtī, English word, 'a list.'

LONG-CLOTH, s. The usual name in India for (white) cotton shirtings, or Lancashire calico; but first applied to the Indian cloth of like kind exported to England, probably because it was made of length unusual in India; cloth for native use being ordinarily made in pieces sufficient only to clothe one person. Or it is just possible that it may have been a corruption or misapprehension of lungi (see LOONGHEE). [This latter view is accepted without question by Sir G. Birdwood (Rep. on Old Rec., 224), who dates its introduction to Europe about 1675.]

1670.—"We have continued to supply you ... in reguard the Dutch do so fully fall in with the Calicoe trade that they had the last year 50,000 pieces of LONG-CLOTH."—Letter from Court of E.I.C. to Madras, Nov. 9th. In Notes and Exts., No. i. p. 2.

[1682.—"... for LONG CLOTH brown English 72: Coveds long & 2¼ broad No. I. ..."—Pringle, Diary, Ft. St. Geo. 1st ser. i. 40.]

1727.—"Saderass, or Saderass Patam, a small Factory belonging to the Dutch, to buy up LONG CLOTH."—A. Hamilton, i. 358; [ed. 1744].

1785.—"The trade of Fort St. David's consists in LONG CLOTHS of different colours."—Carraccioli's Life of Clive, i. 5.

1865.—"LONG-CLOTH, as it is termed, is the material principally worn in the Tropics."—Waring, Tropical Resident, p. 111.

1880.—"A Chinaman is probably the last man in the world to be taken in twice with a fraudulent piece of LONG-CLOTH."—Pall Mall Budget, Jan. 9, p. 9.

LONG-DRAWERS, s. This is an old-fashioned equivalent for PYJAMAS (q.v.). Of late it is confined to the Madras Presidency, and to outfitters' lists. [Mosquito drawers were probably like these.]

[1623.—"They wear a pair of LONG DRAWERS of the same Cloth, which cover not only their Thighs, but legs also to the Feet."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. i. 43.]

1711.—"The better sort wear LONG DRAWERS, and a piece of Silk, or wrought Callico, thrown loose over the Shoulders."—Lockyer, 57.

1774.—"... gave each private man a frock and LONG DRAWERS of chintz."—Forrest, V. to N. Guinea, 100.

1780.—"Leroy, one of the French hussars, who had saved me from being cut down by Hyder's horse, gave me some soup, and a shirt, and LONG-DRAWERS, which I had great want of."—Hon. John Lindsay in Lives of the Lindsays, iv. 266.

1789.—"It is true that they (the Sycs) wear only a short blue jacket, and blue LONG DRAWS."—Note by Translator of Seir Mutaqherin, i. 87.

1810.—"For wear on board ship, pantaloons ... together with as many pair of wove cotton LONG-DRAWERS, to wear under them."—Williamson, V. M. i. 9.

[1853.—"The Doctor, his gaunt figure very scantily clad in a dirty shirt and a pair of MOSQUITO DRAWERS."—Campbell, Old Forest Ranger, 3rd ed. 108.]

(See PYJAMAS, MOGUL BREECHES, SHULWAURS, SIRDRARS.)

LONG-SHORE WIND, s. A term used in Madras to designate the damp, unpleasant wind that blows in some seasons, especially July to September, from the south.

1837.—"This LONGSHORE WIND is very disagreeable—a sort of sham sea-breeze blowing from the south; whereas the real sea-breeze blows from the east; it is a regular cheat upon the new-comers, feeling damp and fresh as if it were going to cool one."—Letters from Madras, 73.

[1879.—"Strong winds from the south known as ALONGSHORE WINDS, prevail especially near the coast."—Stuart, Tinnevelly, 8.]

LONTAR, s. The palm leaves used in the Archipelago (as in S. India) for writing on are called lontar-leaves. Filet (No. 5179, p. 209) gives lontar as the Malay name of two palms, viz. Borassus flabelliformis (see PALMYRA, BRAB), and Livistona tundifolia. [See CADJAN.] [Mr. Skeat notes that Klinkert gives—"Lontar, metathesis of ron-tal, leaf of the tal tree, a fan-palm whose leaves were once used for writing on, borassus flabelliformis." Ron is thus probably equivalent to the Malay daun, or in some dialects don, 'leaf.' The tree itself is called p'hun (pohun) tar in the E. coast of the Malay Peninsula, tar and tal being only variants of the same word. Scott, Malayan Words in English, p. 121, gives: "Lontar, a palm, dial. form of dāun tāl (tāl, Hind.)." (See TODDY.)

LOOCHER, s. This is often used in Anglo-Ind. colloquial for a blackguard libertine, a lewd loafer. It is properly Hind. luchchā, having that sense. Orme seems to have confounded the word, more or less, with lūṭiya (see under LOOTY). [A rogue in Pandurang Hari (ed. 1873, ii. 168) is Loochajee. The place at Matheran originally called "Louisa Point" has become "Loocha Point!"]

[1829.—"... nothing-to-do LOOTCHAS of every sect in Camp...."—Or. Sport. Mag. ed. 1873, i. 121.]

LOONGHEE, s. Hind. lungī, perhaps originally Pers. lung and lunggī; [but Platts connects it with linga]. A scarf or web of cloth to wrap round the body, whether applied as what the French call pagne, i.e. a cloth simply wrapped once or twice round the hips and tucked in at the upper edge, which is the proper Mussulman mode of wearing it; or as a cloth tucked between the legs like a DHOTY (q.v.), which is the Hindu mode, and often followed also by Mahommedans in India. The Qanoon-e-Islam further distinguishes between the lunggī and dhotī that the former is a coloured cloth worn as described, and the latter a cloth with only a coloured border, worn by Hindus alone. This explanation must belong to S. India. ["The lungi is really meant to be worn round the waist, and is very generally of a checked pattern, but it is often used as a paggri (see PUGGRY), more especially that known as the Kohat lungi" (Cookson, Mon. on Punjab Silk, 4). For illustrations of various modes of wearing the garment, see Forbes Watson, Textile Manufactures and Costumes, pl. iii. iv.]

1653.—"LONGUI est vne petite pièce de linge, dont les Indiens se servent à cacher les parties naturelles."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, 529. But in the edition of 1657 it is given: "LONGUI est vn morceau de linge dont l'on se sert au bain en Turquie" (p. 547).

1673.—"The Elder sat in a Row, where the Men and Women came down together to wash, having LUNGIES about their Wastes only."—Fryer, 101. In the Index, Fryer explains as a "Waste-Clout."

1726.—"Silk LONGIS with red borders, 160 pieces in a pack, 14 cobidos long and 2 broad."—Valentijn, v. 178.

1727.—"... For some coarse checquered Cloth, called Cambaya (see COMBOY), LUNGIES, made of Cotton-Yarn, the Natives would bring Elephant's Teeth."—A. Hamilton, i. 9; [ed. 1744].

" (In Pegu) "Under the Frock they have a Scarf or LUNGEE doubled fourfold, made fast about the Middle...."—Ibid. ii. 49.

c. 1760.—"Instead of petticoats they wear what they call a LOONGEE, which is simply a long piece of silk or cotton stuff."—Grose, i. 143.

c. 1809-10.—"Many use the LUNGGI, a piece of blue cotton cloth, from 5 to 7 cubits long and 2 wide. It is wrapped simply two or three times round the waist, and hangs down to the knee."—F. Buchanan, in Eastern India, iii. 102.

LOOT, s. & v. Plunder; Hind. lūṭ, and that from Skt. lotra, for loptra, root lup, 'rob, plunder'; [rather luṇṭ, 'to rob']. The word appears in Stockdale's Vocabulary, of 1788, as "LOOT—plunder, pillage." It has thus long been a familiar item in the Anglo-Indian colloquial. But between the Chinese War of 1841, the Crimean War (1854-5), and the Indian Mutiny (1857-8), it gradually found acceptance in England also, and is now a recognised constituent of the English Slang Dictionary. Admiral Smyth has it in his Nautical Glossary (1867) thus: "LOOT, plunder, or pillage, a term adopted from China."

1545.—St. Francis Xavier in a letter to a friend in Portugal admonishing him from encouraging any friend of his to go to India seems to have the thing Loot in his mind, though of course he does not use the word: "Neminem patiaris amicorum tuorum in Indiam cum Praefectura mitti, ad regias pecunias, et negotia tractanda. Nam de illis vere illud scriptum capere licet: 'Deleantur de libro viventium et cum justis non scribantur.'... Invidiam tantum non culpam usus publicus detrahit, dum vix dubitatur fieri non malè quod impunè fit. Ubique, semper, rapitur, congeritur, aufertur. Semel captum nunquam redditur. Quis enumeret artes et nomina, praedarum? Equidem mirari satis nequeo, quot, praeter usitatos modos, insolitis flexionibus inauspicatum illud RAPIENDI verbum quaedam avaritiae barbaria conjuget!"—Epistolae, Prague, 1667, Lib. V. Ep. vii.

1842.—"I believe I have already told you that I did not take any LOOT—the Indian word for plunder—so that I have nothing of that kind, to which so many in this expedition helped themselves so bountifully."—Colin Campbell to his Sister, in L. of Ld. Clyde, i. 120.

" "In the Saugor district the plunderers are beaten whenever they are caught, but there is a good deal of burning and 'LOOTING,' as they call it."—Indian Administration of Ld. Ellenborough. To the D. of Wellington, May 17, p. 194.

1847.—"Went to see Marshal Soult's pictures which he LOOTED in Spain. There are many Murillos, all beautiful."—Ld. Malmesbury, Mem. of an Ex-Minister, i. 192.

1858.—"There is a word called 'LOOT,' which gives, unfortunately, a venial character to what would in common English be styled robbery."—Ld. Elgin, Letters and Journals, 215.

1860.—"LOOT, swag or plunder."—Slang Dict. s.v.

1864.—"When I mentioned the 'LOOTING' of villages in 1845, the word was printed in italics as little known. Unhappily it requires no distinction now, custom having rendered it rather common of late."—Admiral W. H. Smyth, Synopsis, p. 52.

1875.—"It was the Colonel Sahib who carried off the LOOT."—The Dilemma, ch. xxxvii.

1876.—"Public servants (in Turkey) have vied with one another in a system of universal LOOT."—Blackwood's Mag. No. cxix. p. 115.

1878.—"The city (Hongkong) is now patrolled night and day by strong parties of marines and Sikhs, for both the disposition to LOOT and the facilities for LOOTING are very great."—Miss Bird, Golden Chersonese, 34.

1883.—"'LOOT' is a word of Eastern origin, and for a couple of centuries past ... the LOOTING of Delhi has been the daydream of the most patriotic among the Sikh race."—Bos. Smith's Life of Ld. Lawrence, ii. 245.

" "At Ta li fu ... a year or two ago, a fire, supposed to be an act of incendiarism, broke out among the Tibetan encampments which were then LOOTED by the Chinese."—Official Memo. on Chinese Trade with Tibet, 1883.

LOOTY, LOOTIEWALLA, s.

A. A plunderer. Hind. lūṭī, lūṭīyā, lūṭīwālā.

1757.—"A body of their LOUCHEES (see LOOCHER) or plunderers, who are armed with clubs, passed into the Company's territory."—Orme, ed. 1803, ii. 129.

1782.—"Even the rascally LOOTY WALLAHS, or Mysorean hussars, who had just before been meditating a general desertion to us, now pressed upon our flanks and rear."—Munro's Narrative, 295.

1792.—"The Colonel found him as much dismayed as if he had been surrounded by the whole Austrian army, and busy in placing an ambuscade to catch about six LOOTIES."—Letter of T. Munro, in Life.

" "This body (horse plunderers round Madras) had been branded generally by the name of LOOTIES, but they had some little title to a better appellation, for they were ... not guilty of those sanguinary and inhuman deeds...."—Madras Courier, Jan. 26.

1793.—"A party was immediately sent, who released 27 half-starved wretches in heavy irons; among them was Mr. Randal Cadman, a midshipman taken 10 years before by Suffrein. The remainder were private soldiers; some of whom had been taken by the LOOTIES; others were deserters...."—Dirom's Narrative, p. 157.

B. A different word is the Ar.—Pers. lūṭīy, bearing a worse meaning, 'one of the people of Lot,' and more generally 'a blackguard.'

[1824.—"They were singing, dancing, and making the LUTI all the livelong day."—Hajji Baba, ed. 1851, p. 444.

[1858.—"The LOUTIS, who wandered from town to town with monkeys and other animals, taught them to cast earth upon their heads (a sign of the deepest grief among Asiatics) when they were asked whether they would be governors of Balkh or Akhcheh."—Ferrier, H. of the Afghans, 101.

[1883.—"Monkeys and baboons are kept and trained by the LŪTIS, or professional buffoons."—Will's Modern Persia, ed. 1891, p. 306.]

The people of Shiraz are noted for a fondness for jingling phrases, common enough among many Asiatics, including the people of India, where one constantly hears one's servants speak of chaukī-aukī (for chairs and tables), naukar-chākar (where both are however real words), 'servants,' lakṛī-akṛī, 'sticks and staves,' and so forth. Regarding this Mr. Wills tells a story (Modern Persia, p. 239). The late Minister, Ḳawām-ud-Daulat, a Shirāzi, was asked by the Shāh:

"Why is it, Ḳawām, that you Shīrāzīs always talk of Kabob-mabob and so on? You always add a nonsense-word; is it for euphony?"

"Oh, Asylum of the Universe, may I be your sacrifice! No respectable person in Shīrāz does so, only the LŪTĪ-PŪTĪ says it!"

LOQUOT, LOQUAT, s. A sub-acid fruit, a native of China and Japan, which has been naturalised in India and in Southern Europe. In Italy it is called nespola giapponese (Japan medlar). It is Eriobotrya japonica, Lindl. The name is that used in S. China, lu-küh, pron. at Canton lu-kwat, and meaning 'rush-orange.' Elsewhere in China it is called pi-pa.

[1821.—"The LACOTT, a Chinese fruit, not unlike a plum, was produced also in great plenty (at Bangalore); it is sweet when ripe, and both used for tarts, and eaten as dessert."—Hoole, Missions in Madras and Mysore, 2nd ed. 159.]

1878.—"... the yellow LOQUAT, peach-skinned and pleasant, but prodigal of stones."—Ph. Robinson, In My Indian Garden, 49.

c. 1880.—"A LOQUAT tree in full fruit is probably a sight never seen in England before, but 'the phenomenon' is now on view at Richmond. (This was in the garden of Lady Parker at Stawell House.) We are told that it has a fine crop of fruit, comprising about a dozen bunches, each bunch being of eight or ten beautiful berries...."—Newspaper cutting (source lost).

LORCHA, s. A small kind of vessel used in the China coasting trade. Giles explains it as having a hull of European build, but the masts and sails Chinese fashion, generally with a European skipper and a Chinese crew. The word is said to have been introduced by the Portuguese from S. America (Giles, 81). But Pinto's passage shows how early the word was used in the China seas, a fact which throws doubt on that view. [Other suggestions are that it is Chinese low-chuen, a sort of fighting ship, or Port. lancha, our launch (2 N. & Q. iii. 217, 236).]

1540.—"Now because the LORCH (lorcha), wherein Antonio de Faria came from Patana leaked very much, he commanded all his soldiers to pass into another better vessel ... and arriving at a River that about evening we found towards the East, he cast anchor a league out at Sea, by reason his Junk ... drew much water, so that fearing the Sands ... he sent Christovano Borralho with 14 Soldiers in the LORCH up the River...."—Pinto (orig. cap. xlii.), Cogan, p. 50.

" "Cõ isto nos partemos deste lugar de Laito muyto embandeirados, com as gavias toldadas de paños de seda, et os juncos e LORCHAS cõ duas ordens de paveses por banda"—Pinto, ch. lviii. i.e. "And so we started from Laito all dressed out, the tops draped with silk, and the junks and LORCHAS with two tiers of banners on each side."

1613.—"And they use smaller vessels called LORCHAS and lyolyo (?), and these never use more than 2 oars on each side, which serve both for rudders and for oars in the river traffic."—Godinho de Eredia, f. 26_v_.

1856.—"... Mr. Parkes reported to his superior, Sir John Bowring, at Hong Kong, the facts in connexion with an outrage which had been committed on a British-owned LORCHA at Canton. The LORCHA 'Arrow,' employed in the river trade between Canton and the mouth of the river, commanded by an English captain and flying an English flag, had been boarded by a party of Mandarins and their escort while at anchor near Dutch Folly."—Boulger, H. of China, 1884, iii. 396.

LORY, s. A name given to various brilliantly-coloured varieties of parrot, which are found in the Moluccas and other islands of the Archipelago. The word is a corruption of the Malay nūri, 'a parrot'; but the corruption seems not to be very old, as Fryer retains the correct form. Perhaps it came through the French (see Luillier below). [Mr. Skeat writes: "Lūri is hardly a corruption of nūri; it is rather a parallel form. The two forms appear in different dialects. Nūri may have been first introduced, and lūri may be some dialectic form of it."] The first quotation shows that lories were imported into S. India as early as the 14th century. They are still imported thither, where they are called in the vernacular by a name signifying 'Five-coloured parrots.' [Can. panchavarnagini.]

c. 1330.—"Parrots also, or popinjays, after their kind, of every possible colour, except black, for black ones are never found; but white all over, and green, and red, and also of mixed colours. The birds of this India seem really like the creatures of Paradise."—Friar Jordanus, 29.

c. 1430.—"In Bandan three kinds of parrot are found, some with red feathers and a yellow beak, and some parti-coloured which are called NORI, that is brilliant."—Conti, in India in the XVth Cent., 17. The last words, in Poggio's original Latin, are: "quos Noros appellant hoc est lucidos," showing that Conti connected the word with the Pers. nūr = "lux."

1516.—"In these islands there are many coloured parrots, of very splendid colours; they are tame, and the Moors call them NURE, and they are much valued."—Barbosa, 202.

1555.—"There are hogs also with hornes (see BABI-ROUSSA), and parats which prattle much, which they call NORIS."—Galvano, E.T. in Hakl. iv. 424.

[1598.—"There cometh into India out of the Island of Molucas beyond Malacca a kind of birdes called NOYRAS; they are like Parrattes...."—Linschoten, Hak. Soc. i. 307.]

1601.—"Psittacorum passim in sylvis multae turmae obvolitant. Sed in Moluccanis Insulis per Malaccam avis alia, NOYRA dicta, in Indiam importatur, quae psittaci faciem universim exprimit, quem cantu quoque adamussim aemulatur, nisi quod pennis rubicundis crebrioribus vestitur."—De Bry, v. 4.

1673.—"... Cockatooas and NEWRIES from Bantam."—Fryer, 116.

1682.—"The LORYS are about as big as the parrots that one sees in the Netherlands.... There are no birds that the Indians value more: and they will sometimes pay 30 rix dollars for one...."—Nieuhof, Zee en Lant-Reize, ii. 287.

1698.—"Brought ashore from the Resolution ... a NEWRY and four yards of broad cloth for a present to the Havildar."—In Wheeler, i. 333.

1705.—"On y trouve de quatre sortes de perroquets, sçavoir, perroquets, LAURIS, perruches, & cacatoris."—Luillier, 72.

1809.—

"'Twas Camdeo riding on his LORY, 'Twas the immortal Youth of Love." Kehama, x. 19.

1817.—

"Gay sparkling LOORIES, such as gleam between The crimson blossoms of the coral-tree In the warm isles of India's summer sea." Mokanna.

LOTA, s. Hind. loṭā. The small spheroidal brass pot which Hindus use for drinking, and sometimes for cooking. This is the exclusive Anglo-Indian application; but natives also extend it to the spherical pipkins of earthenware (see CHATTY or GHURRA.)

1810.—"... a LOOTAH, or brass water vessel."—Williamson, V. M. ii. 284.

LOTE, s. Mod. Hind. lōṭ, being a corruption of Eng. 'note.' A bank-note; sometimes called bănklōṭ.

LOTOO, s. Burm. Hlwat-d'hau, 'Royal Court or Hall'; the Chief Council of State in Burma, composed nominally of four Wungyīs (see WOON) or Chief Ministers. Its name designates more properly the place of meeting; compare Star-Chamber.

1792.—"... in capital cases he transmits the evidence in writing, with his opinion, to the LOTOO, or grand chamber of consultation, where the council of state assembles...."—Symes, 307.

1819.—"The first and most respectable of the tribunals is the LUTTÒ, comprised of four presidents called Vunghì, who are chosen by the sovereign from the oldest and most experienced Mandarins, of four assistants, and a great chancery."—Sangermano, 164.

1827.—"Every royal edict requires by law, or rather by usage, the sanction of this council: indeed, the King's name never appears in any edict or proclamation, the acts of the LUT-D'HAU being in fact considered his acts."—Crawfurd's Journal, 401.

LOUTEA, LOYTIA, &c. s. A Chinese title of respect, used by the older writers on China for a Chinese official, much as we still use mandarin. It is now so obsolete that Giles, we see, omits it. "It would almost seem certain that this is the word given as follows in C. C. Baldwin's Manual of the Foochow Dialect: 'Lo-tia.' ... (in Mandarin Lao-tye) a general appellative used for an officer. It means 'Venerable Father' (p. 215). In the Court dialect Ta-lao-yé, 'Great Venerable Father' is the appellative used for any officer, up to the 4th rank. The ye of this expression is quite different from the tyé or tia of the former" (Note by M. Terrien de la Couperie). Mr. Baber, after giving the same explanation from Carstairs Douglas's Amoy Dict., adds: "It would seem ludicrous to a Pekingese. Certain local functionaries (Prefects, Magistrates, &c.) are, however, universally known in China as Fu-mu-kuan, 'Parental Officers' (lit. 'Father-and-Mother Officers') and it is very likely that the expression 'Old Papa' is intended to convey the same idea of paternal government."

c. 1560.—"Everyone that in China hath any office, command, or dignitie by the King, is called LOUTHIA, which is to say with us Señor."—Gaspar da Cruz, in Purchas, iii. 169.

" "I shall have occasion to speake of a certain Order of gentlemen that are called LOUTEA; I will first therefor expound what this word signifieth. Loutea is as muche as to say in our language as Syr...."—Galeotto Pereyra, by R. Willes, in Hakl. ii.; [ed. 1810, ii. 548].

1585.—"And although all the Kinge's officers and justices of what sort of administration they are, be generally called by the name of LOYTIA; yet euerie one hath a speciall and a particular name besides, according vnto his office."—Mendoza, tr. by R. Parke, ii. 101.

1598.—"Not any Man in China is esteemed or accounted of, for his birth, family, or riches, but onely for his learning and knowledge, such as they that serve at every towne, and have the government of the same. They are called LOITIAS and Mandorijns."—Linschoten, 39; [Hak. Soc. i. 133].

1618.—"The China Capt. had letters this day per way of Xaxma (see SATSUMA) ... that the letters I sent are received by the noblemen in China in good parte, and a mandarin, or LOYTEA, appointed to com for Japon...."—Cocks, Diary, ii. 44.

1681.—"They call ... the lords and gentlemen LOYTIAS...."—Martinez de la Puente, Compendio, 26.

LOVE-BIRD, s. The bird to which this name is applied in Bengal is the pretty little lorikeet, Loriculus vernalis, Sparrman, called in Hind. laṭkan or 'pendant,' because of its quaint habit of sleeping suspended by the claws, head downwards.

LUBBYE, LUBBEE, s. [Tel. Labbi, Tam. Ilappai]; according to C. P. Brown and the Madras Gloss. a Dravidian corruption of 'Arabī. A name given in S. India to a race, Mussulmans in creed, but speaking Tamil, supposed to be, like the MOPLAHS of the west coast, the descendants of Arab emigrants by inter-marriage with native women. "There are few classes of natives in S. India, who in energy, industry, and perseverance, can compete with the Lubbay"; they often, as pedlars, go about selling beads, precious stones, &c.

1810.—"Some of these (early emigrants from Kufa) landed on that part of the Western coast of India called the Concan; the others to the eastward of C. Comorin; the descendants of the former are the Nevayets; of the latter the LUBBÈ; a name probably given to them by the natives, from that Arabic particle (a modification of Lubbeik) corresponding with the English here I am, indicating attention on being spoken to. The LUBBÈ pretend to one common origin with the Nevayets, and attribute their black complexion to inter-marriage with the natives; but the Nevayets affirm that the LUBBÈ are the descendants of their domestic slaves, and there is certainly in the physiognomy of this very numerous class, and in their stature and form, a strong resemblance to the natives of Abyssinia."—Wilks, Hist. Sketches, i. 243.

1836.—"Mr. Boyd ... describes the Moors under the name of Cholias (see CHOOLIA); and Sir Alexander Johnston designates them by the appellation of LUBBES. These epithets are however not admissible; for the former is only confined to a particular sect among them, who are rather of an inferior grade; and the latter to the priests who officiate in their temples; and also as an honorary affix to the proper names of some of their chief men."—Simon Casie Chitty on the Moors of Ceylon, in J. R. As. Soc. iii. 338.

1868.—"The LABBEIS are a curious caste, said by some to be the descendants of Hindus forcibly converted to the Mahometan faith some centuries ago. It seems most probable, however, that they are of mixed blood. They are, comparatively, a fine strong active race, and generally contrive to keep themselves in easy circumstances. Many of them live by traffic. Many are smiths, and do excellent work as such. Others are fishermen, boatmen and the like...."—Nelson, Madura Manual, Pt. ii. 86.

1869.—In a paper by Dr. Shortt it is stated that the LUBBAYS are found in large numbers on the East Coast of the Peninsula, between Pulicat and Negapatam. Their headquarters are at Nagore, the burial place of their patron saint Nagori Mīr Ṣāhib. They excel as merchants, owing to their energy and industry.—In Trans. Ethn. Soc. of London, N.S. vii. 189-190.

LUCKERBAUG, s. Hind. lakṛā, lagṛā, lakaṛbagghā, lagaṛbagghā, 'a hyena.' The form lakaṛbaghā is not in the older dicts. but is given by Platts. It is familiar in Upper India, and it occurs in Hickey's Bengal Gazette, June 24, 1781. In some parts the name is applied to the leopard, as the extract from Buchanan shows. This is the case among the Hindi-speaking people of the Himālaya also (see Jerdon). It is not clear what the etymology of the name is, lakaṛ, lakṛā meaning in their everyday sense, a stick or piece of timber. But both in Hind. and Mahr., in an adjective form, the word is used for 'stiff, gaunt, emaciated,' and this may be the sense in which it is applied to the hyena. [More probably the name refers to the bar-like stripes on the animal.] Another name is haṛvāgh, or (apparently) 'bone-tiger,' from its habit of gnawing bones.

c. 1809.—"It was said not to be uncommon in the southern parts of the district (Bhāgalpur) ... but though I have offered ample rewards, I have not been able to procure a specimen, dead or alive; and the leopard is called at Mungger LAKRAVAGH."

" "The hyaena or LAKRAVAGH in this district has acquired an uncommon degree of ferocity."—F. Buchanan, Eastern India, iii. 142-3.

[1849.—"The man seized his gun and shot the hyena, but the 'LAKKABAKKA' got off."—Mrs. Mackenzie, Life in the Mission, ii. 152.]

LUCKNOW, n.p. Properly Lakhnau; the well-known capital of the Nawābs and Kings of Oudh, and the residence of the Chief Commissioner of that British Province, till the office was united to that of the Lieut.-Governor of the N.W. Provinces in 1877. [The name appears to be a corruption of the ancient Lakshmanāvatī, founded by Lakshmana, brother of Rāmachandra of Ayodhya.]

1528.—"On Saturday the 29th of the latter Jemâdi, I reached LUKNOW; and having surveyed it, passed the river Gûmti and encamped."—Baber, p. 381.

[c. 1590.—"LUCKNOW is a large city on the banks of the Gúmti, delightful in its surroundings."—Āīn, ed. Jarrett, ii. 173.]

1663.—"In Agra the Hollanders have also an House.... Formerly they had a good trade there in selling Scarlet ... as also in buying those cloths of Jelapour and LAKNAU, at 7 or 8 days journey from Agra, where they also keep an house...."—Bernier, E.T. 94; [ed. Constable, 292, who identifies Jelapour with Jalālpur-Nāhir in the Fyzābād district.]

LUDDOO, s. H. laḍḍū. A common native sweetmeat, consisting of balls of sugar and ghee, mixt with wheat and gram flour, and with cocoanut kernel rasped.

[1826.—"My friends ... called me boor ke LUDDOO, or the great man's sport."—Pandurang Hari, ed. 1873, i. 197.

[1828.—"When at large we cannot even get rabri (porridge), but in prison we eat LADOO (a sweetmeat)."—Tod, Annals, Calcutta reprint, ii. 185.]

LUGOW, TO, v. This is one of those imperatives transformed, in Anglo-Indian jargon, into infinitives, which are referred to under BUNOW, PUCKEROW. H. inf. lagā-nā, imperative lagā-o. The meanings of lagānā, as given by Shakespear, are: "to apply, close, attach, join, fix, affix, ascribe, impose, lay, add, place, put, plant, set, shut, spread, fasten, connect, plaster, put to work, employ, engage, use, impute, report anything in the way of scandal or malice"—in which long list he has omitted one of the most common uses of the verb, in its Anglo-Indian form lugow, which is "to lay a boat alongside the shore or wharf, to moor." The fact is that lagānā is the active form of the neuter verb lag-nā, 'to touch, lie, to be in contact with,' and used in all the neuter senses of which lagānā expresses the transitive senses. Besides neuter lagnā, active lagānā, we have a secondary casual verb, lagwānā, 'to cause to apply,' &c. Lagnā, lagānā are presumably the same words as our lie, and lay, A.-S. licgan, and lecgan, mod. Germ. liegen and legen. And the meaning 'lay' underlies all the senses which Shakespear gives of lagā-nā. [See Skeat, Concise Etym. Dict. s.v. lie.]

[1839.—"They LUGĀOED, or were fastened, about a quarter of a mile below us...."—Davidson, Travels in Upper India, ii. 20.]

LUMBERDAR, s. Hind. lambardār, a word formed from the English word 'number' with the Pers. termination -dār, and meaning properly 'the man who is registered by a number.' "The registered representative of a coparcenary community, who is responsible for Government revenue." (Carnegy). "The cultivator who, either on his own account or as the representative of other members of the village, pays the Government dues and is registered in the Collector's Roll according to his number; as the representative of the rest he may hold the office by descent or by election." (Wilson).

[1875.—"... Chota Khan ... was exceedingly useful, and really frightened the astonished LAMBADARS."—Wilson, Abode of Snow, 97.]

LUNGOOR, s. Hind. langūr, from Skt. lāngūlin, 'caudatus.' The great white-bearded ape, much patronized by Hindus, and identified with the monkey-god Hanumān. The genus is Presbytes, Illiger, of which several species are now discriminated, but the differences are small. [See Blanford, Mammalia, 27, who classes the Langūr as Semnopithecus entellus.] The animal is well described by Aelian in the following quotation, which will recall to many what they have witnessed in the suburbs of Benares and other great Hindu cities. The Langūr of the Prasii is P. Entellus.

c. 250.—"Among the Prasii of India they say that there exists a kind of ape with human intelligence. These animals seem to be about the size of Hyrcanian dogs. Their front hair looks all grown together, and any one ignorant of the truth would say that it was dressed artificially. The beard is like that of a satyr, and the tail strong like that of a lion. All the rest of the body is white, but the head and the tail are red. These creatures are tame and gentle in character, but by race and manner of life they are wild. They go about in crowds in the suburbs of Latagē (now Latagē is a city of the Indians) and eat the boiled rice that is put out for them by the King's order. Every day their dinner is elegantly set out. Having eaten their fill it is said that they return to their parents in the woods in an orderly manner, and never hurt anybody that they meet by the way."—Aelian, De Nat. Animal. xvi. 10.

1825.—"An alarm was given by one of the sentries in consequence of a baboon drawing near his post. The character of the intruder was, however, soon detected by one of the Suwarrs, who on the Sepoy's repeating his exclamation of the broken English 'Who goes 'ere?' said with a laugh, 'Why do you challenge the LUNGOOR? he cannot answer you.'"—Heber, ii. 85.

1859.—"I found myself in immediate proximity to a sort of parliament or general assembly of the largest and most human-like monkeys I had ever seen. There were at least 200 of them, great LUNGOORS, some quite four feet high, the jetty black of their faces enhanced by a fringe of snowy whisker."—Lewin, A Fly on the Wheel, 49.

1884.—"Less interesting personally than the gibbon, but an animal of very developed social instincts, is Semnopithecus entellus, otherwise the Bengal LANGUR. (He) fights for his wives according to a custom not unheard of in other cases; but what is peculiar to him is that the vanquished males 'receive charge of all the young ones of their own sex, with whom they retire to some neighbouring jungle.' Schoolmasters and private tutors will read this with interest, as showing the origin and early disabilities of their profession."—Saturday Rev., May 31, on Sterndale's Nat. Hist. of Mammalia of India, &c.

LUNGOOTY, s. Hind. langoṭī. The original application of this word seems to be the scantiest modicum of covering worn for decency by some of the lower classes when at work, and tied before and behind by a string round the waist; but it is sometimes applied to the more ample dhotī (see DHOTY). According to R. Drummond, in Guzerat the "LANGOTH or LUNGOTA" (as he writes) is "a pretty broad piece of cotton cloth, tied round the breech by men and boys bathing.... The diminutive is LANGOTEE, a long slip of cloth, stitched to a loin band of the same stuff, and forming exactly the T bandage of English Surgeons...." This distinction is probably originally correct, and the use of langūta by Abdurrazzāk would agree with it. The use of the word has spread to some of the Indo-Chinese countries. In the quotation from Mocquet it is applied in speaking of an American Indian near the R. Amazon. But the writer had been in India.

c. 1422.—"The blacks of this country have the body nearly naked; they wear only bandages round the middle called LANKOUTAH, which descend from the navel to above the knee."—Abdurrazzāk, in India in XV. Cent. 17.

1526.—"Their peasants and the lower classes all go about naked. They tie on a thing which they call a LANGOTI, which is a piece of clout that hangs down two spans from the navel, as a cover to their nakedness. Below this pendant modesty-clout is another slip of cloth, one end of which they fasten before to a string that ties on the LANGOTI, and then passing the slip of cloth between the two legs, bring it up and fix it to the string of the LANGOTI behind."—Baber, 333.

c. 1609.—"Leur capitaine auoit fort bonne façon, encore qu'il fust tout nud et luy seul auoit vn LANGOUTIN, qui est vne petite pièce de coton peinte."—Mocquet, 77.

1653.—"LANGOUTI est une pièce de linge dont les Indou se seruent à cacher les parties naturelles."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, p. 547.

[1822.—"The boatmen go nearly naked, seldom wearing more than a LANGUTTY...."—Wallace, Fifteen Years in India, 410.]

1869.—"Son costume se compose, comme celui de tous les Cambodgiens, d'une veste courte et d'un LANGOUTI."—Rev. des Deux Mondes, lxxix. 854.

"They wear nothing but the LANGOTY, which is a string round the loins, and a piece of cloth about a hand's breadth fastened to it in front."—(Ref. lost), p. 26.

LUNKA, n.p. Skt. Lañka. The oldest name of Ceylon in the literature both of Buddhism and Brahmanism. Also 'an island' in general.

——, s. A kind of strong cheroot much prized in the Madras Presidency, and so called from being made of tobacco grown in the 'islands' (the local term for which is lañka) of the Godavery Delta.

M

MĀ-BĀP, s. 'Āp mā-bāp hai khudāwand!' 'You, my Lord, are my mother and father!' This is an address from a native, seeking assistance, or begging release from a penalty, or reluctant to obey an order, which the young ṣāhib hears at first with astonishment, but soon as a matter of course.

MABAR, n.p. The name given in the Middle Ages by the Arabs to that coast of India which we call Coromandel. The word is Ar. ma'bar, 'the ferry or crossing-place.' It is not clear how the name came to be applied, whether because the Arab vessels habitually touched at its ports, or because it was the place of crossing to Ceylon, or lastly whether it was not an attempt to give meaning to some native name. [The Madras Gloss. says it was so called because it was the place of crossing from Madura to Ceylon; also see Logan, Malabar, i. 280.] We know no occurrence of the term earlier than that which we give from Abdallatīf.

c. 1203.—"I saw in the hands of an Indian trader very beautiful mats, finely woven and painted on both sides with most pleasing colours.... The merchant told me ... that these mats were woven of the Indian plantain ... and that they sold in MABAR for two dinars apiece."—Abd-Allatīf, Relation de l'Egypte, p. 31.

1279-86.—In M. Pauthier's notes on Marco Polo very curious notices are extracted from Chinese official annals regarding the communications, in the time of Kublai Kaan, between that Emperor and Indian States, including MA-PA-'RH.—(See pp. 600-605).

c. 1292.—"When you leave the Island of Seilan and sail westward about 60 miles, you come to the great province of MAABAR, which is styled India the Greater: it is the best of all the Indies, and is on the mainland."—Marco Polo, Bk. iii. ch. 16.

c. 1300.—"The merchants export from MA'BAR silken stuffs, aromatic roots; large pearls are brought from the sea. The productions of this country are carried to 'Irák, Khorásán, Syria, Russia and Europe."—Rashīduddīn, in Elliot, i. 69.

1303.—"In the beginning of this year (703 H.), the Maliki-'Azam, Takiú-d-dín ... departed from the country of Hind to the passage (ma'bar) of corruption. The King of MA'BAR was anxious to obtain his property and wealth, but Malik Mu'azzam Siráju-d-dín, son of the deceased, having secured his goodwill, by the payment of 200,000 dínárs, not only obtained the wealth, but rank also of his father."—Wassáf, in Elliot, iii. 45.

1310.—"The country of MA'BAR, which is so distant from Dehli that a man travelling with all expedition could only reach it after a journey of 12 months, there the arrow of any holy warrior had not yet reached."—Amír Khusrú, in Elliot, iii. 85.

c. 1330.—"The third part (of India) is Ma'bar, which begins some three or four days journey to the eastward of Kaulam; this territory lies to the east of Malabar.... It is stated that the territory MA'BAR begins at the Cape Kumhari, a name which applies both to a mountain and a city.... Biyyardāwal is the residence of the Prince of MA'BAR, for whom horses are imported from foreign countries."—Abulfeda, in Gildemeister, p. 185. We regret to see that M. Guyard, in his welcome completion of Reinaud's translation of Abulfeda, absolutely, in some places, substitutes "Coromandel" for "Ma'bar." It is French fashion, but a bad one.

c. 1498.—"Zo deser stat Kangera anlenden alle Kouffschyff die in den landen zo doyn hauen, ind lijcht in eyner provincie MOABAR genant."—Pilgerfahrt des Ritters Arnold von Harff (a fiction-monger), p. 140.

1753.—"Selon cet autorité le pays du continent qui fait face à l'île de Ceilan est MAABAR, ou le grande Inde: et cette interpretation de Marc-Pol est autant plus juste, que maha est un terme Indien, et propre même à quelques langues Scythiques ou Tartares, pour signifier grand. Ainsi, MAABAR signifie la grande region."—D'Anville, p. 105. The great Geographer is wrong!

MACAO, n.p.

A. The name applied by the Portuguese to the small peninsula and the city built on it, near the mouth of Canton River, which they have occupied since 1557. The place is called by the Chinese Ngao-măn (Ngao, 'bay or inlet,' Măn, 'gate'). The Portuguese name is alleged to be taken from A-mā-ngao, 'the Bay of Ama,' i.e. of the Mother, the so-called 'Queen of Heaven,' a patroness of seamen. And indeed Amacao is an old form often met with.

c. 1567.—"Hanno i Portoghesi fatta vna picciola cittáde in vna Isola vicina a' i liti della China chiamato MACHAO ... ma i datii sono del Rè della China, e vanno a pagarli a Canton, bellissima cittáde, e di grande importanza, distante da Machao due giorni e mezzo."—Cesare de' Federici, in Ramusio, iii. 391.

c. 1570.—"On the fifth day of our voyage it pleased God that we arrived at ... Lampacau, where at that time the Portugals exercised their commerce with the Chineses, which continued till the year 1557, when the Mandarins of Canton, at the request of the Merchants of that Country, gave us the port of MACAO, where the trade now is; of which place (that was but a desart Iland before) our countrymen made a very goodly plantation, wherein there were houses worth three or four thousand Duckats, together with a Cathedral Church...."—Pinto, in Cogan, p. 315.

1584.—"There was in MACHAO a religious man of the order of the barefoote friars of S. Francis, who vnderstanding the great and good desire of this king, did sende him by certaine Portugal merchants ... a cloth whereon was painted the day of iudgement and hell, and that by an excellent workman."—Mendoza, ii. 394.

1585.—"They came to AMACAO, in Iuly, 1585. At the same time it seasonably hapned that Linsilan was commanded from the court to procure of the Strangers at AMACAO, certaine goodly feathers for the King."—From the Jesuit Accounts, in Purchas, iii. 330.

1599 ... —"AMACAO." See under MONSOON.

1602.—"Being come, as heretofore I wrote your Worship, to MACAO a city of the Portugals, adjoyning to the firme Land of China, where there is a Colledge of our Company."—Letter from Diego de Pantoia, in Purchas, iii. 350.

[1611.—"There came a Jesuit from a place called Langasack (see LANGASAQUE), which place the Carrack of AMAKAU yearly was wont to come."—Danvers, Letters, i. 146.]

1615.—"He adviseth me that 4 juncks are arrived at LANGASAQUE from Chanchew, which with this ship from AMACAU, will cause all matters to be sould chepe."—Cocks's Diary, i. 35.

[ " "... carried them prisoners aboard the great ship of AMACAN."—Foster, Letters, iv. 46.]

1625.—"That course continued divers yeeres till the Chinois growing lesse fearefull, granted them in the greater Iland a little Peninsula to dwell in. In that place was an Idoll, which still remained to be seene, called Ama, whence the Peninsula was called AMACAO, that is Amas Bay."—Purchas, iii. 319.

B. MACAO, MACCAO, was also the name of a place on the Pegu River which was the port of the city so called in the day of its greatness. A village of the name still exists at the spot.

1554.—"The baar (see BAHAR) of MACAO contains 120 biças, each biça 100 TICALS (q.v.) ..."—A. Nunes, p. 39.

1568.—"Si fa commodamente il viaggio sino a MACCAO distante da Pegu dodeci miglia, e qui si sbarca."—Ces. Federici, in Ramusio, iii. 395.

1587.—"From Cirion we went to MACAO, &c."—R. Fitch, in Hakl. ii. 391. (See DELING).

1599.—"The King of Arracan is now ending his business at the Town of MACAO, carrying thence the Silver which the King of Tangu had left, exceeding three millions."—N. Pimenta, in Purchas, iii. 1748.

MACAREO, s. A term applied by old voyagers to the phenomenon of the bore, or great tidal wave as seen especially in the Gulf of Cambay, and in the Sitang Estuary in Pegu. The word is used by them as if it were an Oriental word. At one time we were disposed to think it might be the Skt. word makara, which is applied to a mythological sea-monster, and to the Zodiacal sign Capricorn. This might easily have had a mythological association with the furious phenomenon in question, and several of the names given to it in various parts of the world seem due to associations of a similar kind. Thus the old English word Oegir or Eagre for the bore on the Severn, which occurs in Drayton, "seems to be a reminiscence of the old Scandinavian deity Oegir, the god of the stormy sea."[153] [This theory is rejected by N.E.D. s.v. Eagre.] One of the Hindi names for the phenomenon is Menḍhā, 'The Ram'; whilst in modern Guzerat, according to R. Drummond, the natives call it ghoṛā, "likening it to the war horse, or a squadron of them."[154] But nothing could illustrate the naturalness of such a figure as makara, applied to the bore, better than the following paragraph in the review-article just quoted (p. 401), which was evidently penned without any allusion to or suggestion of such an origin of the name, and which indeed makes no reference to the Indian name, but only to the French names of which we shall presently speak:

"Compared with what it used to be, if old descriptions may be trusted, the Mascaret is now stripped of its terrors. It resembles the great nature-force which used to ravage the valley of the Seine, like one of the mythical dragons which, as legends tell, laid whole districts waste, about as much as a lion confined in a cage resembles the free monarch of the African wilderness."

Take also the following:

1885.—"Here at his mouth Father Meghna is 20 miles broad, with islands on his breast as large as English counties, and a great tidal bore which made a daily and ever-varying excitement.... In deep water, it passed merely as a large rolling billow; but in the shallows it rushed along, roaring like a crested and devouring monster, before which no small craft could live."—Lt.-Col. T. Lewin, A Fly on the Wheel, 161-162.

But unfortunately we can find no evidence of the designation of the phenomenon in India by the name of makara or the like; whilst both mascaret (as indicated in the quotation just made) and macrée are found in French as terms for the bore. Both terms appear to belong properly to the Garonne, though mascaret has of late began on the Seine to supplant the old term barre, which is evidently the same as our bore. [The N.E.D. suggests O. N. bára, 'wave.'] Littré can suggest no etymology for mascaret; he mentions a whimsical one which connects the word with a place on the Garrone called St. Macaire, but only to reject it. There would be no impossibility in the transfer of an Indian word of this kind to France, any more than in the other alternative of the transfer of a French term to India in such a way that in the 16th century visitors to that country should have regarded it as an indigenous word, if we had but evidence of its Indian existence. The date of Littré's earliest quotation, which we borrow below, is also unfavourable to the probability of transplantation from India. There remains the possibility that the word is Basque. The Saturday Reviewer already quoted says that he could find nothing approaching to Mascaret in a Basque French Dict., but this hardly seems final.

The vast rapidity of the flood-tide in the Gulf of Cambay is mentioned by Maṣ'ūdī, who witnessed it in the year H. 303 (A.D. 915) i. 255; also less precisely by Ibn Batuta (iv. 60). There is a paper on it in the Bo. Govt. Selections, N.S. No. xxvi., from which it appears that the bore wave reaches a velocity of 10½ knots. [See also Forbes, Or. Mem. 2nd. ed. i. 313.]

1553.—"In which time there came hither (to Diu) a concourse of many vessels from the Red Sea, the Persian Gulf, and all the coast of Arabia and India, so that the places within the Gulf of Cambaya, which had become rich and noble by trade, were by this port undone. And this because it stood outside of the MACAREOS of the Gulf of Cambaya, which were the cause of the loss of many ships."—Barros, II. ii. cap. 9.

1568.—"These Sholds (G. of Cambay) are an hundred and foure-score miles about in a straight or gulfe, which they call MACAREO (Maccareo in orig.) which is as much as to say a race of a Tide."—Master C. Frederick, Hakl. ii. 342; [and comp. ii. 362].

1583.—"And having sailed until the 23d of the said month, we found ourselves in the neighbourhood of the MACAREO (of Martaban) which is the most marvellous thing that ever was heard of in the way of tides, and high waters.... The water in the channel rises to the height of a high tree, and then the boat is set to face it, waiting for the fury of the tide, which comes on with such violence that the noise is that of a great earthquake, insomuch that the boat is soused from stem to stern, and carried by that impulse swiftly up the channel."—Gasparo Balbi, ff. 91_v_, 92.

1613.—"The MACAREO of waves is a disturbance of the sea, like water boiling, in which the sea casts up its waves in foam. For the space of an Italian mile, and within that distance only, this boiling and foaming occurs, whilst all the rest of the sea is smooth and waveless as a pond.... And the stories of the Malays assert that it is caused by souls that are passing the Ocean from one region to another, or going in cafilas from the Golden Chersonesus ... to the river Ganges."—Godinho de Eredia, f. 41_v_. [See Skeat, Malay Magic, 10 seq.]

1644.—"... thence to the Gulf of Cambaya with the impetuosity of the currents which are called MACAREO, of whose fury strange things are told, insomuch that a stone thrown with force from the hand even in the first speed of its projection does not move more swiftly than those waters run."—Bocarro, MS.

1727.—"A Body of Waters comes rolling in on the Sand, whose Front is above two Fathoms high, and whatever Body lies in its Way it overturns, and no Ship can evade its Force, but in a Moment is overturned, this violent Boer the Natives called a MACKREA."—A. Hamilton, ii. 33; [ed. 1744, ii. 32].

1811.—Solvyns uses the word MACRÉE as French for 'Bore,' and in English describes his print as "... the representation of a phenomenon of Nature, the MACRÉE or tide, at the mouth of the river Ougly."—Les Hindous, iii.

MACASSAR, n.p. In Malay Mangkasar, properly the name of a people of CELEBES (q.v.), but now the name of a Dutch seaport and seat of Government on the W. coast of the S.W. peninsula of that spider-like island. The last quotation refers to a time when we occupied the place, an episode of Anglo-Indian history almost forgotten.

[1605-6.—"A description of the Iland Selebes or MAKASSER."—Birdwood, Letter Book, 77.

[1610.—"Selebes or MAKASSAR, wherein are spent and uttered these wares following."—Danvers, Letters, i. 71.

[1664-5.—"... and anon to Gresham College, where, among other good discourse, there was tried the great poyson of MACCASSA upon a dogg, but it had no effect all the time we sat there."—Pepys, Diary, March 15; ed. Wheatley, iv. 372.]

1816.—"Letters from MACASSAR of the 20th and 27th of June (1815), communicate the melancholy intelligence of the death of Lieut. T. C. Jackson, of the 1st Regt. of Native Bengal Infantry, and Assistant Resident of MACASSAR, during an attack on a fortified village, dependent on the dethroned Raja of Boni."—As. Journal, i. 297.

MACE, s.

A. The crimson net-like mantle, which envelops the hard outer shell of the nutmeg, when separated and dried constitutes the mace of commerce. Hanbury and Flückiger are satisfied that the attempt to identify the Macir, Macer, &c., of Pliny and other ancients with mace is a mistake, as indeed the sagacious Garcia also pointed out, and Chr. Acosta still more precisely. The name does not seem to be mentioned by Maṣ'ūdī; it is not in the list of aromatics, 25 in number, which he details (i. 367). It is mentioned by Edrisi, who wrote c. 1150, and whose information generally was of much older date, though we do not know what word he uses. The fact that nutmeg and mace are the product of one plant seems to have led to the fiction that clove and cinnamon also came from that same plant. It is, however, true that a kind of aromatic bark was known in the Arab pharmacopœia of the Middle Ages under the name of ḳirfat-al-ḳaranful or 'bark of clove,' which may have been either a cause of the mistake or a part of it. The mistake in question, in one form or another, prevailed for centuries. One of the authors of this book was asked many years ago by a respectable Mahommedan of Delhi if it were not the case that cinnamon, clove, and nutmeg were the produce of one tree. The prevalence of the mistake in Europe is shown by the fact that it is contradicted in a work of the 16th century (Bodaei, Comment. in Theophrastum, 992); and by the quotation from Funnel.

The name mace may have come from the Ar. basbāsa, possibly in some confusion with the ancient macir. [See Skeat, Concise Dict. who gives F. macis, which was confused with M. F. macer, probably Lat. macer, macir, doubtless of Eastern origin.]

c. 1150.—"On its shores (i.e. of the sea of Ṣanf or CHAMPA), are the dominions of a King called Mihrāj, who possesses a great number of populous and fertile islands, covered with fields and pastures, and producing ivory, camphor, nutmeg, MACE, clove, aloeswood, cardamom, cubeb, &c."—Edrisi, i. 89; see also 51.

c. 1347.—"The fruit of the clove is the nutmeg, which we know as the scented nut. The flower which grows upon it is the MACE (basbāsa). And this is what I have seen with my own eyes."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 243.

c. 1370.—"A gret Yle and great Contree, that men clepen Java.... There growen alle manere of Spicerie more plentyfous liche than in any other contree, as of Gyngevere, Clowegylofres, Canelle, Zedewalle, Notemuges, and MACES. And wytethe wel, that the Notemuge bereth the MACES. For righte as the Note of the Haselle hath an Husk withouten, that the Note is closed in, til it be ripe, and after falleth out; righte so it is of the Notemuge and of the MACES."—Sir John Maundeville, ed. 1866, p. 187-188. This is a remarkable passage for it is interpolated by Maundeville, from superior information, in what he is borrowing from Odoric. The comparison to the hazel-nut husk is just that used by Hanbury & Flückiger (Pharmacographia, 1st ed. 456).

c. 1430.—"Has (insulas Java) ultra xv dierum cursu duae reperiuntur insulae, orientem versus. Altera Sandai appellata, in quâ nuces muscatae et MACES, altera Bandam nomine, in quâ solâ gariofali producuntur."—Conti, in Poggius, De Var. Fortunae.

1514.—"The tree that produces the nut (meg) and MACIS is all one. By this ship I send you a sample of them in the green state."—Letter of Giov. da Empoli, in Archiv. Stor. Ital. 81.

1563.—"It is a very beautiful fruit, and pleasant to the taste; and you must know that when the nut is ripe it swells, and the first cover bursts as do the husks of our chestnuts, and shows the MAÇA, of a bright vermilion like fine grain (i.e. coccus); it is the most beautiful sight in the world when the trees are loaded with it, and sometimes the mace splits off, and that is why the nutmegs often come without the MACE."—Garcia, f. 129_v_-130.

[1602-3.—"In yo^r Provision you shall make in Nutmeggs and MACE haue you a greate care to receiue such as be good."—Birdwood, First Letter Book, 36; also see 67.]

1705.—"It is the commonly received opinion that Cloves, Nutmegs, MACE, and Cinnamon all grow upon one tree; but it is a great mistake."—Funnel, in Dampier, iv. 179.

MACE, s.

B. Jav. and Malay mās. [Mr. Skeat writes: "Mās is really short for amās or emās, one of those curious forms with prefixed a, as in the case of ABADA, which are probably native, but may have been influenced by Portuguese."] A weight used in Sumatra, being, according to Crawfurd, 1-16th of a Malay TAEL (q.v.), or about 40 grains (but see below). Mace is also the name of a small gold coin of Achīn, weighing 9 grs. and worth about 1_s._ 1_d._ And mace was adopted in the language of European traders in China to denominate the tenth part of the Chinese liang or tael of silver; the 100th part of the same value being denominated in like manner CANDAREEN (q.v.). The word is originally Skt. māsha, 'a bean,' and then 'a particular weight of gold' (comp. CARAT, RUTTEE).

1539.—"... by intervention of this thirdsman whom the Moor employed as broker they agreed on my price with the merchant at seven MAZES of gold, which in our money makes a 1400 reys, at the rate of a half cruzado the MAZ."—Pinto, cap. xxv. Cogan has, "the fishermen sold me to the merchant for seven mazes of gold, which amounts in our money to seventeen shillings and sixpence."—p. 31.

1554.—"The weight with which they weigh (at Malaca) gold, musk, seed-pearl, coral, calambuco ... consists of cates which contain 20 tael, each tael 16 MAZES, each MAZ 20 cumduryns. Also one paual 4 MAZES, one MAZ 4 cupões (see KOBANG), one cupão 5 cumduryns (see CANDAREEN)."—A. Nunez, 39.

1598.—"Likewise a Tael of Malacca is 16 MASES."—Linschoten, 44; [Hak. Soc. i. 149].

1599.—"Bezar sive Bazar (i.e. BEZOAR, q.v.) per MASAS venditur."—De Bry, ii. 64.

1625.—"I have also sent by Master Tomkins of their coine (Achin) ... that is of gold named a MAS, and is ninepence halfpenie neerest."—Capt. T. Davis, in Purchas, i. 117.

1813.—"Milburn gives the following table of weights used at Achin, but it is quite inconsistent with the statements of Crawfurd and Linschoten above.

4 copangs = 1 MACE 5 MACE = 1 mayam 16 mayam = 1 tale 5 tales = 1 bancal 20 bancals = 1 catty 200 catties = 1 bahar."

Milburn, ii. 329. [Mr. Skeat notes that here "copang" is Malay kupang; tale, tali; bancal, bongkal.]

MACHEEN, MAHACHEEN, n.p. This name, Mahā-chīna, "Great China," is one by which China was known in India in the early centuries of our era, and the term is still to be heard in India in the same sense in which Al-Birūnī uses it, saying that all beyond the great mountains (Himālaya) is Mahā-chīn. But "in later times the majority, not knowing the meaning of the expression, seem to have used it pleonastically coupled with Chīn, to denote the same thing, Chīn and Māchīn, a phrase having some analogy to the way Sind and Hind was used to express all India, but a stronger one to Gog and Magog, as applied to the northern nations of Asia." And eventually Chīn was discovered to be the eldest son of Japhet, and Māchīn his grandson; which is much the same as saying that Britain was the eldest son of Brut the Trojan, and Great Britain his grandson! (Cathay and the Way Thither, p. cxix.).

In the days of the Mongol supremacy in China, when Chinese affairs were for a time more distinctly conceived in Western Asia, and the name of Manzi as denoting Southern China, unconquered by the Mongols till 1275, was current in the West, it would appear that this name was confounded with Māchīn, and the latter thus acquired a specific but erroneous application. One author of the 16th century also (quoted by Klaproth, J. As. Soc. ser. 2, tom. i. 115) distinguishes Chīn and Māchīn as N. and S. China, but this distinction seems never to have been entertained by the Hindus. Ibn Batuta sometimes distinguishes Ṣīn (i.e. Chīn) as South China from Khitāi (see CATHAY) as North China. In times when intimacy with China had again ceased, the double name seems to have recovered its old vagueness as a rotund way of saying China, and had no more plurality of sense than in modern parlance Sodor and Man. But then comes an occasional new application of Māchīn to Indo-China, as in Conti (followed by Fra Mauro). An exceptional application, arising from the Arab habit of applying the name of a country to the capital or the chief port frequented by them, arose in the Middle Ages, through which Canton became known in the West as the city of Māchīn, or in Persian translation Chīnkalān, i.e. Great Chīn.

Mahāchīna as applied to China:

636.—"'In what country exists the kingdom of the Great Thang?' asked the king (Sīlāditya of Kanauj), 'how far is it from this?'

"'It is situated,' replied he (Hwen T'sang), 'to the N.E. of this kingdom, and is distant several ten-thousands of li. It is the country which the Indian people call MAHĀCHĪNA.'"—Pèl. Bouddh. ii. 254-255.

c. 641.—"MOHOCHINTAN." See quotation under CHINA.

c. 1030.—"Some other mountains are called Harmakút, in which the Ganges has its source. These are impassable from the side of the cold regions, and beyond them lies MĀCHĪN."—Al-Birūnī, in Elliot, i. 46.

1501.—In the Letter of Amerigo Vespucci on the Portuguese discoveries, written from C. Verde, 4th June, we find mention among other new regions of MARCHIN. Published in Baldelli Boni's Il Milione, p. ciii.

c. 1590.—"Adjoining to Asham is Tibet, bordering upon Khatai, which is properly MAHACHEEN, vulgarly called MACHEEN. The capital of Khatai is Khan Baleegh, 4 days' journey from the sea."—Ayeen, by Gladwin, ed. 1800, ii. 4; [ed. Jarrett, ii. 118].

[c. 1665.—"... you told me ... that Persia, Usbec, Kachguer, Tartary, and Catay, Pegu, Siam, China and MATCHINE (in orig. Tchine et MATCHINE) trembled at the name of the Kings of the Indies."—Bernier, ed. Constable, 155 seq.]

Applied to Southern China.

c. 1300.—"Khatāi is bounded on one side by the country of Māchīn, which the Chinese call Manzi.... In the Indian language S. China is called MAHĀ-CHĪN, i.e. 'Great China,' and hence we derive the word Manzi."—Rashīd-uddīn, in H. des Mongols (Quatremère), xci.-xciii.

c. 1348.—"It was the Kaam's orders that we should proceed through Manzi, which was formerly known as India Maxima" (by which he indicates MAHĀ-CHĪNĀ, see below, in last quotation).—John Marignolli, in Cathay, p. 354.

Applied to Indo-China:

c. 1430.—"Ea provincia (Ava)—MACINUM incolae dicunt— ... referta est elephantis."—Conti, in Poggius, De Var. Fortunae.

Chin and Machin:

c. 1320.—"The curiosities of CHÍN AND MACHÍN, and the beautiful products of Hind and Sind."—Wassāf, in Elliot, iii. 32.

c. 1440.—"Poi si retrova in quella istessa provincia di Zagatai Sanmarcant città grandissima e ben popolata, por la qual vanno e vengono tutti quelli di CINI E MACINI e del Cataio, o mercanti o viandanti che siano."—Barbaro, in Ramusio, ii. f. 106_v_.

c. 1442.—"The merchants of the 7 climates from Egypt ... from the whole of the realms of CHĪN AND MĀCHĪN, and from the city of Khānbālik, steer their course to this port."--Abdurrazāk, in Notices et Extraits, xiv. 429.

[1503.—"SIN AND MASIN." See under JAVA.]

Mahāchīn or Chīn Kalān, for Canton.

c. 1030.—In Sprenger's extracts from Al-Birūnī we have "Sharghūd, in Chinese Sanfū. This is Great China (MĀHĀṢĪN)."—Post und Reise-routen des Orients, 90.

c. 1300.—"This canal extends for a distance of 40 days' navigation from Khānbāligh to Khingsaī and Zaitūn, the ports frequented by the ships that come from India, and from the city of MĀCHĪN."—Rashīd-uddin, in Cathay, &c., 259-260.

c. 1332.—"... after I had sailed eastward over the Ocean Sea for many days I came to that noble province Manzi.... The first city to which I came in this country was called CENS-KALAN, and 'tis a city as big as three Venices."—Odoric, in Cathay, &c., 103-105.

c. 1347.—"In the evening we stopped at another village, and so on till we arrived at SĪN-KALĀN, which is the city of Ṣīn-ul-Ṣīn ... one of the greatest of cities, and one of those that has the finest of bazaars. One of the largest of these is the porcelain bazaar, and from it china-ware is exported to the other cities of China, to India, and to Yemen."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 272.

c. 1349.—"The first of these is called Manzi, the greatest and noblest province in the world, having no paragon in beauty, pleasantness, and extent. In it is that noble city of Campsay, besides Zayton, CYNKALAN, and many other cities."—John Marignolli, in Cathay, &c., 373.

MĀCHIS, s. This is recent Hind. for 'lucifer matches.' An older and purer phrase for sulphur-matches is dīwā-, dīyā-salāī.

MADAPOLLAM, n.p. This term, applying to a particular kind of cotton cloth, and which often occurs in prices current, is taken from the name of a place on the Southern Delta-branch of the Godavery, properly Mādhavapalam, [Tel. Mādhavayya-pālemu, 'fortified village of Mādhava']. This was till 1833 [according to the Madras Gloss. 1827] the seat of one of the Company's Commercial Agencies, which was the chief of three in that Delta; the other two being Bunder Malunka and Injeram. Madapollam is now a staple export from England to India; it is a finer kind of white piece-goods, intermediate between calico and muslin.

[1610.—"MADAFUNUM is chequered, somewhat fine and well requested in Pryaman."—Danvers, Letters, i. 74.]

1673.—"The English for that cause (the unhealthiness of Masulipatam), only at the time of shipping, remove to MEDOPOLLON, where they have a wholesome Seat Forty Miles more North."—Fryer, 35.

[1684-85.—"Mr. Benj^a Northey having brought up Musters of the MADAPOLL^M Cloth, Itt is thought convenient that the same be taken of him...."—Pringle, Diary Ft. St. Geo. 1st ser. iv. 49.]

c. 1840.—"Pierrette eût de jolies chemises en MADAPOLAM."—Balzac, Pierrette.

1879.—"... liveliness seems to be the unfailing characteristic of autographs, fans, Cremona fiddles, Louis Quatorze snuff-boxes, and the like, however sluggish pig-iron and MADAPOLLAMS may be."—Sat. Review, Jan. 11, p. 45.

MADRAFAXAO, s. This appears in old Portuguese works as the name of a gold coin of Guzerat; perhaps representing Muẓaffar-shāhī. There were several kings of Guzerat of this name. The one in question was probably Muẓaffar-Shah II. (1511-1525), of whose coinage Thomas mentions a gold piece of 185 grs. (Pathán Kings, 353).

1554.—"There also come to this city MADRAFAXAOS, which are a money of Cambaya, which vary greatly in price; some are of 24 tangas of 60 reis the tanga, others of 23, 22, 21, and other prices according to time and value."—A. Nunez, 32.

MADRAS, n.p. This alternative name of the place, officially called by its founders Fort St. George, first appears about the middle of the 17th century. Its origin has been much debated, but with little result. One derivation, backed by a fictitious legend, derives the name from an imaginary Christian fisherman called Madarasen; but this may be pronounced philologically impossible, as well as otherwise unworthy of serious regard.[155] Lassen makes the name to be a corruption of Manda-rājya, 'Realm of the Stupid!' No one will suspect the illustrious author of the Indische Alterthumskunde to be guilty of a joke; but it does look as if some malign Bengalee had suggested to him this gibe against the "Benighted"! It is indeed curious and true that, in Bengal, sepoys and the like always speak of the Southern Presidency as Mandrāj. In fact, however, all the earlier mentions of the name are in the form of Madraspatanam, 'the city of the Madras,' whatever the Madras may have been. The earliest maps show Madraspatanam as the Mahommedan settlement corresponding to the present Triplicane and Royapettah. The word is therefore probably of Mahommedan origin; and having got so far we need not hesitate to identify it with Madrasa, 'a college.' The Portuguese wrote this Madaraza (see Faria y Sousa, Africa Portuguesa, 1681, p. 6); and the European name probably came from them, close neighbours as they were to Fort St. George, at Mylapore or San Thomé. That there was such a Madrasa in existence is established by the quotation from Hamilton, who was there about the end of the 17th century.[156] Fryer's Map (1698, but illustrating 1672-73) represents the Governor's House as a building of Mahommedan architecture, with a dome. This may have been the Madrasa itself. Lockyer also (1711) speaks of a "College," of which the building was "very ancient"; formerly a hospital, and then used apparently as a residence for young writers. But it is not clear whether the name "College" was not given on this last account. [The Madras Admin. Man. says: "The origin of this name has been much discussed. Madrissa, a Mahommedan school, has been suggested, which considering the date at which the name is first found seems fanciful. Manda is in Sanscrit 'slow.' Mandarāz was a king of the lunar race. The place was probably called after this king" (ii. 91). The Madras Gloss. again writes: "Hind. Madrās, Can. Madarāsu, from Tel. Mandaradzu, name of a local Telegu Royer," or ruler. The whole question has been discussed by Mr. Pringle (Diary Ft. St. Geo., 1st ser. i. 106 seqq.). He points out that while the earliest quotation given below is dated 1653, the name, in the form Madrazpatam, is used by the President and Council of Surat in a letter dated 29th December, 1640 (I. O. Records, O. C. No. 1764); "and the context makes it pretty certain that Francis Day or some other of the factors at the new Settlement must have previously made use of it in reference to the place, or 'rather,' as the Surat letter says, 'plot of ground' offered to him. It is no doubt just possible that in the course of the negotiations Day heard or caught up the name from the Portuguese, who were at the time in friendly relations with the English; but the probabilities are certainly in the opposite direction. The nayak from whom the plot was obtained must almost certainly have supplied the name, or what Francis Day conceived to be the name. Again, as regards Hamilton's mention of a 'college,' Sir H. Yule's remark certainly goes too far. Hamilton writes, 'There is a very Good Hospital in the Town, and the Company's Horse-stables are neat, but the old College where a good many Gentlemen Factors are obliged to lodge, is ill-kept in repair.' This remark taken together with that made by Lockyer ... affords proof, indeed, that there was a building known to the English as the 'College.' But it does not follow that this, or any, building was distinctively known to Musulmans as the 'madrasa.' The 'old College' of Hamilton may have been the successor of a Musulman 'madrasa' of some size and consequence, and if this was so the argument for the derivation would be strengthened. It is however equally possible that some old buildings within the plot of territory acquired by Day, which had never been a 'madrasa,' was turned to use as a College or place where the young writers should live and receive instruction; and in this case the argument, so far as it rests on a mention of 'a College' by Hamilton and Lockyer, is entirely destroyed. Next as regards the probability that the first part of 'Madraspatanam' is 'of Mahommedan origin.' Sir H. Yule does not mention that date of the maps in which Madraspatanam is shown 'as the Mahommedan settlement corresponding to the present Triplicane and Royapettah'; but in Fryer's map, which represents the fort as he saw it in 1672, the name 'Madirass'—to which is added 'the Indian Town with flat houses'—is entered as the designation of the collection of houses on the north side of the English town, and the next makes it evident that in the year in question the name of Madras was applied chiefly to the crowded collection of houses styled in turn the 'Heathen,' the 'Malabar,' and the 'Black' town. This consideration does not necessarily disprove the supposed Musulman origin of 'Madras,' but it undoubtedly weakens the chain of Sir H. Yule's argument." Mr. Pringle ends by saying: "On the whole it is not unfair to say that the chief argument in favour of the derivation adopted by Sir H. Yule is of a negative kind. There are fatal objections to whatever other derivations have been suggested, but if the mongrel character of the compound 'Madrasa-patanam' is disregarded, there is no fatal objection to the derivation from 'madrasa.'... If however that derivation is to stand, it must not rest upon such accidental coincidences as the use of the word 'College' by writers whose knowledge of Madras was derived from visits made from 30 to 50 years after the foundation of the colony."]

1653.—"Estant desbarquez le R. P. Zenon reçut lettres de MADRASPATAN de la detention du Rev. P. Ephraim de Neuers par l'Inquisition de Portugal, pour avoir presché a MADRASPATAN que les Catholiques qui foüetoient et trampoient dans des puys les images de Sainct Antoine de Pade, et de la Vierge Marie, estoient impies, et que les Indous à tout le moins honorent ce qu'ils estiment Sainct...."—De la Boullaye-le-Gouz, ed. 1657, 244.

c. 1665.—"Le Roi de Golconde a de grands Revenus.... Les Douanes des marchandises qui passent sur ses Terres, et celles des Ports de Masulipatan et de MADRESPATAN, lui rapportent beaucoup."—Thevenot, v. 306.

1672.—"... following upon MADRASPATAN, otherwise called Chinnepatan, where the English have a Fort called St. George, chiefly garrisoned by Toepasses and Mistices; from this place they annually send forth their ships, as also from Suratte."—Baldaeus, Germ. ed. 152.

1673.—"Let us now pass the Pale to the Heathen Town, only parted by a wide Parrade, which is used for a Buzzar, or Mercate-place. MADERAS then divides itself into divers long streets, and they are checquered by as many transverse. It enjoys some Choultries for Places of Justice; one Exchange; one Pagod...."—Fryer, 38-39.

1726.—"The Town or Place, anciently called Chinapatnam, now called MADRASPATNAM, and Fort St. George."—Letters Patent, in Charters of E.I. Company, 368-9.

1727.—"Fort St. George or MADERASS, or as the Natives call it, China Patam, is a Colony and City belonging to the English East India Company, situated in one of the most incommodious Places I ever saw.... There is a very good Hospital in the Town, and the Company's Horse-Stables are neat, but the Old College, where a great many Gentlemen Factors are obliged to lodge, is kept in ill Repair."—A. Hamilton, i. 364, [ed. 1744, ii. 182]. (Also see CHINAPATAM.)

MADRAS, s. This name is applied to large bright-coloured handkerchiefs, of silk warp and cotton woof, which were formerly exported from Madras, and much used by the negroes in the W. Indies as head-dresses. The word is preserved in French, but is now obsolete in England.

c. 1830.—"... We found President Petion, the black Washington, sitting on a very old ragged sofa, amidst a confused mass of papers, dressed in a blue military undress frock, white trowsers, and the everlasting MADRAS handkerchief bound round his brows."—Tom Cringle, ed. 1863, p. 425.

1846.—"Et Madame se manifesta! C'était une de ces vieilles dévinées par Adrien Brauwer dans ses sorcières pour le Sabbat ... coiffée d'un MADRAS, faisant encore papillottes avec les imprimés, que recevait gratuitement son maître."—Balzac, Le Cousin Pons, ch. xviii.

MADREMALUCO, n.p. The name given by the Portuguese to the Mahommedan dynasty of Berar, called 'Imād-shāhī. The Portuguese name represents the title of the founder 'Imād-ul-Mulk, ('Pillar of the State'), otherwise Fath Ullah 'Imād Shāh. The dynasty was the most obscure of those founded upon the dissolution of the Bāhmani monarchy in the Deccan. (See COTAMALUCO, IDALCAN, MELIQUE VERIDO, NIZAMALUCO, SABAIO.) It began about 1484, and in 1572 was merged in the kingdom of Ahmednagar. There is another Madremaluco (or 'Imād-ul-Mulk) much spoken of in Portuguese histories, who was an important personage in Guzerat, and put to death with his own hand the king Sikandar Shāh (1526) (Barros, IV. v. 3; Correa, ii. 272, 344, &c.; Couto, Decs. v. and vi. passim).

[1543.—See under COTAMALUCO.]

1553.—"The MADRE MALUCO was married to a sister of the Hidalchan (see IDALCAN), and the latter treated this brother-in-law of his, and MELEQUE VERIDO as if they were his vassals, especially the latter."—Barros, IV. vii. 1.

1563.—"The Imademaluco or MADREMALUCO, as we corruptly style him, was a Circassian (Cherques) by nation, and had originally been a Christian, and died in 1546.... Imad is as much as to say 'prop,' and thus the other (of these princes) was called Imadmaluco, or 'Prop of the Kingdom.'..."—Garcia, f. 36_v_.

Neither the chronology of De Orta here, nor the statement of Imād-ul-Mulk's Circassian origin, agree with those of Firishta. The latter says that Fath-Ullah 'Imād Shāh was descended from the heathen of Bijanagar (iii. 485).

MADURA, n.p., properly Madurei, Tam. Mathurai. This is still the name of a district in S. India, and of a city which appears in the Tables of Ptolemy as "Μόδουρα βασίλειον Πανδιόνος." The name is generally supposed to be the same as that of Mathurā, the holy and much more ancient city of Northern India, from which the name was adopted (see MUTTRA), but modified after Tamil pronunciation.[157] [On the other hand, a writer in J. R. As. Soc. (xiv. 578, n. 3) derives Madura from the Dravidian Madur in the sense of 'Old Town,' and suggests that the northern Mathura may be an offshoot from it.] Madura was, from a date, at least as early as the Christian era, the seat of the Pāṇḍya sovereigns. These, according to Tamil tradition, as stated by Bp. Caldwell, had previously held their residence at Kolkei on the Tamraparni, the Κόλχοι of Ptolemy. (See Caldwell, pp. 16, 95, 101). The name of Madura, probably as adopted from the holier northern Muttra, seems to have been a favourite among the Eastern settlements under Hindu influence. Thus we have Matura in Ceylon; the city and island of Madura adjoining Java; and a town of the same name (Madura) in Burma, not far north of Mandalé, Madeya of the maps.

A.D. c. 70-80.—"Alius utilior portus gentis Neacyndon qui vocatur Becare. Ibi regnabat Pandion, longe ab emporio mediterraneo distante oppido quod vocatur MODURA."—Pliny, vi. 26.

[c. 1315.—"MARDI." See CRORE.]

c. 1347.—"The Sultan stopped a month at Fattan, and then departed for his capital. I stayed 15 days after his departure, and then started for his residence, which was at MUTRA, a great city with wide streets.... I found there a pest raging of which people died in brief space ... when I went out I saw only the dead and dying."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 200-1.

1311.—"... the royal canopy moved from Bírdhúl ... and 5 days afterwards they arrived at the city of MATHRA ... the dwelling-place of the brother of the Ráí Sundar Pándya. They found the city empty, for the Ráí had fled with the Ránís, but had left two or three elephants in the temple of Jagnár (Jaganāth)."—Amír Khusrú, in Elliot, iii. 91.

MADURA FOOT, s. A fungoidal disease of the foot, apparently incurable except by amputation, which occurs in the Madura district, and especially in places where the 'Black soil' prevails. Medical authorities have not yet decided on the causes or precise nature of the disease. See Nelson, Madura, Pt. i. pp. 91-94; [Gribble, Cuddapah, 193].

MAGADOXO, n.p. This is the Portuguese representation, which has passed into general European use, of Makdashau, the name of a town and State on the Somālī coast in E. Africa, now subject to Zanzibar. It has been shown by one of the present writers that Marco Polo, in his chapter on Madagascar, has made some confusion between Magadoxo and that island, mixing up particulars relating to both. It is possible that the name of Madagascar was really given from Makdashau, as Sir R. Burton supposes; but he does not give any authority for his statement that the name of Madagascar "came from Makdishú (Magadoxo) ... whose Sheikh invaded it" (Comment. on Camões, ii. 520). [Owen (Narrative, i. 357) writes the name Mukdeesha, and Boteler (Narrative, ii. 215) says it is pronounced by the Arabs Mākŏdĭsha. The name is said to be Magaad-el-Shata, "Harbour of the Sheep," and the first syllable has been identified with that of Maqdala and is said to mean "door" in some of the Galla dialects (Notes & Queries, 9 ser. ii. 193, 310. Also see Mr. Gray's note on Pyrard, Hak. Soc. i. 29, and Dr. Burnell on Linschoten, Hak. Soc. i. 19.]

c. 1330.—"On departing from Zaila, we sailed on the sea for 15 days, and then arrived at MAḲDASHAU, a town of great size. The inhabitants possess a great number of camels, and of these they slaughter (for food) several hundreds every day."—Ibn Batuta, ii. 181.

1498.—"And we found ourselves before a great city with houses of several stories, and in the midst of the city certain great palaces; and about it a wall with four towers; and this city stood close upon the sea, and the Moors call it MAGADOXÓ. And when we were come well abreast of it, we discharged many bombards (at it), and kept on our way along the coast with a fine wind on the poop."—Roteiro, 102.

1505.—"And the Viceroy (Don Francisco D'Almeida) made sail, ordering the course to be made for MAGADAXO, which he had instructions also to make tributary. But the pilots objected saying that they would miss the season for crossing to India, as it was already the 26th of August...."—Correa, i. 560.

1514.—"... The most of them are Moors such as inhabit the city of Zofalla ... and these people continue to be found in Mazambic, Melinda, MOGODECIO, Marachilue (read Brava Chilve, i.e. Brava and Quiloa), and Mombazza; which are all walled cities on the main land, with houses and streets like our own; except Mazambich."—Letter of Giov. da Empoli, in Archiv. Stor. Ital.

1516.—"Further on towards the Red Sea there is another very large and beautiful town called MAGADOXO, belonging to the Moors, and it has a King over it, and is a place of great trade and merchandise."—Barbosa, 16.

1532.—"... and after they had passed Cape Guardafu, Dom Estevão was going along in such depression that he was like to die of grief, on arriving at MAGADOXO, they stopped to water. And the King of the country, hearing that there had come a son of the Count Admiral, of whom all had ample knowledge as being the first to discover and navigate on that coast, came to the shore to see him, and made great offers of all that he could require."—Couto, IV. viii. 2.

1727.—"MAGADOXA, or as the Portuguese call it, MAGADOCIA, is a pretty large City, about 2 or 3 Miles from the Sea, from whence it has a very fine Aspect, being adorn'd with many high Steeples and Mosques."—A. Hamilton, i. 12-13, [ed. 1744].

MAGAZINE, s. This word is, of course, not Anglo-Indian, but may find a place here because of its origin from Ar. makhāzin, plur. of al-makhzan, whence Sp. almacen, almagacen, magacen, Port. almazem, armazem, Ital. magazzino, Fr. magazin.

c. 1340.—"The Sultan ... made him a grant of the whole city of Sīrī and all its houses with the gardens and fields of the treasury (MAKHZAN) adjacent to the city (of Delhi)."—Ibn Batuta, iii. 262.

1539.—"A que Pero de Faria respondea, que lhe desse elle commissão per mandar nos ALMAZẼS, et que logo proveria no socorro que entendia ser necessario."—Pinto, cap. xxi.

MAHÁJUN, s. Hind. from Skt. mahā-jan, 'great person.' A banker and merchant. In Southern and Western India the vernacular word has various other applications which are given in Wilson.

[1813.—"MAHAJEN, MAHAJANUM, a great person, a merchant."—Gloss. to 5th Rep. s.v.]

c. 1861.—

"Down there lives a MAHAJUN—my father gave him a bill, I have paid the knave thrice over, and here I'm paying him still. He shows me a long stamp paper, and must have my land—must he? If I were twenty years younger, he should get six feet by three." Sir A. C. Lyall, The Old Pindaree.

1885.—"The MAHAJUN hospitably entertains his victim, and speeds his homeward departure, giving no word or sign of his business till the time for appeal has gone by, and the decree is made absolute. Then the storm bursts on the head of the luckless hill-man, who finds himself loaded with an overwhelming debt, which he has never incurred, and can never hope to discharge; and so he practically becomes the MAHAJUN'S slave for the rest of his natural life."—Lt.-Col. T. Lewin, A Fly on the Wheel, 339.

MAHANNAH, s. (See MEEANA.)

MAHÉ, n.p. Properly Māyēl̤i. [According to the Madras Gloss. the Mal. name is Mayyazhi, mai, 'black,' azhi, 'river mouth'; but the title is from the French Mahé, being one of the names of Labourdonnais.] A small settlement on the Malabar coast, 4 m. S.E. of Tellicherry, where the French established a factory for the sake of the pepper trade in 1722, and which they still retain. It is not now of any importance.

MAHI, n.p. The name of a considerable river flowing into the upper part of the Gulf of Cambay. ["The height of its banks, and the fierceness of its floods; the deep gullies through which the traveller has to pass on his way to the river, and perhaps, above all, the bad name of the tribes on its banks, explain the proverb: 'When the Mahi is crossed, there is comfort'" (Imp. Gazetteer, s.v.).]

c. A.D. 80-90.—"Next comes another gulf ... extending also to the north, at the mouth of which is an island called Baiōnēs (PERIM), and at the innermost extremity a great river called MAÏS."—Periplus, ch. 42.

MAHOUT, s. The driver and tender of an elephant. Hind. mahā-wat, from Skt. mahā-mātra, 'great in measure,' a high officer, &c., so applied. The Skt. term occurs in this sense in the Mahābhārata (e.g. iv. 1761, &c.). The Mahout is mentioned in the 1st Book of Maccabees as 'the INDIAN.' It is remarkable that we find what is apparently mahā-mātra, in the sense of a high officer in Hesychius:

"Μαμάτραι, οἱ στρατηγοὶ παρ' Ἰνδοῖς."—Hesych. s.v.

c. 1590.—"Mast elephants (see MUST). There are five and a half servants to each, viz., first a MAHAWAT, who sits on the neck of the animal and directs its movements.... He gets 200 dáms per month.... Secondly a Bhói, who sits behind, upon the rump of the elephant, and assists in battle, and in quickening the speed of the animal; but he often performs the duties of the MAHAWAT.... Thirdly the Met'hs (see MATE).... A Met'h fetches fodder, and assists in caparisoning the elephant...."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 125.

1648.—"... and MAHOUTS for the elephants...."—Van Twist, 56.

1826.—"I will now pass over the term of my infancy, which was employed in learning to read and write—my preceptor being a MAHOUHUT, or elephant-driver—and will take up my adventures."—Pandurang Hari, 21; [ed. 1873, i. 28].

1848.—"Then he described a tiger hunt, and the manner in which the MAHOUT of his elephant had been pulled off his seat by one of the infuriate animals."—Thackeray, Vanity Fair, ch. iv.

MAHRATTA, n.p. Hind. Marhaṭā, Marhaṭṭā, Marhāṭā (Marhaṭī, Marahṭī, Marhaiṭī), and Marāṭhā. The name of a famous Hindu race, from the old Skt. name of their country, Mahā-rāshṭra, 'Magna Regio.' [On the other hand H. A. Acworth (Ballads of the Marathas, Intro. vi.) derives the word from a tribal name Raṭhī or Raṭhā, 'chariot fighters,' from raṭh, 'a chariot,' thus Mahā-Raṭhā means 'Great Warrior.' This was transferred to the country and finally Sanskritised into Mahā-rāshṭra. Again some authorities (Wilson, Indian Caste, ii. 48; Baden-Powell, J. R. As. Soc., 1897, p. 249, note) prefer to derive the word from the Mhār or Mahār, a once numerous and dominant race. And see the discussion in the Bombay Gazetteer, I. pt. ii. 143 seq.]

c. 550.—"The planet (Saturn's) motion in Açleshâ causes affliction to aquatic animals or products, and snakes ... in Pûrva Phalgunî to vendors of liquors, women of the town, damsels, and the MAHRATTAS...."—Bṛhat Saṇhitā, tr. by Kern, J.R. As. Soc. 2nd ser. v. 64.

640.—"De là il prit la direction du Nord-Ouest, traversa une vaste forêt, et ... il arriva au royaume de Mo-ho-la-to (MAHĀRĀSHṬRA)...."—Pèl. Bouddh. i. 202; [Bombay Gazetteer, I. pt. ii. 353].

c. 1030.—"De Dhar, en se dirigeant vers le midi, jusqu'à la rivière de Nymyah on comte 7 parasanges; de là à MAHRAT-DESSA 18 paras."—Albirúni, in Reinaud's Fragmens, 109.

c. 1294-5.—"Alá-ud-dín marched to Elichpúr, and thence to Ghati-lajaura ... the people of that country had never heard of the Mussulmans; the MAHRATTA land had never been punished by their armies; no Mussulman King or Prince had penetrated so far."—Zía-ud-dín Barní, in Elliot, iii. 150.

c. 1328.—"In this Greater India are twelve idolatrous Kings, and more.... There is also the Kingdom of MARATHA which is very great."—Friar Jordanus, 41.

1673.—"They tell their tale in MORATTY; by Profession they are Gentues."—Fryer, 174.

1747.—"Agreed on the arrival of these Ships that We take Five Hundred (500) Peons more into our Service, that the 50 MORATTA Horses be augmented to 100 as We found them very usefull in the last Skirmish...."—Consn. at Ft. St. David, Jan. 6 (MS. Record in India Office).

1748.—"That upon his hearing the MIRATTOES had taken Tanner's Fort ..."—In Long, p. 5.

c. 1760.—"... those dangerous and powerful neighbors the MORATTOES; who being now masters of the contiguous island of Salsette ..."—Grose, ii. 44.

" "The name of MORATTOES, or MARATTAS, is, I have reason to think, a derivation in their country-language, or by corruption, from Mar-Rajah."—Ibid. ii. 75.

1765.—"These united princes and people are those which are known by the general name of MAHARATTORS; a word compounded of Rattor and Maahah; the first being the name of a particular Raazpoot (or Rajpoot) tribe; and the latter, signifying great or mighty (as explained by Mr. Fraser)...."—Holwell, Hist. Events, &c., i. 105.

c. 1769.—Under a mezzotint portrait: "The Right Honble George Lord Pigot, Baron Pigot of Patshul in the Kingdom of Ireland, President and Governor of and for all the Affairs of the United Company of Merchants of England trading to the East Indies, on the Coast of Choromandel, and Orixa, and of the Chingee and MORATTA Countries, &c., &c., &c."

c. 1842.—

"... Ah, for some retreat Deep in yonder shining Orient, where my life began to beat; Where in wild MAHRATTA battle fell my father evil starr'd." —Tennyson, Locksley Hall.

The following is in the true HOBSON-JOBSON manner:

[1859.—"This term MARHATTA or MÂRHUTTA, is derived from the mode of warfare adopted by these men. Mar means to strike, and hutna, to get out of the way, i.e. those who struck a blow suddenly and at once retreated out of harm's way."—H. Dundas Robertson, District Duties during the Revolt in 1857, p. 104, note.]

MAHRATTA DITCH, n.p. An excavation made in 1742, as described in the extract from Orme, on the landward sides of Calcutta, to protect the settlement from the Mahratta bands. Hence the term, or for shortness 'The Ditch' simply, as a disparaging name for Calcutta (see DITCHER). The line of the Ditch corresponded nearly with the outside of the existing Circular Road, except at the S.E. and S., where the work was never executed. [There is an excavation known by the same name at Madras excavated in 1780. (Murray, Handbook, 1859, p. 43).]

1742.—"In the year 1742 the Indian inhabitants of the Colony requested and obtained permission to dig a ditch at their own expense, round the Company's bounds, from the northern parts of Sootanatty to the southern part of Govindpore. In six months three miles were finished: when the inhabitants ... discontinued the work, which from the occasion was called the MORATTOE DITCH."—Orme, ed. 1803, ii. 45.

1757.—"That the Bounds of Calcutta are to extend the whole Circle of Ditch dug upon the Invasion of the MARATTES; also 600 yards without it, for an Esplanade."—Articles of Agreement sent by Colonel Clive (previous to the Treaty with the Nabob of May 14). In Memoirs of the Revolution in Bengal, 1760, p. 89.

1782.—"To the Proprietors and Occupiers of Houses and other Tenements within the MAHRATTA ENTRENCHMENT."—India Gazette, Aug. 10.

[1840.—"Less than a hundred years ago, it was thought necessary to fortify Calcutta against the horsemen of Berar, and the name of the MAHRATTA DITCH still preserves the memory of the danger."—Macaulay, Essay on Clive.]

1872.—"The Calcutta cockney, who glories in the MAHRATTA DITCH...."—Govinda Samanta, i. 25.

MAHSEER, MASEER, MASAL, &c. Hind. mahāsir, mahāser, mahāsaulā, s. The name is applied to perhaps more than one of the larger species of Barbus (N.O. Cyprinidae), but especially to B. Mosul of Buchanan, B. Tor, Day, B. megalepis, McLelland, found in the larger Himālayan rivers, and also in the greater perennial rivers of Madras and Bombay. It grows at its largest, to about the size of the biggest salmon, and more. It affords also the highest sport to Indian anglers; and from these circumstances has sometimes been called, misleadingly, the 'Indian salmon.' The origin of the name Mahseer, and its proper spelling, are very doubtful. It may be Skt. mahā-śiras, 'big-head,' or mahā-śalka, 'large-scaled.' The latter is most probable, for the scales are so large that Buchanan mentions that playing cards were made from them at Dacca. Mr. H. S. Thomas suggests mahā-āsya, 'great mouth.' [The word does not appear in the ordinary dicts.; on the whole, perhaps the derivation from mahā-śiras is most probable.]

c. 1809.—"The MASAL of the Kosi is a very large fish, which many people think still better than the Rohu, and compare it to the salmon."—Buchanan, Eastern India, iii. 194.

1822.—"MAHASAULA and Tora, variously altered and corrupted, and with various additions may be considered as genuine appellations, amongst the natives for these fishes, all of which frequent large rivers."—F. Buchanan Hamilton, Fishes of the Ganges, 304.

1873.—"In my own opinion and that of others whom I have met, the MAHSEER shows more sport for its size than a salmon."—H. S. Thomas, The Rod in India, p. 9.

MAINATO, s. Tam. Mal. Mainātta, a washerman or DHOBY (q.v.).

1516.—"There is another sect of Gentiles which they call MAINATOS, whose business it is to wash the clothes of the Kings, Bramins, and Naires; and by this they get their living; and neither they nor their sons can take up any other business."—Barbosa, Lisbon ed., 334.

c. 1542.—"In this inclosure do likewise remain all the Landresses, by them called MAYNATES, which wash the linnen of the City (Pequin), who, as we were told, are above an hundred thousand."—Pinto, in Cogan, p. 133. The original (cap. cv.) has todos os MAINATOS, whose sex Cogan has changed.

1554.—"And the farm (renda) of MAINATOS, which farm prohibits any one from washing clothes, which is the work of a MAINATO, except by arrangement with the farmer (Rendeiro)...."—Tombo, &c., 53.

[1598.—"There are some among them that do nothing els but wash cloathes: ... they are called MAYNATTOS."—Linschoten, Hak. Soc. i. 260.

[c. 1610.—"These folk (the washermen) are called MENATES."—Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. ii. 71.]

1644.—(Expenses of Daman) "For two MAYNATOS, three water boys (bois de agoa), one sombreyro boy, and 4 torch bearers for the said Captain, at 1 xerafim each a month, comes in the year to 36,000 rés or x^{ns}. 00120.0.00."—Bocarro, MS. f. 181.

MAISTRY, MISTRY, sometimes even MYSTERY, s. Hind. mistrī. This word, a corruption of the Portuguese mestre, has spread into the vernaculars all over India, and is in constant Anglo-Indian use. Properly 'a foreman,' 'a master-workman'; but used also, at least in Upper India, for any artizan, as rāj-mistrī (properly Pers. rāz), 'a mason or bricklayer,' lohār-mistrī, 'a blacksmith,' &c. The proper use of the word, as noted above, corresponds precisely to the definition of the Portuguese word, as applied to artizans in Bluteau: "Artifice que sabe bem o seu officio. Peritus artifex.... Opifex, alienorum operum inspector." In W. and S. India MAISTRY, as used in the household, generally means the cook, or the tailor. (See CALEEFA.)

MASTÈR (Мастеръ) is also the Russian term for a skilled workman, and has given rise to several derived adjectives. There is too a similar word in modern Greek, μαγίστωρ.

1404.—"And in these (chambers) there were works of gold and azure and of many other colours, made in the most marvellous way; insomuch that even in Paris whence come the subtle MAESTROS, it would be reckoned beautiful to see."—Clavijo, § cv. (Comp. Markham, p. 125).

1524.—"And the Viceroy (D. Vasco da Gama) sent to seize in the river of the Culymutys four newly-built CATURS, and fetched them to Cochin. These were built very light for fast rowing, and were greatly admired. But he ordered them to be burned, saying that he intended to show the Moors that we knew how to build better CATURS than they did; and he sent for MESTRE Vyne the Genoese, whom he had brought to build galleys, and asked him if he could build boats that would row faster than the Malabar paraos (see PROW). He answered: 'Sir, I'll build you brigantines fast enough to catch a mosquito....'"—Correa, ii. 830.

[1548.—"He ordered to be collected in the smithies of the dockyard as many smiths as could be had, for he had many MISTERES."—Ibid. iv. 663.]

1554.—"To the MESTRÈ of the smith's shop (ferraria) 30,000 reis of salary and 600 reis for maintenance" (see BATTA).—S. Botelho, Tombo, 65.

1800.—"... I have not yet been able to remedy the mischief done in my absence, as we have the advantage here of the assistance of some Madras DUBASHES and MAISTRIES" (ironical).—Wellington, i. 67.

1883.—"... My mind goes back to my ancient Goanese cook. He was only a MAISTRY, or more vulgarly a BOBBERJEE (see BOBACHEE), yet his sonorous name recalled the conquest of Mexico, or the doubling of the Cape."—Tribes on My Frontier, 35.

[1900.—"MYSTERY very sick, Mem Sahib, very sick all the night."—Temple Bar, April.]

MAJOON, s. Hind. from Ar. ma'jūn, lit. 'kneaded,' and thence what old medical books call 'an electuary' (i.e. a compound of medicines kneaded with syrup into a soft mass), but especially applied to an intoxicating confection of hemp leaves, &c., sold in the bazar. [Burton, Ar. Nights, iii. 159.] In the Deccan the form is ma'jūm. Moodeen Sheriff, in his Suppt. to the Pharmac. of India, writes maghjūn. "The chief ingredients in making it are ganja (or hemp) leaves, milk, ghee, poppy-seeds, flowers of the thorn-apple (see DATURA), the powder of nux vomica, and sugar" (Qanoon-e-Islam, Gloss. lxxxiii).

1519.—"Next morning I halted ... and indulging myself with a MAAJÛN, made them throw into the water the liquor used for intoxicating fishes, and caught a few fish."—Baber, 272.

1563.—"And this they make up into an electuary, with sugar, and with the things above-mentioned, and this they call MAJU."—Garcia, f. 27_v_.

1781.—"Our ill-favoured guard brought in a dose of MAJUM each, and obliged us to eat it ... a little after sunset the surgeon came, and with him 30 or 40 Caffres, who seized us, and held us fast till the operation (circumcision) was performed."—Soldier's letter quoted in Hon. John Lindsay's Journal of Captivity in Mysore, Lives of Lindsays, iii. 293.

1874.—"... it (Bhang) is made up with flour and various additions into a sweetmeat or MAJUM of a green colour."—Hanbury and Flückiger, 493.

MALABAR, n.p.

A. The name of the sea-board country which the Arabs called the 'Pepper-Coast,' the ancient Kerala of the Hindus, the Λιμύρικη, or rather Διμύρικη, of the Greeks (see TAMIL), is not in form indigenous, but was applied, apparently, first by the Arab or Arabo-Persian mariners of the Gulf. The substantive part of the name, Malai, or the like, is doubtless indigenous; it is the Dravadian term for 'mountain' in the Sanskritized form Malaya, which is applied specifically to the southern portion of the Western Ghauts, and from which is taken the indigenous term Malayālam, distinguishing that branch of the Dravidian language in the tract which we call Malabar. This name—Male or Malai, Malīah, &c.,—we find in the earlier post-classic notices of India; whilst in the great Temple-Inscription of Tanjore (11th century) we find the region in question called Malai-nāḍu (nāḍu, 'country'). The affix bār appears attached to it first (so far as we are aware) in the Geography of Edrisi (c. 1150). This (Persian?) termination, bār, whatever be its origin, and whether or no it be connected either with the Ar. barr, 'a continent,' on the one hand, or with the Skt. vāra, 'a region, a slope,' on the other, was most assuredly applied by the navigators of the Gulf to other regions which they visited besides Western India. Thus we have Zangī-bār (mod. ZANZIBAR), 'the country of the Blacks'; Kalāh-bār, denoting apparently the coast of the Malay Peninsula; and even according to the dictionaries, Hindū-bār for India. In the Arabic work which affords the second of these examples (Relation, &c., tr. by Reinaud, i. 17) it is expressly explained: "The word bār serves to indicate that which is both a coast and a kingdom." It will be seen from the quotations below that in the Middle Ages, even after the establishment of the use of this termination, the exact form of the name as given by foreign travellers and writers, varies considerably. But, from the time of the Portuguese discovery of the Cape route, Malavar, or Malabar, as we have it now, is the persistent form. [Mr. Logan (Manual, i. 1) remarks that the name is not in use in the district itself except among foreigners and English-speaking natives; the ordinary name is Malayālam or Malāyam, 'the Hill Country.']

c. 545.—"The imports to Taprobane are silk, aloeswood, cloves, sandalwood.... These again are passed on from Sielediba to the marts on this side, such as Μαλὲ, where the pepper is grown.... And the most notable places of trade are these, Sindu ... and then the five marts of Μαλὲ, from which the pepper is exported, viz., Parti, Mangaruth, Salopatana, Nalopatana, and Pudopatana."—Cosmas, Bk. xi. In Cathay, &c., p. clxxviii.

c. 645.—"To the south this kingdom is near the sea. There rise the mountains called MO-LA-YE (Malaya), with their precipitous sides, and their lofty summits, their dark valleys and their deep ravines. On these mountains grows the white sandalwood."—Hwen T'sang, in Julien, iii. 122.

851.—"From this place (Maskat) ships sail for India, and run for Kaulam-MALAI; the distance from Maskat to Kaulam-MALAI is a month's sail with a moderate wind."—Relation, &c., tr. by Reinaud, i. 15. The same work at p. 15 uses the expression "Country of Pepper" (Balad-ul-falfal).

890.—"From Sindán to MALÍ is five days' journey; in the latter pepper is to be found, also the bamboo."—Ibn Khurdádba, in Elliot, i. 15.

c. 1030.—"You enter then on the country of Lárán, in which is Jaimúr (see under CHOUL), then MALIAH, then Kánchí, then Dravira (see DRAVIDIAN)."—Al-Birúni, in Reinaud, Fragmens, 121.

c. 1150.—"Fandarina (see PANDARANI) is a town built at the mouth of a river which comes from MANÍBÁR, where vessels from India and Sind cast anchor."—Idrisi, in Elliot, i. 90.

c. 1200.—"Hari sports here in the delightful spring ... when the breeze from MALAYA is fragrant from passing over the charming lavanga" (cloves).—Gīta Govinda.

1270.—"MALIBAR is a large country of India, with many cities, in which pepper is produced."—Kazwīnī, in Gildemeister, 214.

1293.—"You can sail (upon that sea) between these islands and Ormes, and (from Ormes) to those parts which are called (MINIBAR), is a distance of 2,000 miles, in a direction between south and south-east; then 300 miles between east and south-east from MINIBAR to Maabar" (see MABAR).—Letter of Fr. John of Montecorvino, in Cathay, i. 215.

1298.—"MELIBAR is a great kingdom lying towards the west.... There is in this kingdom a great quantity of pepper."—Marco Polo, Bk. iii. ch. 25.

c. 1300.—"Beyond Guzerat are Kankan (see CONCAN) and TĀNA; beyond them the country of MALÍBÁR, which from the boundary of Karoha to Kúlam (probably from Gheriah to QUILON) is 300 parasangs in length."—Rashíduddín, in Elliot, i. 68.

c. 1320.—"A certain traveller states that India is divided into three parts, of which the first, which is also the most westerly, is that on the confines of Kerman and Sind, and is called Gūzerāt; the second MANĪBĀR, or the Land of Pepper, east of Gūzerāt."—Abulfeda, in Gildemeister, 184.

c. 1322.—"And now that ye may know how pepper is got, let me tell you that it groweth in a certain empire, whereunto I came to land, the name whereof is MINIBAR."—Friar Odoric, in Cathay, &c., 74.

c. 1343.—"After 3 days we arrived in the country of the MULAIBĀR, which is the country of Pepper. It stretches in length a distance of two months' march along the sea-shore."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 71.

c. 1348-49.—"We embarked on board certain junks from Lower India, which is called MINUBAR."—John de' Marignolli, in Cathay, 356.

c. 1420-30.—"... Departing thence he ... arrived at a noble city called Coloen.... This province is called MELIBARIA, and they collect in it the ginger called by the natives colombi, pepper, brazil-wood, and the cinnamon, called canella grossa."—Conti, corrected from Jones's tr. in India in XVth Cent. 17-18.

c. 1442.—"The coast which includes Calicut with some neighbouring ports, and which extends as far as (Kael), a place situated opposite to the Island of Serendib ... bears the general name of MELĪBĀR."—Abdurrazzāk, ibid. 19.

1459.—Fra Mauro's great Map has MILIBAR.

1514.—"In the region of India called MELIBAR, which province begins at Goa, and extends to Cape Comedis (COMORIN)...."—Letter of Giov. da Empoli, 79. It is remarkable to find this Florentine using this old form in 1514.

1516.—"And after that the Moors of Meca discovered India, and began to navigate near it, which was 610 years ago, they used to touch at this country of MALABAR on account of the pepper which is found there."—Barbosa, 102.

1553.—"We shall hereafter describe particularly the position of this city of Calecut, and of the country of MALAUAR in which it stands."—Barros, Dec. I. iv. c. 6. In the following chapter he writes MALABAR.

1554.—"From Diu to the Islands of Dib. Steer first S.S.E., the pole being made by five inches, side towards the land in the direction of E.S.E. and S.E. by E. till you see the mountains of MONÍBÁR."—The Mohit, in J. As. Soc. Ben. v. 461.

1572.—

"Esta provincia cuja porto agora Tomado tendes, MALABAR se chama: Do culto antiguo os idolos adora, Que cà por estas partes se derrama." Camões, vii. 32.

By Burton:

"This province, in whose Ports your ships have tane refuge, the MALABAR by name is known; its ántique rite adoreth idols vain, Idol-religion being broadest sown."

Since De Barros MALABAR occurs almost universally.

[1623.—"... MAHABAR Pirates...."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. i. 121.]

1877.—The form MALIBAR is used in a letter from Athanasius Peter III., "Patriarch of the Syrians of Antioch" to the Marquis of Salisbury, dated Cairo, July 18.

MALABAR, n.p.

B. This word, through circumstances which have been fully elucidated by Bishop Caldwell in his Comparative Grammar (2nd ed. 10-12), from which we give an extract below,[158] was applied by the Portuguese not only to the language and people of the country thus called, but also to the Tamil language and the people speaking Tamil. In the quotations following, those under A apply, or may apply, to the proper people or language of Malabar (see MALAYALAM); those under B are instances of the misapplication to Tamil, a misapplication which was general (see e.g. in Orme, passim) down to the beginning of the last century, and which still holds among the more ignorant Europeans and Eurasians in S. India and Ceylon.

(A.)

1552.—"A lingua dos Gentios de Canara e MALABAR."—Castanheda, ii. 78.

1572.—

"Leva alguns MALABARES, que tomou Por força, dos que o Samorim mandara." Camões, ix. 14.

[By Aubertin:

"He takes some Malabars he kept on board By force, of those whom Samorin had sent ..."]

1582.—"They asked of the MALABARS which went with him what he was?"—Castañeda, (tr. by N. L.) f. 37_v_.

1602.—"We came to anchor in the Roade of Achen ... where we found sixteene or eighteene saile of shippes of diuers Nations, some Goserats, some of Bengala, some of Calecut, called MALABARES, some Pegues, and some Patanyes."—Sir J. Lancaster, in Purchas, i. 153.

1606.—In Gouvea (Synodo, ff. 2_v_, 3, &c.) MALAVAR means the Malayālam language.

(B.)

1549.—"Enrico Enriques, a Portuguese priest of our Society, a man of excellent virtue and good example, who is now in the Promontory of Comorin, writes and speaks the MALABAR tongue very well indeed."—Letter of Xavier, in Coleridge's Life, ii. 73.

1680.—"Whereas it hath been hitherto accustomary at this place to make sales and alienations of houses in writing in the Portuguese, Gentue, and MALLABAR languages, from which some inconveniences have arisen...."—Ft. St. Geo. Consn., Sept 9, in Notes and Extracts, No. iii. 33.

[1682.—"An order in English Portuguez Gentue & MALLABAR for the preventing the transportation of this Countrey People and makeing them slaves in other Strange Countreys...."—Pringle, Diary Ft. St. Geo., 1st ser. i. 87.]

1718.—"This place (Tranquebar) is altogether inhabited by MALABARIAN Heathens."—Propn. of the Gospel in the East, Pt. i. (3rd ed.), p. 18.

" "Two distinct languages are necessarily required; one is the Damulian, commonly called MALABARICK."—Ibid. Pt. iii. 33.

1734.—"Magnopere commendantes zelum, ac studium Missionariorum, qui libros sacram Ecclesiae Catholicae doctrinam, rerumque sacrarum monumenta continentes, pro Indorum Christi fidelium eruditione in linguam MALABARICAM seu Tamulicam transtulere."—Brief of Pope Clement XII., in Norbert, ii. 432-3. These words are adopted from Card. Tournon's decree of 1704 (see ibid. i. 173).

c. 1760.—"Such was the ardent zeal of M. Ziegenbalg that in less than a year he attained a perfect knowledge of the MALABARIAN tongue.... He composed also a MALABARIAN dictionary of 20,000 words."—Grose, i. 261.

1782.—"Les habitans de la côte de Coromandel sont appellés Tamouls; les Européens les nomment improprement MALABARS."—Sonnerat, i. 47.

1801.—"From Niliseram to the Chandergerry River no language is understood but the MALABARS of the Coast."—Sir T. Munro, in Life, i. 322.

In the following passage the word MALABARS is misapplied still further, though by a writer usually most accurate and intelligent:

1810.—"The language spoken at Madras is the Talinga, here called MALABARS."—Maria Graham, 128.

1860.—"The term 'MALABAR' is used throughout the following pages in the comprehensive sense in which it is applied in the Singhalese Chronicles to the continental invaders of Ceylon; but it must be observed that the adventurers in these expeditions, who are styled in the Mahawanso 'damilos,' or Tamils, came not only from ... 'Malabar,' but also from all parts of the Peninsula as far north as Cuttack and Orissa."—Tennent's Ceylon, i. 353.

MALABAR-CREEPER, s. Argyreia malabarica, Choisy.

[MALABAR EARS, s. The seed vessels of a tree which Ives calls Codaga palli.

1773.—"From their shape they are called MALABAR-EARS, on account of the resemblance they bear to the ears of the women of the Malabar coast, which from the large slit made in them and the great weight of ornamental rings put into them, are rendered very large, and so long that sometimes they touch the very shoulders."—Ives, 465.

MALABAR HILL, n.p. This favourite site of villas on Bombay Island is stated by Mr. Whitworth to have acquired its name from the fact that the Malabar pirates, who haunted this coast, used to lie behind it.

[1674.—"On the other side of the great Inlet, to the Sea, is a great Point abutting against Old Woman's Island, and is called MALABAR-HILL ... the remains of a stupendous Pagod, near a Tank of Fresh Water, which the Malabars visited it mostly for."—Fryer, 68 seq.]

[MALABAR OIL, s. "The ambiguous term 'MALABAR OIL' is applied to a mixture of the oil obtained from the livers of several kinds of fishes frequenting the Malabar Coast of India and the neighbourhood of Karachi."—Watt, Econ. Dict. v. 113.]

MALABAR RITES. This was a name given to certain heathen and superstitious practices which the Jesuits of the Madura, Carnatic, and Mysore Missions permitted to their converts, in spite of repeated prohibitions by the Popes. And though these practices were finally condemned by the Legate Cardinal de Tournon in 1704, they still subsist, more or less, among native Catholic Christians, and especially those belonging to the (so-called) Goa Churches. These practices are generally alleged to have arisen under Father de' Nobili ("Robertus de Nobilibus"), who came to Madura about 1606. There can be no doubt that the aim of this famous Jesuit was to present Christianity to the people under the form, as it were, of a Hindu translation!

The nature of the practices of which we speak may be gathered from the following particulars of their prohibition. In 1623 Pope Gregory XV., by a constitution dated 31st January, condemned the following:—1. The investiture of Brahmans and certain other castes with the sacred thread, through the agency of Hindu priests, and with Hindu ceremonies. For these Christian ceremonies were to be substituted; and the thread was to be regarded as only a civil badge. 2. The ornamental use of sandalwood paste was permitted, but not its superstitious use, e.g., in mixture with cowdung ashes, &c., for ceremonial purification. 3. Bathing as a ceremonial purification. 4. The observance of caste, and the refusal of high-caste Christians to mix with low-caste Christians in the churches was disapproved.

The quarrels between Capuchins and Jesuits later in the 17th century again brought the Malabar Rites into notice, and Cardinal de Tournon was sent on his unlucky mission to determine these matters finally. His decree (June 23, 1704) prohibited:—1. A mutilated form of baptism, in which were omitted certain ceremonies offensive to Hindus, specifically the use of 'saliva, sal, et insufflatio.' 2. The use of Pagan names. 3. The Hinduizing of Christian terms by translation. 4. Deferring the baptism of children. 5. Infant marriages. 6. The use of the Hindu tali (see TALEE). 7. Hindu usages at marriages. 8. Augury at marriages, by means of a coco-nut. 9. The exclusion of women from churches during certain periods. 10. Ceremonies on a girl's attainment of puberty. 11. The making distinctions between Pariahs and others. 12. The assistance of Christian musicians at heathen ceremonies. 13. The use of ceremonial washings and bathings. 14. The use of cowdung-ashes. 15. The reading and use of Hindu books.

With regard to No. 11 it may be observed that in South India the distinction of castes still subsists, and the only Christian Mission in that quarter which has really succeeded in abolishing caste is that of the Basel Society.

MALABATHRUM, s. There can be very little doubt that this classical export from India was the dried leaf of various species of Cinnamomum, which leaf was known in Skt. as tamāla-pattra. Some who wrote soon after the Portuguese discoveries took, perhaps not unnaturally, the pān or betel-leaf for the malabathrum of the ancients; and this was maintained by Dean Vincent in his well-known work on the Commerce and Navigation of the Ancients, justifying this in part by the Ar. name of the betel, tambūl, which is taken from Skt. tāmbūla, betel; tāmbūla-pattra, betel-leaf. The tamāla-pattra, however, the produce of certain wild spp. of Cinnamomum, obtained both in the hills of Eastern Bengal and in the forests of Southern India, is still valued in India as a medicine and aromatic, though in no such degree as in ancient times, and it is usually known in domestic economy as TEJPĀT, or corruptly tezpāt, i.e. 'pungent leaf.' The leaf was in the Arabic Materia Medica under the name of sādhaj or sādhajī Hindī, as was till recently in the English Pharmacopœia as Folium indicum, which will still be found in Italian drug-shops. The matter is treated, with his usual lucidity and abundance of local knowledge, in the Colloquios of Garcia de Orta, of which we give a short extract. This was evidently unknown to Dean Vincent, as he repeats the very errors which Garcia dissipates. Garcia also notes that confusion of Malabathrum and Folium indicum with spikenard, which is traceable in Pliny as well as among the Arab pharmacologists. The ancients did no doubt apply the name Malabathrum to some other substance, an unguent or solid extract. Rheede, we may notice, mentions that in his time in Malabar, oils in high medical estimation were made from both leaves and root of the "wild cinnamon" of that coast, and that from the root of the same tree a camphor was extracted, having several of the properties of real camphor and more fragrance. (See a note by one of the present writers in Cathay, &c., pp. cxlv.-xlvi.) The name Cinnamon is properly confined to the tree of Ceylon (C. Zeylanicum). The other Cinnamoma are properly Cassia barks. [See Watt. Econ. Dict. ii. 317 seqq.]

c. A.D. 60.—"Μαλάβαθρον ἔνιοι ὑπολάμβάνουσιν εἶναι τῆς Ἰνδικῆς νάρδου φύλλον, πλανώμενοι ὑπὸ τῆς κατὰ τὴν ὀσμὴν, ἐμφερειας, ... ἴδιον γαρ ἐστι γένος φυόμενον ἐν τοῖς Ἰνδικοῖς τέλμασι, φύλλον ὃν ἐπινηχόμενον ὕδατι."—Dioscorides, Mat. Med. i. 11.

c. A.D. 70.—"We are beholden to Syria for Malabathrum. This is a tree that beareth leaves rolled up round together, and seeming to the eie withered. Out of which there is drawn and pressed an Oile for perfumers to use.... And yet there commeth a better kind thereof from India.... The rellish thereof ought to resemble Nardus at the tongue end. The perfume or smell that ... the leafe yeeldeth when it is boiled in wine, passeth all others. It is straunge and monstrous which is observed in the price; for it hath risen from one denier to three hundred a pound."—Pliny, xii. 26, in Ph. Holland.

c. A.D. 90.—"... Getting rid of the fibrous parts, they take the leaves and double them up into little balls, which they stitch through with the fibres of the withes. And these they divide into three classes.... And thus originate the three qualities of MALABATHRUM, which the people who have prepared them carry to India for sale."—Periplus, near the end. [Also see Yule, Intro. Gill, River of Golden Sand, ed. 1883, p. 89.]

1563.—"R. I remember well that in speaking of betel you told me that it was not folium indu, a piece of information of great value to me; for the physicians who put themselves forward as having learned much from these parts, assert that they are the same; and what is more, the modern writers ... call betel in their works tembul, and say that the Moors give it this name....

"O. That the two things are different as I told you is clear, for Avicenna treats them in two different chapters, viz., in 259, which treats of folium indu, and in 707, which treats of tambul ... and the folium indu is called by the Indians TAMALAPATRA, which the Greeks and Latins corrupted into MALABATHRUM," &c.—Garcia, ff. 95_v_, 96.

c. 1690.—"Hoc Tembul seu Sirium, licet vulgatissimum in India sit folium, distinguendum est a Folio Indo seu MALABATHRO, Arabibus Cadegi Hindi, in Pharmacopoeis, et Indis, Tamala-patra et folio Indo dicto,... A nostra autem natione intellexi MALABATHRUM nihil aliud esse quam folium canellae, seu cinnamomi sylvestris."—Rumphius, v. 337.

c. 1760.—"... quand l'on considère que les Indiens appellent notre feuille Indienne TAMALAPATRA on croit d'apercevoir que le mot Grec μαλάβατρον en a été anciennement dérivé."—(Diderot) Encyclopédie, xx. 846.

1837.—(MALATROON is given in Arabic works of Materia Medica as the Greek of Sādhaj, and tuj and tej-pat as the Hindi synonymes). "By the latter names may be obtained everywhere in the bazars of India, the leaves of Cinn. Tamala and of Cinn. albiflorum."—Royle, Essay on Antiq. of Hindoo Medicine, 85.

MALACCA, n.p. The city which gives its name to the Peninsula and the Straits of Malacca, and which was the seat of a considerable Malay monarchy till its capture by the Portuguese under D'Alboquerque in 1511. One naturally supposes some etymological connection between Malay and Malacca. And such a connection is put forward by De Barros and D'Alboquerque (see below, and also under MALAY). The latter also mentions an alternative suggestion for the origin of the name of the city, which evidently refers to the Ar. mulāḳāt, 'a meeting.' This last, though it appears also in the Sijara Malayu, may be totally rejected. Crawfurd is positive that the place was called from the word malaka, the Malay name of the Phyllanthus emblica, or emblic MYROBALAN (q.v.), "a tree said to be abundant in that locality"; and this, it will be seen below, is given by Godinho de Eredia as the etymology. Malaka again seems to be a corruption of the Skt. amlaka, from amla, 'acid.' [Mr. Skeat writes: "There can be no doubt that Crawfurd is right, and that the place was named from the tree. The suggested connection between Malayu and Malaka appears impossible to me, and, I think, would do so to any one acquainted with the laws of the language. I have seen the Malaka tree myself and eaten its fruit. Ridley in his Botanical Lists has laka-laka and malaka which he identifies as Phyllanthus emblica, L. and P. pectinatus Hooker (Euphorbiaceae). The two species are hardly distinct, but the latter is the commoner form. The fact is that the place, as is so often the case among the Malays, must have taken its name from the Sungei Malaka, or Malaka River."]

1416.—"There was no King but only a chief, the country belonging to Siam.... In the year 1409, the imperial envoy Cheng Ho brought an order from the emperor and gave to the chief two silver seals, ... he erected a stone and raised the place to a city, after which the land was called the Kingdom of MALACCA (Moa-la-ka).... Tin is found in the mountains ... it is cast into small blocks weighing 1 catti 8 taels ... ten pieces are bound together with rattan and form a small bundle, whilst 40 pieces make a large bundle. In all their trading ... they use these pieces of tin instead of money."—Chinese Annals, in Groenveldt, p. 123.

1498.—"MELEQUA ... is 40 days from Qualecut with a fair wind ... hence proceeds all the clove, and it is worth there 9 crusados for a BAHAR (q.v.), and likewise nutmeg other 9 crusados the bahar; and there is much porcelain and much silk, and much tin, of which they make money, but the money is of large size and little value, so that it takes 3 farazalas (see FRAZALA) of it to make a crusado. Here too are many large parrots all red like fire."—Roteiro de V. da Gama, 110-111.

1510.—"When we had arrived at the city of MELACHA, we were immediately presented to the Sultan, who is a Moor ... I believe that more ships arrive here than in any other place in the world...."—Varthema, 224.

1511.—"This Paremiçura gave the name of MALACA to the new colony, because in the language of Java, when a man of Palimbão flees away they call him Malayo.... Others say that it was called Malaca because of the number of people who came there from one part and the other in so short a space of time, for the word Malaca also signifies to meet.... Of these two opinions let each one accept that which he thinks to be the best, for this is the truth of the matter."—Commentaries of Alboquerque, E.T. by Birch, iii. 76-77.

1516.—"The said Kingdom of Ansyane (see SIAM) throws out a great point of land into the sea, which makes there a cape, where the sea returns again towards China to the north; in this promontory is a small kingdom in which there is a large city called MALACA."—Barbosa, 191.

1553.—"A son of Paramisora called Xaquem Darxa, (i.e. Sikandar Shāh) ... to form the town of MALACA, to which he gave that name in memory of the banishment of his father, because in his vernacular tongue (Javanese) this was as much as to say 'banished,' and hence the people are called MALAIOS."—De Barros, II. vi. 1.

" "That which he (Alboquerque) regretted most of all that was lost on that vessel, was two lions cast in iron, a first-rate work, and most natural, which the King of China had sent to the King of MALACA, and which King Mahamed had kept, as an honourable possession, at the gate of his Palace, whence Affonso Alboquerque carried them off, as the principal item of his triumph on the capture of the city."—Ibid. II. vii. 1.

1572.—

"Nem tu menos fugir poderás deste Postoque rica, e postoque assentada Là no gremio da Aurora, onde nasceste, Opulenta MALACA nomeada! Assettas venenosas, que fizeste, Os crises, com que j'á te vejo armada, Malaios namorados, Jaos valentes, Todos farás ao Luso obedientes." Camões, x. 44.

By Burton:

"Nor shalt thou 'scape the fate to fall his prize, albeit so wealthy, and so strong thy site there on Aurora's bosom, whence thy rise, thou Home of Opulence, Malacca hight! The poysoned arrows which thine art supplies, the Krises thirsting, as I see, for fight, th' enamoured Malay-men, the Javan braves, all of the Lusian shall become the slaves."

1612.—"The Arabs call it Malakat, from collecting all merchants."—Sijara Malayu, in J. Ind. Arch. v. 322.

1613.—"MALACA significa Mirabolanos, fructa de hua arvore, plantada ao longo de hum ribeiro chamado Aerlele."—Godinho de Eredia, f. 4.

MALADOO, s. Chicken maladoo is an article in the Anglo-Indian menu. It looks like a corruption from the French cuisine, but of what? [Maladoo or Manadoo, a lady informs me, is cold meat, such as chicken or mutton, cut into slices, or pounded up and re-cooked in batter. The Port. malhado, 'beaten-up,' has been suggested as a possible origin for the word.]

MALAY, n.p. This is in the Malay language an adjective, Malāyu; thus orang Malāyu, 'a Malay'; tāna [tānah] Malāyu, 'the Malay country'; bahāsa [bhāsa] Malāyu, 'the Malay language.'

In Javanese the word malāyu signifies 'to run away,' and the proper name has traditionally been derived from this, in reference to the alleged foundation of MALACCA by Javanese fugitives; but we can hardly attach importance to this. It may be worthy at least of consideration whether the name was not of foreign, i.e. of S. Indian origin, and connected with the Malāya of the Peninsula (see under MALABAR). [Mr. Skeat writes: "The tradition given me by Javanese in the Malay States was that the name was applied to Javanese refugees, who peopled the S. of Sumatra. Whatever be the original meaning of the word, it is probable that it started its life-history as a river-name in the S. of Sumatra, and thence became applied to the district through which the river ran, and so to the people who lived there; after which it spread with the Malay dialect until it included not only many allied, but also many foreign, tribes; all Malay-speaking tribes being eventually called Malays without regard to racial origin. A most important passage in this connection is to be found in Leyden's Tr. of the 'Malay Annals' (1821), p. 20, in which direct reference to such a river is made: 'There is a country in the land of Andalás named Paralembang, which is at present denominated Palembang, the raja of which was denominated Damang Lebar Dawn (chieftain Broad-leaf), who derived his origin from Raja Sulan (Chulan?), whose great-grandson he was. The name of its river Muartatang, into which falls another river named Sungey MALAYU, near the source of which is a mountain named the mountain Sagantang Maha Miru.' Here Palembang is the name of a well-known Sumatran State, often described as the original home of the Malay race. In standard Malay 'Damang Lebar Dawn' would be 'Dĕmang Lebar Daun.' Raja Chulan is probably some mythical Indian king, the story being evidently derived from Indian traditions. 'Muartatang' may be a mistake for Muar Tenang, which is a place one heard of in the Peninsula, though I do not know for certain where it is. 'Sungey Malayu' simply means 'River Malayu.' 'Sagantang Maha Miru' is, I think, a mistake for Sa-guntang Maha Miru, which is the name used in the Peninsula for the sacred central mountain of the world on which the episode related in the Annals occurred" (see Skeat, Malay Magic, p. 2).]

It is a remarkable circumstance, which has been noted by Crawfurd, that a name which appears on Ptolemy's Tables as on the coast of the Golden Chersonese, and which must be located somewhere about Maulmain, is Μαλεοῦ Κῶλον, words which in Javanese (Malāyu-Kulon) would signify "Malays of the West." After this the next (possible) occurrence of the name in literature is in the Geography of Edrisi, who describes Malai as a great island in the eastern seas, or rather as occupying the position of the Lemuria of Mr. Sclater, for (in partial accommodation to the Ptolemaic theory of the Indian Sea) it stretched eastward nearly from the coast of Zinj, i.e. of Eastern Africa, to the vicinity of China. Thus it must be uncertain without further accounts whether it is an adumbration of the great Malay islands (as is on the whole probable) or of the Island of the Malagashes (Madagascar), if it is either. We then come to Marco Polo, and after him there is, we believe, no mention of the Malay name till the Portuguese entered the seas of the Archipelago.

[A.D. 690.—Mr. Skeat notes: "I Tsing speaks of the 'MOLO-YU country,' i.e. the district W. or N.W. of Palembang in Sumatra."]

c. 1150.—"The Isle of MALAI is very great.... The people devote themselves to very profitable trade; and there are found here elephants, rhinoceroses, and various aromatics and spices, such as clove, cinnamon, nard ... and nutmeg. In the mountains are mines of gold, of excellent quality ... the people also have windmills."—Edrisi, by Jaubert, i. 945.

c. 1273.—A Chinese notice records under this year that tribute was sent from Siam to the Emperor. "The Siamese had long been at war with the MALIYI, or MALIURH, but both nations laid aside their feud and submitted to China."—Notice by Sir T. Wade, in Bowring's Siam, i. 72.

c. 1292.—"You come to an Island which forms a kingdom, and is called MALAIUR. The people have a king of their own, and a peculiar language. The city is a fine and noble one, and there is a great trade carried on there. All kinds of spicery are to be found there."—Marco Polo, Bk. iii. ch. 8.

c. 1539.—"... as soon as he had delivered to him the letter, it was translated into the Portugal out of the MALAYAN tongue wherein it was written."—Pinto, E.T. p. 15.

1548.—"... having made a breach in the wall twelve fathom wide, he assaulted it with 10,000 strangers, Turks, Abyssins, Moors, Malauares, Achems, Jaos, and MALAYOS."—Ibid. p. 279.

1553.—"And so these Gentiles like the Moors who inhabit the sea-coasts of the Island (Sumatra), although they have each their peculiar language, almost all can speak the MALAY of Malacca as being the most general language of those parts."—Barros, III. v. 1.

" "Everything with them is to be a gentleman; and this has such prevalence in those parts that you will never find a native MALAY, however poor he may be, who will set his hand to lift a thing of his own or anybody else's; every service must be done by slaves."—Ibid. II. vi. 1.

1610.—"I cannot imagine what the Hollanders meane, to suffer these MALAYSIANS, Chinesians, and Moores of these countries, and to assist them in their free trade thorow all the Indies, and forbid it their owne seruants, countrymen, and Brethern, upon paine of death and losse of goods."—Peter Williamson Floris, in Purchas, i. 321.

[Mr. Skeat writes: "The word Malaya is now often applied by English writers to the Peninsula as a whole, and from this the term MALAYSIA as a term of wider application (i.e. to the Archipelago) has been coined (see quotation of 1610 above). The former is very frequently miswritten by English writers as 'Malay,' a barbarism which has even found place on the title-page of a book—'Travel and Sport in Burma, Siam and MALAY, by John Bradley, London, 1876.'"]

MALAYĀLAM. This is the name applied to one of the cultivated Dravidian languages, the closest in its relation to the Tamil. It is spoken along the Malabar coast, on the Western side of the GHAUTS (or Malāya mountains), from the Chandragiri River on the North, near Mangalore (entering the sea in 12° 29′), beyond which the language is, for a limited distance, Tulu, and then Canarese, to Trevandrum on the South (lat. 8° 29′), where Tamil begins to supersede it. Tamil, however, also intertwines with Malayālam all along Malabar. The term Malayālam properly applies to territory, not language, and might be rendered "Mountain region" [See under MALABAR, and Logan, Man. of Malabar, i. 90.]

MALDIVES, MALDIVE ISLDS., n.p. The proper form of this name appears to be Male-dīva; not, as the estimable Garcia de Orta says, Nale-dīva; whilst the etymology which he gives is certainly wrong, hard as it may be to say what is the right one. The people of the islands formerly designated themselves and their country by a form of the word for 'island' which we have in the Skt. dvīpa and the Pali dīpo. We find this reflected in the Divi of Ammianus, and in the Dīva and Dība-jāt (Pers. plural) of old Arab geographers, whilst it survives in letters of the 18th century addressed to the Ceylon Government (Dutch) by the Sultan of the Isles, who calls his kingdom Divehi Rajjé, and his people Divehe mīhun. Something like the modern form first appears in Ibn Batuta. He, it will be seen, in his admirable account of these islands, calls them, as it were, Mahal-dives, and says they were so called from the chief group Mahal, which was the residence of the Sultan, indicating a connection with Mahal, 'a palace.' This form of the name looks like a foreign 'striving after meaning.' But Pyrard de Laval, the author of the most complete account in existence, also says that the name of the islands was taken from Malé, that on which the King resided. Bishop Caldwell has suggested that these islands were the dives, or islands, of Malé, as Malebār (see MALABAR) was the coast-tract or continent, of Malé. It is, however, not impossible that the true etymology was from mālā, 'a garland or necklace,' of which their configuration is highly suggestive. [The Madras Gloss. gives Malayāl. māl, 'black,' and dvīpa, 'island,' from the dark soil. For a full account of early notices of the Maldives, see Mr. Gray's note on Pyrard de Laval, Hak. Soc. ii. 423 seqq.] Milburn (Or. Commmerce, i. 335) says: "This island was (these islands were) discovered by the Portuguese in 1507." Let us see!

A.D. 362.—"Legationes undique solito ocius concurrebant; hinc Transtigritanis pacem obsecrantibus et Armeniis, inde nationibus Indicis certatim cum donis optimates mittentibus ante tempus, ab usque DIVIS et Serendivis."—Ammian. Marcellinus, xxii. 3.

c. 545.—"And round about it (Sielediba or Taprobane, i.e. Ceylon) there are a number of small islands, in all of which you find fresh water and coco-nuts. And these are almost all set close to one another."—Cosmas, in Cathay, &c., clxxvii.

851.—"Between this Sea (of Horkand) and the Sea called Lāravi there is a great number of isles; their number, indeed, it is said, amounts to 1,900; ... the distance from island to island is 2, 3, or 4 parasangs. They are all inhabited, and all produce coco-palms.... The last of these islands is Serendīb, in the Sea of Horkand; it is the chief of all; they give the islands the name of DĪBAJĀT" (i.e. Dības).—Relation, &c., tr. by Reinaud, i. 4-5.

c. 1030.—"The special name of DĪVA is given to islands which are formed in the sea, and which appear above water in the form of accumulations of sand; these sands continually augment, spread, and unite, till they present a firm aspect ... these islands are divided into two classes, according to the nature of their staple product. Those of one class are called DĪVA-Kūzah (or the Cowry Divahs), because of the cowries which are gathered from coco-branches planted in the sea. The others are called DĪVA-Kanbar, from the word kanbar (see COIR), which is the name of the twine made from coco-fibres, with which vessels are stitched."—Al-Birūnī, in Reinaud, Fragmens, 124.

1150.—See also Edrisi, in Jaubert's Transl. i. 68. But the translator prints a bad reading, Raibiḥāt, for DĪBAJĀT.

c. 1343.—"Ten days after embarking at Calecut we arrived at the Islands called DHĪBAT-AL-MAHAL.... These islands are reckoned among the wonders of the World; there are some 2000 of them. Groups of a hundred, or not quite so many, of these islands are found clustered into a ring, and each cluster has an entrance like a harbour-mouth, and it is only there that ships can enter.... Most of the trees that grow on these islands are coco-palms.... They are divided into regions or groups ... among which are distinguished ... 3^o MAHAL, the group which gives a name to the whole, and which is the residence of the Sultans."—Ibn Batuta, iv. 110 seqq.

1442.—Abdurrazzak also calls them "the isles of DĪVA-MAHAL."—In Not. et Exts. xiv. 429.

1503.—"But Dom Vasco ... said that things must go on as they were to India, and there he would inquire into the truth. And so arriving in the Gulf (golfão) where the storm befel them, all were separated, and that vessel which steered badly, parted company with the fleet, and found itself at one of the first islands of MALDIVA, at which they stopped some days enjoying themselves. For the island abounded in provisions, and the men indulged to excess in eating cocos, and fish, and in drinking bad stagnant water, and in disorders with women; so that many died."—Correa, i. 347.

[1512.—"Mafamede Maçay with two ships put into the MALDIVE islands (ilhas de MALDIVA)."—Albuquerque, Cartas, p. 30.]

1563.—"R. Though it be somewhat to interrupt the business in hand,—why is that chain of islands called 'Islands of MALDIVA'?

"O. In this matter of the nomenclature of lands and seas and kingdoms, many of our people make gerat mistakes even in regard to our own lands; how then can you expect that one can give you the rationale of etymologies of names in foreign tongues? But, nevertheless, I will tell you what I have heard say. And that is that the right name is not MALDIVA, but Nalediva; for nale in Malabar means 'four,' and diva 'island,' so that in the Malabar tongue the name is as much as to say 'Four Isles.'... And in the same way we call a certain island that is 12 leagues from Goa Angediva (see ANCHEDIVA), because there are five in the group, and so the name in Malabar means 'Five Isles,' for ange is 'five.' But these derivations rest on common report, I don't detail them to you as demonstrable facts."—Garcia, Colloquios, f. 11.

1572.—"Nas ilhas de MALDIVA." (See COCO-DE-MER.)

c. 1610.—"Ce Royaume en leur langage s'appelle MALÉ-ragué, Royaume de Malé, et des autres peuples de l'Inde il s'appelle MALÉ-DIVAR, et les peuples DIUES ... L'Isle principale, comme j'ay dit, s'appelle MALÉ, qui donne le nom à tout le reste des autres; car le mot DIUES signifie vn nombre de petites isles amassées."—Pyrard de Laval, i. 63, 68, ed. 1679. [Hak. Soc. i. 83, 177.]

1683.—"Mr. Beard sent up his Couries, which he had received from ye MAULDIVAS, to be put off and passed by Mr. Charnock at Cassumbazar."—Hedges, Diary, Oct. 2; [Hak. Soc. i. 122].

MALUM, s. In a ship with English officers and native crew, the mate is called mālum sāhib. The word is Ar. mu'allim, literally 'the Instructor,' and is properly applied to the pilot or sailing-master. The word may be compared, thus used, with our 'master' in the Navy. In regard to the first quotation we may observe that Nākhuda (see NACODA) is, rather than Mu'allim, 'the captain'; though its proper meaning is the owner of the ship; the two capacities of owner and skipper being doubtless often combined. The distinction of Mu'allim from Nākhuda accounts for the former title being assigned to the mate.

1497.—"And he sent 20 cruzados in gold, and 20 testoons in silver for the MALEMOS, who were the pilots, for of these coins he would give each month whatever he (the Sheikh) should direct."—Correa, i. 38 (E.T. by Ld. Stanley of Alderley, 88). On this passage the Translator says: "The word is perhaps the Arabic for an instructor, a word in general use all over Africa." It is curious that his varied experience should have failed to recognise the habitual marine use of the term.

1541.—"Meanwhile he sent three CATURS (q.v.) to the Port of the MALEMS (Porto dos Malemos) in order to get some pilot.... In this Port of the Bandel of the MALEMS the ships of the Moors take pilots when they enter the Straits, and when they return they leave them here again."[159]—Correa, iv. 168.

1553.—"... among whom (at Melinda) came a Moor, a Guzarate by nation, called MALEM Cana, who, as much for the satisfaction he had in conversing with our people, as to please the King, who was inquiring for a pilot to give them, agreed to accompany them."—Barros, I. iv. 6.

c. 1590.—"MU'ALLIM or Captain. He must be acquainted with the depths and shallow places of the Ocean, and must know astronomy. It is he who guides the ship to her destination, and prevents her falling into dangers."—Āīn, ed. Blochmann, i. 280.

[1887.—"The second class, or MALUMIS, are sailors."—Logan, Malabar, ii. ccxcv.]

MAMIRAN, MAMIRA, s. A medicine from old times of much repute in the East, especially for eye-diseases, and imported from Himalayan and Trans-Himalayan regions. It is a popular native drug in the Punjab bazars, where it is still known as mamīra, also as pīlīārī. It seems probable that the name is applied to bitter roots of kindred properties but of more than one specific origin. Hanbury and Flückiger describe it as the rhizome of Coptis Teeta, Wallich, tīta being the name of the drug in the Mishmi country at the head of the Assam Valley, from which it is imported into Bengal. But Stewart states explicitly that the mamīra of the Punjab bazars is now "known to be" mostly, if not entirely, derived from Thalictrum foliosum D.C., a tall plant which is common throughout the temperate Himālaya (5000 to 8000 feet) and on the Kasia Hills, and is exported from Kumaun under the name of MOMIRI. [See Watt, Econ. Dict. vi. pt. iv. 42 seq.] "The MAMIRA of the old Arab writers was identified with Χελιδόνιον μέγα, by which, however, Löw (Aram. Pflanzennamen, p. 220) says they understood curcuma longa." W.R.S.

c. A.D. 600-700.—"Μαμιράς, οἷον ῥιζίον τι πόας ἐστὶν ἔχον ὥσπερ κονδύλους πυκνοὺς, ὄπος οὐλας τε καὶ λευκώματα λεπτύνειν πεπιστεύεται, δηλονότι ῥυπτικῆς ὑπάρχον δυνάμεως."—Pauli Aeginetae Medici, Libri vii., Basileae 1538. Lib. vii. cap. iii. sect. 12 (p. 246).

c. 1020.—"MEMIREM quid est? Est lignum sicut nodi declinans ad nigredinem ... mundificat albuginem in oculis, et acuit visum: quum ex eo fit collyrium et abstergit humiditatem grossam...." &c.—Avicennae Opera, Venet. 1564, p. 345 (lib. ii. tractat. ii.).

The glossary of Arabic terms by Andreas de Alpago of Belluno, attached to various early editions of Avicenna, gives the following interpretation: "MEMIREM est radix nodosa, non multum grossa, citrini coloris, sicut curcuma; minor tamen est et subtilior, et asportatur ex Indiâ, et apud physicos orientales est valde nota, et usitatur in passionibus oculi."

c. 1100.—"MEMIRAM Arabibus, χελιδόνιον μέγα Graecis," &c.—Io. Serapionis de Simpl. Medicam. Historia, Lib. iv. cap. lxxvi. (ed. Ven. 1552, f. 106).

c. 1200.—"Some maintain that this plant ('urūk al-ṣábaghīn) is the small kurkum (TURMERIC), and others that it is MAMĪRĀN.... The kurkum is brought to us from India.... The MAMĪRĀN is imported from China, and has the same properties as kurkum."—Ibn Baithar, ii. 186-188.

c. 1550.—"But they have a much greater appreciation of another little root which grows in the mountains of Succuir (i.e. Suchau in Shensi), where the rhubarb grows, and which they call MAMBRONI-Chini (i.e. MAMĪRĀN-i-Chīnī). This is extremely dear, and is used in most of their ailments, but especially when the eyes are affected. They grind it on a stone with rose water, and anoint the eyes with it. The result is wonderfully beneficial."—Hajji Mahommed's Account of Cathay, in Ramusio, ii. f. 15_v_.

c. 1573.—(At Aleppo). "MAMIRANITCHINI, good for eyes as they say."—Rauwolff, in Ray's 2nd ed. p. 114.

Also the following we borrow from Dozy's Suppl. aux Dictt. Arabes:—

1582.—"Mehr haben ihre Krämer kleine würtzelein zu verkaufen MAMIRANI tchini genennet, in gebresten der Augen, wie sie fürgeben ganz dienslich; diese seind gelblecht wie die Curcuma umb ein zimlichs lenger, auch dünner und knopffet das solche unseren weisz wurtzlen sehr ehnlich, und wol für das rechte mamiran mögen gehalten werden, dessen sonderlich Rhases an mehr orten gedencket."—Rauwolff, Aigentliehe Beschreibung der Raisz, 126.

c. 1665.—"These caravans brought back Musk, China-wood, Rubarb, and MAMIRON, which last is a small root exceeding good for ill eyes."—Bernier, E.T. 136; [ed. Constable, 426].

1862.—"Imports from Yarkand and Changthan, through Leh to the Punjab ... MAMIRAN-i-Chini (a yellow root, medicine for the eyes) ..."—Punjaub Trade Report, App. xxiv. p. ccxxxiii.

MAMLUTDAR, s. P.—H. mu'āmalatdār (from Ar. mu'āmala, 'affairs, business'), and in Mahr. māmlatdār. Chiefly used in Western India. Formerly it was the designation, under various native governments, of the chief civil officer of a district, and is now in the Bombay Presidency the title of a native civil officer in charge of a TALOOK, corresponding nearly to the TAHSEELDAR of a pergunna in the Bengal Presidency, but of a status somewhat more important.

[1826.—"I now proceeded to the MAAMULUT-DAR, or farmer of the district...."—Pandurang Hari, ed. 1873, i. 42.]

MAMOOL, s.; MAMOOLEE, adj. Custom, Customary. Ar.—H. ma'mūl. The literal meaning is 'practised,' and then 'established, customary.' Ma'mūl is, in short, 'precedent,' by which all Orientals set as much store as English lawyers, e.g. "And Laban said, It must not so be done in our country (lit. It is not so done in our place) to give the younger before the firstborn."—Genesis xxix. 26.

MAMOOTY, MAMOTY, MOMATTY, s. A digging tool of the form usual all over India, i.e. not in the shape of a spade, but in that of a hoe, with the helve at an acute angle with the blade. [See FOWRA.] The word is of S. Indian origin, Tamil manvĕtti, 'earth-cutter'; and its vernacular use is confined to the Tamil regions, but it has long been an established term in the list of ordnance stores all over India, and thus has a certain prevalence in Anglo-Indian use beyond these limits.

[1782.—"He marched ... with two battalions of sepoys ... who were ordered to make a show of entrenching themselves with MAMUTIES...."—Letter of Ld. Macartney, in Forrest, Selections, iii. 855.]

[1852.—"... by means of a MOMETTY or hatchet, which he ran and borrowed from a husbandman ... this fellow dug ... a reservoir...."—Neale, Narrative of Residence in Siam, 138.]

MANCHUA, s. A large cargo-boat, with a single mast and a square sail, much used on the Malabar coast. This is the Portuguese form; the original Malayālam word is manji, [manchi, Skt. maṇcha, 'a cot,' so called apparently from its raised platform for cargo,] and nowadays a nearer approach to this, manjee, &c., is usual.

c. 1512.—"So he made ready two MANCHUAS, and one night got into the house of the King, and stole from him the most beautiful woman that he had, and, along with her, jewels and a quantity of money."—Correa, i. 281.

1525.—"Quatro LANCHARAS (q.v.) grandes e seis qualaluzes (see CALALUZ) e MANCHUAS que se remam muyto."—Lembrança das Cousas de India, p. 8.

1552.—"MANCHUAS que sam navios de remo."—Castanheda, ii. 362.

c. 1610.—"Il a vne petite Galiote, qu'ils appellent MANCHOUËS, fort bien couverte ... et faut huit ou neuf hommes seulement pour la mener."—Pyrard de Laval, ii. 26; [Hak. Soc. ii. 42].

[1623.—"... boats which they call MANEIVE, going with 20 or 24 Oars."—P. della Valle, Hak. Soc. ii. 211; MANCINA in ii. 217.

[1679.—"I commanded the SHIBBARS and MANCHUAS to keepe a little ahead of me."—Yule, Hedges' Diary, Hak. Soc. ii. clxxxiv.]

1682.—"Ex hujusmodi arboribus excavatis naviculas Indi conficiunt, quas MANSJOAS appellant, quarum nonullae longitudine 80, latitudine 9 pedum mensuram superant."—Rheede, Hort. Malabar, iii. 27.

[1736.—"All ships and vessels ... as well as the MUNCHUAS appertaining to the Company's officers."—Treaty, in Logan, Malabar, ii. 31.

MANDADORE, s. Port. mandador, 'one who commands.'

1673.—"Each of which Tribes have a MANDADORE or Superintendent."—Fryer, 67.

MANDALAY, MANDALÉ, n.p. The capital of the King of Burmah, founded in 1860, 7 miles north of the preceding capital Amarapura, and between 2 and 3 miles from the left bank of the Irawadi. The name was taken from that of a conical isolated hill, rising high above the alluvial plain of the Irawadi, and crowned by a gilt pagoda. The name of the hill (and now of the city at its base) probably represents Mandara, the sacred mountain which in Hindu mythology served the gods as a churning-staff at the churning of the sea. The hill appears as Mandiye-taung in Major Grant Allan's Map of the Environs of Amarapura (1855), published in the Narrative of Major Phayre's Mission, but the name does not occur in the Narrative itself.

[1860.—See the account of MANDELAY in Mason, Burmah, 14 seqq.]

1861.—"Next morning the son of my friendly host accompanied me to the MANDALAY Hill, on which there stands in a gilt chapel the image of Shwesayatta, pointing down with outstretched finger to the Palace of MANDALAY, interpreted as the divine command there to build a city ... on the other side where the hill falls in an abrupt precipice, sits a gigantic Buddha gazing in motionless meditation on the mountains opposite. There are here some caves in the hard rock, built up with bricks and whitewashed, which are inhabited by eremites...."—Bastian's Travels (German), ii. 89-90.

MANDARIN, s. Port. Mandarij, Mandarim. Wedgwood explains and derives the word thus: "A Chinese officer, a name first made known to us by the Portuguese, and like the Indian caste, erroneously supposed to be a native term. From Portuguese mandar, to hold authority, command, govern, &c." So also T. Hyde in the quotation below. Except as regards the word having been first made known to us by the Portuguese, this is an old and persistent mistake. What sort of form would mandarij be as a derivative from mandar? The Portuguese might have applied to Eastern officials some such word as mandador, which a preceding article (see MANDADORE) shows that they did apply in certain cases. But the parallel to the assumed origin of mandarin from mandar would be that English voyagers on visiting China, or some other country in the far East, should have invented, as a title for the officials of that country, a new and abnormal derivation from 'order,' and called them orderumbos.

The word is really a slight corruption of Hind. (from Skt.) mantri, 'a counsellor, a Minister of State,' for which it was indeed the proper old pre-Mahommedan term in India. It has been adopted, and specially affected in various Indo-Chinese countries, and particularly by the Malays, among whom it is habitually applied to the highest class of public officers (see Crawfurd's Malay Dict. s.v. [and Klinkert, who writes manteri, colloquially mentri]). Yet Crawfurd himself, strange to say, adopts the current explanation as from the Portuguese (see J. Ind. Archip. iv. 189). [Klinkert adopts the Skt. derivation.] It is, no doubt, probable that the instinctive "striving after meaning" may have shaped the corruption of mantri into a semblance of mandar. Marsden is still more oddly perverse, videns meliora, deteriora secutus, when he says: "The officers next in rank to the Sultan are Mantree, which some apprehend to be a corruption of the word Mandarin, a title of distinction among the Chinese" (H. of Sumatra, 2nd ed. 285). Ritter adopts the etymology from mandar, apparently after A. W. Schlegel.[160] The true etymon is pointed out in Notes and Queries in China and Japan, iii. 12, and by one of the present writers in Ocean Highways for Sept. 1872, p. 186. Several of the quotations below will show that the earlier applications of the title have no reference to China at all, but to officers of state, not only in the Malay countries, but in Continental India. We may add that mantri (see MUNTREE) is still much in vogue among the less barbarous Hill Races on the Eastern frontier of Bengal (e.g. among the Kasias (see COSSYA) as a denomination for their petty dignitaries under the chief. Gibbon was perhaps aware of the true origin of mandarin; see below.

c. A.D. 400 (?).—"The King desirous of trying cases must enter the assembly composed in manner, together with Brahmans who know the Vedas, and MANTRINS (or counsellors)."—Manu, viii. 1.

[1522.—"... and for this purpose he sent one of his chief MANDARINS (mandarim)."—India Office MSS. in an Agreement made by the Portuguese with the "Rey de Sunda," this Sunda being that of the Straits.]

1524.—(At the Moluccas) "and they cut off the heads of all the dead Moors, and indeed fought with one another for these, because whoever brought in seven heads of enemies, they made him a knight, and called him MANDERYM, which is their name for Knight."—Correa, ii. 808.

c. 1540.—"... the which corsairs had their own dealings with the MANDARINS of those ports, to whom they used to give many and heavy bribes to allow them to sell on shore what they plundered on the sea."—Pinto, cap. 1.

1552.—(At Malacca) "whence subsist the King and the Prince with their MANDARINS, who are the gentlemen."—Castanheda, iii. 207.

" (In China). "There are among them degrees of honour, and according to their degrees of honour is their service; gentlemen (fidalgos) whom they call MANDARINS ride on horseback, and when they pass along the streets the common people make way for them."—Ibid. iv. 57.

1553.—"Proceeding ashore in two or three boats dressed with flags and with a grand blare of trumpets (this was at Malacca in 1508-9).... Jeronymo Teixeira was received by many MANDARIJS of the King, these being the most noble class of the city."—De Barros, Dec. II. liv. iv. cap. 3.

" "And he being already known to the MANDARIJS (at Chittagong, in Bengal), and held to be a man profitable to the country, because of the heavy amounts of duty that he paid, he was regarded like a native."—Ibid. Dec. IV. liv. ix. cap. 2.

Spotted a typo or a problem in this chapter? Tell us